JP2021153635A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest by an informing performance having various parts.SOLUTION: In a game machine having an informing performance for reporting whether control is performed to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided, abetment up to a winning/losing informing part is performed so as to increase a player's sense of exaltation, an epilogue part is provided after reporting winning in the winning/losing informing part, and a feeling of blessing is granted, thus achieving an informing performance full of variety by the sense of exaltation in the introduction part and the feeling of blessing in the epilogue part.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 33

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that enhances the interest of a player by providing a plurality of parts (for example, an introduction part, a winning / failing determination part, an epilogue part, etc.) from the start to the end of the variable display (Patent Document 1). ). In addition, among the jackpot symbols, a gaming machine that executes a re-lottery effect in which the jackpot symbol re-changes after being temporarily stopped at the non-probability variation symbol (normal jackpot symbol) and then the non-probability variation symbol or the probability variation symbol stops is known. (Patent Document 2).

JP-A-2019-118411 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-179389

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in making the flow of the series of productions to be performed look better.

The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of more preferably showing a series of effects to be performed.

(1) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Movable body and
Sound output means and
Directing execution means and
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is decided that the epilogue is to be performed, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
In the hit / fail notification part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means.
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves while retracting from the second position to the first position. The effect display for body movement is finished, the display corresponding to the epilogue part is performed, and after the movable body is retracted to the first position, the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character are displayed.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, the brightness data table for moving the movable body is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part.
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the epilogue is in the process of retracting the movable body from the second position to the first position. Output the sound corresponding to the part,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The effect executing means is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state is controlled, among a plurality of types of re-lottery effects, a replacement display in which the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol is displayed. It is possible to perform the first re-lottery effect of displaying the second symbol in the latter half part.
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, the replacement display is performed in the first half part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. Re-lottery production is possible,
The first re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all the other symbols between the start of the replacement display in the first half part and the display of the second symbol in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all the other symbols between the start of the replacement display in the first half part and the display of the first symbol in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is used. The brightness data table for controlling the light emitting means is controlled, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. ..

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the frame lamp. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the special figure LED board, the 4th symbol unit, and the 4th symbol unit and a game effect lamp. It is a figure for demonstrating the display mode of a screen in an image display device. It is a figure for demonstrating various boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the hit type. It is a figure for demonstrating each random number. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot determination table and the jackpot type determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of an effect control command. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the pre-variation pattern on the main side. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the post-variation pattern on the main side. It is a figure for demonstrating the post-variation pattern determination table at the time of loss. It is a figure for demonstrating the post-variation pattern determination table at the time of a big hit. It is a figure for demonstrating the prevariation pattern determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the total variation pattern on the main side. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the lottery of the production pattern on the sub side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process after opening a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of a series of productions. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship before and after the winning / failing decision, the SP first half reach A jackpot, and the SP final reach jackpot. It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a start part. It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of the fan part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach A), and the loss epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of the fan part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach B), and the loss epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of the character operation part (at the time of development of the latter half of SP). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of the fan part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of the hit epilogue part (SP second half reach A), and the loss epilogue part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of the fan part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of the hit epilogue part (SP second half reach B), and the loss epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of the fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of the fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of the hit epilogue part (SP final reach), and the loss epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of the part per relief. It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of the re-lottery part (the odd number symbol is derived after the button operation), and the fanfare part. It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of the re-lottery part (the even number symbol is derived after the button operation), and the fanfare part. It is a figure for demonstrating the mechanism of output to an LED driver. It is a figure for demonstrating the lighting mode of a game effect lamp. It is a figure for demonstrating the lighting mode of a game effect lamp. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a start part. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a start part. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a start part. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a start part. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a start part. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a start part. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a start part. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a hit epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a hit epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the loss epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the loss epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the loss epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the loss epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the accessory operation part (at the time of development of the latter half of SP). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a hit epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a hit epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the loss epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the loss epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a hit epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a hit epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a hit epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the loss epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the loss epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fan part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a hit epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a hit epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a hit epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a hit epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the loss epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the loss epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the relief hit part. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the relief hit part. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (the odd-numbered symbol is derived after a button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (the odd-numbered symbol is derived after a button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (the odd-numbered symbol is derived after a button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fanfare repertoire. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (the even-numbered symbol is derived after a button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (the even-numbered symbol is derived after a button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in the re-lottery part (the even-numbered symbol is derived after a button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a fanfare repertoire. It is a detailed explanatory drawing of the part (b11) to (b13). It is a figure for demonstrating the volume level. It is a figure for demonstrating the volume level. It is a detailed explanatory drawing of the part (r24) to (r27). It is a detailed explanatory drawing of the part (r28) to (r31). It is a detailed explanatory drawing of the part (r32) to (r35). It is a detailed explanatory view of the accessory operation in (b18) to (i1). It is a detailed explanatory view of the accessory operation in (b18) to (i1). It is a detailed explanatory view of the accessory operation in (r54) to (s4). It is a detailed explanatory view of the accessory operation in (r54) to (s4). It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the number of subtitles and the number of lines. It is a detailed explanatory drawing of the part (A1) to (A23). It is a detailed explanatory view of the part (A24) to (A46). It is a detailed explanatory view of the part (b4) to (b6), and is a comparative figure during a big hit round. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the transmittance of the subtitle and the sound output with respect to the dialogue. It is a detailed explanatory view of the part (b4) to (b6) and the detailed explanatory view of the part (o3) to (o5). It is a figure for demonstrating the comparative example of the subtitles. It is a detailed explanatory drawing of the part (B4) to (B11). It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of the pattern output. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of the re-lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of the re-lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of the re-lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of the re-lottery. It is a detailed explanatory drawing of a symbol fixing period. It is a detailed explanatory drawing of a blackout. It is a figure for demonstrating the detailed explanatory view of the game effect lamp at the time of loss and the deformation example at the time of loss. It is a detailed explanatory drawing of the part (r48). It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table in the luminance data table used for the start part. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a start part. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP first half reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP first half reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the hit epilogue part of the first half of SP reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of the first half reach A of SP. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP first half reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP first half reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the hit epilogue part of the first half of SP reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of the SP first half reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the accessory operation part at the time of the development of the latter half of SP. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP latter half reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP latter half reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP latter half reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the hit epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP latter half reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP latter half reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the hit epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of SP final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of SP final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of SP final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the hit epilogue part of SP final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of SP final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the relief hit part. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table in the luminance data table used for the re-lottery part. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the re-lottery part (before operation promotion). It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the re-lottery part (the symbol promotion after operation promotion). It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the re-lottery part (the symbol is maintained after operation promotion). It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a fanfare repertoire. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a parent table in a smooth rainbow luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table in a smooth rainbow luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a smooth rainbow luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an accessory lamp and the grandchild table for a left-hand lamp in a smooth rainbow brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a smooth rainbow brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for the frame lamp in the accessory operation red blinking luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a yellow haze brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a white blinking (white flash) luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a parent table in a common red cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table in a common red cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for the accessory lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a panel left lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table in the common green cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table in a common green cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a common green cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a common green cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a common green cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for the accessory lamp in a common green cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a panel left lamp in a common green cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a common green cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a common green cut-in luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a fanning brightness data table without operation promotion. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a trigger display luminance data table and operation promotion luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a shutter luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a loss brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table per relief. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table per relief. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a hit determination brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a hit determination brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a re-lottery effect brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a re-lottery effect brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table in a background luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a background luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating the comparison of the lamp control at the time of hit and the time of loss. It is a figure for demonstrating the comparison of the lamp control at the time of hit and the time of loss. It is a figure for demonstrating the comparison of the lamp control at the time of hit and the time of loss. It is a figure for demonstrating the shaking mode of a symbol. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of the re-lottery effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of the re-lottery effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of the re-lottery effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the reference of the luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating the reference of the luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating the reference of the luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating the reference of the luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of lamp control using a luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of lamp control using a grandchild table by timer management of a child table.

<Configuration of pachinko game machines, etc.>
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 1 shows an arrangement layout of main members in a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is an example of a gaming machine. The pachinko gaming machine 1, which is an example of a gaming machine, is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. There is. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game is performed by variably displaying a special symbol. The "variable display" of a special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

Two types of special symbols are provided as the special symbols that are variably displayed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, one special symbol is also referred to as a "first special symbol" or "first special symbol", and the other special symbol is also referred to as a "second special symbol" or "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game".

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols are displayed. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction). Update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

On the game board 2 on the left side of the image display device 5, a character named Yumemu-chan, who appears in the production executed by the pachinko game machine 1, is drawn. Yumemu-chan is the main character who appears in the content used in the pachinko machine 1. Further, on the lower right game board 2 of the image display device 5, a character named Jam who appears in the production executed by the pachinko game machine 1 is drawn. Jam-chan is a character that appears in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening (electric chew) that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 6). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the second starting winning opening is used. It is in a closed state where the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open). When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7A having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7A includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 6), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door (see FIG. 6). Hereinafter, it is usually referred to as a grand prize opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7A includes a game board 2 located on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 and a glass door frame 3a (see FIG. 2) located on the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1. A large winning opening door is provided in the space between the pachinko machines, and this large winning opening door slides open and closes horizontally between the back side and the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to open and close the normal large winning opening with a gaming ball. The route to is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, the large winning opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to close the normal large winning opening, and the game ball enters the normal large winning opening. You will not be able to (pass). On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to open the normal large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the normal large winning opening. ..

The game ball that has entered the normal large winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through the area provided inside the normal large winning opening. When the game balls are detected by the count switch 23 (see FIG. 6), the game balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls for each detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. When a game ball enters the normal large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10. Further, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10), one round is completed and the normal large winning opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 7B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 7A. The V variable winning ball device 7B includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 83 (see FIG. 6), and the large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door (hereinafter referred to as V large). Form a winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7B is provided with a large winning opening door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and the large winning opening door is located on the back side and the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. By sliding open and close in the horizontal direction between the spaces, the path to the V-large winning opening by the game ball is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 83 is in the off state, the large winning opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to close the V large winning opening, and the game ball enters the V large winning opening. You will not be able to (pass). On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to open the V large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the V large winning opening. ..

The game ball that has entered the V-large winning opening is detected by the V-winning switch 24 (see FIG. 6) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as a V-winning area) provided inside the V-large winning opening. When the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 24, the game state is controlled to the probability change state. That is, in the present embodiment, the V prize is generated on the condition that the game ball enters the V big prize opening during the round of the big hit game state, and the game state is controlled to the probable change state. .. In addition, the normal large winning opening and the V large winning opening are collectively referred to as a large winning opening. The big prize opening is also called an attacker.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol is performed. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. The movable body 32 is composed of the character string "POWERFULII". "POWERFULII" may be the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or may be a name representing the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the title of an animation or the name of a singer). Further, the characters attached to the movable body 32 may indicate the name of a character appearing in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, "Yumemu" indicating Yumemu-chan, who is the main character). In the present embodiment, the model name (powerful II) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown on the movable body 32.

In the present embodiment, the movable body 32 is movable between the position above the image display device 5 and the position overlying (overlapping) the front surface of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the movable body 32 covers the front surface of the image display device 5 by the characters "POWERFULII" falling diagonally ("P" falls downward and "II" falls upward). Stop at the (overlapping) position. The movable body 32 is also referred to as an accessory.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper plate, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (ball hitting plate) on which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the stick controller 31A as an operating rod that can be grasped and tilted by the player (operation in the front-back and left-right directions, operation of pulling toward the player). Is installed. A controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 6) for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided inside the main body of the stick controller 31A. Further, the stick controller 31A has a built-in vibrator motor (not shown) for vibrating the stick controller 31A. Since the stick controller 31A can be pulled toward the player, it is also referred to as a "trigger".

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 6).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a special drawing LED board 20 at the lower left of the gaming board 2. The special figure LED board 20 is an LED board that is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 and notifies the first reserved storage number, the second reserved storage number, and the like by turning on / blinking / turning off the LED. In the special figure LED board 20, the type of the special symbol (first special figure) in the first special figure game and the special symbol in the second special figure game are determined by the combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs. Indicates the type of (2nd special figure). For example, as shown in FIG. 4A, which will be described later, in the special figure LED board 20, depending on the combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 21. The type of the first special figure is represented, and the type of the second special figure is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the variable display unit 22 of the special drawing 2. In the present embodiment, the term "lighting mode" is used as a concept including lighting, blinking, and extinguishing of various lamps such as a frame lamp described later.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a fourth symbol unit 50 at the lower left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 50 is an LED board that is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 and notifies the fluctuation of the special figure, the number of reserved memories, the right-handed display, and the like by turning on / blinking / turning off the LED. In the fourth symbol unit 50, the type of the special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the special symbol in the second special symbol game are determined by the combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs. Indicates the type of (2nd special figure). For example, as shown in FIG. 4B described later, in the fourth symbol unit 50, depending on the combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 53, The type of the first special figure is represented, and the type of the second special figure is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the variable display unit 54 of the special figure 2.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps (also referred to as game effect lamps) in the gaming board 2 and the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided in the vicinity of the accessory lamp 9A provided on the movable body 32, the board left lamp 9B provided on the left side of the game board 2, and the special variable winning ball device 7B. The attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F provided near the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the round of the big hit gaming state where the V big winning opening is open and the V winning can be generated and the V winning The V lamp 9G for notifying the occurrence of the above, the electric chew lamp 9H provided near the variable winning ball device 6B, the stick controller lamp 9J provided on the stick controller 31A, and the push provided on the push button 31B. It includes a button lamp 9K, a frame left lamp 9L provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and a frame right lamp 9R provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3. The V lamp may notify that a big hit has occurred.

The accessory lamp 9A is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4. Specifically, the member with the letters "POWERFULII" included in the movable body 32 is divided into four parts, the accessory lamp 9A1 is behind the "P" and "O" parts, and the accessory lamp 9A2 is. The accessory lamps 9A3 are arranged on the back side of the "W" and "E" parts, the accessory lamps 9A3 are arranged on the back side of the "R" and "F" parts, and the accessory lamps 9A4 are arranged on the back side of the "U" and "L" parts. There is. As a result, the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 are lit (light-emitting) on the back side of the member with the letters "POWERFULII", so that the "POWERFULII" is lit (light-emitting).

The panel left lamp 9B is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5. On the left side of the game board 2, the main character (for example, "Yumemu" indicating Yumemu-chan, the main character) is drawn in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1, and the left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 are the main characters. Are arranged on the back side of the part of the game board 2 on which is drawn. As a result, the left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 light up (light up) behind the part of the game board 2 on which the hero is drawn, so that the part of the game board 2 on which the hero is drawn lights up (lights up). ing.

The attacker lamp 9E is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B. As a result, the attacker lamp 9E lights up (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, so that the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B lights up (lights up). Further, the V attacker lamp 9F is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7A. As a result, the V attacker lamp 9F lights up (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, so that the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7A lights up (lights up).

The V lamp 9G is arranged on the back side of the part of the game board 2 marked with "V". As a result, the V lamp 9G lights up (lights up) behind the part of the game board 2 marked with "V", so that the part of the game board 2 marked with "V" lights up (lights up). It has become. The electric chew lamp 9H is arranged in the vicinity of the variable winning ball device 6B, and by lighting (light emitting), the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B is lit (light emitting).

The stick controller lamp 9J is provided on the stick controller 31A, and by lighting (light emitting) the stick controller 31A, the stick controller 31A is lit (light emitting). The push button lamp 9K is provided on the push button 31B, and by lighting (light emitting), the push button 31B is lit (light emitting).

The frame left lamp 9L is composed of a plurality of lamps 9L1 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 3) provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and each lamp is lit (light emitting) for the gaming machine. The left side of the frame 3 is lit (light emitting). The frame right lamp 9R is composed of a plurality of lamps 9R2 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 3) provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3, and each lamp is lit (light emitting) for the gaming machine. The right side of the frame 3 is lit (light emitting). The frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R are also collectively referred to as a frame lamp. In addition, the accessory lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, the V lamp 9G, the electric chew lamp 9H, the stick controller lamp 9J, the push button lamp 9K, the frame left lamp 9L, and the frame right lamp 9R. Are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment. On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability and a ball output rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17 (see FIG. 6).

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see FIG. 6) is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ream ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning a prize to the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a frame lamp. The frame left lamp 9L has 12 lamp groups of the frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12 in a counterclockwise direction from above to below the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 9L emits light near the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking each of a plurality of lamps (12 lamps in this example). On the other hand, the frame right lamp 9R has 11 lamp groups of the frame left lamps 9R2 to 9L12 clockwise from the upper side to the lower side of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 9R emits light near the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example).

FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the special figure LED substrate 20 and the fourth symbol unit 50. As shown in FIG. 4A, the special figure LED substrate 20 has a special figure 1 variable display unit 21 showing a variable display of the first special figure and a special figure 2 variable display unit showing a variable display of the second special figure. 22, the special figure 1 storage display unit 23 showing the first reserved storage number corresponding to the first special figure game, and the special figure 2 storage display unit 24 showing the second reserved storage number corresponding to the second special figure game. , The normal figure storage display unit 25 showing the number of stored normal figures, the normal figure display unit 26 showing the variable display of the normal symbol, the right-handed display unit 30 for urging the player to hit right, and the presence or absence of a probability change state. A probability variation display unit 28 indicating the presence or absence of a time reduction state, a time reduction display unit 29 indicating the presence or absence of a time reduction state, and a round display unit 27 indicating the number of rounds of a big hit are provided. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of a special figure or a normal symbol, the result, the current game state, the number of holds, etc. by lighting or blinking by a lighting means such as an LED. can.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by turning on / blinking / turning off by a lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 22 sets the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined by whether or not the second special symbol is variablely displayed in the second special figure game and the result of the variable display, such as an LED. The player is notified by lighting / blinking / extinguishing by the lighting means of.

Further, the special figure LED substrate 20 can urge the player to strike right by turning on / blinking / extinguishing the right-handed display unit 30 by a lighting means such as an LED. In the present embodiment, when urging the player to hit right, when the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 30 lights up (lights up) and does not urge the player to hit right. That is, when urging the player to strike left, the lighting means such as the LED on the right-handed display unit 30 is turned off. After the symbol is confirmed, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display lighting designation command to the effect control CPU 120, lights the right-handed display unit 30, and after the symbol is confirmed by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. , The right-handed display / off designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120, and the right-handed display unit 30 is turned off. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a jackpot that is not controlled by a high base after the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120 may turn on the right-handed display unit 30 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command to the effect control CPU 120, and turns off the right-handed display unit 30.

Here, right-handed means firing a game ball toward the second flow path of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area provided in the game board 2. The hitting operation handle 30 is operated (how to hit) in this way. The first flow path is, for example, a path passing through the left region of the game area, and the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A exists ahead of the path, while the variable winning ball device is present. This is a route in which the second starting winning opening formed in 6B does not exist. The second flow-down route is, for example, a route that passes through the area on the right side of the game area, and beyond that, a second start winning opening or a large winning opening (usually a large winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V Grand Prize) is the route that exists. When the player launches the game ball toward the first flow path, the game ball flows through the first flow path toward the first start winning opening. When the player launches the game ball toward the second flow path, the game ball passes through the second flow path to the second start winning opening and the large winning opening (normal large winning opening, V large winning opening). Flow into.

In the present embodiment, in the big hit game after the big hit occurs and in the game state (time saving state or probability change state) after the big hit game, the player is provided on the right side of the game area by hitting right. The game ball is made to enter the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, and during that time, the right-handed display unit 30 prompts the player to make a right-handed hit. By hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right is displayed, the player enters the game ball into the second start winning opening and pays out a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls. The right to the second special figure game can be obtained, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls can be paid out by inserting a game ball into the normal large prize opening. Further, as will be described in detail later, the V-large winning opening is opened during the round of the probabilistic jackpot, but the player hits the right while the display prompting the player to hit the right is displayed, so that the V-large winning opening is opened. It is also possible to obtain the right to enter the game ball into the winning opening and control it to a probabilistic state. For this reason, the player can have an overall advantage by hitting right while the display prompting him to hit right is being performed. In addition, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the hitting ball operation handle 30 so as to launch the game ball toward the first opposite field path (hit method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 4B, the fourth symbol unit 50 has a special figure 1 storage display unit 51 indicating a first reserved storage number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a second special figure game corresponding to the second special figure game. 2 Special figure 2 storage display unit 52 showing the number of reserved storage, special figure 1 variable display unit 53 showing the variable display status or display result of the first special figure, and the variable display status or display result of the second special figure. A special figure 2 variable display unit 54 showing the above, and a right-handed display unit 55 for urging the player to hit the right side are provided. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence / absence of variable display of the special figure, the number of holdings, the right-handed instruction, and the like by turning on / blinking / extinguishing by a lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 53 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by turning on / blinking / turning off by a lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 54 sets a stop symbol of the second special symbol determined by whether or not the second special symbol is variablely displayed in the second special figure game and the result of the variable display, such as an LED. The player is notified by lighting / blinking / extinguishing by the lighting means of.

In the following, the variation display (variable display) of the first special symbol indicates that the variation of the stop symbol of the first special symbol is represented by the lighting means such as the LED in the special diagram 1 variable display unit 21 and the special diagram 1 variable display unit 53. Also called. In addition, the fact that the change of the stop symbol of the second special symbol is represented by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 54 is also referred to as the variation display (variable display) of the second special symbol. Refer to.

Further, in the present embodiment, when urging the player to strike right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 55 of the fourth symbol unit 50 lights (lights up) and strikes right. When not prompting the player, that is, when prompting the player to strike left, the lighting means such as the LED on the right-handed display unit 55 is turned off. After the symbol is confirmed, the effect control CPU 120 lights the right-handed display unit 55 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting designation command from the CPU 103, and the symbol is changed by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After confirmation, the right-handed display unit 55 is turned off based on the reception of the right-handed display / off designation command from the CPU 103. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a jackpot that is not controlled by a high base after the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120 may turn on the right-handed display unit 55 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the right-handed display unit 55 based on receiving the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103.

FIG. 4C is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the fourth symbol unit and the game effect lamp. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a pre-variation pattern command, a post-variation pattern command, or a symbol confirmation command, which will be described later, among the effect control commands, the fourth symbol unit 50 and the game effect lamp are used. , Whether or not to switch the lighting mode such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing is different. The pre-variation pattern command and the post-variation pattern command are commands output from the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, which will be described later, to the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12, and the pre-variation pattern command and the post-variation pattern command. A set of commands is output from the CPU 103 to the effect control CPU 120. In the following, the pre-variation pattern command and the post-variation pattern command are collectively referred to as a variation pattern command.

Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command from the CPU 103, the lighting mode of the LEDs (special figure 1 variable display 53 and special figure 2 variable display 54) in the fourth symbol unit 50 is changed. .. For example, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern command corresponding to the first special figure game from the CPU 103, the lighting mode of the special figure 1 variable display 53 is set to the lighting mode of the first special symbol based on the received variation pattern command. The light off indicating stop is switched to blinking indicating the fluctuation of the first special symbol. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern command corresponding to the second special figure game from the CPU 103, the lighting mode of the special figure 2 variable display 54 is changed to the second special symbol based on the received variation pattern command. The light is switched from the light off indicating the stop to the blinking indicating the fluctuation of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, even if the effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern command from the CPU 103, the lighting mode before receiving the variation pattern command is displayed without changing the lighting mode of the LED (frame lamp or the like) in the game effect lamp. Keep it up.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol determination command from the CPU 103, the lighting mode of the LEDs (special figure 1 variable display 53 and special figure 2 variable display 54) in the fourth symbol unit 50 is changed. For example, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a symbol confirmation command from the CPU 103 that specifies that the symbol variation is terminated in the first special symbol game, the special figure 1 variable display 53 is lit based on the received symbol confirmation command. The mode is switched from blinking indicating the change of the first special symbol to extinguishing indicating the stop of the first special symbol. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a symbol confirmation command from the CPU 103 that specifies that the symbol variation is terminated in the second special symbol game, the special figure 2 variable display 54 is lit based on the received symbol confirmation command. The mode is switched from blinking indicating the change of the second special symbol to extinguishing indicating the stop of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, even if the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation command from the CPU 103, the lighting mode before receiving the symbol confirmation command is displayed without changing the lighting mode of the LED (frame lamp or the like) in the game effect lamp. Keep it up.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the fourth symbol unit 50, the mode of the lamp (LED) changes according to the reception of the variation pattern command and the symbol determination command. On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the game effect lamp 9, the mode of the lamp is maintained before and after receiving the command regardless of receiving the variation pattern command or the symbol confirmation command. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the mode of the gaming effect lamp 9 in response to receiving the variation pattern command. For example, when the gaming state changes from the normal state to the time saving state after the big hit, the pachinko gaming machine 1 changes from the lighting mode of the normal state to the time saving state in response to receiving the variation pattern command for starting the time saving state. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed to the lighting mode of.

FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining a screen display mode in the image display device 5. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 displays an image such as a variable display of a decorative pattern or a reach effect. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol Etc.) are variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

At the lower end of the screen of the image display device 5, the first hold storage number can be displayed by the number of circular hold displays, and the second hold storage display area 5D can be displayed by the number of circular hold displays. A displayable second hold storage display area 5U and an active display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display being executed as the active display are provided.

At the upper right end of the screen of the image display device 5, a fourth symbol 5J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed is displayed. At the lower part of the fourth symbol 5J, a number indicating the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is displayed. As for the number indicating the number of holdings, the left side shows the first holding number and the right side shows the second holding storage number. At the bottom of the display indicating the number of holdings, a small symbol 5M having a size smaller than each decorative symbol is displayed. The small symbols are displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L, the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C, and the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R. The symbols corresponding to each of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. Further, the small symbol 5M is also a symbol that is not hidden during the variable display and is always displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 5, a decorative symbol is arranged in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the small symbol 5M has a size smaller than the decorative symbol at the right end of the screen of the image display device 5. Have been placed. Therefore, the visibility of the small symbol 5M is lower than the visibility of the decorative symbol.

As shown in FIG. 5A, the shape of the screen of the image display device 5 is a quadrangle or a substantially quadrangle, but the game board 2 is fixed so as to cover the edge of the screen of the image display device 5. Has been done. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 5B, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, a part (particularly the end) of the screen of the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized or is difficult to be visually recognized by the gaming board 2. It has become.

<Board configuration>
FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining various substrates and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a relay board 15, and the like. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 connected to the power supply switch 91 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which a conductor pattern is formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electric components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, electric power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 by a power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 is, for example, an input port for inputting various signals (detection signals described later) and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the special figure LED board 20 and the like, solenoid drive signals). It is composed including and.

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B), a count switch 23, and a V winning switch 24) for detecting a game ball. A detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and the switch is turned on, etc.) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The reset signal, power cutoff signal, and clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as a game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. All you need is. The power cutoff signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage falls below the predetermined value continues for more than the power cutoff reference time. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81, the solenoid 82, or the solenoid 83.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision of). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The effect control CPU 120 supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that specifies the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9. Brightness data (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) to be performed is supplied to the LED driver. Further, the effect control CPU 120 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

As will be described in detail later, each game effect lamp has a game effect lamp LED substrate on which an LED (lamp) and an LED driver that supplies a current to the LED are mounted. The LED driver turns on / blinks / turns off the game effect lamp 9 by adjusting the current for each LED (lamp) included in the game effect lamp 9 based on the brightness data from the effect control CPU 120. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lighting / blinking / extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, brightness data signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include an output port for.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12 and the sound control board 13, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

The fourth symbol unit 50 is connected to the effect control board 12, and each display unit can be lit (blinking) under the control of the effect control CPU 120.

<Outline of the progress of the game>
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the above-described configuration, the game proceeds as follows. The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special drawing game by the special drawing 1 variable display unit 21 of the special drawing LED substrate 20 is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special drawing game by the special drawing 2 variable display unit 22 of the special drawing LED substrate 20 is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the jackpot game state described later (a start winning is generated, but is based on the starting winning). If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined maximum number (for example, 4).

In the special figure game, the combination of the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided on the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 of the special figure LED board 20 is a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, which will be described later). The actual design differs depending on the type of big hit.) When the combination of lighting modes corresponding to) is used, the "big hit" is obtained. It should be noted that the lighting mode corresponding to a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) in the combination of the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 of the special figure LED substrate 20. Is also referred to as a "specific display result". Further, the combination of the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided on the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 of the special figure LED board 20 corresponds to a special symbol (lost symbol) different from the jackpot symbol. When it becomes a combination of lighting modes to be turned on, it becomes a "loss". It should be noted that, in the combination of the lighting modes of a plurality of LEDs provided on the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 of the special figure LED board 20, it corresponds to a special symbol (lost symbol) different from the jackpot symbol. The lighting mode is also referred to as a “loss display result”.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. In addition, as an advantageous state, it may be controlled to a small hit game state. Here, the small hit is a hit that is allowed up to a number of times that the number of times the big winning opening is opened is smaller than that of the big hit. When the small hit game state ends, the game state does not change. That is, before and after the small hit game state, the probability change state does not shift to the normal state or the normal state does not shift to the probability change state. Further, as with the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state is either the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) or the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until early timing. This predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as the opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (10 times or 7 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The type of jackpot is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum opening period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type that can obtain many prize balls, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type that can hardly obtain prize balls may be provided.

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. As a result, control (high opening control, high base control) that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a time saving state, and a probability change state, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in the probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of the game effect lamp 9, and the like. It may be turned off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko game machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach. In addition, the super reach includes the first half of the super reach that ends in the first half of the super reach, the second half of the super reach that develops from the first half of the super reach, and the final reach that develops from the first half of the super reach. In the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability is higher when the variable display display result is derived in the first half of the super reach than when the variable display display result is derived in the normal reach. Further, the jackpot reliability is higher when the variable display display result is derived in the latter half of the super reach than when the variable display display result is derived in the first half of the super reach. Further, the jackpot reliability is higher when the variable display display result is derived in the final reach than when the variable display display result is derived in the latter half of the super reach. In the following, "Super Reach" is "SP Reach", "Super Reach First Half" is "SP First Half (SP First Half Reach)", and "Super Reach Second Half" is "SP Second Half (SP Second Half Reach)", " "Final reach" is also referred to as "SP final (SP final reach)".

When the display result of the special figure game is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to the "big hit" (the above-mentioned specific display result), it is predetermined as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. A definite decorative symbol that is a combination of big hits is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability big hit" may be executed. As the promotion effect, for example, a re-lottery effect may be executed to temporarily stop the non-probability variation symbol (normal symbol) as a jackpot display result and then to encourage whether or not to promote to the probability variation symbol. Further, a round promotion effect of promoting from a non-probable big hit to a probable big hit may be executed during the big hit game state.

When the display result of the special figure game is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to "loss" (the above-mentioned loss display result), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, but the variable display of the decorative symbol. As a display result of, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination (also referred to as “non-reach loss”) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes “non-reach loss”). If the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

<Various tables related to big hits>
Various tables related to big hits will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8.

[Hit type]
FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a hit type. As shown in FIG. 7, in the hit type table, for each type (type) of hit in the jackpot, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot game state, the base after the end of the jackpot game state, and the number of times of opening in the jackpot ( The number of rounds) is shown.

Specifically, as the types of jackpots, normal jackpots 1 and 2 and probabilistic jackpots 1 to 9 are provided. In the following, the marking of each round may be represented by "R". For example, the first round is also referred to as the 1Rth, and the second round is also referred to as the 2Rth.

The normal jackpot 1 is a jackpot controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of 3 rounds. In the normal jackpot 1, such a low accuracy and high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed for a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

The normal jackpot 2 is a jackpot controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of 3 rounds. In the normal jackpot 2, such a low accuracy and high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probabilistic jackpots 1 to 5 are jackpots that are controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of three rounds. In the probability variation jackpot 1, such a high accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability variation jackpot 6 is a jackpot controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of 5 rounds. In the probability variation jackpot 6, such a high accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability variation jackpot 7 is a jackpot controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot game state of 7 rounds. In the probability variation jackpot 7, such a high accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probabilistic jackpots 8 and 9 are jackpots that are controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot game state of 10 rounds. In the probability variation jackpots 8 and 9, such a high accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

[Random numbers]
FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining each random number. As shown in FIG. 8, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, Random 1 is a random counter for hit determination that determines whether or not to make a big hit. Random 1 is, for example, added and updated from 1 to 1 at a time, added and updated up to the upper limit of 65536, and then added and updated again from 1. Random 2 is a random counter (for determining the jackpot type) that determines the jackpot type (type).

Random 3 and Random 4 are random counters (for determining the post-variation pattern) that determine the variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as the post-variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to the post-variation among the variation patterns. Post-variation refers to the variation in the latter half of the variation in the special symbol. Random 3 is a random counter that determines the post-variation pattern corresponding to the case of loss. For example, it is updated one by one, added and updated from 1, and then added and updated up to the upper limit of 65519, and then added again from 1. Will be updated. Random 4 is a random counter that determines a post-variation pattern corresponding to a hit. For example, it is added and updated from 1 to 1 at a time, added and updated up to its upper limit of 239, and then added and updated again from 1.

Random 5 is a random counter (for determining the pre-variation pattern) that determines a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as a pre-variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to the pre-variation among the variation patterns. The pre-variation refers to the variation of the first half of the variation of the special symbol. Random 5 is, for example, added and updated from 1 to 1 at a time, added and updated up to the upper limit of 251 and then added and updated again from 1. Random 6 is a random counter (for determining whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol). Random 6 is, for example, added and updated from 1 to 1 by 1, added and updated up to the upper limit of 201, and then added and updated again from 1.

In the present embodiment, whether or not the player is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is determined based on the value of the jackpot determination random number (random 1). Then, which of the plurality of types of jackpots is to be selected is determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 2). At this time, the jackpot symbol may also be determined based on the value of random 2.

First, the post-variation pattern is determined according to the hit or loss using the random number for determining the post-variation pattern (random 3 and 4), and the pre-variation pattern is determined using the random number for determining the pre-variation pattern (random 5). Will be done. As described above, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by the two-step lottery process.

[Big hit judgment table, big hit type judgment table]
FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. These tables are stored in ROM 101.

FIG. 9A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1 is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal time (non-probability variation) jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability variation state, that is, a non-probability variation state) and a probability variation jackpot determination table used in the probability variation state.

In the normal jackpot determination table, jackpot determination values are set for the number of determination values listed in the upper column of FIG. 9 (a), and in the probability variation jackpot determination table, the lower column of FIG. 9 (a). The jackpot judgment value is set for the number of judgment values described in. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change is the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at normal time, and the jackpot judgment value peculiar to the probability change is added to the jackpot judgment value at normal time. A larger number of jackpot determination values than the jackpot determination table are set. As a result, in the probabilistic state, it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit with a higher probability than in the normal state.

The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1). If it matches the jackpot determination value, it is decided to make a jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot) for the special symbol. In addition, FIG. 9A shows the probability of becoming a big hit (ratio) or the probability of losing (ratio).

9 (b) and 9 (c) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 9B is a first special figure jackpot type determination table used for determining a jackpot type when a jackpot is determined by the first special symbol. FIG. 9C is a second special figure jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to be a jackpot by the second special symbol.

In the first special figure jackpot type determination table of FIG. 9B, the numerical values are compared with the random 2 values for determining the jackpot type, and correspond to the normal jackpots 1 and 2 and the probability variation jackpots 1 to 4, respectively. Judgment values are set for the number of judgment values that have been made. For example, as shown in FIG. 9B, for the first special figure, the normal jackpot 1 is assigned 25 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and the normal jackpot 2 is 100 random 2s. 25 random 2 values are assigned, probabilistic jackpot 1 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and probabilistic jackpot 2 is 37 out of 100 random 2s. Random 2 values are assigned, probabilistic jackpot 3 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and probabilistic jackpot 4 is 4 random 2 out of 100 random 2s. The value of is assigned.

In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 9C, determination values are set by the number of determination values corresponding to each of the probabilistic jackpots 5 to 9, which are numerical values to be compared with the values of random 2. Has been done. For example, as shown in FIG. 9C, for the second special figure, the probability variation jackpot 5 is assigned 10 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and the probability variation jackpot 6 is 100 random 2s. 5 random 2 values are assigned, probabilistic jackpot 7 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and probabilistic jackpot 8 is 70 out of 100 random 2s. Random 2 values are assigned, and the probability variation jackpot 9 is assigned 10 random 2 values out of 100 random 2.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value in which the random 2 values match as the jackpot type, and the random 2 values match as the jackpot symbol. Determine the big hit design you made. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

<Direction control command>
FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of the effect control command. The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 which is the control board on the main side transmits various effect control commands to the effect control CPU 120 according to the game control state. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The command form shown in FIG. 10 is an example, and other command forms may be used. In the following, "(H)" is shown to be a hexadecimal number, but may be omitted in the present specification.

The command 80XX (H) is a variation pattern that specifies a variation pattern (pre-variation pattern) corresponding to the pre-variation among the variation patterns of the decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. It is a command (XX corresponds to the number of the pre-variation pattern). The front variation on the sub side refers to the variation of the first half of the variation of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of pre-variation patterns, there is a pre-variation pattern command corresponding to each of the pre-variation patterns specified by the number.

The command 84XX (H) is a variation pattern that specifies a variation pattern (post-variation pattern) corresponding to the post-variation among the variation patterns of the decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. It is a command (XX corresponds to the post-variation pattern number). The rear variation on the sub side refers to the variation of the latter half of the variation of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of post-variation patterns, there is a post-variation pattern command corresponding to each of the post-variation patterns specified by the number.

The pre-variation pattern command and the post-variation pattern command are transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control CPU 120 as a set of two commands. The effect control CPU 120 cannot specify the fluctuation pattern only by receiving only one of the pre-variation pattern command and the post-variation pattern command, and receives both the pre-variation pattern command and the post-variation pattern command. By doing so, the fluctuation pattern can be specified.

The command 8101 (H) is a first variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display of the first special figure. The command 8102 (H) is a second variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display of the second special figure. Upon receiving the command 8101 (H) or the command 8102 (H), the effect control CPU 101 controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that the command is determined to be lost. The command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (normal jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 1 is determined. The command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (normal jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 2 is determined. The command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (probability variation jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 1 is determined. The command 8C05 (H) is a display result 5 designation command (probability variation jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 2 is determined. The command 8C06 (H) is a display result 6 designation command (probability variation jackpot 3 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 3 is determined. The command 8C07 (H) is a display result 7 designation command (probability variation jackpot 4 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 4 is determined. The command 8C08 (H) is a display result 8 designation command (probability variation jackpot 5 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 5 is determined. The command 8C09 (H) is a display result 9 designation command (probability variation jackpot 6 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 6 is determined. The command 8C10 (H) is a display result 10 designation command (probability variation jackpot 7 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 7 is determined. The command 8C11 (H) is a display result 11 designation command (probability variation jackpot 8 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 8 is determined. The command 8C12 (H) is a display result 12 designation command (probability variation jackpot 9 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 9 is determined. Each of the loss designation command, the normal jackpot 1, 2 designation command, and the probability variation jackpot 1 to 9 designation command, or these are collectively referred to as an 8C system command.

The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variable display of the first special figure is started. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variable display of the second special figure is started. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D system commands. The command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of the variation of the first special figure and the second special figure.

The command 9000 (H) is an initialization specification command for designating the initialization (designating to display the initial screen at the time of turning on the power) to be transmitted when the power supply for the gaming machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is a power failure recovery designation command for designating the power failure recovery (designating to display the power failure recovery screen) transmitted when the power supply for the gaming machine is resumed. Command 9500 (H) is a normal state specification command that specifies the background of the normal state. The command 9501 (H) is a time saving state specification command for designating the background of the time saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a probability change state specification command for designating the background of the probability change state. Each of the normal state specification command, the time saving state specification command, and the probabilistic state specification command, or these are collectively referred to as a 95-series command or a background specification command.

Command 9F00 (H) is a customer-waiting demo designation command that specifies the transition to the customer-waiting demonstration display. The effect control CPU 120 determines that there is currently no hold due to receiving the customer waiting demo designation command. Then, the effect control CPU 120 sends the demonstration image to the image display device 5 30 seconds after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command. The effect control CPU 120 turns on the game effect lamp 9 in the manner of a demonstration lamp 30 seconds after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 for demonstration is more lively (high brightness, many blinking modes, rainbow lighting, etc.) than the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 in the normal state. Thereby, the attractiveness of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shown to the player. In the demonstration display waiting for customers, the background in the normal state (hereinafter, also referred to as the normal background) is displayed, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Further, in the demonstration display waiting for customers, the title of the gaming machine 1 (for example, "POWERFULII") may be displayed, or a part of the introduction image (still image or moving image) of the effect may be displayed.

The command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that normally specifies the start of the jackpot 1. The command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that normally specifies the start of the jackpot 2. The command A003 (H) is a probability variation jackpot start 3 designation command that specifies the start of the probability variation jackpot 1. The command A004 (H) is a command for designating the probability variation jackpot start 4 to specify the start of the probability variation jackpot 2. The command A005 (H) is a probability variation jackpot start 5 designation command that specifies the start of the probability variation jackpot 3. The command A006 (H) is a command for designating the probability variation jackpot start 6 to specify the start of the probability variation jackpot 4. The command A007 (H) is a probability variation jackpot start 7 designation command that specifies the start of the probability variation jackpot 5. The command A008 (H) is a command for designating the probability variation jackpot start 8 to specify the start of the probability variation jackpot 6. The command A009 (H) is a probability variation jackpot start 9 designation command that specifies the start of the probability variation jackpot 7. The command A010 (H) is a command for designating the probability variation jackpot start 10 to specify the start of the probability variation jackpot 8. The command A011 (H) is a command for designating the probability variation jackpot start 11 to specify the start of the probability variation jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot start 1 to 11 designated commands, or these are collectively referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX (H) is a command for designating the opening of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The command specified while the large winning opening is open is also referred to as an A1 command. A2XX (H) is a designated command after opening the large winning opening indicating the closing of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designated command after opening the big winning opening is also called an A2 command.

The command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that normally specifies the end of jackpot 1. The command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that normally specifies the end of the jackpot 2. The command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 1. The command A304 (H) is a jackpot end 4 designation command that specifies the end of the probability variation jackpot 2. The command A305 (H) is a jackpot end 5 designation command that specifies the end of the probability variation jackpot 3. The command A306 (H) is a jackpot end 6 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 4. The command A307 (H) is a jackpot end 7 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 5. The command A308 (H) is a jackpot end 8 designation command that specifies the end of the probability variation jackpot 6. The command A309 (H) is a jackpot end 9 designation command that specifies the end of the probability variation jackpot 7. The command A310 (H) is a jackpot end 10 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 8. The command A311 (H) is a jackpot end 11 designation command that specifies the end of the probability variation jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot end 1 to 11 designated commands, or these are collectively referred to as A3 series commands.

The command AD00 (H) is a probability variation determination device pass designation command that specifies that a V prize has occurred. The probability variation determination device passage designation command is a command transmitted when a game ball that has passed through the V large winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 24.

The command B100 (H) is a first start prize designation command for designating that there was a first start prize. The command B200 (H) is a second start prize designation command for designating that there was a second start prize.

The command C1XX (H) is a first hold storage number designation command for designating that the first hold storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first hold storage number designation command is also referred to as a C1 system command. The command C2XX (H) is a designated command for second hold storage that specifies that the second hold storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second hold storage number designation command is also referred to as a C2 system command.

The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) display the contents of the winning judgment results such as the big hit judgment, the big hit type judgment, and the variation pattern type judgment at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. This is an effect control command to be shown. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not a jackpot will be achieved and a determination result of the type of jackpot among the winning determination results.

C7XX (H) is a large winning opening winning designation command indicating the passage of the game ball to the large winning opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed display off-designated command indicating that the right-handed display is turned off. The command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1, is a right-handed display lighting designation command indicating lighting of the right-handed display. In the present embodiment, the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a big hit is obtained, the type of the big hit, and the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type are in the range of the determination value at the time of starting winning. Then, a value for designating a big hit and a value for designating the type of the big hit are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value that specifies a range of determination values as a determination result of the variation pattern type in the EXT data of the variation type command, and controls transmission to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, the type of the big hit, and can recognize the fluctuation pattern type based on the fluctuation type command. ..

<Variation pattern>
The contents of the fluctuation pattern, determination of the fluctuation pattern, and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 17.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are set by the game control microcomputer 100 on the main side. Each fluctuation pattern is managed by the main fluctuation number, and is composed of a combination of a pre-variation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the pre-variation, and a post-variation pattern corresponding to the post-variation. It is designed to include. The pre-variation pattern corresponds to the pre-variation pattern command (80XX (H)) described with reference to FIG. 10, and the post-variation pattern corresponds to the post-variation pattern command (84XX (H)) described with reference to FIG. Corresponds to.

[Pre-variation pattern on the main side]
FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of the pre-variation pattern on the main side. Of the plurality of types of pre-variation patterns to which each pre-variation number is assigned, the pre-variation number 1 is a pre-variation pattern command (8000 (H)) that specifies a normal variation (for example, a variation of a decorative symbol over 13 seconds). Is. The pre-variation number 2 is a pre-variation pattern command (8001 (H)) that specifies a shortened variation (for example, a variation of a decorative symbol over 7 seconds). The pre-variation number 3 is a pre-variation pattern command (8002 (H)) that specifies an ultra-shortening variation (for example, a variation of a decorative symbol over 3 seconds).

The pre-variation number 4 is a pre-variation pattern command (8003 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (normal or SP first half) (a reach that ends in the normal reach or the SP first half reach after the reach mode is reached). The pre-variation number 5 is a pre-variation pattern command (8004 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (SP second half development) (a reach that develops into the SP second half reach after becoming a reach mode). The pre-variation number 6 is a pre-variation pattern command (8005 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) (a reach that develops into the final reach after becoming a reach mode).

The pre-variation number 7 is a pre-variation pattern command (8006 (H)) that specifies that the normal reach (normal or SP first half) is executed after one pseudo-variation. Pseudo-variation means that the variable display is temporarily stopped and then restarted from the start of the variable display (variable display) of the decorative symbol until the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. Variable display (variable display). The effect of repeating such pseudo-variations is also called pseudo-ream. By executing the pseudo-ream, the variable display based on one hold memory can be shown to the player as if it were a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The variable display that is temporarily stopped and then restarted is also referred to as "re-variable display". The pre-variation number 8 is a pre-variation pattern command (8007 (H)) that specifies that normal reach (SP latter half development) is executed after one pseudo-variation. The pre-variation number 9 is a pre-variation pattern command (8008 (H)) that specifies normal reach (final reach development) after one pseudo-variation.

The pre-variation number 10 is a pre-variation pattern command (8009 (H)) that specifies that the normal reach (normal or the first half of the SP) is executed after the pseudo-variation is performed twice. The pre-variation number 11 is a pre-variation pattern command (800A (H)) that specifies that the normal reach (SP latter half development) is executed after the pseudo-variation is performed twice. The pre-variation number 12 is a pre-variation pattern command (800B (H)) that specifies normal reach (final reach development) after performing pseudo-variation twice.

A fluctuation time is specified for each of the pre-variation patterns, and an animation (moving image) is displayed on the image display device 5 over each fluctuation time. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it takes about 33.3 msec for one still image (referred to as a frame) constituting the moving image. For example, in the case of the patterns of the previous variation numbers 7 to 9, 41500 mse is set as the variation time, and the number of frames is about 1246. Further, in the case of the patterns of the previous variation numbers 10 to 12, 62000 mse is set as the variation time, and the number of frames is about 1861.

[Post-variation pattern on the main side]
FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-variation pattern on the main side. Of the plurality of types of post-variation patterns to which the post-variation numbers are assigned, the post-variation number 1 is a post-variation pattern command (8400 (H)) that specifies a 13-second variation. The post-variation number 2 is a post-variation pattern command (8401 (H)) that specifies a 7-second variation. The post-variation number 3 is a post-variation pattern command (8402 (H)) that specifies a 3-second variation. The post-variation number 4 is a post-variation pattern command (8403 (H)) that specifies that the pseudo-continuous Gase is executed. Pseudo-ream Gase is an effect that pretends to execute pseudo-ream and does not execute pseudo-ream in the end.

The post-variation number 5 is a post-variation pattern command (8404 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (loss) (a variation of a decorative pattern that becomes a reach mode but becomes a loss mode without developing into SP reach). The post-variation number 6 is a post-variation pattern command (8405 (H)) that specifies the first half of the SP (loss) (the variation of the decorative pattern that develops into the SP reach but becomes the loss mode in the first half of the SP reach). The post-variation number 7 is a post-variation pattern command (8406 (H)) that specifies the latter half of the SP (loss) (the variation of the decorative pattern that develops in the latter half of the SP reach but becomes a loss mode in the latter half of the SP reach). The post-variation number 8 is a post-variation pattern command (8407 (H)) that specifies the final reach (loss) (the variation of the decorative pattern that develops into the final reach but becomes the loss mode in the final reach).

The post-variation number 9 is a post-variation pattern command (8408 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (hit) (a variation of a decorative symbol that becomes a reach mode and a hit mode). The post-variation number 10 is a post-variation pattern command (8409 (H)) that specifies the first half (hit) of the SP (the variation of the decorative pattern that develops into the SP reach and becomes the hit mode in the first half of the SP reach). The post-variation number 11 is a post-variation pattern command (840A (H)) that specifies the latter half of the SP (hit) (the variation of the decorative symbol that develops in the latter half of the SP reach and becomes the hit mode in the latter half of the SP reach). The post-variation number 12 is a post-variation pattern command (840B (H)) that specifies the final reach (hit) (the variation of the decorative symbol that develops into the final reach and becomes the hit mode in the final reach).

[Judgment of post-variation pattern]
The post-variation pattern is determined by using different random counters in the jackpot determination depending on whether the jackpot or the loss is determined. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a post-variation pattern determination table at the time of loss. As shown in FIG. 13, when a loss is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using the random 3 described in FIG. Further, when the jackpot determination is determined to be lost, the post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of determination values according to the number of reserved memories after digestion, and the determined post-variation number is also different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13A, when the number of reserved memories after digestion is 0, one of the post-variation numbers 1, 4, 5 to 8 is determined as the post-variation pattern. A different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

When the number of reserved memories after digestion is 1, one of the post-variation numbers 1, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. ing. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

When the number of reserved memories after digestion is 2, one of the post-variation numbers 2, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. ing. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

When the number of reserved memories after digestion is 3, one of the post-variation numbers 3, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. ing. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

In this way, the post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of determination values according to the number of reserved memories after digestion, and further, the post-variation number is determined using a different number of determination values according to the number of reserved memories after digestion. Therefore, the type of variation pattern changes according to the number of remaining reserved memories, which makes it possible to give variety to the game and improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining a post-variation pattern determination table at the time of a big hit. As shown in FIG. 14, when the jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using the random 4 described in FIG. Further, when the jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of determination values according to the type of jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 (a), when it is determined to be one of the normal jackpot 1, 2 and the probability variation jackpot 1, 2, 5 to 8, any of the post-variation numbers 9 to 12 is determined. The post-variation pattern is determined, and different numbers of determination values are provided for each of the post-variation patterns. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12) is about 1 / 1.1.

When it is determined to be one of the probability variation jackpots 3 and 9, one of the posterior variation patterns 9 to 12 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the posterior variation patterns. .. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12) is about 1 / 1.1.

When the probability variation jackpot 4 is determined, any of the posterior variation patterns 9 to 12 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the posterior variation patterns. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12) is about 1 / 1.1.

In this way, since the post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of judgment values depending on the type of jackpot, the type of variation pattern changes according to the type of jackpot, thereby giving variety to the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13, the probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach is about 1/102 at the time of loss, whereas it is a big hit. Since the time is about 1 / 1.1, which is higher than that, when the SP reach or the final reach is developed, the player can be expected to generate a big hit.

[Judgment of pre-variation pattern]
FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining a pre-variation pattern determination table. The pre-variation pattern is determined using the number of random 5 determination values that differ depending on the type of post-variation pattern determined earlier. Further, the pre-variation number determined is also different depending on the type of the post-variation pattern determined earlier.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15A, when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 1 is determined, the anterior variation pattern of the anterior variation number 1 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15B, when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 2 is determined, the anterior variation pattern of the anterior variation number 2 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15C, when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 3 is determined, the anterior variation pattern of the anterior variation number 3 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15D, when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 4 is determined, the anterior variation pattern of the anterior variation number 1 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 15 (e), when any of the post-variation numbers 5 and 9 is determined to be the post-variation pattern, the pre-variation pattern of any of the pre-variation numbers 4 and 7 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15 (f), when any of the post-variation numbers 6 and 10 is determined to be the post-variation pattern, the pre-variation pattern of any of the pre-variation numbers 4, 7 and 10 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15 (g), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 7 is determined, it is determined to be any of the anterior variation patterns 5, 8 and 11 of the anterior variation numbers 5, 8 and 11.

As shown in FIG. 15 (h), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 11 is determined, it is determined to be one of the anterior variation patterns 5, 8 and 11. As shown in FIG. 15 (i), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 8 is determined, it is determined to be one of the anterior variation patterns 6, 9 and 12. As shown in FIG. 15 (j), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 12 is determined, it is determined to be one of the anterior variation patterns 6, 9 and 12.

[Total variation pattern]
FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining an example of a total variation pattern on the main side. When the post-variation pattern and the pre-variation pattern are determined as described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15, any of the fluctuation patterns of the main variation numbers 1 to 26 as shown in FIG. 16 is obtained.

FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining an example of a lottery of an effect pattern on the sub side. As shown in FIG. 17, the effect control CPU 120 on the sub side determines the effect pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern command received from the CPU 103 on the main side.

For example, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 7 to 9 from the CPU 103, among a plurality of types of reach effects, the effect of the loss pattern of the SP first half reach A, which will be described later, or the effect of the loss pattern of the SP first half reach A, which will be described later, or , SP First half Reach B is decided to be one of the production of the loss pattern. When the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 18 to 20 from the CPU 103, among a plurality of types of reach effects, the effect of the hit pattern of the SP first half reach A, which will be described later, or the SP It is decided to be one of the production of the hit pattern of the first half reach B.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 10 to 12 from the CPU 103, among a plurality of types of reach effects, the effect of the loss pattern of the SP second half reach A, which will be described later, or the SP Decide on one of the production of the loss pattern of reach B in the second half. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 21 to 23 from the CPU 103, among a plurality of types of reach effects, the effect of the hit pattern of the SP second half reach A, which will be described later, or the SP It is decided to be one of the production of the hit pattern of the second half reach B.

<Operation>
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

[Main operation of main board 11]
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described.

(Special symbol process processing)
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control main process. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, the CPU 103 makes necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

When the recovery condition is satisfied (Y in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the recovery process (step S4) and then the setting confirmation process (step S5). The CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the symbol can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (N in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the initialization process (step S6) and then the setting change process (step S7). The initialization process of step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle 30, the detection of the game ball by various switches, and the like are stopped, and the lost symbol and the like are stopped and displayed, and the game stopped state different from the lost symbol. It suffices to control so that the display corresponding to is performed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the setting change state, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, the CPU 103 stores (updates and stores) the set value displayed on the display monitor 29 in the backup area of the RAM 102 based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the amusement park or the like. Turn off the display monitor 29. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 is performed. The setting change process of step S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch 92 is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. .. When the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 is performed. While it is executed, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and enables interrupts. (Step S10). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

(Game control timer interrupt processing)
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of game control timer interrupt processing. When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 19 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and can generate a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined information output process to start, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information (information indicating the number of start winning prizes) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability change state has been reached) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the jackpot game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal figure display unit 26, and the number of reserved normal figures is displayed by turning on the normal figure storage display unit 25.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

(Special symbol process processing)
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. The special symbol process process is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold memories, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Be told. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 19 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S117) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit" and the jackpot type when it is set as "big hit" are displayed as the display result. Is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a process of determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit", etc. It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation process, the process of setting the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 and the special diagram 2 variable display unit 22 to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop processing, the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22 stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "missing", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a configuration in which the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability and the ball output rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. .. If the jackpot winning probability changes according to the set value, the ball output rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, and the gaming ball is a special variable winning ball device 7 during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the machine. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability is higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6) may be provided. When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (in order to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (for controlling the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Starting prize judgment process)
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a start winning determination process. The CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process in S101 of the special symbol process process shown in FIG. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting port switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (Step S51). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (Y in step S51), the number of reserved special figures reserved for the special figure game using the first special figure is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, it is determined whether or not it is "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S52). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown). When the number of reserved first special figures is not the upper limit value in step S52 (N in step S52), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "1". (Step S53).

Variable when the first start port switch 22A is off in step S51 (N in step S51) or when the first special figure hold storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S52 (Y in step S52). Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is on (step). S54). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (Y in step S54), the second special figure hold storage number, which is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, it is determined whether or not it is "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S55). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown). When the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S55 (N in step S55), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2". (Step S56).

After executing any of the processes of step S53 and step S56, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (step S57). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first hold memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (step S58). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is a stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), may be updated so as to be added by 1.

After executing the process of step S58, the CPU 103 uses the random number value random 1 for jackpot determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit (not shown). Numerical data indicating the random number random 2 and the random number random 3 and 4 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (step S59). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S60). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random values random 1 to random 4 is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit (not shown), while the start port buffer value is "2". At a certain time, numerical data indicating random values random 1 to random 4 is stored in a second special figure reservation storage unit (not shown).

For the numerical data indicating the random value random 1 for jackpot judgment and the random value random 2 for jackpot type judgment, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit", and further, the variable display result is " It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". Random random values 3 and 4 for determining the variation pattern are used to determine the variation pattern including the variation display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step S59, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random value values used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol and the variable display time.

Following the process of step S59, the transmission setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step S60). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start prize designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the send command pointer in the send command buffer, thereby performing the effect control board 12 The setting for sending the first start winning prize designation command is made to. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start prize designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is seconded. 2 Make settings for sending the start prize designation command. The start prize designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 19 after the special symbol process process is completed. NS.

Following the process in step S60, the CPU 103 stores the random number value in the storage area corresponding to the hold storage (step S61). After that, the CPU 103 clears the start port buffer, initializes the stored value to "0" (step S62), and then ends the start winning determination process. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 22, in the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 uses the first reserved storage buffer (storage buffer for storing the reserved storage information of the first special symbol) or the second reserved storage buffer (of the second special symbol). It is determined whether or not there is hold storage data in the storage buffer for storing the hold storage information (step S1001). When there is no hold storage data in either the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer (N in step S1001), it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed from the suspension of fluctuation (step S1002). If a predetermined period does not elapse from the suspension of fluctuation (N in step S1002), the special symbol normal processing is terminated. On the other hand, when a predetermined period has elapsed from the suspension of fluctuation (Y in step S1002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demo designation command is performed (step S1003), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. Here, when the customer-waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer-waiting demo designation command sent flag indicating that the customer-waiting demo designation command has been sent is set. Then, when the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt is executed after the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer is repeated based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set. It is controlled not to send the wait demo specification command. Such a customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is reset when the next variation display of the special symbol is started.

When there is hold storage data in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer (Y in step S1001), the CPU 103 indicates that the first data among the data set in the hold specific area indicates "second". It is determined whether or not the data is data (step S1004). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is not the data indicating the "second" (that is, the data indicating the "first") (N in step S1004), the CPU 103 uses the special symbol pointer (first). Data indicating "first" is set in (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol) (step S1005). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is the data indicating "second" (Y in step S1004), the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step S1006). ).

In this embodiment, hereinafter, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special are performed according to whether the data indicating the "first" is set or the data indicating the "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. The variable display of the symbol is executed using a common processing routine. When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the first reserved storage buffer. On the other hand, when the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the second reserved storage buffer.

Under the control of steps S1004 to S1006, if even one data of the second hold storage exists in the second hold storage buffer, the variation display of the second special symbol based on the data of the second hold storage is displayed. 1 Priority is given to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data in the hold storage.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102 (step S1007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the hold storage buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the hold storage buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S1008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first hold storage counter and sets each storage area in the first hold storage buffer. Shift the content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second hold storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second hold storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 is placed in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always extracted is the first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number). The order of the second reserved memory) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the hold storage number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control CPU 120 based on the value of the hold storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction (). Step S1009). In this case, when a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first hold storage number designation command. Further, when a value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second hold storage number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step S1010), reads a random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the hold storage buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step S1011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the jackpot determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 8) with a random number for jackpot determination, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. That is, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the probability of becoming a jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is in the non-probability state (normal gaming state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, when the number of big hit judgment values is set in advance, the big hit judgment table (the table in which the numerical value in the lower column of FIG. 9A is set) and the number of big hit judgment values are probable change. A normal jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical value in the upper column of FIG. 9A is set), which is set less than the jackpot determination table, is provided. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, and when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process using the probabilistic jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. In the state or the time saving state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the normal jackpot determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 9A, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is decided to make a big hit (Y in step S1011), the process proceeds to step S1012. It should be noted that deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit game state, but it also means deciding whether or not to make the stop symbol in the special symbol a big hit symbol. ..

It should be noted that confirmation of whether or not the current gaming state is in the probabilistic state is performed depending on whether or not the probabilistic flag is set. The probability change flag is set when the game state is changed to the probability change state, and is reset when the probability change state is finished. Specifically, the probability variation flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then the condition that the fluctuation display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the condition that the next jackpot is determined. When the earlier of the conditions is satisfied, the change display of the special symbol is ended and the stop symbol is reset at the timing of the stop display.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S1011), the process proceeds to step S1015 described later.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) matches any of the big hit determination values in step S1011, the CPU 103 sets the big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (step S1012). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table used to determine the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 9 (b) and the second special symbol jackpot type in FIG. 9 (c) are used. Select one of the judgment tables. Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9B. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9 (c). Then, the CPU 103 reads out the jackpot type determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and stores them in the hold storage buffer using the selected jackpot type determination table. The jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the jackpot type are determined (step S1013).

Further, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step S1014).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a stop symbol of the special symbol (step S1015). Specifically, when the jackpot flag is not set, "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in step S1014 is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command (step S1016), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step S1017).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 23, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines the post-variation pattern based on random 3 and 4 according to the number of reserved storages and the presence / absence of a big hit (step S1101). Specifically, in the case of loss, the CPU 103 selects the post-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13 according to the number of reserved storages, and after the selection, the post-variation pattern determination table and the value of random 3 are used as the post-variation pattern determination table. Determine the variation pattern. Further, in the case of a big hit, the CPU 103 selects the post-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14 according to the type of the jackpot, and selects the post-variation pattern determination table based on the selected post-variation pattern determination table and the value of random 4. decide.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the pre-variation pattern based on the random 5 (step S1102). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects the pre-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 15 according to the post-variation pattern determined in S1102, and pre-variates based on the selected pre-variation pattern determination table and the value of random 5. Determine the pattern.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern (pre-variation pattern and post-variation pattern) to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1103).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step S1104). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the symbol variation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1105), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S112) (step S1105). S1106).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 24, in the special symbol variation processing, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step S1201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step S1202), sets the value of the special symbol process flag to the special symbol. The value corresponding to the stop process (step S113) is updated (step S1203). If the fluctuation time timer has not timed out (N in step S1202), the process ends as it is.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 25, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and displays the stop symbol on the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 or the special figure 2 variable display unit 22. Control for derivation and display is performed (step S1301). When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the special diagram 1 variable display unit 21 is terminated, and the special symbol pointer indicates "second". When the data is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 is terminated. In addition, a symbol confirmation designation command is set in the effect control CPU 120 (step S1302). As a result, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S1303). Then, if the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1303), the process proceeds to step S1309.

When the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S1303), the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag and the time saving flag (step S1304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right-handed display lighting command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1305).

In addition, referring to the opening pattern data stored in ROМ101, the number of opening times (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval between rounds are obtained for the normal large winning opening and the V large winning opening. Data indicating an opening mode such as an interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step S1306). For example, in the case of a normal big hit of 3R, an opening mode for opening the normal big winning opening in all of 1 to 3R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. In the case of a probabilistic jackpot of 5R, an opening mode in which the normal large winning opening is opened at the 1st to 3rd Rs and the 5th R and the V large winning opening is opened at the 4th R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. Further, in the case of a probability variation jackpot of 10R, an opening mode in which the normal large winning opening is opened at the 1st to 8th R and 10R and the V large winning opening is opened at the 9th R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. .. The data of the number of times of opening (5 times or 10 times) is set in the number of times of opening counter for counting the number of times of opening.

Further, a value corresponding to the fanfare time (time for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot, for example, in the image display device 5), which is the jackpot display time, is set in the jackpot control timer (step S1307). After that, in the big hit opening pre-processing, the big winning opening control timer is subtracted by 1, and when it becomes 0, the big winning opening is opened and the round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step S1308), and the processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1304), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step S1309). .. If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S1309), the process proceeds to step S1316. When the time saving flag is set (Y in step S1309), the counter value of the time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (step S1310). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction counter has become 0 (step S1311). When the value of the time reduction counter becomes 0 (Y in step S1311), it is determined that the duration of the time reduction state has expired, and the time reduction flag is reset (step S1312). As a result, the gaming state shifts from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state when the variable display resulting in the loss display result is performed a specific number of times (100 times) in the time-saving state. If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 in step S1311 (N in step S1311), the process proceeds to step S1316.

After step S1312, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag indicating the probability change state is set (step S1313). If the probability change flag is set (Y in step S1313), the probability change flag is reset (step S1314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 in response to the transition of the game state from the time saving state to the normal state (low probability / low base state) (step S1315), and in step S1316. move on. If the probability change flag is not set in step S1313 (N in step S1313), the process proceeds to step S1315 without performing the process of step S1314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1316), and the process ends.

(Big hit pre-opening treatment)
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening preprocessing. As shown in FIG. 26, in the jackpot opening preprocessing, the CPU 103 sets the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step S1401). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (step S1402), and if the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1402), the process ends.

When the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1402), a command indicating that the large winning opening is open is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the normal large winning opening (step S1404). As a result, the large winning opening is usually opened in the 1st round.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the maximum time during which the large winning opening can be opened (large winning opening opening time) by the large winning opening control timer based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 in step S1306). The corresponding large winning opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is set (step S1405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1406), and the process ends.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of processing during jackpot opening. As shown in FIG. 27, in the process during the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 sets the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step S1501).

Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the large winning opening control timer has become 0 (step S1502). When the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1502), the process proceeds to step S1511. When the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1502), it is determined whether or not the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is being opened (step S1503). Whether or not the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is open may be determined by the value of the opening count counter.

If it is determined in step S1503 that the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is not open (N in step S1503), the process ends.

If the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is open (Y in step S1503), it is determined whether or not the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 24 is turned on (step S1504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 24 is turned on (N in step S1504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 24 is turned on (Y in step S1504), the winning number counter is incremented by +1 (addition update) (step S1505).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation determination flag is set (step S1506). The probability change determination flag is a flag set when it is determined that the probability change state is controlled when a V prize is generated. If the probability change determination flag is set (Y in step S1506), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1506), it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 24 is turned on (step S1507). If the V winning switch 24 is not turned on (N in step S1507), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is turned on (Y in step S1507), the probability change determination flag is set (step S1508), the probability change determination device passage designation command is transmitted (step S1509), and the process proceeds to step S1510. do.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S1510). If the value of the winning number counter does not reach a predetermined number (N in step S1510), the process ends.

When the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step S1510), the CPU 103 controls to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal large winning opening, or drives the solenoid 83 to drive the V large winning opening. One of the controls for closing the solenoid is controlled (step S1511). Next, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing (setting to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step S1512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release post-processing (step S116) (step S1513), and ends the processing.

(Post-processing after opening the jackpot)
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of post-processing after opening the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 28, in the jackpot opening post-processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the opening count counter is 0 (step S1601).

If the value of the open count counter is 0 (Y in step S1601), the jackpot end designation mand is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1602), and the jackpot end time (the jackpot game is completed) is sent to the jackpot control timer. For example, a value corresponding to (time to be notified in the image display device 5) is set (step S1603), and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end processing (step S117) (step S1604). End the process.

In step S1601, if the value of the opening count counter is not 0 (N in step S1601), a designated mand is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 after opening the large winning opening (step S1605), and a round is sent to the large winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step S1606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round before the round in which the V-large winning opening is opened (also referred to as the V-opening round), that is, the next round is the V-opening round (step S1607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step S1607), the solenoid 82 is driven to control the normal opening of the large winning opening (step S1608). On the other hand, when it is before the V opening round (Y in step S1607), the solenoid 83 is driven to control the opening of the V large winning opening (step S1609).

After step S1608 or step S1609, the CPU 103 transmits a designated mand during the opening of the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1611), and ends the process.

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end processing. As shown in FIG. 29, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer for which the jackpot end time is set (step S1701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed) (step S1702). If the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1702), the process ends. If the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1702), the big hit flag is reset (step S1703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the probability variation determination flag set by passing through the V winning region is set (step S1704). If the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1704), the process proceeds to step S1705. If the probability change determination flag is set in step S1704 (Y in step S1704), the probability change flag indicating the probability change state is set (step S1707). Next, a probability change state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1708), the probability change determination flag is reset (step S1709), and the process proceeds to step S1710.

In step S1710, a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step S1710), and 100 is set in the time saving number counter (step S1711). Then, the process proceeds to step S1712.

On the other hand, if the probability variation determination flag is not set in step S1704 (N in step S1704), in step S1705, a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step S1705), and 100 is set in the time saving number counter. (Step S1706), the process proceeds to step S1712.

In step S1712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1713), and ends the process. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 side can recognize which of the probabilistic change, the time saving, and the normal gaming state is in the probabilistic change state specification command transmitted from the CPU 103.

[Main operation of production control board 12]
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described.

(Main processing of production control)
In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main process. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 30 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (N in step S73), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to emit a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (Y in step S73), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. In addition, the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices is determined, determined, set, and the like according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. The effect control process process is a process executed in step S76 of FIG. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 31, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S175 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. By driving the movable body 32, outputting sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (lamp control data) to the LED driver. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the jackpot game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4". In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing", and the effect process flag. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The jackpot effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to "" and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process. As shown in FIG. 32, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the result of the variable display is determined to be lost (step S7101). If the effect control CPU 120 is determined to be lost, it confirms whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern has been received as the fluctuation pattern command (step S7103).

When the effect control CPU 120 determines that a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern has been received, the effect control CPU 120 uses the loss symbol determination data table to determine the display result of the loss that does not reach as the final stop of the effect symbol (step). S7105), the process proceeds to step S7106.

When it is determined in the process of step S7103 that it is not a non-reach variation pattern (when it is determined that it is a reach variation pattern), the stop symbol of the effect symbol constituting the combination of reach symbols is determined (step S7104), and step S7106 Proceed to.

Further, when it is not decided to make a loss in the process of step S7101 (when it is decided to make a big hit), the effect control CPU 101 configures a combination of big hit symbols according to the type of big hit. The stop symbol of the effect symbol is determined (step S7102), and the process proceeds to step S7106.

Next, after executing the effect setting process (step S7106) for setting various effects in the variable display, the process proceeds to step S7107. For example, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute an effect that suggests a big hit (incites whether or not it is a big hit) in the effect setting process in step S7106. Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 128 (r41), which will be described later, as an effect that suggests a big hit (incites whether or not it is a big hit). In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 specifies whether or not to develop to the final reach based on the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command, and if it develops to the final reach, a big hit based on the fluctuation pattern. Determine whether or not to execute the cut-in effect based on the result of whether or not it is a specified jackpot, and determine the type of cut-in effect (red cut-in effect, green cut-in effect) when executing. do. When executing the cut-in effect, the effect control CPU 101 sets information for executing the cut-in effect in the effect setting process.

In step S7107, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns. In step S7107, the symbol variation control pattern is set according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command and various effect control (effect operation) patterns specified by the effect control pattern of the effect determined in the process of step S7106. Among the plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the table, one of the effect control patterns corresponding to the various designated effect operation patterns is selected and determined as the pattern to be used.

In the control pattern table stored in the ROM 121, for example, the effect symbol in the display area of the image display device 5 during the period from the start of the variation of the effect symbol to the stop display of the final stop symbol. Data indicating the control contents of various production operations such as the fluctuation display operation, the effect display operation in the reach effect, the effect display operation by the pseudo-ream effect, and the effect display operation in the advance notice effect are stored as multiple types of symbol variation control patterns. Has been done.

Further, each symbol variation control pattern corresponds to the variation display of the effect symbol such as the effect control process timer setting value, the effect control process timer determination value, the effect display control data, the voice control data, the brightness data, and the end code. It includes control data for controlling various effect operations, and the contents of various effect controls and the switching timing of the effect control are set in chronological order.

Next, the process table corresponding to the effect control pattern is selected (step S7108). Then, the process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data of the selected process table is started (step S7109).

After executing the process of step S7109, the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and various lamps as the effect component) according to the contents of the process data (display control execution data, brightness data, sound number data). Control of the speakers 8L, 8R) as production parts) is started (step S7110). For example, according to the display control execution data, the image display device 5 outputs a command to display an image (including an effect symbol) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In addition, a control signal (lamp control data) is output to the LED driver in order to control lighting / extinguishing of light emitters such as various LEDs. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (phone number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command is set in the fluctuation display time timer (step S7111), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172). (Step S7112), the variable display start setting process ends.

<Details of game progress>
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, the game proceeds as follows. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player first hits the left side to launch the game ball toward the first flow path passing through the left side area of the game area. When the launched game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 is in a display mode showing a big hit symbol, a big hit occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special figure game include normal jackpots 1 and 2, and probabilistic jackpots 1 to 4. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-handed promotion effect that encourages the player to strike right is executed. As a right-handed promotion effect, characters (for example, "right-handed") and figures (for example, an arrow pointing to the right, which is the direction of the second flow path) that encourage right-handed characters (for example, "right-handed") are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition to displaying an image, the right-handed display unit 30 of the special figure LED substrate 20 and the right-handed display unit 55 of the fourth symbol unit 50 also prompt right-handed by lighting a lighting means such as an LED. As a result, the player will hit right after that.

During the round of the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times in the case of a normal jackpot of 3R and 10 times in the case of a probability variation jackpot of 10R). One opening of the big winning opening is between the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until the earlier timing.

When the ending effect after the big hit game state is completed, the game state is controlled to the time saving state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times). Further, when a V prize is generated during the big hit round, the gaming state is controlled to the probabilistic state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) controlled in the time saving state.

Even in the probability change state or the time saving state after the big hit round, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 30, and the right-handed display unit 55. For this reason, the player is always urged to hit right by the right-handed promotion effect even in the time-saving state after the big hit round is completed after the first big hit (also referred to as the first hit) occurs.

In the time saving state, control is executed to shorten the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) from the normal state, and the average normal figure fluctuation time (period in which the normal figure is changed) is executed. Is executed to shorten the time from the normal state, and further, the control to improve the probability of "hit the normal figure" in the normal state game is executed. Further, in the time saving state, the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning opening is opened more frequently, so that the game ball enters the second starting winning opening more frequently and the second start is started. Electric chew support control may be performed to facilitate winning a prize in the winning opening (higher entry, higher frequency).

In the time saving state after the big hit round, the second special figure game is started by the launched game ball entering the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 is in a display mode showing a big hit symbol, a big hit (also referred to as a continuous chan hit) occurs.

As described above, there are 5 to 9 probabilistic jackpots as the types of jackpots in the second special figure game. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. The right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 30, and the right-handed display unit 55 has continued since the first hit.

During the round of the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). One opening of the big winning opening is between the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until the earlier timing.

Then, when the ending effect after the big hit game state is completed, the game state is controlled to a time saving state and a probability change state (high accuracy and high base state) over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) as in the case of the first hit. Will be done. Even in the probable change state after the big hit round in the continuous chan, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 30, and the right-handed display unit 55. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player will be hit by consecutive chans in the probable change state or time saving state after the big hit round is completed, and the player will be in the probable change state or time saving after the big hit round per continuous chan is finished. Even in the state, you are always encouraged to hit right by the right-handed promotion effect.

The probabilistic state or time saving state after the big hit round of the first hit ends, and the probabilistic state or time saving state ends without a big hit occurring in either the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit round per consecutive chan ends. Then, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy and low base state), and the right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 30, and the right-handed display unit 55 is also completed. As a result, the player launches the game ball toward the first flow path passing through the left area of the game area by hitting the left again.

<Flow of production>
Next, a series of production flows executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining the flow of a series of effects. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the notification effect is executed from the start of the variable display to the stop of the variable display. The notification effect is an effect of notifying the player whether or not the fluctuation of the special figure or the decorative symbol is stopped in a manner indicating a big hit, that is, whether or not it is controlled to the big hit game state. The notification effect is formed from a plurality of effect parts, and in the present embodiment, the start part, the fanfare part, the hit epilogue part, the lost epilogue part, the character movement part, the relief hit part, the re-lottery part, and Includes fanfare repertoire. After the re-lottery part, it will be a fanfare repertoire that will be executed before the transition to the jackpot game state. In addition, the fanning part is also called the introduction part. In addition, the hit epilogue part and the lost epilogue part are collectively referred to as an epilogue part.

[Starting part]
The start part is a part in which the effect corresponding to the pre-variation pattern is executed. The start part is also a part indicating the period from the start of fluctuation and the execution of pseudo-ream or normal reach to the start of SP reach. The start part also includes fluctuations that result in non-reach loss.

[Fan part (introduction part)]
The fanning part (introduction part) includes from the start of SP reach (also referred to as super reach) (the start timing of the title display of SP reach) to the timing of heading for a big hit or a loss. In addition, the fanning part is a part that fuels whether it will be a big hit or a loss depending on the effect to be executed. The fanning part corresponds to any of the SP first half reach A and SP first half reach B, which is executed after the start part, and the SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, and SP final reach that develop from the SP first half reach. Includes parts. The SP first half reach A and the SP first half reach B may be collectively referred to as the SP first half, the SP second half reach A, the SP second half reach B, and the SP final reach may be collectively referred to as the SP second half.

[Epilogue Part]
The epilogue part includes a hit epilogue part that notifies that a jackpot display result will be obtained after each fanning part, and a loss epilogue part that notifies that a loss display result will be obtained. In the hit epilogue part, at least in the final part of the epilogue part, an effect by story development is executed so as to notify that the changing symbol becomes a big hit display result and is controlled to the big hit game state. In the lost epilogue part, at least in the final part of the epilogue part, an effect by story development is executed so as to notify that the changing symbol becomes a lost display result and is not controlled to the big hit game state.

In addition, in the epilogue part, the notification that the jackpot display result will be obtained is when the notification is made by moving the accessory when the success / failure notification is performed after the introduction part, as in the final reach described later, and when the SP reach other than the final reach is notified. As described above, there are times when the notification is made by story development on the liquid crystal display (image display device 5) without using an accessory. Of the epilogue parts, the hit epilogue part that is notified by the movement of the accessory is also referred to as the success / failure notification part. Specifically, in the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, when a big hit occurs in the epilogue part executed after the introduction part, the liquid crystal is used by the hit epilogue part as described above. It is notified that the jackpot game state is controlled as the ending of the story production, and if the jackpot does not occur, the loss epilogue part notifies that the jackpot gaming state is not controlled as the ending of the story production using the liquid crystal display. The first story development in the story production may suggest whether it is a hit or not. On the other hand, in the final reach, in the epilogue part executed after the introduction part, first of all, the branch of whether or not the accessory is controlled by the hit / miss notification part (the accessory operation part) is controlled to the big hit game state. After that, if a big hit occurs, the hit epilogue part as described above notifies that the story is controlled to the big hit game state as the end of the story production using the liquid crystal display, and if the big hit does not occur, the liquid crystal display is used by the lost epilogue part. As the end of the story production using, it is notified that the jackpot game state is not controlled. As described above, the hit epilogue part in the final reach includes the hit / fail notification part and the hit epilogue part or the lost epilogue part that is visited after that.

Further, corresponding to the SP first half reach A, the hit epilogue part of the SP first half reach A and the lost epilogue part of the SP first half reach A are executed. Corresponding to the SP first half reach B, the hit epilogue part of the SP first half reach B and the lost epilogue part of the SP first half reach B are executed. Corresponding to the SP second half reach A, the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach A and the lost epilogue part of the SP second half reach A are executed. Corresponding to the SP second half reach B, the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach B and the lost epilogue part of the SP second half reach B are executed. Corresponding to the SP final reach, the hit epilogue part of the SP final reach and the lost epilogue part of the SP final reach are executed.

[Character movement part]
The accessory movement part is a part corresponding to the period during the development of the latter half of the SP, in which the effect indicating that the movable body 32 is operated to develop from the first half of the SP to the second half of the SP is executed. The accessory movement part is executed after the fanning part of the SP reach first half reach A or the fanning part of the SP reach first half B. Then, after the character movement part, any one of the fanning part of the SP second half reach A, the fanning part of the SP second half reach B, and the fanning part of the SP final reach is executed.

[Part per relief]
The relief hit part is a part in which a relief hit effect is executed, which once pretends to be a loss and then suggests that it is a big hit. The relief hit part is a part that may develop from either the lost epilogue part of the SP second half reach A, the lost epilogue part of the SP second half reach B, or the lost epilogue part of the SP final reach.

[Re-lottery part]
The re-lottery part is a part executed after the hit epilogue part in which the jackpot display result is displayed. Specifically, the re-lottery production is the hit epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the hit epilogue part of SP reach first half B, the hit epilogue part of SP second half reach A, the hit epilogue part of SP second half reach B, and the SP final reach. Performed after the hit epilogue part and the relief hit part. In this embodiment, the re-lottery part is always executed after each hit part (hit epilogue part, relief hit part), but there may be cases where the re-lottery production part is not performed. For example, the re-lottery part may not be executed after the relief part, the re-lottery part may not be executed after the winning epilogue part, or the jackpot display result may be a probability variation symbol (probability variation). If the odd numbered symbol shown) is derived, the re-lottery part may not be executed.

[Relationship before and after the decision of success or failure]
Next, an example will be described in which a series of effects are divided at the timing before and after the decision of success or failure. FIG. 34 is a diagram for explaining the relationship before and after the winning / failing decision, the SP first half reach A jackpot, and the SP final reach jackpot. Here, the winning / failing determination is an effect showing a branch of whether the jackpot display result or the loss display result is obtained at the final stage of the fanning part. As shown in FIG. 34 (A), the series of effects can be divided into parts that are executed before and after the winning / failing decision, before and after the winning / failing decision, from the start of the fluctuation to the stop of the fluctuation. The part before the decision of success or failure includes the start part and the fan part. In addition, the part after the decision of winning or failing includes an epilogue part (hit, lost), a relief hit part, and a re-lottery part.

In this way, the series of effects from the start of fluctuation to the stop of fluctuation is composed of a plurality of parts. It is also possible to divide the period from the start of fluctuation to the stop of fluctuation before and after the start of SP reach (start of post-variation). In such a case, before the start of SP reach corresponds to the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern of the pre-variation, and after the start of SP reach corresponds to the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern of the post-variation.

Next, the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 20, which is the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot among the fluctuation patterns, will be described with reference to FIG. 34 (B). In the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot, the start part is from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the SP reach (the start of the later fluctuation). Then, the period from the start of SP reach (start of post-variation) to the decision of success or failure is the fanning part (SP first half reach A). In the fluctuation pattern of the reach A jackpot in the first half of the SP, the accessory does not move at the timing of winning or failing. Then, the epilogue part (per reach A in the first half of the SP) is from the decision of winning or failing to the start of the re-lottery production. Then, the re-lottery part is from the start of the re-lottery effect to the stop of fluctuation. For example, in the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot, the start part is 60 seconds, the fan part (SP first half reach A) is 20 seconds, the epilogue part (SP first half reach A) is 15 seconds, and the re-lottery part is 20 seconds. The time is set so that

Next, the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 26, which is the fluctuation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot among the fluctuation patterns, will be described with reference to FIG. 34 (C). In the fluctuation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, the start part is from the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach (start of post-variation). Then, from the start of SP reach (start of post-variation) to the development of the latter half of SP is the fanning part (reach A in the first half of SP). Then, the part from the development of the latter half of the SP to the decision of whether or not to win is the part (SP final reach). In the fluctuation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, the accessory does not move at the timing of winning or failing. Then, the epilogue part (per SP final reach) is from the decision of winning or failing to the start of the re-lottery production. Then, the re-lottery part is from the start of the re-lottery effect to the stop of fluctuation. For example, in the fluctuation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, the start part is 60 seconds, the fan part (SP first half reach A) is 20 seconds, the fan part (SP final reach) is 25 seconds, and the epilogue part (SP final reach) is 30 seconds. The time is set so that the seconds and the re-lottery part are 20 seconds.

As shown in FIGS. 34 (B) and 34 (C), the fluctuation time of the SP final reach, which has a higher degree of expectation, is longer than that of the SP first half reach A. In addition, the SP final reach, which has a higher expectation than the SP first half reach A, has a longer total fanning part time and epilogue part time. As a result, the higher the expected fluctuation, the longer the period of inciting the player, and the longer the lingering time when hit, so that the feeling of blessing can be enhanced.

<About the scenario>
Next, the correspondence relationship between the effect content executed in the series of effects and the game effect lamp 9 will be described by a scenario for each part. The scenario described here has the role of a script that summarizes the contents of each scene of a series of productions. The scenario of each part corresponds to the figure for explaining the production mode corresponding to each part described later. The contents such as the effect executed on the screen of the image display device 5 and the aspect of the game effect lamp 9 will be described in detail with reference to the drawings for explaining the effect mode described later. In the following, the correspondence between the figure for explaining the scenario of each part and the figure for explaining the effect mode described later will be described.

FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a start part. The scenario of the start part corresponding to the number 1 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the effect mode of FIGS. 55 to 61 described later. FIG. 36 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of the fanning part (SP first half reach A). The scenario of the fanning part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to the number 2 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 62 to 67, which will be described later. FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a hit epilogue part (SP first half reach A) and a lost epilogue part (SP first half reach A). The scenario of the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to the number 3 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 68 to 69 described later. The scenario of the lost epilogue part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to the number 4 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 70 to 71, which will be described later.

FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a fanning part (SP first half reach B). The scenario of the fanning part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to the number 5 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 72 to 77 described later. FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a hit epilogue part (SP first half reach B) and a lost epilogue part (SP first half reach B). The scenario of the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to the number 6 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 78 to 80 described later. The scenario of the lost epilogue part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to the number 7 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 81 to 82 described later. FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of the accessory operation part (at the time of development in the latter half of the SP). The scenario of the accessory operation part (at the time of development in the latter half of the SP) corresponding to the number 8 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIG. 83, which will be described later.

FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of the fanning part (SP second half reach A). The scenario of the fanning part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to the number 9 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 84 to 96 described later. FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a hit epilogue part (SP second half reach A) and a lost epilogue part (SP second half reach A). The scenario of the hit epilogue part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to the number 10 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 97 to 98, which will be described later. The scenario of the lost epilogue part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to the number 11 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 99 to 100 described later.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of the fanning part (SP second half reach B). The scenario of the fanning part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to the number 12 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 101 to 109 described later. FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a hit epilogue part (SP second half reach B) and a lost epilogue part (SP second half reach B). The scenario of the hit epilogue part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to the number 13 of FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 110 to 112 described later. The scenario of the lost epilogue part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to the number 14 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 113 to 114 described later.

45 and 46 are diagrams for explaining the scenario of the fanning part (SP final reach). The scenario of the fanning part (SP final reach) corresponding to the number 15 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 115 to 132, which will be described later. FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a hit epilogue part (SP final reach) and a lost epilogue part (SP final reach). The scenario of the hit epilogue part (SP final reach) corresponding to the number 16 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 133 to 136, which will be described later. The scenario of the lost epilogue part (SP final reach) corresponding to the number 17 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 137 to 138 described later. FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a part per relief. The scenario of the relief hit part corresponding to the number 18 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 139 to 140, which will be described later.

FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). The scenario of the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation) corresponding to the number 19 of FIG. 33 corresponds to the effect mode of FIGS. 141 to 156 described later. FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a re-lottery part (odd number symbol derivation after button operation) and a fanfare repertoire. The scenario of the re-lottery part (deriving an odd numbered symbol after the button operation) corresponding to the number 20 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the effect mode of FIGS. 157 to 159, which will be described later. The scenario of the fanfare repertoire corresponding to the number 22 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIG. 160, which will be described later. FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a re-lottery part (even-numbered symbols are derived after a button operation) and a fanfare repertoire. The scenario of the re-lottery part (deriving even-numbered symbols after the button operation) corresponding to the number 21 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the effect mode of FIGS. 161 to 163 described later. The scenario of the fanfare repertoire corresponding to the number 22 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIG. 164 described later.

<Mechanism of output to LED driver (lamp driver)>
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 turns on / blinks / turns off one or a plurality of lamps (LEDs) among the plurality of lamps (LEDs) included in the game effect lamp 9. The brightness data for making the LED driver (also referred to as a lamp driver) is output. In the following, lighting / blinking / extinguishing control performed on a lamp such as an LED by the effect control CPU 120 is also referred to as lamp control. The LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each of the lamps in order to turn on / blink / extinguish each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 to be controlled by the lamp based on the brightness data received from the effect control CPU 120. Each game effect lamp 9 is turned on / blinked / turned off based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

More specifically, the ROM 121 and the RAM 122 of the effect control board 12 store a luminance data table in which the luminance data for controlling each game effect lamp 9 is stored. The brightness data table includes the brightness data table for error used when an error occurs, and the brightness for SP reach used in each part during SP reach (fan part, hit epilogue part, lost epilogue part, accessory operation part, etc.). Includes a data table and a background luminance data table.

Further, the background brightness data table includes a normal background brightness data table used in a low-accuracy low-base state (normal state), a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state in which a fanfare effect is executed, and a jackpot game. The brightness data table for the jackpot background used during the round of the state, the brightness data table for the ending background used in the ending state in which the ending effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and the high accuracy and high base state (probability variation). The brightness data table for the probability variation background used in the state) is included.

Each of the above-mentioned background brightness data tables is used without overlapping, and is controlled to any of a plurality of types of gaming states such as a normal state, a fanfare state, a jackpot gaming state, an ending state, and a probability variation state. Depending on whether or not, one of the background brightness data tables is used. That is, the effect control CPU 120 uses one of the background luminance data tables for each gaming state under control, and outputs the luminance data based on the background luminance data table to the LED driver. As a result, each game effect lamp 9 is ramp-controlled according to the game state being controlled.

Further, each of the error luminance data table, the SP reach luminance data table, and the background luminance data table has a priority when used. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52, the priority is high when the luminance data table for error, the luminance data table for SP reach, and the luminance data table for background are used in this order.

For example, when the effect control CPU 120 develops into SP reach when the brightness data is output based on the normal background brightness data table in the normal state, the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach is used as the normal background. It is used preferentially over the luminance data table for SP, and the luminance data is output to the LED driver based on the luminance data table for SP reach. As a result, when the game effect lamp 9 develops into SP reach when the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a mode corresponding to the normal state based on the normal background brightness data table, a mode corresponding to SP reach based on the SP reach brightness data table. The game effect lamp 9 is controlled by the lamp. During the period when the brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the background brightness data table is not normally output to the LED driver, but usually after the SP reach is completed. When it returns to the state, the brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table is output to the LED driver, and when it becomes a big hit and the fanfare state is reached, the brightness data based on the fanfare background brightness data table is sent to the LED driver. It is output.

More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 uses a background brightness data table corresponding to the game state under control while measuring the lamp control time corresponding to the game state under control by a timer, and an LED driver. However, when it develops into SP reach or the like, the brightness data for SP reach corresponding to the SP reach is preferentially used over the brightness data table for background, and the brightness data is output to the LED driver. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 keeps updating the timer value without stopping the time counting of the lamp control using the background luminance data table. That is, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the background brightness data table even while the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled based on the SP reach brightness data table, but the background brightness Since the brightness data included in the data table has a lower priority than the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table, the brightness data included in the background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. ing. Then, after the SP reach is completed, the effect control CPU 120 starts to output the luminance data included in the background luminance data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the luminance data that has been continuously updated.

Further, for example, when an error occurs while the effect control CPU 120 is outputting brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table during SP reach, the error brightness data table corresponding to the error is SP reach. It is used preferentially over the luminance data table for error, and the luminance data is output to the LED driver based on the luminance data table for error. As a result, if an error occurs while the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to SP reach based on the SP reach brightness data table, the game effect is handled in a manner corresponding to the error based on the error brightness data table. The lamp 9 is lamp controlled. During the period when the brightness data based on the error brightness data table is output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver, but the error is cleared and the SP reach is in progress again. When the game state is returned to, the brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the SP reach under control, and uses the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach to inform the LED driver of the brightness. Data is output, but when an error occurs, the luminance data table for error corresponding to the error is preferentially used over the luminance data table for SP reach, and the luminance data is output to the LED driver. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 keeps updating the timer value without stopping the time counting of the lamp control using the SP reach luminance data table. That is, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table even while the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled based on the error brightness data table, but the SP reach Since the brightness data included in the brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data included in the error brightness data table, the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table should not be output to the LED driver. It has become. Then, after the error is cleared, the effect control CPU 120 starts to output the luminance data included in the SP reach luminance data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the luminance data that has been continuously updated.

<Lighting mode of the game effect lamp>
In the present embodiment, each game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled by the output of the luminance data to the LED driver by the effect control CPU 120 as described above. Here, the lighting mode of each game effect lamp 9 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. 53 and 54 are diagrams for explaining the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9.

In the present embodiment, the terms related to the lighting of the game effect lamps 9 such as the frame lamp, the accessory lamp 9A, the left panel lamp 9B, the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, and the electric chew lamp 9H are "off" and "". Use "abbreviated off", "on", "blinking", and the like. Further, as described above, the mode of each game effect lamp 9 by "lighting" and "blinking" is also referred to as "lighting mode".

The term "off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and the brightness becomes zero. The term "substantially extinguished" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is lit but its brightness is extremely low (for example, the brightness "1" described later).

For example, as shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the luminance data of the frame lamp is “000”, the frame lamp is “turned off”. When the brightness data (RGB data) of the frame lamp is "111", the frame lamp lights up in white with extremely low brightness. In the present embodiment, the state of the frame lamp in which the RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially extinguished" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the data of RRRR (Red, Red, Red, Red) defined as the luminance data of the accessory lamp 9A is "0000", the accessory lamp 9A is "turned off". .. Further, when the brightness data (RRRR data) of the accessory lamp 9A is "1111", the accessory lamp 9A lights up in red with extremely low brightness. In the present embodiment, the state of the accessory lamp 9A in which the RRRR data is "1111" may be referred to as "substantially extinguished" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the data of WWWWW (White, White, White, White, White) defined as the brightness data of the panel left lamp 9B is “00000”, the panel left lamp 9B is “turned off”. "do. Further, when the brightness data (WWWWWW data) of the panel left lamp 9B is "11111", the panel left lamp 9B is lit with extremely low brightness. In the present embodiment, the state of the panel left lamp 9B in which the WWWWW data is “11111” may be referred to as “substantially extinguished” for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the luminance data of the attacker lamp 9E is “000”, the attacker lamp 9E is “turned off”. Further, when the brightness data (RGB data) of the attacker lamp 9E is "111", the attacker lamp 9E is lit with extremely low brightness. In the present embodiment, the state of the attacker lamp 9E in which the RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially extinguished" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the WWW (White, White, White) data defined as the luminance data of the V attacker lamp 9F is “000”, the V attacker lamp 9F is “turned off”. Further, when the brightness data (WWW data) of the V attacker lamp 9F is "111", the V attacker lamp 9F lights up with extremely low brightness. In the present embodiment, the state of the V attacker lamp 9F in which the WWW data is “111” may be referred to as “substantially extinguished” for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the luminance data of the electric chew lamp 9H is “000”, the electric chew lamp 9H is “turned off”. Further, when the brightness data (RGB data) of the electric chew lamp 9H is "111", the electric chew lamp 9H lights up with extremely low brightness. In the present embodiment, the state of the electric chew lamp 9H in which the RGB data is “111” may be referred to as “substantially extinguished” for convenience.

The term "lighting" includes constant lighting in which the game effect lamp 9 is always lit, wave lighting in which a plurality of arranged lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are sequentially switched from off to on, and game effect lamp 9 is used. Includes moya lighting, which is dimly lit while changing the brightness. Specifically, "lighting" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the luminance data is any one of "2" to "F". The luminance data is hexadecimal data and can be specified from "0" to "F". "0" has no luminance, "1" has the lowest luminance, and "F" has the lowest luminance. Will be higher.

For example, as shown in FIG. 53 (X2), when the luminance data (RGB data) of the frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12 is "AAA", the frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12 are "lit", and especially in this case, Since the brightness is high, the frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12 are lit brightly.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X3), when the brightness data (RGB data) of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is "AAA", the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 are "lit", and in this case, the brightness is particularly high. Since it is high, the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 are lit brightly.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X4), when the brightness data (RRRR data) of the accessory lamp 9A is "AAAA", the accessory lamp 9A is "lit", and in this case, the brightness is high, so that the combination lamp 9A is used. The object lamp 9A lights up brightly.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X5), when the brightness data (WWWWWW data) of the panel left lamp 9B is "AAAAA", the panel left lamp 9B is "lit", and in this case, the brightness is particularly high, so that the panel The left lamp 9B lights up brightly.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X6), when the brightness data (RGB data) of the attacker lamp 9E is "AAA", the attacker lamp 9E is "lit", and in this case, the attacker lamp 9E is particularly high in brightness. Lights up brightly. When the brightness data (WWW data) of the V attacker lamp 9F is "AAA", the V attacker lamp 9F is "lit", and particularly in this case, since the brightness is high, the V attacker lamp 9F is lit brightly. When the brightness data (RGB data) of the electric chew lamp 9H is "AAA", the electric chew lamp 9H is "lit", and particularly in this case, since the brightness is high, the electric chew lamp 9H is turned on brightly.

The term "blinking" is a mode other than the above-mentioned "turning off" and "lighting" of the game effect lamp 9, and the brightness of each lamp is the first brightness and the second brightness higher than the first brightness. Includes aspects such as alternating between. For example, "blinking" includes repeating lighting and extinguishing or substantially extinguishing, and specifically, "blinking" means that the luminance data is any one of "2" to "F". This includes switching between the case where the luminance data is "0" or "1" with the passage of time. As described above, in the present embodiment, there is a moya lighting as a lighting mode of the lamp, but the moya lighting is a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing the brightness. , Blinking is different from each other in that the entire lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is repeatedly turned on and off or substantially turned off.

<Direction mode of pachinko game machine 1>
Next, the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 164. In the present embodiment, an effect mode when any of the fluctuation patterns of the main fluctuation numbers 9, 12, 15, 20, 23, and 26 is selected will be described.

Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 9 is selected, among the plurality of routes shown in FIG. 33, the start part (1), the fanning part of the SP first half reach A (2), and the SP first half reach A The production transitions in the order of the lost epilogue part (4), or the production transitions in the order of the start part (1), the fanning part (5) of the SP first half reach B, and the lost epilogue part (7) of the SP first half reach B. ..

When the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 12 is selected, the start part (1), the fanning part of the SP first half reach A (2), the accessory movement part (8), the fanning part of the SP second half reach A (9), SP The production transitions in the order of the loss epilogue part (11) of the second half reach A, or the start part (1), the fanning part of the SP first half reach A (2), the character movement part (8), and the fanning part of the SP second half reach B. (12), the production transitions in the order of the loss epilogue part (14) of the SP second half reach B, or the start part (1), the SP first half reach B fanning part (5), the character movement part (8), the second half of the SP Reach A's fanning part (9), SP second half reach B's lost epilogue part (14), or the start part (1), SP first half reach B's fanning part (5), character movement part ( 8), the production transitions in the order of the fanning part (12) of the SP second half reach B and the lost epilogue part (14) of the SP second half reach B.

When the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 15 is selected, the start part (1), the fanning part of the SP first half reach A (2), the accessory movement part (8), the fanning part of the SP final reach (15), and the SP final The production changes in the order of the reach loss epilogue part (17), or the start part (1), the SP first half reach B fanning part (5), the character movement part (8), and the SP final reach fanning part (15). , The production transitions in the order of the lost epilogue part (17) of the SP final reach.

When the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 20 is selected, the production transitions or starts in the order of the start part (1), the fanning part of the SP first half reach A (2), and the hit epilogue part of the SP first half reach A (3). The production changes in the order of part (1), the fanning part (5) of the SP first half reach B, and the hit epilogue part (6) of the SP first half reach B.

When the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 20 is selected, the start part (1), the fanning part of the SP first half reach A (2), the accessory movement part (8), the fanning part of the SP second half reach A (9), SP The production transitions in the order of the hit epilogue part (10) in the second half reach A, or the start part (1), the fanning part of the SP first half reach A (2), the character movement part (8), and the fanning part of the SP second half reach B. (12), the production transitions in the order of the hit epilogue part (13) of the SP second half reach B, or the start part (1), the SP first half reach B fanning part (5), the character movement part (8), the SP second half The production transitions in the order of reach A fanning part (9), SP second half reach B hit epilogue part (10), or start part (1), SP first half reach B fanning part (5), character movement part ( The production transitions in the order of 8), the fanning part (12) of the SP second half reach B, and the hit epilogue part (13) of the SP second half reach B.

When the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 26 is selected, the start part (1), the fanning part of the SP first half reach A (2), the accessory movement part (8), the fanning part of the SP final reach (15), and the SP final The production changes in the order of the reach hit epilogue part (16), or the start part (1), the SP first half reach B fanning part (5), the character movement part (8), and the SP final reach fanning part (15). , The production transitions in the order of the hit epilogue part (16) of the SP final reach.

Further, in the figure, the mode of each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 and the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are also shown. In the present embodiment, the re-lottery part is always executed after the winning epilogue, but there may be a variation pattern in which the re-lottery effect is not executed and ends in the winning epilogue part. Further, in the example of the total variation pattern, the description of the variation pattern corresponding to the relief per part is omitted, but the variation pattern corresponding to the relief per part will also be described. In the case of a hit, the fluctuation time is longer than the fluctuation pattern of the loss, so that the relief hit part that pretends to be a loss may execute the effect of the relief hit part by using the fluctuation time.

[Direction mode in the start part]
The production mode in the start part will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 61.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a1), when the variable display (variable display) starts based on one hold storage, the decorative symbol is variable in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition to displaying, the fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including an image of a character or a landscape is displayed as a background during variable display. In the present embodiment, an image in which a girl named Yumemu-chan is flying is displayed as a character that appears in the fluctuation during the normal gaming state. Yume-chan is the main character that appears as an ally character in the production performed by the pachinko machine 1.

At the start of the fluctuation, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow corresponding to the normal background. During the variable display, the effect sound is appropriately output from the speakers 8L and 8R, but the effect sound is shown only in some drawings. Further, the yellow lighting corresponding to the normal background by the game effect lamp 9 is referred to as "background yellow lighting". The effect control CPU 120 lights the game effect lamp 9 in a yellow background lighting pattern based on the normal background luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, the “lighting” referred to here includes constant lighting, wave lighting, moya lighting, and the like, and is the same in the following description.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a2), after the left and right decorative symbols are in a reach mode in which the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at the "2" symbol, the "NEXT" symbol as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped at the middle symbol. It is shown that the second variation of the pseudo variation is started by stopping the "NEXT" symbol. When the "NEXT" symbol is stopped, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Note that the "blinking" referred to here includes repeating the on and off of the lamp as described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, and is the same in the following description. After that, as shown in FIG. 55 (a3), the character "x2" indicating that the second variable display by the pseudo-continuous production is performed is displayed. When "x2" is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is white and blinks twice.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56 (a4), re-variation is performed as the second variation of the pseudo-variation. At the upper left of the screen, the characters "x2" indicating that it is the second variable display are displayed in small letters. At the time of re-variation, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a yellow background lighting pattern. Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (a5), the "NEXT" symbol as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped in the middle symbol after the reach mode is established. It is shown that the third variation of the pseudo variation is started by stopping the "NEXT" symbol. When the "NEXT" symbol is stopped, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. After that, as shown in FIG. 56 (a6), the character "x3" indicating that the third variable display by the pseudo-continuous production is performed is displayed. When "x3" is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is white and blinks twice.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57 (a7), a pseudo re-variation is performed as the third variable display. At the upper left of the screen, the characters "x3" indicating that it is the third variable display are displayed in small letters. At the time of re-variation, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a yellow background lighting pattern. After that, as shown in FIG. 57 (a8), "2" stops in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, and "2" also stops in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, which is called a reach tempai. It becomes an aspect. At the time of reach tempai, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Then, as shown in FIG. 57 (a9), the background is darkened while the middle symbol is fluctuating in the mode at the time of reach tempai, and the screen becomes dark. At the start of background darkening, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (a10), an image of the shape of the shutter (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a shutter) is displayed so as to hide the display of the decorative pattern and the character image of Yumemu-chan. The shutter layer has a higher priority than the decorative pattern layer and the Yumemu-chan character layer. High priority means that the image layer (image layer) is located on the front side. As shown in FIG. 58 (a10), the shutter is displayed so as to close from the top and bottom of the screen toward the center of the screen. Due to the image of the shutter, the image behind the shutter becomes invisible. In addition, the screen brightness gradually decreases as the shutter gradually closes. When the shutter of (a10) is closed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while gradually reducing the brightness.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (a11), the shutter is further closed and the screen brightness is lower than that at the time of (a10). When the shutter of (a11) is closed, the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 further decreases from the time of (a10), and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (a12), the shutter is further closed and the screen brightness is lower than that at the time of (a11). When the shutter of (a12) is closed, the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 further decreases from the time of (a11), and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. The screen brightness gradually decreases from (a10) to (a12) so that, for example, the relationship is (a10) 75%> (a11) 50%> (a12) 25%. Further, the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 gradually decreases from (a10) to (a12).

After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (a13), the shutter is completely closed. When the shutter of (a13) is closed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained at the same brightness as at the time of (a12). After that, the state in which the shutter is closed is maintained from FIGS. 59 (a14) to 59 (a15). In the state where the shutters of (a14) and (a15) are kept closed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained at the same brightness as that at the time of (a13).

After that, the screen brightness is gradually improved according to the situation in which the shutter is gradually opened from FIGS. 60 (a16) to 60 (a18). When the shutter of (a16) is open, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained at the same brightness as at the time of (a15). After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (a17), the shutter is further opened and the screen brightness is improved from the time point (a16). When the shutter of (a17) is open, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained at the same brightness as at the time of (a16). After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (a18), the shutter is further opened and the screen brightness is improved from that at the time of (a17). When the shutter of (a18) is open, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained at the same brightness as at the time of (a17).

The screen brightness gradually improves from (a16) to (a17) so that, for example, the relationship is (a16) 25% <(a17) 50% <(a18) 75%. Further, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in red while maintaining the brightness from (a16) to (a18). Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (a19), when the shutter is completely opened, the screen corresponding to the SP first half reach A is displayed. When the shutter of (a19) is open, the screen brightness is 100%. Further, when the shutter of (a19) is open, the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. It should be noted that it may be "substantially extinguished" instead of "extinguished". Further, if it is decided to shift to the SP first half reach B when the shutter is released, the screen corresponding to the SP first half reach B will be displayed. When the SP first half reach A is executed from the state of (a19), the process shifts to the production of FIG. 62 (b1), and when the SP first half reach B is executed from the state of (a19), FIG. 72 ( Shift to the production of e1).

[Direction mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach A)]
The production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 67. The fanning part (SP first half reach A) is a part where the story of Yume-chan, who is a ally character, chasing Baku Chu, who is an enemy character, is developed. In the fanning part (SP first half reach A), a story is developed that fuels that if Yumemu-chan can catch Baku Chu, it will be a big hit, and if Yumemu-chan can not catch Baku Chu, it will be a loss.

As shown in FIG. 62 (b1), in the fanning part where the SP first half reach A is executed, the title corresponding to the SP first half reach A such as "Catch the Baku Chu!" Is displayed. The title display shows the contents of the production of the first half of the SP to be executed from now on. In the state where the title display of (b1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is off. After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (b2), the title display is erased, and an image showing how an enemy character called Baku Chu lands is displayed. In the state where the title display of (b2) is turned off, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Further, at the timing when the image related to the title display of (b2) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the reach A in the first half of the SP is output. After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (b3), an image in which the enemy character Baku Chu lands in the center of the screen and poses is displayed. When the enemy character of (b3) appears, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (b4), an image of the confrontation between the ally character Yumemu-chan and the enemy character Baku Chu facing each other is displayed in the center of the screen. In the confrontation state of (b4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green on the left side where Yumemu-chan is displayed, corresponding to Yumemu-chan's character. Further, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in red on the right side where the Baku Chu is displayed, corresponding to the character of the Baku Chu. After that, as shown in (b5), the subtitle display "I found" corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line "I found" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (b5), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side blinks in green in response to Yume-chan's speech. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of Baku Chu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (b6), the subtitle display "found" corresponding to the line "found" of Baku Chu is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (b6), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green corresponding to Yumemu-chan's character. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in red in response to the explosion chew emitting a line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (b7), Yume-chan, who is a ally character, is enlarged and displayed on the screen. In addition, as shown in (b7), the subtitle display "Catch me!" Corresponding to Yume-chan's line "Catch me!" Is displayed on the dream up screen. Further, in the state of dream up in (b7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan emitting a line. After that, as shown in (b8), an image of Yumemu-chan chasing Baku Chu is displayed. Further, in the state of chasing the dream of (b8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan emitting the line "To". After that, as shown in (b9), an image of Baku Chu escaping from Yumemu-chan is displayed. Further, in the state of (b9) Baku Chu escaping, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the Baku Chu emitting the line "Hehehe".

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (b10), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the state of the room background of (b10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (b11), an image of Yume-chan on the left side of the screen chasing the Baku Chu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (b11), the subtitle display "Wait ~" corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line "Wait ~" is displayed on the Yumemu chase screen. In addition, Yumemu-chan's footsteps "Zazzazza" as a physical sound (hereinafter referred to as "physical sound") are output according to Yumemu-chan's image. In addition, the footsteps of Baku Chu as a physical sound "Tata Tata" are output according to the image of Baku Chu. Further, in the state of chasing Yumemu in (b11), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side blinks in green in response to Yumemu-chan emitting a line. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of Baku Chu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (b12), images of Yume-chan on the left side of the screen chasing the Baku Chu on the right side of the screen are continuously displayed. As shown in (b11), Yumemu-chan's footsteps "Zazza-zazza" as physical sound are output according to the image of Yume-chan. In addition, the footsteps of Baku Chu as a physical sound "Tata Tata" are output according to the image of Baku Chu. Further, in the state of chasing the dream of (b12), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of Baku Chu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (b13), the back view of Baku Chu is displayed, and a part of Yumemu-chan's hand is displayed, so that the screen is such that Baku Chu escapes from Yumemu-chan. As shown in (b13), the subtitle display "Catch Monka!" Corresponding to the Baku Chu line "Catch Monka!" Is displayed on the Baku Chu Escape screen. In addition, Yumemu-chan's footsteps "Zazza-zazza" are output as physical sounds according to Yume-chan's video. In addition, the footsteps of Baku Chu as a physical sound "Tata Tata" are output according to the image of Baku Chu. Further, in the state of (b13) in which the Baku Chu escapes, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the Baku Chu emitting a line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (b14), an image is displayed in which the Baku Chu on the right side of the screen jumps to escape from Yumemu-chan on the left side of the screen. As shown in (b14), the jump sound "Pyon" of the Baku Chu is output as a pseudo sound (hereinafter referred to as an onomatopoeia) according to the image of the Baku Chu jump. Further, in the state of the explosion chew jump of (b14), the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white corresponding to the jump of the explosion chew. After that, as shown in (b15), the enemy character Baku Chu is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (b15), on the screen of the explosion chew-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the character of the explosion chew.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (b16), Yume-chan, who is a ally character, is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (b16), on the dream-up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. After that, as shown in (b17), an image of Yumemu-chan jumping and jumping on the explosion chew is displayed. As shown in (b17), Yumemu-chan's line "Toriya!" Is output on the Yumemu Jump screen. Further, in the state of the dream jump of (b17), the BGM is turned off, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the jump of Yume-chan.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (b18), the screen in the scene of the winning / failing determination in which Yume-chan is enlarged and displayed is displayed. Further, in the scene before the winning / failing determination in (b18), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the white lighting so as to correspond to the winning / failing determination scene. It is easy to understand that it is a branching scene of the winning / failing decision because the scene before the winning / failing decision is muted. If it is determined that the jackpot will be a big hit in the reach A of the first half of the SP from the state of (b18), the production shifts to the production of (c1). If it is determined that the state of (b18) will be lost in the reach A of the first half of the SP, the production shifts to the production of (d1). If it is decided to develop from the state of (b18) to the SP reach in the latter half, the production shifts to the production of (h1).

[Direction mode in the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach A)]
The production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 69. The hit epilogue part (SP first half reach A) is a part that informs you that Yumemu-chan will be controlled into a big hit game state as the story of catching Baku Chu is developed.

As shown in FIG. 68 (c1), in the hit epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, an image in which Yumemu-chan catches the tail of Baku Chu by hand is displayed. In addition, in the state of catching Baku Chu in (c1), the sound "Bashi!" That Yume-chan catches as a physical sound is output according to the image of Yume-chan catching Baku Chu. Further, in the state of catching the Baku Chu in (c1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a white color brighter than the white color in (tb18) indicating the lighting mode of (b18) in response to catching the Baku Chu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (c2), an image of Yume-chan who caught the Baku Chu is buoyed is displayed. As shown in (c2), in the state of catching the Baku Chu, the subtitle display "Rakusho!" Corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line "Rakusho!" Is displayed. Further, in the state of (c2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in a rainbow color to indicate that the jackpot has been achieved. Hereinafter, the smooth lighting of the rainbow color is also referred to as rainbow lighting (smooth). Further, in the state of (c2), the BGM for hitting is output. After that, as shown in (c3), the image of Yume-chan who caught the Baku Chu is buoy-signed is displayed as a graphic novel-style still image. In the state of the still image of (c3), the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow-lit (smooth).

After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (c4), the effect of displaying the decorative symbol combination “222” indicating the jackpot display result on the screen in a large size is executed. As shown in (c4), the symbol of "222" is enlarged and the symbol is emphasized by the concentrated line in the symbol output. In the state of the symbol (c4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in bright white. After that, as shown in (c5), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than the state of (c4). In the state of the symbol (c5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (c6), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced from the state of (c5) and displayed in a normal size. In the state of the two symbols (normal size) of (c6), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Direction mode in Lost Epilogue Part (SP First Half Reach A)]
The production mode in the lost epilogue part (SP first half reach A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 71. The Lost Epilogue Part (SP First Half Reach A) is a part that informs you that Yumemu-chan will not be controlled by the jackpot game state as the story unfolds in which Baku Chu was not caught.

As shown in FIG. 70 (d1), in the lost epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, an image in which Yumemu-chan was not caught by Baku Chu is displayed. In addition, in the state where the Baku Chu was not caught in (d1), the sound "Suka" that Yume-chan was not caught as an onomatopoeia is output according to the image in which Yume-chan was not caught. Further, in the state where the Baku Chu was not caught in (d1), the game effect lamp 9 was darker than the white color in (tb18) indicating the lighting mode of (b18) in response to the fact that the Baku Chu was not caught. Lights in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (d2), an image is displayed in which Yume-chan, who could not catch Baku Chu, kneels down and is disappointed, and Baku Chu is pleased. As shown in (d2), in the unfortunate state, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a white color darker than the white color in (td1) indicating the lighting mode of (d1). After that, as shown in (d3), the screen is dimmed. In the state of screen darkening in (d3), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (d4), the symbol of "232", which is a combination of lost symbols, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen of (d4) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights in the same background yellow lighting pattern as in (ta1) indicating the lighting mode of (a1).

[Direction mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach B)]
The production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach B) will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 77. The fanning part (SP first half reach B) is a part where the story of a hockey confrontation between a friend character Yumemu-chan and an enemy character Boingo is developed. In the fanning part (SP first half reach B), a story is developed that encourages Yumemu-chan to win a big hit if she wins Boingo, and Yumemu-chan loses if she loses to Boingo.

As shown in FIG. 72 (e1), in the fanning part where the SP first half reach B is executed, the title corresponding to the SP first half reach B with the "billy hockey confrontation" is displayed. The title display shows the contents of the production of the first half of the SP to be executed from now on. In the state where the title display of (e1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is off. After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (e2), the screen is cracked and an image in which the title display is erased is displayed. The screen of (e2) is cracked. When the title display disappears, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green. After that, as shown in (e3), an image of the appearance of the opponent character in which the ally character Yumemu-chan and the enemy character Boingo appear on the screen is displayed. In the state where the opponent character of (e3) appears, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (e4), an image of a confrontation between Yume-chan, who is a ally character on the left front of the screen, and Boingo, who is an enemy character on the right back of the screen, is displayed. In the confrontation state of (e4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green on the left side where Yumemu-chan is displayed, corresponding to Yumemu-chan's character. Further, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in cream color on the right side where the boingo is displayed, corresponding to the boingo character. Further, at the timing when the title display of (e4) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the reach B in the first half of the SP is output. After that, as shown in (e5), the subtitle display "Because I can't lose" corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line "Because I can't lose" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (e5), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side blinks in green in response to Yume-chan's speech. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in cream color corresponding to the character of Boingo.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (e6), the subtitle display "Kakekoi" corresponding to Boingo's line "Kakekoi" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (e6), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green corresponding to Yumemu-chan's character. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in cream color in response to Boingo emitting a line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (e7), an image of Yume-chan, who is a ally character, hitting the puck is displayed. In addition, as shown in (e7), Yume-chan's line "ya-" is output on the screen that is Yume-chan's turn. Further, in the state of the dream turn of (e7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan emitting a line. After that, as shown in (e8), the pack struck by Yumemu-chan is enlarged and displayed. Further, in the state of the pack display of (e8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white corresponding to the physical sound "shoe" in which the pack operates. After that, as shown in (e9), an image of Boingo preventing Yumemu-chan's pack is displayed. Further, in the state of preventing boingo in (e9), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in cream color corresponding to the character of boingo.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (e10), an image of the plucked puck flying in the air is displayed. In the state of dancing in the puck of (e10), the physical sound "Shururu" that the puck rotates is output. Further, in the state of (e10), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yumemu-chan. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in cream color corresponding to the character of Boingo. After that, as shown in (e11), an image in which the enemy character Boingo hits the puck is displayed. Further, as shown in (e11), the line of Boingo "Good job" is output on the screen which is the turn of Boingo. Further, in the state of the boingo turn (e11), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in cream color in response to the boingo emitting a line. After that, as shown in (e12), the puck struck by Boingo is enlarged and displayed. Further, in the state of the pack display of (e12), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the physical sound "shoe" in which the pack operates.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76 (e13), Yumemu-chan is damaged by receiving the pack directly, and an image in which electricity runs and the bones are transparent is displayed. As shown in (e13), Yumemu-chan's line "Wow" is output in the state of Yumemu damage. Further, in the state of Yumemu damage in (e13), the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white in response to Yumemu-chan being damaged. After that, as shown in (e14), Yumemu-chan is damaged, electricity runs, and an image through which the bones are transparent is displayed. Further, in the state of Yumemu damage in (e14), the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white in response to Yumemu-chan being damaged. After that, as shown in (e15), an image in which Yumemu-chan is damaged, electricity runs and the bones are transparent is displayed with the same contents as in (e13). Further, in the state of dream damage in (e15), the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white in response to the damage to Yume-chan.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77 (e16), an image in which Yumemu-chan is damaged, electricity runs and the bones are transparent is displayed with the same contents as in (e14). Further, in the dream damage state of (e16), the BGM is turned off, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white in response to the damage to Yume-chan. After that, as shown in (e17), it becomes a scene in the scene before the decision of whether or not the result is displayed in which Yumemu-chan is damaged. In the scene before the winning / failing determination of (e17), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the white lighting so as to correspond to the scene before the winning / failing determination. It is easy to understand that it is a branching scene of the winning / failing decision because the scene before the winning / failing decision is muted. If it is determined that the jackpot will be a big hit in the reach B of the first half of the SP from the state of (e17), the production shifts to the production of (f1). If it is determined that the state of (e17) will be lost in the reach B of the first half of the SP, the production shifts to the production of (g1). If it is decided to develop from the state of (e17) to the SP reach in the latter half, the production shifts to the production of (h1).

[Direction mode in the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach B)]
The production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach B) will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80. The hit epilogue part (SP first half reach B) is a part that informs you that the story of Yumemu-chan's victory over Boingo will be developed and controlled into a big hit game state.

As shown in FIG. 78 (f1), in the hit epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, an image of Yumemu-chan hitting the puck is displayed. In addition, in the state of Yumemu-chan attacking by hitting the pack back in (f1), the subtitle display "Go-!" Corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line "Go-!" Is displayed. Further, in the state of the dream attack of (f1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a white color brighter than the white color of (te17) indicating the lighting mode of (e17) in response to the attack by Yumemu-chan. do.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78 (f2), an image in which Boingo attacked by Yumemu-chan is blown away is displayed. As shown in (f2), in the state of being attacked by Boingo, the subtitle display "Wow!" Corresponding to the line "Wow!" Of Boingo is displayed. Further, in the state of (f2), the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow-lit (smooth) indicating that it has become a big hit. Further, in the state of (f2), the BGM for hitting is output. After that, as shown in (f3), the image of Yumemu-chan's guts pose and Boingo's fallen Yumemu victory is displayed. As shown in (f3), in the state of Yumemu victory, the subtitle display "Easy victory!" Corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line "Easy victory!" Is displayed. Further, in the state of (f3), the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow-lit (smooth).

After that, as shown in (f4), the image of Yumemu Victory is displayed as a graphic novel-style still image. In the state of the still image of (f4), the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow-lit (smooth). After that, as shown in FIG. 79 (f5), the effect of displaying the decorative symbol combination “222” indicating the jackpot display result on the screen in a large size is executed. As shown in (f5), the symbol of "222" is enlarged and the symbol is emphasized by the concentrated line in the symbol output. In the state of the symbol (f5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (f6), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than the state of (f5). In the state of displaying the pattern of (f6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in FIG. 80 (f7), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced from the state of (f6) and displayed in a normal size. In the state of the two symbols (normal size) of (f7), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Direction mode in the lost epilogue part (SP first half reach B)]
The production mode in the lost epilogue part (SP first half reach B) will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 82. The Lost Epilogue Part (SP First Half Reach B) is a part that informs you that the story of Yumemu-chan's defeat to Boingo will be unfolded and will not be controlled by the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 81 (g1), in the lost epilogue part of the reach B in the first half of the SP, an image in which Yume-chan, who was attacked by Boingo, is blown away is displayed. As shown in (g1), in the state of being blown by a dream, the game effect lamp 9 is darker than the white color of (te17) indicating the lighting mode of (e17) in response to the fact that Yume-chan is skipped. Lights in white. After that, as shown in (g2), an image in which Yumemu-chan blows away from the state of (g1) is displayed. As shown in (g2), in the state of being blown by a dream, the game effect lamp 9 is darker than the white color of (te17) indicating the lighting mode of (e17) in response to the fact that Yume-chan is skipped. Lights in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 81 (g3), an image of Yume-chan, who was defeated by Boingo, kneeling down and laughing at Boingo is displayed. As shown in (g3), in the unfortunate state, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a white color darker than the white color of (tg1) and (tg2) indicating the lighting modes of (g1) and (g2). Then, as shown in FIG. 82 (g4), the screen is dimmed. In the state of the screen darkening of (g4), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. After that, as shown in FIG. 82 (g5), the symbol of "232", which is a combination of lost symbols, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen of (g5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights in the same background yellow lighting pattern as in (ta1) indicating the lighting mode of (a1).

[Direction mode in the character movement part (during the latter half of development)]
With reference to FIG. 83, an effect mode in the accessory movement part (at the time of development in the latter half) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 83 (h1), when developing from the SP first half reach A or the SP first half reach B to the SP reach of any one of the SP second half reach A, the SP second half reach B, and the SP strongest reach, the accessory The movable body 32 operates as. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the accessory falls while tilting diagonally from the upper part of the screen toward the front side of the screen. As shown in (h1), a radial effect image is displayed on the accessory on the screen at the start of the fall of the accessory. Due to the effect image, Yumemu-chan's character and the reduced "2" decorative pattern cannot be seen. Further, in the state of (h1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red as the accessory falls.

After that, in the state of (h2), the accessory further drops from the state of (h1). In the state of (h2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red as the accessory falls. After that, in the state of (h3), the character is further arranged so that the character "P" among the characters of the character is located up to the position where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" is displayed. Fall. In the state of (h3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. The effect of raising the accessory from the state of (h3) is executed. If it is decided to develop into the reach A in the latter half of the SP after the character has risen, the production shifts to (i1). If it is decided to develop into the reach B in the latter half of the SP after the character rises, the production shifts to (n1). If it has been decided that the SP will reach the final reach after the character has risen, the production will shift to (r1).

[Direction mode in the fanning part (SP second half reach A)]
The production mode in the fanning part (SP second half reach A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 96. The fanning part (SP second half reach A) is a part where the story of Yume-chan and Jam-chan, who are ally characters, chasing Baku Chu, who is an enemy character, is developed. In the fanning part (SP second half reach A), a story is developed that fuels a big hit if Yumemu and Jam can catch the Baku Chu, and if Yumemu and Jam can not catch the Baku Chu, it will be a loss. NS.

As shown in FIG. 84 (i1), in the fanning part where the SP second half reach A is executed, the title corresponding to the SP second half reach A such as "Catch the Baku Chu!" Is displayed. The title display shows the content of the SP second half reach production that will be executed from now on. In the state where the title display of (i1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. After that, as shown in (i2), an image of a confrontation between the friendly characters Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan (the character on the far left) and the enemy character Baku Chu facing each other is displayed in the center of the screen. In the confrontation state of (i2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white on the left side where Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan are displayed corresponding to the two characters. Further, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in red on the right side where the Baku Chu is displayed, corresponding to the character of the Baku Chu. Further, at the timing when the image related to the title display of (i2) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the SP latter half reach A is output. After that, as shown in (i3), the subtitle display "I will not let you escape!" Corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line "I will not let you escape!" Is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (i3), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side blinks in green in response to Yume-chan's speech. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of Baku Chu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 85 (i4), the subtitle display "I will help you!" Corresponding to Jam-chan's line "I will help you!" Is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (i4), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side blinks in purple in response to Jam's speech. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of Baku Chu. After that, as shown in (i5), the subtitle display "I'll run away again!" Corresponding to the line "I'll run away again!" Of Baku Chu is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (i5), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in white corresponding to the two characters Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in red in response to the explosion chew emitting a line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 85 (i6), when Jam-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "Catch me!" Corresponding to Jam-chan's line "I'll catch you!" Is displayed. In the jam display state of (i6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to the jam being emitting a line. After that, as shown in FIG. 86 (i7), when Yumemu-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "Gozo" corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line "Go" is displayed. In the state of the dream display of (i7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan emitting a line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86 (i8), when the Baku Chu is displayed, the subtitle display “Kake Koi!” Corresponding to the line “Kake Koi!” Of the Baku Chu is displayed. In the state of the explosion chew display of (i8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to the explosion chew emitting a line. After that, as shown in (i9), when the image of Jam chasing Baku Chu is displayed, the subtitle display "Wait!" Corresponding to Jam's line "Wait!" Is displayed. In the state of chasing the jam in (i9), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to the fact that the jam is emitting a line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (i10), when the image of Baku Chu escaping from Jam-chan is displayed, the footstep sound of Baku Chu is output as a physical sound. Further, in the state of (i10) Baku Chu escaping, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the Baku Chu escaping. After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (i11), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the state of the room background of (i11), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (i12), an image of Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing the Baku Chu on the right side of the screen is displayed. Further, as shown in (i12), the subtitle display "Wait!" Corresponding to Jam's line "Wait!" Is displayed on the jam chasing screen. As shown in (i12), Jam-chan's footstep sound "Zazz-Zazza" is output as a physical sound according to Jam-chan's image. In addition, the footsteps of Baku Chu as a physical sound "Tata Tata" are output according to the image of Baku Chu. Further, in the state of chasing the jam in (i12), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side blinks in purple in response to the fact that the jam is emitting a line. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of Baku Chu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (i13), an image in which Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chases the Baku Chu on the right side of the screen is continuously displayed. As shown in (i13), Jam-chan's footstep sound "Zazza-Za-Za" is output as a physical sound according to the image of Jam-chan. In addition, the footsteps of Baku Chu as a physical sound "Tata Tata" are output according to the image of Baku Chu. Further, in the jam chasing state of (i13), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in purple corresponding to the character of Jam. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of Baku Chu. After that, as shown in (i14), an image of Jam jumping and jumping on the explosion chew is displayed. As shown in (i14), in the jam jump state, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the jam being jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (i15), an image is displayed in which the Baku Chu on the right side of the screen jumps to escape from Jam on the left side of the screen. As shown in (i15), the jump sound "Pyon" of the explosion chew as an onomatopoeia is output according to the image of the jump of the explosion chew. Further, in the state of the explosion chew jump of (i15), the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white corresponding to the jumping of the explosion chew. After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (i16), an image in which Jam-chan was not caught by Baku Chu is displayed. In addition, in the state where the Baku Chu is not caught in (i16), the subtitle display "I can't catch" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "I can't catch" is displayed. In addition, the sound "Suka" that Jam-chan could not catch as an onomatopoeia is output according to the image that Jam-chan could not catch Baku Chu. Further, in the state (i16) in which the Baku Chu is not caught, the game effect lamp 9 on the left side blinks in purple in response to Jam-chan's speech. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of Baku Chu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (i17), when Yumemu-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "Next is me!" Corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line "Next is me!" Is displayed. .. In the state of the dream display of (i17), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan emitting a line. After that, as shown in (i18), an image of Yumemu-chan chasing Baku Chu is displayed. In the state of chasing the explosion chew of (i18), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green corresponding to the operation of Yumemu-chan.

After that, as shown in FIG. 90 (i19), when the image of Baku Chu escaping from Yumemu-chan is displayed, the footstep sound of Baku Chu is output as a physical sound. Further, in the state of (i19) Baku Chu escaping, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the Baku Chu escaping. After that, as shown in FIG. 90 (i20), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the state of the room background of (i20), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (i21), an image of Yume-chan on the left side of the screen chasing the Baku Chu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i21), the subtitle display "Wait!" Corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line "Wait!" Is displayed on the Yumemu chase screen. Further, as shown in (i21), the footsteps of Yumemu-chan, "Zazza-zazza", are output as physical sounds according to the image of Yume-chan. In addition, the footsteps of Baku Chu as a physical sound "Tata Tata" are output according to the image of Baku Chu. Further, in the state of chasing the dream of (i21), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side blinks in green in response to Yume-chan emitting a line. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of Baku Chu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (i22), images of Yume-chan on the left side of the screen chasing the Baku Chu on the right side of the screen are continuously displayed. As shown in (i22), Yumemu-chan's footsteps "Zazza-zazza" as physical sound are output according to the image of Yume-chan. In addition, the footsteps of Baku Chu as a physical sound "Tata Tata" are output according to the image of Baku Chu. Further, in the state of chasing the dream of (i22), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of Baku Chu. After that, as shown in (i23), an image of Yumemu-chan jumping and jumping on the explosion chew is displayed. As shown in (i23), in the state of the dream jump, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the jump of Yume-chan.

After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (i24), an image is displayed in which the explosion chew on the right side of the screen jumps to escape from Jam on the left side of the screen. As shown in (i24), the jump sound "Pyon" of the explosion chew as an onomatopoeia is output according to the image of the jump of the explosion chew. Further, in the state of the explosion chew jump of (i24), the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white corresponding to the jumping of the explosion chew. After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (i25), an image in which Yumemu-chan was not caught by Baku Chu is displayed. In addition, in the state where the Baku Chu is not caught in (i25), the subtitle display "I can't catch" corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line "I can't catch" is displayed. In addition, the sound "Suka" that Yumemu-chan could not catch as an onomatopoeia is output according to the image that Yumemu-chan could not catch Baku Chu. In addition, in the state (i25) where the Baku Chu is not caught, the game effect lamp 9 on the left side blinks in green in response to Yume-chan's speech. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of Baku Chu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (i26), two allies, Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan, are displayed. As shown in (i26), when two allies are displayed, the subtitle display "Next is two people!" Corresponding to the dialogue of the two allies "Next is two people!" Is displayed. In the state of displaying two allies in (i26), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side blinks in purple in response to Jam-chan emitting a line. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in green in response to Yume-chan's speech. After that, as shown in (i27), Yume-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, in the dream-up state of (i27), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (i28), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the left side of the screen, and Yume-chan is enlarged and displayed on the right side of the screen. As shown in (i28), in the dream and jam-up state, the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's character. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in green corresponding to Yumemu-chan's character. After that, as shown in (i29), an image is displayed in which Yume-chan and Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chase after the Baku Chu on the right side of the screen. As shown in (i29), in the state of chasing by two people, the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in white corresponding to the two characters. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of Baku Chu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 30 (i30), images of Yume-chan and Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing the Baku Chu on the right side of the screen are continuously displayed. In (i30), an image in which two people are closer to the explosion chew than in (i29) is displayed. As shown in (i30), the footsteps of Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan, "Zazza-zazza", are output as physical sounds according to the images of Yume-chan and Jam-chan. In addition, the footsteps of Baku Chu as a physical sound "Tata Tata" are output according to the image of Baku Chu. Further, in the state of chasing by two people (i30), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in white corresponding to the two characters. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of Baku Chu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (i31), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (i31), on the jam-up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to the character of Jam-chan. After that, as shown in (i32), an image of Jam jumping and jumping on the explosion chew is displayed. As shown in (i32), Jam-chan's line "Wow" is output on the jam jump screen. Further, in the jam jump state of (i32), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple corresponding to the jump of Jam.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (i33), Yume-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (i33), on the dream-up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. After that, as shown in FIG. 95 (i34), an image of Yumemu-chan jumping and jumping on the explosion chew is displayed. As shown in (i35), Yumemu-chan's line "Wow" is output on the Yumemu Jump screen. Further, in the state of the dream jump of (i34), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green corresponding to the jump of Yume-chan. After that, as shown in (i35), an image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan jumping and jumping on the explosion chew is displayed. As shown in (i35), in the state of jumping by two people, the subtitle display "Wait!" Corresponding to the dialogue "Wait!" Of the two allies is displayed. In the state of the two-person jump of (i35), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the two people jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 95 (i36), an image in which Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan are jumping is displayed as a still image 1. In the state of the two-person jump of (i36), the BGM is turned off, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white corresponding to the two people jumping. After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (i37), an image in which Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan are jumping is displayed as a still image 2. In the state of the two-person jump of (i37), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white corresponding to the two people jumping. After that, as shown in (i38), an image in which Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan are jumping is displayed as a still image 3. In the state of the two-person jump of (i38), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white corresponding to the two people jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (i39), the image in which Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan are jumping is displayed as a still image 4, which is a scene before the decision is made. In the scene before the winning / failing determination of (i39), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the white lighting so as to correspond to the scene before the winning / failing determination. It is easy to understand that it is a branching scene of the winning / failing decision because the scene before the winning / failing decision is muted. If it is decided that the jackpot will be a big hit in the reach A in the latter half of the SP from the state of (i39), the production shifts to the production of (j1). If it is decided that the state of (i39) will be lost in the reach A in the latter half of the SP, or that it will be a relief hit, the production shifts to the production of (k1).

[Direction mode in the hit epilogue part (SP second half reach A)]
The production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP second half reach A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 98. The hit epilogue part (SP second half reach A) is a part that informs you that the story of catching Baku Chu with Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan will be developed and controlled to the big hit game state.

As shown in FIG. 97 (j1), in the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach A, an image in which Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan catch the tail of Baku Chu by hand is displayed. Also, in the state of catching the Baku Chu in (j1), the sound "Bashi!" That Yume-chan and Jam-chan catch as physical sounds is output according to the image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan catching the Baku Chu. Further, in the state of catching the explosive chew of (j1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a white color brighter than the white color of (ti39) indicating the lighting mode of (i39) in response to catching the explosive chew.

After that, as shown in FIG. 97 (j2), Yume-chan who caught the Baku Chu signs a buoy, and an image of Jam on the Baku Chu is displayed. As shown in (j2), in the state of catching Baku Chu, the subtitle display "I'm sorry!" Corresponding to Jam-chan's line "I'm sorry!" Is displayed. Further, in the state of (j2), the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow-lit (smooth) indicating that it has become a big hit. Further, in the state of (j2), the BGM for hitting is output. After that, as shown in (j3), Yume-chan who caught the Baku Chu signs a buoy, and the image of Jam on the Baku Chu is displayed as a graphic novel-style still image. In the state of the still image of (j3), the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow-lit (smooth).

After that, as shown in FIG. 98 (j4), the effect of displaying the decorative symbol combination “222” indicating the jackpot display result on the screen in a large size is executed. As shown in (j4), the symbol of "222" is enlarged and the symbol is emphasized by the concentrated line in the symbol output. In the state of the symbol (j4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (j5), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than the state of (j4). In the state of the symbol (j5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (j6), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced from the state of (j5) and displayed in a normal size. In the state of the two symbols (normal size) of (j6), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Direction mode in Lost Epilogue Part (SP Second Half Reach A)]
The production mode in the lost epilogue part (SP second half reach A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 100. The Lost Epilogue Part (SP Second Half Reach A) is a part in which Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan are informed that they will not be controlled by the jackpot game state as the story unfolds in which Baku Chu was not caught.

As shown in FIG. 99 (k1), in the lost epilogue part of the SP second half reach A, an image in which Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan could not catch the Baku Chu is displayed. In addition, in the state where the Baku Chu is not caught in (k1), the sound "Suka" that was not caught as an onomatopoeia is output according to the image in which Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan were not able to catch the Baku Chu. Further, in the state where the Baku Chu was not caught in (k1), the game effect lamp 9 was darker than the white color in (ti39) showing the lighting mode of (i39) in response to the fact that the Baku Chu was not caught. Lights in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99 (k2), the explosion chew is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (k2), the subtitle display "Usshisshi!" Corresponding to the line "Ussushi!" Of the Baku Chu is displayed on the Baku Chu-up screen. In the state of the explosion chew-up of (k2), the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a white color darker than the white color of (tk1) indicating the lighting mode of (k1). After that, as shown in (k3), an image of Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan, who couldn't catch the Baku Chu, kneels down and is disappointed. As shown in (k3), in the unfortunate state, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a white color darker than the white color of (tk1) indicating the lighting mode of (k1). After that, as shown in FIG. 100 (k4), the screen is darkened. In the state of the screen darkening of (k4), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. After that, as shown in (k5), the symbol of "232", which is a combination of lost symbols, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen of (k5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights in the same background yellow lighting pattern as in (ta1) indicating the lighting mode of (a1). If it has been decided that the relief will be achieved from the state of (k5), the production shifts to the production of (v1).

[Direction mode in the fanning part (SP second half reach B)]
The production mode in the fanning part (SP second half reach B) will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 109. The fanning part (SP second half reach B) is a part where the story of the confrontation between the friendly characters Jam and Nana and the enemy character Crab robot is developed. In the fanning part (SP second half reach B), a story is developed in which Jam and Nana are big hits if the crab robot beats Boingo, and Jam and Nana are lost if they lose to the crab robot.

As shown in FIG. 101 (n1), in the fanning part where the SP second half reach B is executed, the title corresponding to the SP second half reach B with "Gekisei Robo Battle" is displayed. The title display shows the contents of the production of the latter half of the SP to be executed from now on. Below the title display, the jackpot expectation for this reach is indicated by the number of stars. In addition, the display showing the jackpot expectation degree may be displayed by another SP reach. In the state where the title display of (n1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. After that, as shown in (n2), an image of a confrontation between the friendly characters Jam and Nana (the leftmost character) and the enemy character crab robot is displayed. As shown in (n2), the subtitle display "I will not lose!" Corresponding to the dialogue "I will not lose!" Of the two allies is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (n2), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side blinks in white in response to two people emitting lines. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of the crab. Further, at the timing when the image related to the title display of (n2) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the reach B in the latter half of the SP is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 101 (n3), an image of a crab attack in which a crab, which is an enemy character, shoots a beam is displayed. Further, in the state of the crab attack of (n3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white in response to the crab attack. After that, as shown in FIG. 102 (n4), an image of Jam and Nana escaping from the crab beam is displayed. As shown in (n4), the subtitle display "Kya!" Corresponding to the dialogue "Kya!" Of the two allies is displayed on the screen where the two are running away. In the state of two people escaping in (n4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the action of two people running and escaping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 102 (n5), an image is displayed in which Jam and Nana escape into a rocky depression in order to escape from the crab beam. In the state of the two-person jump of (n5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (n6), an image of the beam passing over the rocky area is displayed. In the state where the beam of (n6) is passing, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (n7), an image in which Jam and Nana are relieved in the shadow of the rocky area is displayed. As shown in (n7), the subtitle display "hahaa" corresponding to the jam line "hahaa" is displayed on the screen where the two people are relieved. In the confrontation state of (n7), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side blinks in purple in response to Jam-chan emitting a line. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in pink corresponding to Nana-chan's character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (n8), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (n8), the subtitle display "This number!" Corresponding to Jam-chan's line "This number!" Is displayed on the jam-up screen. Further, in the jam-up state of (n8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to the fact that Jam-chan is emitting a line. After that, as shown in (n9), an image of Jam attacking the crab by the technique called Delta Break is displayed. Further, in the state of the jam attack of (n9), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to the fact that Jam is emitting the line "Delta Break".

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (n10), an image in which the crab is damaged by the attack of Jam is displayed. Further, in the state of the crab attack of (n10), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the crab emitting the line "Gununu". After that, as shown in (n11), an image of a confrontation between Jam-chan and Nana-chan and a crab is displayed. In the confrontation state of (n11), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in white corresponding to the two characters. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of the crab. After that, as shown in (n12), an image of a crab attack in which a crab, which is an enemy character, shoots a beam is displayed. Further, in the state of the crab attack of (n12), the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white in response to the crab attack.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (n13), an image of Jam and Nana escaping from the crab beam is displayed. As shown in (n13), the subtitle display "Kya!" Corresponding to the dialogue "Kya!" Of the two allies is displayed on the screen where the two are running away. In the state of two people escaping in (n13), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the action of two people running and escaping. After that, as shown in (n14), an image in which the beam approaches Jam-chan and Nana-chan is displayed. In the state of the beam of (n14), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (n15), an image is displayed in which Jam and Nana are damaged by the crab beam. Further, in the state where the two people (n15) are damaged, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the damage to the two people.

After that, as shown in FIG. 106 (n16), an image in which the damaged Jam and Nana stand up is displayed. As shown in (n16), the subtitle display "From now on!" Corresponding to the dialogue "From now on!" Of the two allies is displayed on the screen where the two people stand up. In the state where the two people stand up in (n16), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's character. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in pink corresponding to Nana-chan's character. After that, as shown in (n17), Nana is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, in the state of (n17) Nana-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink corresponding to Nana-chan's character. After that, as shown in (n18), the screen where Nana prays is displayed. Nana's prayer action is performed as a production that confuses the enemy. Further, in the state of Nana prayer (n18), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in pink in response to the action of praying Nana-chan.

After that, as shown in FIG. 107 (n19), an image in which the crab is confused by the production of Nana's prayer is displayed. Further, in the state of crab confusion in (n19), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the crab confusion operation. After that, as shown in (n20), an image in which the crab recovering from the confusion gets angry is displayed. In the state where the crab is angry (n20), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the character of the crab. After that, as shown in (n21), an image in which the crab swings its arm and attacks is displayed. Further, in the state of the crab attack of (n21), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the crab attack.

After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (n22), an image in which Nana is damaged by the crab's attack is displayed. Further, in the state of receiving Nana damage of (n22), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the damage of Nana. After that, as shown in (n23), an image that Jam operates with the remote controller is displayed. As shown in (n23), the subtitle display "Leave it to me!" Corresponding to the line "Leave it to me!" Of the jam is displayed on the screen of the jam remote control operation. Further, in the state of the jam remote control operation of (n23), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple corresponding to the fact that the jam is emitting a line. After that, as shown in (n24), an image of Jam trying to press a button on the remote controller is displayed. As shown in (n24), in the state of the jam remote control operation, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to the operation of the remote control by Jam.

After that, as shown in FIG. 109 (n25), the effect of the hand coming out of heaven is executed. As shown in (n25), the game effect lamp 9 is white and blinks twice in a state where the hand is out of heaven. After that, as shown in (n26), an image of a hand extending from heaven going to catch a crab is displayed. As shown in (n26), in the state of going to catch the crab, the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white. After that, as shown in (n27), the scene before the decision of whether or not to display the enlarged image of the crab and the hand is obtained. In the scene before the winning / failing determination of (n27), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the white lighting so as to correspond to the scene before the winning / failing determination. It is easy to understand that it is a branching scene of the winning / failing decision because the scene before the winning / failing decision is muted. If it is determined that the jackpot will be a big hit in the reach B in the latter half of the SP from the state of (n27), the production shifts to the production of (o1). If it has been decided that the state of (n27) will be lost in the reach B in the latter half of the SP, or that it will be a relief hit, the production shifts to the production of (p1).

[Direction mode in the hit epilogue part (SP second half reach B)]
The production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP second half reach B) will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 112. The hit epilogue part (SP second half reach B) is a part that informs that the story of Jam and Nana winning the crab robot is developed and controlled to the big hit game state.

As shown in FIG. 110 (o1), in the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach B, an image in which a hand extending from heaven catches a crab is displayed. Further, as shown in (o1), the subtitle display "Yatare-" corresponding to the crab line "Yatake-" is displayed on the screen where the crab is caught. Further, in the state of catching the crab of (o1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a white color brighter than the white color of (tn27) indicating the lighting mode of (n27) in response to catching the crab. After that, as shown in (o2), an image in which the caught crab is installed as a signboard of the shop is displayed. Further, (o2) In the state of the store where the crab is the signboard, the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow-lit (smooth) indicating that it has become a big hit. Further, in the state of (o2), the BGM for hitting is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110 (o3), a screen is displayed in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan are displayed in front of the shop where the crab is a signboard. In addition, as shown in (o3), the subtitle display "Good signboard" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "Good signboard" is displayed on the screen of the shop where the crab is the signboard. Further, in the state of the store where the crab of (o3) is a signboard, the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow-lit (smooth). After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (o4), the screen in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan are displayed is continued in front of the shop where the crab is the signboard. In addition, as shown in (o4), the subtitle display "Work hard" corresponding to Nana-chan's line "Work hard" is displayed on the screen of the shop where the crab is a signboard. Further, in the state of the store where the crab of (o4) is a signboard, the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow-lit (smooth). After that, as shown in (o5), the image of the shop with the crab as the signboard is displayed as a graphic novel-style still image. In the state of the still image of (o5), the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow-lit (smooth).

After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (o6), the effect of displaying the decorative symbol combination “222” indicating the jackpot display result on the screen in a large size is executed. As shown in (o6), the symbol of "222" is enlarged and the symbol is emphasized by the concentrated line in the symbol output. In the state of displaying the pattern (o6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in FIG. 112 (o7), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than the state of (o6). In the state of displaying the pattern (o7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (o8), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced from the state of (o7) and displayed in a normal size. In the state of the two symbols (normal size) of (o8), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Direction mode in Lost Epilogue Part (SP Second Half Reach B)]
The production mode in the lost epilogue part (SP second half reach B) will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 114. The Lost Epilogue Part (SP Second Half Reach B) is a part that informs that Jam and Nana are not controlled to the jackpot game state as the story of being defeated by the crab robot is developed.

As shown in FIG. 113 (p1), in the lost epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B, an image in which the hand extending from the heavens did not catch the crab is displayed. Further, in the state where the crab is not caught in (p1), the game effect lamp 9 has a white color darker than the white color of (tn27) which indicates the lighting mode of (n27) in response to the fact that the crab was not caught. Light. After that, as shown in (p2), an image of the crab walking sideways and escaping is displayed. In the state where the crab escapes in (p2), the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a white color darker than the white color in (tp1) indicating the lighting mode of (p1). After that, as shown in (p3), an image of Jam and Nana who escaped to the crab is displayed, which is disappointing. In addition, as shown in (p3), the subtitle display "Such ~" corresponding to the dialogue "Such ~" of the two allies is displayed on the unfortunate screen. Further, as shown in (p3), in the unfortunate state, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a white color darker than the white color in (tp1) indicating the lighting mode of (p1).

Then, as shown in FIG. 114 (p4), the screen is dimmed. In the state of the screen darkening of (p4), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. After that, as shown in (p5), the symbol of "232", which is a combination of lost symbols, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen of (p5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights in the same background yellow lighting pattern as in (ta1) indicating the lighting mode of (a1). If it has been decided that the relief will be achieved from the state of (p5), the process shifts to the production of (v1).

[Direction mode in the fanning part (SP final reach)]
The production mode in the fanning part (SP final reach) will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 132. The fanning part (SP final reach) is a part where the story of six ally characters, Yumemu-chan, Jam-chan, Nana-chan, Maid A, Maid B, and AD, chasing the enemy character Baku Chu is unfolded. Is. In the fanning part (SP final reach), a story is developed that fuels that if 6 people can catch Baku Chu, it will be a big hit, and if 6 people can not catch Baku Chu, it will be a loss. In addition, the fanning part (SP final reach) is the reach with the highest expectation of a big hit among all the reach.

As shown in FIG. 115 (r1), in the fanning part where the SP final reach is executed, the title corresponding to the SP final reach such as "Catch the Baku Chu with 6 people!" Is displayed. The title display shows the content of the SP final reach production that will be executed from now on. In the state where the title display of (r1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. After that, as shown in (r2), the six friendly characters AD, Maid A, Maid B, Nana, Jam, and Yumemu-chan and the enemy character Baku Chu face each other in the center of the screen. The image is displayed. On the screen where the characters are facing each other, the lines of the six allies, "This is the end," are output. Further, in the confrontation state of (r2), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side blinks in white in response to the six characters emitting the lines. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of Baku Chu. Further, at the timing when the image related to the title display of (r2) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the SP final reach is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 115 (r3), the line "I'll run away again" of Baku Chu is output on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (r3), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in white corresponding to the six characters. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in red in response to the explosion chew emitting a line. After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (r4), when AD is displayed, the subtitle display "Leave it to me!" Corresponding to the line "Leave it to me!" Is displayed. In the AD display state of (r4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in orange in response to the AD emitting a line. After that, as shown in (r5), when the maid A is displayed, the subtitle display "see" corresponding to the line "see" of the maid A is displayed. In the state of the maid A display of (r5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue in response to the maid A emitting a line. After that, as shown in (r6), when the maid B is displayed, the subtitle display "I'll do my best" corresponding to the line "I'll do my best" of the maid B is displayed. In the state of the maid B display of (r6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in Hawaiian blue color in response to the maid B emitting a line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (r7), when Nana is displayed, the subtitle display "Catch me" corresponding to Nana's line "Catch me" is displayed. In the state of Nana-chan display in (r7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in pink in response to Nana-chan emitting a line. After that, as shown in (r8), when Jam-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "Margin desho" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "Margin desho" is displayed. In the state of the jam-chan display of (r8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to the jam-chan emitting a line. After that, as shown in (r9), when Yumemu-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "Everyone goes!" Corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line "Everyone goes!" Is displayed. In the state of Yumemu-chan display in (r9), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yumemu-chan emitting a line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118 (r10), when the Baku Chu is displayed, the subtitle display "Come on any number of people" corresponding to the line "Come on any number of people" is displayed. In the state of the explosion chew display of (r10), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to the explosion chew emitting a line. After that, as shown in (r11), when the image of Maid A chasing the explosion chew is displayed, the subtitle display "Wait!" Corresponding to the line "Wait!" Of Maid A is displayed. In the jam chasing state of (r11), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue in response to the maid A emitting a line. After that, as shown in (r12), when the image of AD and Maid A chasing Baku Chu is displayed, the subtitle display "Wait and wait!" Corresponding to the lines of the two allies "Wait and wait!" Is displayed. In the state of chasing AD & Maid A in (r12), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side blinks in orange in response to the character of AD emitting a line. Further, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in blue in response to the character of the maid A emitting a line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 119 (r13), when the image of the Baku Chu escaping is displayed, the subtitle display "Catch!" Corresponding to the line "Catch!" Of the Baku Chu is displayed. In addition, the footsteps of Baku Chu "Tata Tata" are output as physical sounds. Further, in the state of (r13) Baku Chu escaping, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the Baku Chu escaping. After that, as shown in (r14), an image is displayed in which the explosive chew escapes and is separated from the screen. In addition, the footsteps of Baku Chu "Tata Tata" are output as physical sounds. Further, in the state of (r14) escaping the explosion chew, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. After that, as shown in (r15), the background of the city is displayed on the screen. In the state of the city background of (r15), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (r16), when the image of Nana chasing the Baku Chu is displayed, the subtitle display "Wait!" Corresponding to Nana's line "Wait!" Is displayed. .. In the state of chasing Nana in (r16), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in pink in response to Nana emitting a line. After that, as shown in (r17), when the image of Maid B and Nana chasing Baku Chu is displayed, the subtitle display "Wait and wait!" Corresponding to the lines of the two allies "Wait and wait!" Is displayed. In the state of chasing Maid B & Nana of (r17), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side blinks in Hawaiian blue color in response to the character of Maid B emitting a line. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in pink in response to Nana's character emitting a line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (r18), when the image of the Baku Chu escaping is displayed, the subtitle display “Wow!” Corresponding to the line “Wow!” Of the Baku Chu is displayed. In addition, the footsteps of Baku Chu "Tata Tata" are output as physical sounds. Further, in the state of (r18) Baku Chu escaping, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the Baku Chu escaping. After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (r19), the background of the city is displayed on the screen. In the state of the city background of (r19), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (r20), when the image of Yumemu-chan chasing Baku Chu is displayed, the subtitle display "Wait!" Corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line "Wait!" Is displayed. Will be done. In the state of chasing Yumemu in (r20), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yumemu-chan emitting a line. After that, as shown in (r21), when the image of Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan chasing Baku Chu is displayed, the subtitle display "Wait and wait!" Corresponding to the lines of the two allies "Wait and wait!" Is displayed. In the dream & jam chasing state of (r21), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side blinks in purple in response to the character of Jam emitting a line. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in green in response to the character of Yumemu-chan emitting a line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (r22), the background of the city is displayed on the screen. In the state of the city background of (r22), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (r23), when the image of the Baku Chu escaping is displayed, the subtitle display "Yabai!" Corresponding to the line "Yabai!" Of the Baku Chu is displayed. In addition, the footsteps of Baku Chu "Tata Tata" are output as physical sounds. Further, in the state of (r23) Baku Chu escaping, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the Baku Chu escaping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (r24), when the AD character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in orange corresponding to AD. After that, as shown in FIG. 123 (r25), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in orange in the scene where the AD jumps. At this time, "Ai!" Is output as the AD dialogue sound, but the subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r26), when the character of the maid A is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue corresponding to the maid A. After that, as shown in (r27), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue when the maid A executes the jumping operation. At this time, "To!" Is output as the dialogue sound of Maid A, but the subtitles are not displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 124 (r28), when the character of the maid B is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the Hawaiian blue color corresponding to the maid B. After that, as shown in (r29), in the scene where the maid B executes the jumping motion, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in Hawaiian blue color. At this time, the same dialogue as Maid A "To!" Is output as the dialogue sound of Maid B, but the subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r30), in the scene where Nana-chan's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink corresponding to Nana-chan. After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (r31), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in pink when Nana executes the jumping action. At this time, "Teiya!" Is output as Nana-chan's dialogue sound, but the subtitles are not displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (r32), when the character of Jam-chan is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan. After that, as shown in (r33), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in the scene where Jam executes the jumping action. At this time, "Toriya!" Is output as Jam-chan's dialogue sound, but the subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (r34), in the scene where Yumemu-chan's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yumemu-chan. After that, as shown in (r35), in the scene where Yumemu-chan executes the jumping action, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green. At this time, "Orya!" Is output as Yume-chan's dialogue sound, but the subtitles are not displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (r36), an image in which the faces of the six characters are raised is displayed on the divided screen. As shown in (r36), when the image of 6 allies up is displayed, the subtitle display "This is the last!" Corresponding to the line "This is the last!" Of the 6 allies is displayed. Further, in the state of (r36) with 6 allies up, the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white in response to 6 people emitting lines. After that, as shown in FIG. 127 (r37), the image of 6 allies up is continuously displayed. Further, in the state of (r37) with 6 allies up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 127 (r38), the explosion chew is displayed together with the background of the city. Further, in the state of the explosion chew display of (r38), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the character of the explosion chew. After that, as shown in (r39), the explosion chew is enlarged and displayed. In addition, as shown in (r39), when the image of Baku Chu Mondai is displayed, the subtitle display "Yabee !!!" corresponding to the line "Yabee !!!" of Baku Chu is displayed. NS. Further, in the state of the explosion chew-up of (r39), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to the explosion chew emitting a line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (r40), the image showing the push button 31B and the time gauge are displayed together with the concentrated line on the image of the explosion chew-up. Further, in the state of the explosion chew-up + button display of (r40), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times. After that, when the player operates the button within the valid period of the button operation, as shown in (r41), three main characters of the pachinko gaming machine 1, Nana-chan, Yumemu-chan, and Jam-chan, are cut in on the screen. It is displayed. The cut-in display is an effect in which another image is interrupted and displayed on the displayed image. In addition, the cut-in display can indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit with the color of the cut-in display. For example, when the cut-in display is red, the jackpot expectation is higher than when it is green. Further, in the cut-in state of (r41), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red or green depending on the color of the cut-in display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (r42), after the cut-in display is cleared, an image of six people jumping toward the Baku Chu is displayed. Further, in the cut-in handling state of (r42), the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in white. After that, as shown in FIG. 129 (r43), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white when the screen is displayed with six allies. After that, as shown in (r44), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red when the screen on which the explosion chew is displayed is displayed. After that, as shown in (r45), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white when six allies who are enlarged as in (r43) are displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 130 (r46), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red when the explosive chew enlarged from that of (r44) is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 130 (r47), when six allies who are enlarged from the time of (r45) are displayed, the subtitle display "Hunted down!" Corresponding to the dialogue of the six allies "I have cornered!" "!" Is displayed. Further, in the state of (r47) displaying 6 allies, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the fact that the 6 allies are emitting lines. After that, as shown in (r48), the display of Baku Chu and the display of 6 people are alternately displayed. In the state of (r48), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 131 (r49), an image in which the images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are gathered in the center of the screen is displayed. As shown in (r49), a sound corresponding to the operation promotion for the player to promote the operation is output in response to the trigger display gathering in the center. Further, in the state of (r49) toward the center of the trigger display, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. After that, as shown in (r50), an image in which the trigger display is gathered in the center of the screen is displayed as compared with (r49). As shown in (r50), a sound corresponding to the operation promotion for the player to promote the operation is output in response to the trigger display gathering in the center. Further, in the state of (r50) toward the center of the trigger display, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 131 (r51), the image of the explosion chew is displayed as a still image 1. At this time, the promotion display for operating the trigger and the time gauge are displayed along with the characters "Close!" Overlaid on the image of Baku Chu. In the state where the closing display (still image 1) of (r51) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion for promoting the operation to the player is output. Further, in the state where the closing display (still image 1) of (r51) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (r52), the image of the explosion chew is displayed as a still image 2. At this time, the promotion display for operating the trigger and the time gauge are displayed along with the characters "Close!" Overlaid on the image of Baku Chu. The time gauge is smaller than that at (r51). In the state where the closing display (still image 2) of (r52) is displayed, the sound corresponding to the operation promotion is output, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. After that, as shown in (r53), the image of the explosion chew is displayed as a still image 3. At this time, the promotion display for operating the trigger and the time gauge are displayed along with the characters "Close!" Overlaid on the image of Baku Chu. The time gauge is smaller than that at (r52). In the state where the closing display (still image 3) of (r53) is displayed, the sound corresponding to the operation promotion is output, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (r54), the image of the explosion chew is displayed as a still image 4, which is a scene before the decision of success or failure. At this time, the promotion display for operating the trigger and the time gauge are displayed along with the characters "Close!" Overlaid on the image of Baku Chu. The time gauge is smaller than that at (r53). In the state where the closing display (still image 4) is displayed as the pre-decision scene of (r54), the sound corresponding to the operation promotion is output, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. If it is determined that the jackpot will be a big hit in the final reach of the SP from the state of (r54), the production shifts to the production of (s1). If it is decided that the state of (r54) will be lost in the final reach of the SP, or that it will be a relief hit, the process shifts to the production of (u1).

[Direction mode in the hit epilogue part (SP final reach)]
The production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP final reach) will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 to 136. The hit epilogue part (SP final reach) is a part in which it is notified that the story of six people catching Baku Chu will be developed and controlled into a big hit game state.

As shown in FIG. 133 (s1), in the hit epilogue part of the SP final reach, as shown in (s1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen in accordance with the start of the fall of the accessory. Will be done. This effect image has a more flashy production mode than the effect image when developing to the latter half of SP reach. In addition, the effect image makes it impossible to visually recognize the character of Baku Chu and the reduced decorative pattern of "2". Further, in the state of (s1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color in accordance with the fall of the accessory.

After that, in the state of FIG. 133 (s2), the accessory further drops from the state of (s1). In the state of (s2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color as the accessory falls. After that, in the state of (s3), the character is further arranged so that the character "P" among the characters of the character is positioned up to the position where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" is displayed. Fall. In the state of (s3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color. The effect of raising the accessory from the state of (s3) is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (s4), the scene where Yumemu-chan caught the Baku Chu is displayed in the state after the character has risen. Further, as shown in (s4), the subtitle display "U, caught" corresponding to the line "U, caught" of Baku Chu is displayed. In the state of catching the Baku Chu in (s4), the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow-lit (smooth). Further, in the state of (s4), the BGM for hitting is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (s5), an image in which the six people are pleased to catch the Baku Chu is displayed. In addition, as shown in (s5), the subtitle display "Everyone did it!" Corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line "Everyone did it!" Is displayed. In the state of catching the Baku Chu in (s5), the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow-lit (smooth). After that, as shown in (s6), an image in which the six people are pleased to catch the Baku Chu is displayed. Further, as shown in (s6), the subtitle display "Everyone, you did it!" Is continuously displayed. In the state of catching the Baku Chu in (s6), the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow-lit (smooth).

After that, as shown in FIG. 135 (s7), an image in which the six people are pleased to catch the Baku Chu is displayed as a graphic novel-style still image. In the state of the still image of (s7), the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow-lit (smooth). After that, as shown in (s8), the effect of displaying the decorative symbol combination “222” indicating the jackpot display result on the screen in a large size is executed. As shown in (s8), in the symbol output, the symbol of "222" is enlarged and the symbol is emphasized by the concentrated line. In the state of displaying the pattern of (s8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (s9), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than the state of (s8). In the state of displaying the pattern of (s9), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced from the state of (s9) and displayed in a normal size. In the state of the two symbols (normal size) of (s10), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Direction mode in the lost epilogue part (SP final reach)]
The production mode in the lost epilogue part (SP final reach) will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 to 138. The Lost Epilogue Part (SP Final Reach) is a part that informs that the story of 6 people who could not catch Baku Chu is unfolded and is not controlled to the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 137 (u1), in the lost epilogue part of the SP final reach, an image in which the Baku Chu escapes is displayed. Further, in the state of (u1) escaping from the Baku Chu, the game effect lamp 9 has a white color darker than the white color of (tr54) indicating the lighting mode of (r54) in response to the fact that the Baku Chu was not caught. Light. After that, as shown in (u2), an image is displayed, which is disappointing for the six people who could not catch the Baku Chu because the Baku Chu escaped far away. Further, as shown in (u2), the subtitle display "Sorry" corresponding to the line "Sorry" of Baku Chu is displayed on the disappointing screen. As shown in (u2), in the unfortunate state, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a white color darker than the white color in (tu1) indicating the lighting mode of (u1).

After that, as shown in FIG. 137 (u3), the screen is darkened. In the state of the screen darkening of (u3), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (u4), the symbol of "232", which is a combination of lost symbols, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen of (u4) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights in the same background yellow lighting pattern as in (ta1) indicating the lighting mode of (a1). If it has been decided that the relief will be achieved from the state of (u4), the process shifts to the production of (v1).

[Direction mode in the relief hit part]
The production mode in the relief per part will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 140. The relief hit part is a part where the story by the relief production, which becomes a big hit after the development of the lost story, is developed. In the relief hit part, a premium character corresponding to the relief (revival) called Drum-kun, which did not appear in other reach, will appear.

As shown in FIG. 139 (v1), in the relief hit part, a relief effect in which the character Drum-kun is displayed on the screen is executed. By displaying Mr. Drum, the player can recognize that it is a revival that pretends to be a loss. In the relief effect of (v1), the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a brighter red color than (td4, tg5, tp5, tu4). After that, as shown in (v3), the screen whites out. In the whiteout of (v2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (v3), the effect of displaying the decorative symbol combination “222” indicating the jackpot display result on the screen in a large size is executed. As shown in (v3), the symbol of "222" is enlarged and the symbol is emphasized by the concentrated line in the symbol output. In the state of the symbol (v3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (v4), the symbol combination “222” is displayed in a smaller size than the state of (v3). In the state of the symbol (v4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (v5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced from the state of (v4) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of the two symbols (normal size) of (v5), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Direction mode in the re-lottery part (odd or even symbol derivation after button operation)]
With reference to FIGS. 141 to 156, an effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation) will be described. In FIGS. 141 to 156, a series of production flows from the detailed production of designing in the fanning effect to the button operation in the re-lottery effect will be described.

As shown in FIG. 141 (A1), the effect of displaying the decorative symbol combination “222” indicating the jackpot display result on the screen in a large size is executed. As shown in (A1), in the state of two symbol enlargement, the symbol of "222" is enlarged and the symbol is emphasized by the concentrated line. In the state of the two symbols enlarged in (A1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (A2), the symbol combination "222" is enlarged and displayed from the state of (A1). In the state of the two symbols enlarged in (A2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (A3), the symbol combination "222" is reduced and displayed. In the state of the two symbols reduced in (A3), the game effect lamp 9 is white and blinks.

After that, as shown in FIG. 142 (A4), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed. In the state of the two symbols reduced in (A4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (A5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed in the normal size. In the state of the two symbols normal size of (A5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in a rainbow color. After that, as shown in (A6), the background changes and the re-lottery effect starts. In the state of (A6), the symbol combination "222" has a shaking period in which it swings up and down. In (A6), a screen in which the symbol is raised upward from the normal position is displayed. In the state of the two symbols shaking in (A6), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off.

Here, from the state of (A5) to the state of (A6), the period in which the symbol is swaying is omitted. Specifically, when the design is the normal size, the design is shaking. Then, after reaching the normal size, the pattern shaking of the re-lottery part continues. At this time, at the timing related to the completion of the symbol output (for example, the timing immediately before the normal size, the timing after the normal size, the timing to start the symbol shaking, etc.), the game effect lamp 9 is set. It switches from blinking white to smooth lighting in rainbow color. As a result, it is possible to smoothly print out the symbol from the symbol to the re-lottery effect, shift to a smooth shaking period, and bless the pattern by emitting light from the screen and the lamp. After that, in the symbol shaking period of FIG. 143 (A7), a screen in which the symbol is lowered from the normal position is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 is turned off in the state of the two symbols shaking in (A7).

After that, as shown in FIG. 143 (A8), the screen in which the symbol is displayed in the center is displayed during the symbol shaking period. As shown in (A8), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off in the state of the two symbols shaking. After that, as shown in (A9), the two symbols are displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (A8) during the period when the movement starts due to the re-lottery effect. In the state of the two symbols reduced in (A9), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. After that, as shown in FIG. 144 (A10), two symbols are further reduced and displayed from the state of (A9). In the state of the two symbols reduced in (A10), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

After that, from FIG. 144 (A11) to FIG. 148 (A24), the numbers used as the decorative symbols fluctuate at high speed, so that the replacement display is performed. When the replacement display is performed, the decorative symbols that have been temporarily stopped are sequentially replaced with other symbols, so that the decorative symbols are switched one after another. For example, as shown in (A11), two symbols are displayed faintly during high-speed fluctuation. In the fluctuating state of (A11), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. After that, as shown in (A12), three symbols are clearly displayed during high-speed fluctuation. In the state of the three symbols (A12), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. After that, from FIG. 145 (A13) to FIG. 148 (A23), the symbols are changed at high speed, such as 3 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, 6 symbols, 7 symbols, and 1 symbol, so that the display is thin. A clear display is repeated. From FIG. 145 (A13) to FIG. 148 (A23), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

After that, in FIG. 148 (A24), in which the high-speed fluctuation starting from the two symbols is cycled once and the two symbols are clearly displayed again, the button image and the time gauge are slightly displayed below the two symbols. After that, as shown in FIG. 149 (A25), the button image and the time gauge are clearly displayed when the two symbols are displayed lightly during the high-speed fluctuation. After that, from FIG. 149 (A26) to FIG. 156 (A46), 3 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, 6 symbols, 7 symbols, 1 symbol, 2 symbols, 3 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, 6 symbols, and so on. , The faint display and the clear display are repeated so that the symbols are replaced while fluctuating at high speed. Also, the time gauge gradually decreases over time. From FIG. 148 (A24) to FIG. 156 (A46), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Then, when the push button 31B is operated from the state of (A46), if it is determined that the odd-numbered symbol is derived, the process shifts to the effect of (B1). When the push button 31B is operated from the state of (A46), if it is determined that an even numbered symbol is derived, the process shifts to the effect of (C1).

[Direction mode in the re-lottery part (deriving odd-numbered symbols after button operation)]
With reference to FIGS. 157 to 160, an effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol derivation after button operation) will be described. In FIGS. 157 to 160, a series of production flows from the operation of the button operation to the derivation of the odd-numbered symbols in the re-lottery effect will be described.

As shown in FIG. 157 (B1), the effect of displaying the decorative symbol combination “333” indicating the jackpot display result on the screen in a large size is executed. As shown in (B1), in the state where the three symbols are enlarged, the background becomes bright and the symbol of "333" is enlarged, and the symbols are emphasized by the concentrated lines. In the state of the three symbols enlarged in (B1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (B2), the symbol combination "333" is enlarged and displayed from the state of (B1). In the state of the three symbols enlarged in (B2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (B3), the symbol combination "333" is reduced and displayed. In the state of the three symbols reduced in (B3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 158 (B4), the symbol combination "333" is further reduced and displayed. In the state of the three symbols reduced in (B4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (B5), the symbol combination "333" is further reduced and displayed in the normal size. In the state of the three symbols normal size of (B5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a rainbow color. After that, as shown in (B6), the symbol combination "333" has a shaking period in which it swings up and down. In (B6), a screen in which the symbol is raised upward from the normal position is displayed. In the state of the three symbols shaking in (B6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a rainbow color. After that, as shown in FIG. 159 (B7), the background changes to a normal background. Even in the normal background of (B7), the symbol shaking period continues. In the normal background shaking state of (B7), a screen in which the symbol is lowered from the normal position is displayed. In the normal background shaking state of (B7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a rainbow color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 159 (B8), the decorative symbol of "333" is fixedly stopped. Further, in the symbol confirmation period of (B8), the small symbol is also fixed and stopped at "333". During the symbol determination period of (B8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a rainbow color. After that, as shown in (B9), the symbol determination period continues. During the symbol determination period of (B9), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the blinking lighting mode of the rainbow-colored blinking. After that, in the fanfare period of FIG. 160 (D1), the same screen as in the state of (B9) is displayed. However, the mode of the game effect lamp 9 is to turn off the lights corresponding to the fanfare. After that, as shown in (D2), the screen is switched to the screen in which the characters "FEVER" indicating the fanfare mode and Yumemu-chan are displayed behind the mode of the game effect lamp 9. Further, in the mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time, the lighting of the fanfare mode is maintained.

[Direction mode in the re-lottery part (even-numbered symbol derivation after button operation)]
With reference to FIGS. 161 to 164, an effect mode in the re-lottery part (even-numbered symbol derivation after button operation) will be described. In FIGS. 161 to 164, a flow of a series of effects from the operation of the button operation to the derivation of even-numbered symbols in the re-lottery effect will be described.

As shown in FIG. 161 (C1), the effect of displaying the decorative symbol combination “222” indicating the jackpot display result on the screen in a large size is executed. As shown in (C1), in the state where the two symbols are enlarged, the background becomes bright and the symbol of "222" is enlarged, and the symbols are emphasized by the concentrated lines. In the state of the two symbols enlarged in (C1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (C2), the symbol combination "222" is enlarged and displayed from the state of (C1). In the state of the two symbols enlarged in (C2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (C3), the symbol combination "222" is reduced and displayed. In the state of the two symbols reduced in (C3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 162 (C4), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed. In the state of the two symbols reduced in (C4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (C5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed in the normal size. In the state of the two symbols normal size of (C5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in a rainbow color. After that, as shown in (C6), the background returns to the state of (A46), and the symbol combination "222" becomes a shaking period in which the symbol combination "222" swings up and down. In (C6), a screen in which the symbol is raised upward from the normal position is displayed. In the state of the two symbols shaking in (C6), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in a rainbow color. After that, the background changes to a normal background as shown in FIG. 163 (C7). Even in the normal background of (C7), the symbol shaking period continues. In the normal background shaking state of (C7), a screen in which the symbol is lowered from the normal position is displayed. In the normal background shaking state of (C7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in a rainbow color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 163 (C8), the decorative symbol of "222" is fixedly stopped. Further, in the symbol confirmation period of (C8), the small symbol is also fixed and stopped at "222". During the symbol determination period of (C8), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in a rainbow color. After that, as shown in (C9), the symbol determination period continues. During the symbol determination period of (C9), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the smooth lighting of the rainbow color. After that, during the fanfare period of FIG. 164 (E1), the same screen as in the state of (C9) is displayed. However, the mode of the game effect lamp 9 is to turn off the lights corresponding to the fanfare. After that, as shown in (E2), the screen is switched to the screen in which the characters "FEVER" indicating the fanfare mode and Yumemu-chan are displayed behind the mode of the game effect lamp 9. Further, in the mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time, the lighting of the fanfare mode is maintained.

<Explanation of characteristic parts in the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1>
Next, the featured portion, the modified example, and the like in the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be described in detail.

(Start 5)
The shutter described above is an image that makes the image of the effect executed behind by making it invisible by closing it, and makes the image of the effect executed behind by opening visible after closing. In addition, the shutter is executed at a timing related to the fanning part, that is, before the start of the fanning part. Then, when the shutter is closed, the screen brightness is lowered as the visible area of the effect is narrowed, and when the shutter is opened, the screen brightness is reduced as the visible area of the effect is widened. Will be higher. According to this, the flow of the production can be shown favorably by giving reality when the shutter is closed and opened. In addition, although the image of the effect executed behind is made invisible or visible by using the image of the shutter, the image may be an image other than the shutter, and the same effect is executed by the accessory. You may.

(Start 6)
Further, the shutter described above is in a mode of closing from the upper and lower edges of the screen toward the center of the screen. According to this, it is possible to preferably show an effect in which the screen brightness gradually changes. Further, the shutter may be closed from both ends of the screen toward the center like a sliding door. Further, the shutter may be closed from the upper end of the screen toward the lower end of the screen.

(Start 7)
Further, as shown in FIG. 58 described above, the image of the edge of the shutter is represented in black. According to this, it is possible to blur the boundary between the effect executed when the screen brightness is lowered and the edge of the shutter just before the shutter is completely closed as shown in FIG. 58 (a12), and to eliminate the sense of incongruity. .. Similarly, when the shutter as shown in FIG. 60 (a16) starts to open, the discomfort can be eliminated.

(Start 8)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 described above, after the shutter is opened, the reach of the first half of the SP is started. Until the shutter is fully opened, the effect of the reach of the first half of the SP is not started, the screen brightness gradually increases, and the effect of the first half of the SP progresses after the shutter is released. According to this, since the production of the reach in the first half of the SP is a production that the player wants to pay attention to, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction due to the production being executed before the shutter is opened.

(Start 10)
Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (a9) described above, the brightness of the screen is lowered first before the shutter closing is started, and the shutter is closed at the timing when the shutter is completely closed. .. Here, if the brightness of the screen is lowered at the timing when the shutter is closed, the speed of darkening of the screen may become too fast. Therefore, by starting to reduce the screen brightness in advance, it is possible to make the screen darkening speed appropriate and to make a series of effects more suitable.

(Start 12)
Further, until the shutter is released, the player does not know which SP first half reach will be started. According to this, it is possible to have an expectation as to which effect will be executed.

(Start 13)
It should be noted that the above-mentioned effect by the shutter may be executed at a timing other than the timing of development in the first half of the SP. For example, the timing may be from the second re-variation to the third re-variation in the pseudo-ream. In addition, when the shutter is closed and then released, an icon image (for example, a green hold image) suggesting a change in the active hold, which is a hold display of the fluctuation, is displayed, and the active hold is displayed corresponding to the icon image. It may change (for example, change from blue to green). Further, the effect by the shutter may be executed at the timing of developing from the reach of the first half of the SP to the reach of the second half of the SP. According to this, it is possible to improve the interest of the production by the shutter.

(Start 15)
Further, in addition to the above-mentioned pattern in which the shutter closes and automatically opens, a pattern in which a button image is displayed after the shutter closes and the shutter is released by executing a button operation may be provided. According to this, since a plurality of types of effects by the shutter are provided, the interest of the effects by the shutter is improved.

(Fan 1)
In addition, the above-mentioned fanning part that fanns the right or wrong was updated by the development in which the ally character and the enemy character alternately compete with each other (for example, SP first half reach B and SP second half reach B, etc.). There is a scene in which a ally character is damaged in the production in such a fanning part. In addition, in the production of such a fan part, the image display switching interval is earlier than that of the epilogue part, and the number of image display switchings is also large. According to this, it is possible to make the fanning part look more suitable by making the fanning part develop faster than the epilogue part.

(Fan 2)
Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (b5) described above, in the fanning part, the dialogue of the ally character was generated at the very beginning, and the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue were displayed. According to this, the ally character can be suitably recognized in the fanning part.

(Fan 3)
The subtitle display of the ally character displayed first may be set so as to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display in another scene of the fanning part. According to this, the ally character can be firmly recognized.

(Fan 4)
Further, as shown in FIG. 67 (b17) described above, there is a scene in which the subtitles are not displayed when the ally character emits a dialogue. According to this, it is possible to preferably show the subtitle display of the ally character displayed first, and more preferably show the screen display than adding the subtitle display to all the lines.

(Fan 5)
Further, in the above-mentioned fanning part, SP first half reach A and SP first half reach B as the first fanning part executed at the timing of the first half, and SP second half reach A as the second fanning part executed at the latter half timing. , SP second half reach B, SP final reach. Then, there are scenes in which the ally character plays an active part in both the first fanning part and the second fanning part. In addition, in any of the fanning parts, the dialogue of the ally character was generated at the very beginning, and the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue were displayed. According to this, it is possible to preferably recognize the ally character in any of the fanning parts.

(Fan 6)
In addition, in the above-mentioned fanning part, Yumemu-chan's character plays an active part in the fanning part corresponding to the SP first half reach B, and Jam-chan and Nana-chan's characters play an active part in the fanning part corresponding to the SP second half reach B. There was a scene where he was active. Then, in the first half of the SP reach B, a line was generated by Yume-chan, a ally character who was active first, and the subtitles corresponding to the line were displayed. Further, in the second half of the SP reach B, a line was generated by the first active ally characters Jam and Nana, and the subtitles corresponding to the line were displayed. According to this, the ally character can be suitably recognized in any of the fanning parts. The number of active characters may be one or two or more. In addition, the characters that are active in the first half of the fanning part and the second half of the fanning part may be the same.

(Fan 11)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 63 (b5) and 63 (b6) described above, there is a scene in which each character emits a dialogue under the situation where the ally character and the enemy character are displayed. Under such circumstances, the subtitle display for the dialogue has a certain size and is displayed at a certain display position. According to this, it is possible to reduce the chance that a bug or the like gets angry by not changing the display mode of the dialogue for each character.

(Fan cut-in 2)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 127 (r39) to 128 (r42) described above, the subtitle display is displayed before the promotion display of the button image is displayed at the timing when the cut-in display is executed. According to this, since the button image can be continuously shown to the player who is watching the screen paying attention to the subtitle display, it is possible not to miss the button image, and the cut-in display can be preferably executed. Can be done.

(Fan cut-in 3)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 128 (r41) to 130 (r47) described above, the design is such that there is no dialogue during a predetermined period after the cut-in display is separated. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined period without dialogue, a dialogue is issued, and a subtitle display is attached to the dialogue. According to this, the player can concentrate on the production in the period after the cut-in display, and a suitable cut-in display can be obtained.

(Win / Fail 1)
Further, as shown in FIG. 132 (r54) described above, the scene of the winning / failing decision was between the fanning part and the epilogue part. Then, in the scene of determining whether or not to win, the player was notified whether or not it was a big hit after that, triggered by operating the trigger as the operating means. In addition, in the scene of winning / failing, the accessory was movable after the trigger operation in the case of a big hit. According to this, the interest of the production is improved by setting a suitable scene for determining whether or not the result is made by using the operating means.

(Win / Fail 2)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r47) to 132 (r54) described above, the subtitles are displayed by the ally character before the image corresponding to the operating means is displayed, and then the screen corresponding to the operating means is displayed. The effect that was being executed becomes invisible. Then, the effect executed after that can be recognized again together with the image of the operating means. According to this, while giving an impact by displaying the introduction of the operating means on the entire screen, it is possible to display the effect that was firmly executed at the timing when the operating means can be operated, and to show the progress of the effect appropriately. ..

(Win / Fail 3)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r48) to 131 (r51) described above, while the introduction images (images of (r49) to (r50)) for enabling the operation means to be operated are displayed. The production is in progress. According to this, by advancing the effect behind the scenes, it is possible to pay attention to the image (image of (r51)) in which the operating means can be operated, and also to pay attention to the development of the effect.

(Win / Fail 4)
Further, in FIGS. 132 (r51) to 132 (r54) described above, when the trigger image as the promotion display was displayed, the tail was slightly moved at each image change in the image of the explosion chew. In this way, the effect may be advanced while the promotion display is displayed. Here, as the progress of the production, there may be scene switching or character movements rather than the movement of the tail. According to this, it is possible to pay attention to the development of the effect during the promotion display.

(Win 5)
In addition, the effect that progresses while the promotion display is displayed is slower than the effect that was executed before the promotion display was displayed. According to this, the player can pay attention to the promotion display for operating the operating means, and the promotion display and the progress of the effect can be balanced. It should be noted that the effect of progressing during the display of the promotion display may be slower than the effect of progressing during the display of the introduced image. According to this, it is possible to make a difference in the progress speed of the effect between the display of the promotion display and the display of the introduced image.

(Win / Fail 6)
Further, it is preferable to apply an echo to the dialogue before the introduction image as shown in FIG. 130 (r47) is displayed. According to this, the player can be excited before the introductory image is displayed.

(Win 7)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r47) to 131 (r49) described above, the introduced image is displayed after the subtitle display before the introduced image is displayed is deleted. According to this, it is possible to prevent the display timings of the introduced image and the subtitle display from overlapping.

(Win 14)
Further, in FIGS. 95 (i36) to 96 (i39) described above, the image in which the two characters Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan are displayed is gradually enlarged and displayed, and at the timing of (i39), 1 A sheet of images is displayed stationary for a predetermined period of time. After that, if it is a big hit, the video of the hit epilogue part will be played, and if it is lost, the video of the lost epilogue part will be played. In the period in which one image is stationary and displayed for a predetermined period, one image can be diverted and used, so that it is possible to preferably agitate the scene of winning or failing while reducing the data capacity. During the period in which the images in which the two characters are displayed are gradually enlarged and displayed, many images (for example, 10 images) are displayed as shown in FIGS. 95 (i36) to 96 (i39). You may use it.

(Win 16)
Further, in FIGS. 131 (r49) to 132 (r54) described above, there is a display period of the introduced image in which the image corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) is displayed in the center of the screen. After that, there is a period in which a promotion display for operating the trigger is displayed. During the display period of the promotion display, a plurality of images are gradually moved to make the character appear to be moving. After that, by operating the trigger at the branching scene of the winning / failing decision, the video of the hit epilogue part will be played if it is a big hit, and the video of the lost epilogue part will be played if it is lost. All of these periods are periods in which the image is dynamically displayed as if it were moving. According to this, a series of effects can be executed in a dynamic flow, and a suitable flow of effects can be obtained.

(Win / Fail 18)
In addition, the hit epilogue part and the lost epilogue part after the scene of the winning / failing determination shown in FIGS. 133 (s1) to 136 (s10) and 137 (u1) to 138 (u4) described above will be described. In the hit epilogue part, the video corresponding to the hit epilogue part is played after the production of the character movement. Further, in the lost epilogue part, the screen goes dark after the production corresponding to the lost epilogue part, and then returns to the normal screen. According to this, since it is a flow of switching a plurality of images after the scene of determining whether or not to win, it is possible to make a suitable flow of production.

(Epilog 1)
The above-mentioned hit epilogue part is a part that does not shift at the time of loss, and there is a scene in which the enemy character is disadvantageous and a scene in which the ally character is advantageous. In addition, in the hit epilogue part, the number of switching of image display in the production is smaller than that in the fanning part. According to this, an appropriate effect can be executed in each part, and the flow of a series of effects can be appropriately shown.

(Epilogue 4)
As shown in FIG. 104 (n10) described above, subtitles are not added to the lines of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character is damaged in the fanning part. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 110 (o1), subtitles are added to the lines of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character in the hit epilogue part is damaged (the scene of catching a crab). According to this, the subtitle display that was not displayed in the fanning part is displayed in the hit epilogue part, so that the feeling of blessing can be emphasized.

(Epilogue 6)
As shown in FIGS. 134 (s5) to 134 (s6) described above, the subtitle display displayed in the hit epilogue part is designed to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display displayed in the fan part. According to this, by displaying the subtitle display in the final hit epilogue part for a long period of time, the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the big hit and the feeling of blessing can be emphasized. When displaying the subtitle display, the one with a large number of characters may be displayed longer than the case with a small number of characters. Even in such a case, if the same number of subtitles (for example, 5 characters) are displayed in the hit epilogue part and the fan part, the subtitle display period is longer in the hit epilogue part. It should be designed as follows.

(Epilogue 15)
As shown in FIGS. 134 (s6) to 135 (s8) described above, the final subtitle display for the final dialogue in the hit epilogue part is designed to be erased before the patterning effect is executed. .. According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from being covered with the decorative pattern and to be misunderstood as a message in the effect of displaying the pattern. Therefore, the production in the hit epilogue part can be shown favorably.

(Epilogue 17)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, at the timing when the effect of displaying the symbol is completed and the player can recognize the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol and the image of the character or the like displayed as the background become a still image. There is. According to this, it is possible to prevent the decorative pattern from becoming difficult to see because the background of the decorative pattern is a moving image.

(Epilogue 18)
As shown in FIG. 135 (s7) described above, the image flowing in the hit epilogue part becomes a still image at the timing before the effect of patterning is executed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the symbol from becoming difficult to see from the timing of the start of the symbol output.

(Epilogue 19)
As shown in FIG. 135 (s7) described above, the still image displayed in the hit epilogue part has a special aspect of a graphic novel style. According to this, by adding an effect of a special aspect to the still image, it is possible to make a suitable hit epilogue part by emphasizing that the image is still and suggesting that the scene has been switched.

(Epilogue 21)
It is desirable that the subtitle display before the patterning shown in FIG. 134 (s6) described above does not have a fade effect that gradually erases the display. Here, the subtitle display displayed at other timings may be provided with a fade effect that gradually erases the display. According to this, except for the final subtitle display, it is possible to switch effectively by adding a fade effect, and by instantly erasing the final subtitle display, the final subtitle display is covered with the decorative pattern. It is possible to prevent the message from being lost and being misunderstood as a message in the production of the design. Therefore, the production in the hit epilogue part can be shown favorably.

(Epilogue 22)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the decorative symbol and the small symbol are displayed at the time of producing the symbol. Then, the effect image by the concentrated line is added to the decorative symbol, but the effect image is not added to the small symbol. Further, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the front side. According to this, it is possible to recognize that the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner by the small symbol while enhancing the effect of the effect image, and it is possible to make a suitable hit epilogue part.

(Epilogue 23)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the decorative symbol and the small symbol are displayed at the time of producing the symbol. Here, the movements of the decorative symbol and the small symbol may be synchronized at the timing when the decorative symbol is finished. Specifically, during the symbol shaking period in which the decorative symbol is finished and the symbol is swaying up and down, the small symbol may be swayed up and down in the same motion as the decorative symbol. According to this, by matching the movements of the decorative symbol and the small symbol, it is possible to preferably show the flow of the production in the hit epilogue part.

(Epilogue 24)
As shown in FIGS. 157 (B1) to 158 (B5) described above, both the decorative symbol and the small symbol are displayed at the time of producing the symbol in the re-lottery part. Then, the effect image by the concentrated line is added to the decorative symbol, but the effect image is not added to the small symbol. Further, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the front side. According to this, it is possible to recognize that the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner by the small symbol while enhancing the effect of the effect image.

(Epilogue 25)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, when the design is produced, both the decorative design and the small design may be displayed in a state where the symbols are once aligned. Then, in conjunction with the transition to the re-lottery part, both the decorative symbol and the small symbol may be changed again. According to this, it is possible to synchronize the decorative symbol and the small symbol to obtain a suitable display.

(Re-lottery production 3)
As shown in FIG. 142 (A5) described above, in the final state of the effect of displaying the symbol in the hit epilogue part, the decorative symbol is shaken and displayed, and the effect image by the concentrated line is added. Even when switching from that state to the background of the re-lottery effect as shown in (A6), the effect image by the concentrated line is still added. Further, the game effect lamp 9 switches from the smooth rainbow lighting to the extinguishing. In other words, from the design to the re-lottery effect, the design is such that the pattern shaking and the mode of the effect continue, and the background and the lamp are switched. According to this, it is possible to make it easy to understand from which decorative pattern the re-lottery effect started.

(Re-lottery production 6)
As shown in the flow shown in FIGS. 144 (A10) to 156 (A46) and 157 (B1) to 158 (B5) described above, in the re-lottery effect, the symbol feed is executed by the reduced size decorative symbol, and the button is pressed. Operation promotion display is displayed. Then, when the player operates the button, the effect of displaying the symbol in an enlarged manner is executed. That is, the decorative symbol that is finally notified from the moment when the symbol is put out is enlarged and displayed. According to this, since it is a symbol that is finally notified from the beginning of expansion, it is possible to show the player what the final notification symbol is in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Re-lottery production 16)
The above-mentioned symbolizing in the portions of FIGS. 141 (A1) to 142 (A5) and the symbolizing in the portions of FIGS. 161 (C1) to 162 (C5) are executed using substantially the same image. Specifically, the same image is used for the pattern output by the “2” symbol and the effect image, and the pattern output is executed in such a manner that the background portion is different. According to this, since the images of the symbols can be made substantially the same, it is possible to clearly show the player that the symbol has not been promoted to the probabilistic symbol. It should be noted that the image of the patterning portion including the background may be exactly the same.

(Re-lottery production 17)
In the above-mentioned effect of displaying the symbol, a series of effects of enlarging the symbol once and then setting the normal size at the center of the screen are executed. According to this, it is possible to preferably show a series of design effects by enlarging and reducing the design.

(Re-lottery production 18)
In the above-mentioned effect of designing, common design data may be used for the data of the designing effect in the hit epilogue part and the data of the designing effect in the re-lottery effect. Then, a series of patterning effects may be executed by using the common patterning data and the combination of the plurality of decorative patterns. According to this, it is possible to reduce the data capacity while making the effect of displaying the pattern look favorable. It should be noted that substantially the same data may be used for the data of the symbolizing effect in the hit epilogue part and the data of the symbolizing effect in the re-lottery effect.

<Detailed explanation of the production mode>
Next, with respect to the above-described production mode, feature portions and modification examples that should be particularly mentioned will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 165 to 191.

[About fanning 12, 13, 15]
In FIG. 165, the featured portion in the fanning part will be described by numbering.

(Detailed explanatory view of parts (b11) to (b13))
FIG. 165 is a detailed explanatory view of the portions (b11) to (b13) of the SP first half reach A described above. As shown in FIG. 165 (b11), the relationship between Yumemu-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is that Yumemu-chan is on the left side and Bakuchu is on the right side in the left-right direction. According to this character arrangement, the left frame lamp lights green corresponding to Yumemu-chan, and the right frame lamp lights red corresponding to Baku Chu. In the state of (b11), Yumemu-chan's dialogue "Wait ~" is output as the dialogue sound, Yumemu-chan's footstep "Zazzazza" is output as the physical sound, and Baku Chu's footstep "Zazzazza" is output as the physical sound. "Tatata Tat" is output.

Further, as shown in (b11), the relationship between Yumemu-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is that in the front-back direction, Bakuchu is in the front and Yumemu-chan is in the rear. The positional relationship seen by the player is that Baku Chu is near and Yumemu-chan is far away. On the other hand, the relationship of volume is the relationship of Yumemu-chan's dialogue sound of "Wait ~"> Baku Chu's footsteps "Tatatatta"> Yumemu-chan's footsteps "Zazzazza". In this way, the volume data is set so that the dialogue sound of the distant Yumemu-chan is louder than the footsteps of the near Baku Chu.

In FIG. 165 (b12), the relationship between Yume-chan and Baku Chu on the screen is the same as in the state of (b11) in both the left-right direction and the front-back direction. In (b12), the dialogue sound is not output, and the footsteps of Yumemu-chan as physical sounds "Zazzazza" and the footsteps of Baku Chu as physical sounds "Tatatatta" are output. The relationship between the volume is "Baku Chu's footsteps" Tata Tata "> Yumemu-chan's footsteps" Zazza Zazza ". In this way, when the dialogue sound is not output, the volume data is set so that the footsteps of the near Baku Chu are louder than the footsteps of the distant Yumemu-chan so as to match the context on the screen.

In FIG. 165 (b13), the relationship between Yume-chan and Baku Chu on the screen is that Yume-chan is on the left side and Baku Chu is on the right side in the left-right direction. In addition, in the state of (b13), the dialogue of Baku Chu is output as the dialogue sound, "Catch Monka!" "Tatata Tat" is output. Further, as shown in (b13), the relationship between Yumemu-chan and Baku Chu on the screen is the relationship of Yumemu-chan in the front and Baku Chu in the rear in the front-back direction. The positional relationship seen by the player is that Yumemu-chan is near and Baku Chu is far away. On the other hand, the relationship of volume is the relationship of "Catch Monka!" Baku Chu's dialogue sound> Yumemu-chan's footsteps "Zazzazza"> Baku Chu's footsteps "Tatatatta". In this way, the volume data is set so that the dialogue sound of the distant Baku Chu is louder than the footsteps of the near Yumemu-chan.

(Fan 12)
In the fanning part, there is a scene where the SP reach BGM is output and the dialogue sound and the physical sound (also referred to as the operating sound) are output at the timing of overlapping. When the dialogue sound and the physical sound are output at the overlapping timing, the dialogue sound is output at a louder volume when it is output from the speakers 8L and 8R than the physical sound. According to this, while the physical sound is output as a part of the production to bring out the reality of the production, the content of the production is given to the player by outputting a large dialogue sound when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap. It can be easily communicated. Therefore, as a result, it is possible to make the production in the fanning part look better.

(Fan 13)
Here, the work process when actually making various effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. First, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a video for each production corresponding to a fluctuation time such as SP reach is created. Along with this video, directing sounds such as BGM, physical sounds, onomatopoeia, sound effects, and dialogue sounds are added one by one with dedicated software. The finished image and sound are played, and the strength of the sound is further added. In such a series of work processes, rather than outputting the sound with reality while keeping the actual sense of distance on the image, the sound is output ignoring the actual sense of distance that is easily transmitted to the player by discarding the reality. Sound data is set as follows. Thereby, a series of effects can be preferably shown.

(Fan 15)
In addition, when the dialogue sound of a character whose player's sense of distance is far and the physical sound whose player's sense of distance is close overlap, the sound data is set so that the dialogue sound sounds louder than the physical sound. Has been done. As a result, the sound that ignores the actual sense of distance that is easily transmitted to the player by discarding the reality is output, so that the content of the production can be easily transmitted to the player.

[About fanning 14 and 16]
In FIGS. 166 and 167, the characteristic portions in the fanning part will be described by numbering.

(Explanation of volume level)
FIG. 166 is a diagram for explaining the volume level. As shown in FIG. 166 (A), among the sounds output from the pachinko gaming machine 1, the relationship between the dialogue sound, the physical sound (footstep sound), and the volume level in the SP reach BGM will be described. The output volume level has a relationship of dialogue sound> physical sound (footstep)> SP reach BGM. Further, when these three sounds overlap, the way of outputting the sound is different between the case of the dialogue sound with subtitles and the case of the dialogue sound without subtitles.

As shown in FIG. 166 (B), in the case of a dialogue sound with subtitles, the volume of the SP reach BGM is output when the dialogue sound (with subtitles), the physical sound, and the SP reach BGM overlap. It is controlled to output at a lower level. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 166 (C), in the case of the dialogue sound without subtitles, when the dialogue sound (without subtitles), the physical sound and the SP reach BGM are output at the overlapping timing, the dialogue sound> It is controlled to output without changing any volume level while maintaining the relationship of physical sound (footstep)> SP reach BGM.

(Fan 14)
In this way, when the physical sound of the character and the dialogue sound are output in an overlapping manner, the dialogue sound is adjusted and output so as to be heard louder than the physical sound. For example, when the physical sound and the dialogue sound are output in an overlapping manner, as shown in FIG. 166 (B), the SP reach BGM is adjusted to be reduced according to the output period of the dialogue sound. In this way, it is possible to easily convey the content of the production to the player while giving reality.

(Fan 16)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 166 (B) and 166 (C), there is a subtitle in the dialogue sound depending on whether the dialogue sound overlapping the physical sound has a subtitle or the dialogue sound overlapping the physical sound has no subtitle. The case is adjusted so that it sounds louder as the volume of the SP reach BGM is lowered. The dialogue sound with subtitles is more related to the content of SP reach than the dialogue sound without subtitles. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the production by outputting a large amount of dialogue sound with subtitles related to the content of the SP reach.

(Explanation of volume level)
FIG. 167 is a diagram for explaining the volume level. A method of effectively outputting the volume by a method different from that of FIG. 166 will be described with reference to FIG. 167. In FIG. 167 and FIG. 166, the relationship between the output volume levels is the same as dialogue sound> physical sound (footstep)> SP reach BGM. However, as shown in FIG. 167 (B), when the physical sound of the character and the dialogue sound are output in an overlapping manner, the dialogue sound is adjusted to be louder than the physical sound.

(Fan 16)
As shown in FIGS. 167 (B) and 167 (C), there are cases where the dialogue sound overlapping the physical sound has subtitles and cases where the dialogue sound overlapping the physical sound has no subtitles. Only one is adjusted to increase the volume. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the production by outputting a large amount of dialogue sound with subtitles related to the content of the SP reach.

[About fanning 7 and 8]
In FIGS. 168 to 170, the characteristic portions in the fanning part will be described by numbering.

(Detailed explanatory view of parts (r24) to (r27))
FIG. 168 is a detailed explanatory view of the (r24) to (r27) portions of the final reach described above. As shown in (r24), when the AD character is up, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in orange corresponding to AD. After that, as shown in (r25), in the scene where the AD jumps, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in orange. At this time, "Ai!" Is output as the AD dialogue sound, but the subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r25'), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in the scene where the AD is handled from the screen.

After that, as shown in (r26), when the character of the maid A is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue corresponding to the maid A. After that, as shown in (r27), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue when the maid A executes the jumping operation. At this time, "To!" Is output as the dialogue sound of Maid A, but the subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r27'), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in the scene where the maid A handles from the screen.

(Detailed explanatory view of parts (r28) to (r31))
FIG. 169 is a detailed explanatory view of the (r28) to (r31) portions of the final reach described above. As shown in (r28), when the character of the maid B is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the Hawaiian blue color corresponding to the maid B. After that, as shown in (r29), in the scene where the maid B executes the jumping motion, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in Hawaiian blue color. At this time, the same dialogue as Maid A "To!" Is output as the dialogue sound of Maid B, but the subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r29'), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in the scene where the maid B is separated from the screen.

After that, as shown in (r30), in the scene where Nana-chan's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink corresponding to Nana-chan. After that, as shown in (r31), in the scene where Nana executes the jumping action, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in pink. At this time, "Teiya!" Is output as Nana-chan's dialogue sound, but the subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r31'), the game effect lamp 9 blinks white three times in the scene where Nana handles from the screen.

(Detailed explanatory view of parts (r32) to (r35))
FIG. 170 is a detailed explanatory view of the (r32) to (r35) portions of the final reach described above. As shown in (r32), when Jam-chan's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan. After that, as shown in (r32), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in the scene where Jam executes the jumping action. At this time, "Toriya!" Is output as Jam-chan's dialogue sound, but the subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r32'), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in the scene where Jam handles from the screen.

After that, as shown in (r34), in the scene where Yumemu-chan's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yumemu-chan. After that, as shown in (r35), in the scene where Yumemu-chan executes the jumping action, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green. At this time, "Orya!" Is output as Yume-chan's dialogue sound, but the subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r35'), the game effect lamp 9 blinks white three times in the scene where Yumemu-chan handles from the screen.

Here, in a scene such as r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, r35, the output line is a word line that seems to be enthusiastic. And in these particular scenes, scene switching is faster than in other scenes. Also, in these specific scenes, subtitles are not directly related to story development as compared to scenes with other subtitles. For these reasons, the subtitle display corresponding to the dialogue is not attached.

(Fan 7)
As shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, there are scenes in which the character emits lines but does not have subtitles in the fanning part (for example, scenes of r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35). However, even in such a specific scene, the luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) of the game effect lamp 9 is specified so that the frame lamp lights in the color corresponding to the character. In this way, even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue sound, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. As a result, the effect corresponding to the character can be suitably executed, and the fanning part can be preferably shown to the player.

(Fan 8)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, in a scene in which a character appears (for example, r24, r26, r28, r30, r32, r34), a color other than the color corresponding to the corresponding character in the preceding scene. The game effect lamp 9 is controlled to be turned on. Specifically, in front of the scene of (r24), the game effect lamp 9 is lit / blinked in yellow of (r22) or red of (r23), and then the game effect lamp 9 is colored orange corresponding to the AD character. It will be a lighting scenario. Further, in front of the scene of (r26), the game effect lamp 9 lights / blinks in orange of (r25) or white of (r25'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights in blue corresponding to the character of maid A. It becomes a scenario to do. In front of the scene of (r28), the game effect lamp 9 is lit / blinked in blue of (r27) or white of (r27'), and then the game effect lamp 9 is in Hawaiian blue color corresponding to the character of maid B. It will be a lighting scenario. Also, in front of the scene of (r30), the game effect lamp 9 is lit / blinked in Hawaiian blue color of (r29) or white of (r29'), and then the game effect lamp 9 is pink corresponding to Nana's character. Is a scenario in which is lit. Also, in front of the scene of (r32), the game effect lamp 9 lights / blinks in pink of (r31) or white of (r31'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's character. It becomes a scenario to do. Also, in front of the scene of (r34), a scenario in which the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yumemu-chan's character after the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple (r33) or white in (r33'). It becomes. In this way, after the control is performed to light the game effect lamp 9 in a color different from the color corresponding to the corresponding character before the character appears, the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in the color corresponding to the character. Control is done. Therefore, it is possible to express in the form of a lamp that the displayed character changes and which character the changed character is in an easy-to-understand manner, and it can be a suitable fanning part.

[About Starts 1 to 4]
The feature portions of FIGS. 171 to 172 will be described by numbering them.

(Detailed explanatory view of the accessory operation in (b18) to (i1))
FIG. 171 is a detailed explanatory view of the accessory operation in (b18) to (i1). In the scene before the winning / failing determination shown in (b18), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the white lighting mode. After that, when developing into the reach of the latter half of the SP, the movable body 32 as an accessory operates. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the accessory falls while tilting diagonally from the upper part of the screen toward the front side of the screen. As shown in (h1), a radial effect image is displayed on the accessory on the screen at the start of the fall of the accessory. Due to the effect image, Yumemu-chan's character and the reduced "2" decorative pattern cannot be seen. Further, in the state of (h1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red as the accessory falls.

After that, in the state of (h2), the character is further arranged so that the character "P" among the characters of the character is located up to the position where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" is displayed. Fall. In the state of (h2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. In addition, as a sound effect, a sound for the character corresponding to the fall of the character is output. After that, in the state of (h3), the position of the accessory is maintained at the drop position in the state of (h2). In the state of (h3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

After that, as shown in (h4), the accessory starts to rise (the accessory moves from the advance position to the evacuation position). In the state of (h4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in yellow. When the state of (h3) is changed to the state of being retracted in (h4), the luminance data table output from the luminance data table of the accessory operation part to the luminance data table of the SP second half reach A (fanning part) changes. .. After that, in the state of (h5), the accessory is further raised. In the state of (h5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in yellow.

FIG. 172 is a detailed explanatory view of the accessory operation in (b18) to (i1). After (h5), in the state of (h6), the accessory is further raised. In the state of (h6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in yellow. After that, as shown in (h7), when the accessory is further raised, the effect image displayed corresponding to the accessory becomes lighter. As the effect image becomes lighter (the transmittance becomes higher), the background corresponding to the reach A in the latter half of the SP begins to be slightly visible. In the state of (h7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. Further, as a sound effect, a sound corresponding to the latter half of SP, which is a BGM corresponding to the reach of the latter half of SP, is output. The sound effect related to the title in the latter half of the SP may be output together with the BGM. After that, in the state of (h8), the accessory is further raised from the state of (h7). In the state of (h8), the effect image is lighter than in the state of (h7), so that the background display becomes easier to see. In the state of (h8), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

After that, in the state of (h9), the accessory is further raised. In the state of (h9), the effect image is lighter than in the state of (h8), so that the background display becomes easier to see. In the state of (h9), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, in the state of (h10), the accessory is further raised. In the state of (h10), the effect image is lighter than in the state of (h9), so that the background display becomes easier to see. In the state of (h10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, in the state of (i1), the effect image disappears and the title corresponding to the start scene of the SP second half reach A is clearly displayed. In the state of (i1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

(Start 1)
As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the operation of the accessory switches the effect from the effect of the SP first half reach A to the effect of the SP second half reach A. In addition, an effect image corresponding to the accessory movement is displayed according to the movement of the accessory falling. After that, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the accessory movement to the screen corresponding to the SP second half reach A while the accessory is rising. Further, from the brightness data table of the accessory operation part (child table WD8 shown in FIG. 202 described later) to the brightness data table of the SP latter half reach A (child table WD9 shown in FIGS. 204 and 205 described later) while the accessory is rising. ) Is switched to the brightness data table. In addition, a sound corresponding to the latter half of the SP (for example, BGM in the latter half of the SP) is output while the accessory is rising. Here, the effect image corresponding to the accessory operation is displayed on the premise that the accessory is at a position where the accessory is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled by switching to the background display corresponding to the latter half of the SP by the time the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position. Further, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the latter half of the SP while the accessory is returning to the initial position, the fanning part of the latter half of the SP can be preferably displayed.

(Start 2)
As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the operation of the accessory switches the effect from the effect of the SP first half reach A to the effect of the SP second half reach A. Further, before the operation of the accessory, the "2" symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower left and right corners of the screen. When the accessory moves, the accessory falls so that the letter "P" of the letters of the accessory is positioned to the position where it overlaps with the place where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" was displayed. do. Further, the effect image corresponding to the accessory movement is displayed in the priority layer in front of the reduced "2" symbol according to the movement of the accessory falling. Then, after the accessory rises from the falling position and the "2" symbol does not overlap with the accessory, the effect image gradually becomes thinner, and the background and "2" symbol corresponding to the SP second half reach A become. It is displayed faintly. According to this, it is possible to prevent the display from being unattractive by displaying the reduced decorative pattern during the operation of the accessory. Further, the effect image corresponding to the accessory movement is displayed on the premise that the accessory is in a position where the accessory is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled by switching to the background display corresponding to the latter half of the SP by the time the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position. In addition, since a reduced decorative pattern is displayed in the middle of ascending the accessory, it is possible to switch a suitable effect according to the movement of the accessory.

(Start 3)
As shown in FIG. 171, the accessory operates and displays the effect image before reaching the position of the lowermost end of the fall. According to this, the reduced decorative pattern can be hidden at an early stage, and it is possible to switch a suitable effect with an accessory.

(Start 4)
In addition, when switching from the effect image to the image of the effect when developing in the latter half, the image related to the accessory may be displayed. Specifically, in the scenes corresponding to FIGS. 172 (h7) to (h10), the characters "POWERFULII" and images of the main characters Yumemu-chan, Jam-chan, and Nana-chan when the character rises, etc. May be displayed. According to this, it is possible to show a suitable switching of the production with the accessory by giving the interlocking when the production is switched.

[About Epilogue 7, 8, 10-14, 20]
In FIGS. 173 to 174, the feature portions in the epilogue part will be described by numbering.

(Detailed explanatory view of the accessory operation in (r54) to (s4))
FIG. 173 is a detailed explanatory view of the accessory operation in (r54) to (s4). In the scene before the success / failure decision of (r54), the sound corresponding to the operation promotion is output, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. At this time, an operation image corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) is displayed on the screen together with the character of Baku Chu. Further, below the operation image, a time gauge is displayed as an operation promotion display for promoting the operation. When the player executes the action of pulling the stick controller 31A within a predetermined period or the predetermined period elapses, the movable body 32 as a bonus is operated. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the accessory falls while tilting diagonally from the upper part of the screen toward the front side of the screen. Here, the time during which the accessory is falling in the success / failure notification scene is longer than the time during which the accessory is falling in the scene that develops in the latter half of the SP.

As shown in (s1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen at the start of the fall of the accessory. This effect image has a more flashy production mode than the effect image when developing to the latter half of SP reach. Specifically, the effect image in the success / failure notification scene as in (s1) is a rainbow color. The effect images in the scenes that develop in the latter half of the SP are blue and red. In addition, the effect image makes it impossible to visually recognize the character of Baku Chu and the reduced decorative pattern of "2". Further, in the state of (s1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color in accordance with the fall of the accessory.

After that, in the state of (s2), the accessory falls so that the letter "P" among the letters of the accessory is positioned to the position where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" is displayed. do. In the state of (s2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color. After that, in the state of (s3), the position of the accessory is maintained at the drop position in the state of (s2). In the state of (s3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color.

After that, as shown in (s3-2), the accessory starts to rise (the accessory moves from the advance position to the evacuation position). In the state of (s3-2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. The brightness output from the brightness data table for the accessory operation of the hit epilogue part to the brightness data table for the hit epilogue of the hit epilogue part when the state of (s3) is changed to the retracted state of (s3-2). The data table changes. After that, in the state of (s3-3), the accessory is further raised. In the state of (s3-3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

FIG. 174 is a detailed explanatory view of the accessory operation in (r54) to (s4). After (s3-3), in the state of (s3-4), the accessory is further raised. In the state of (s3-4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (s3-5), when the accessory is further raised, the effect image displayed corresponding to the accessory becomes lighter. As the effect image becomes lighter (the transmittance becomes higher), the background corresponding to the epilogue part at the end of the SP reach begins to be slightly visible. In the state of (s3-5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Further, as a sound effect, a sound corresponding to the hit epilogue part, which is a BGM corresponding to the hit epilogue part of the SP final reach, is output. After that, in the state of (s3-6), the accessory is further raised from the state of (s3-5). In the state of (s3-6), the effect image is lighter than in the state of (s3-5), so that the background display becomes easier to see. In the state of (s3-6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

After that, in the state of (s3-7), the accessory is further raised. In the state of (s3-7), the effect image is lighter than in the state of (s3-6), so that the background display becomes easier to see. In the state of (s3-7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, in the state of (s3-8), the accessory is further raised. In the state of (s3-8), the effect image is lighter than in the state of (s3-7), so that the background display becomes easier to see. In the state of (s3-8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, in the state of (s4), the scene where Yumemu-chan caught Baku Chu is displayed. At this time, the sound at the time of successful production is output as a sound effect. In addition, subtitles will be displayed along with the line "Uu, I was caught" from Baku Chu. In the state of (s4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in a rainbow color.

(Epilogue 7)
As shown in FIGS. 173 to 174, the effect image corresponding to the accessory movement is displayed according to the movement of the accessory falling. After that, the accessory moves to the initial position according to a predetermined evacuation pattern. The display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the character movement to the screen corresponding to the SP final reach hit epilogue part while the character is rising. Here, the effect image corresponding to the accessory operation is displayed on the premise that the accessory is at a position where the accessory is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled by switching to the background display corresponding to the reach of the first half of the SP by the time the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position.

(Epilogue 8)
On the premise that the accessory returns to the initial position, the timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue is the rising timing related to the start timing of the return operation. According to this, since the display corresponding to the epilogue is switched at the timing related to the start of the return operation, the display of the effect image corresponding to the accessory operation ends before the accessory returns to the initial position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the situation where the effect image is displayed when the accessory returns to the initial position, and the aesthetic appearance of the production is not spoiled. The timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue may be the same as the timing at which the accessory starts to rise. Further, the accessory may perform a rotation operation or a movement operation at the falling position.

(Epilogue 10)
The BGM corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return operation of the accessory to the initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. According to this, the epilogue part can be preferably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part by BGM.

(Epilogue 11)
The sound effect corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return operation of the accessory to the initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. According to this, the epilogue part can be preferably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part by the sound effect.

(Epilogue 12)
The BGM and sound effect corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return operation of the accessory to the initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. According to this, the epilogue part can be preferably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part by the BGM and the sound effect.

(Epilogue 13)
In the situation where the accessory returns to the initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, the dialogue sound is not output, and the dialogue sound is output and the subtitles are output in the epilogue display after the accessory returns to the initial position. It may be shown. According to this, it is possible to avoid displaying the subtitles at a timing when the subtitles are difficult to see, and to preferably execute the epilogue part.

(Epilogue 14)
At the timing when the accessory returns to the initial position, the dialogue sound may be output and the subtitles may be displayed in the epilogue display. According to this, the dialogue can be recognized firmly, and the epilogue part can be preferably executed.

(Epilogue 20)
As shown in FIGS. 173 to 174, the mode of the production is switched to the hit epilogue part by moving the accessory from the scene before the winning / failing decision in the fanning part. In addition, an effect image corresponding to the accessory movement is displayed according to the movement of the accessory falling. After that, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the character movement to the screen corresponding to the hit epilogue part of the SP final reach while the character is rising. Further, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the accessory movement to the brightness data table corresponding to the hit epilogue part while the accessory is rising. In addition, a hit epilogue part-corresponding sound is output while the accessory is rising. In addition, no dialogue sound is output when the background is displayed corresponding to the hit epilogue part that is displayed before the accessory changes to the initial position from (s3-5) to (s3-8). .. After that, in the state (s4) in which the movement of the accessory to the initial position is completed and the display of the effect image is completed, the dialogue sound is output and the subtitle display is displayed. Here, the effect image corresponding to the accessory operation is displayed on the premise that the accessory is at a position where the accessory is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled by switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part by the time the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position. Further, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the hit epilogue part during the ascending of the accessory, the hit epilogue part can be preferably displayed. Further, since the subtitle is displayed after the return operation to the initial position is completed, the hit epilogue part can be preferably displayed.

[About Epilogues 2, 3 and 5]
In FIG. 175, the feature portions in the epilogue part will be described by numbering.

(Relationship between the number of subtitles and the number of lines)
FIG. 175 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of subtitles and the number of lines. FIG. 175 shows the number of lines of the character being produced and the number of subtitles corresponding to the lines in each SP reach type and the epilogue type corresponding to each SP reach. For example, in the case of reach A in the first half of SP, the number of lines is 8 and the number of subtitles is 5. Further, in the case of the hit epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, the number of subtitles is 1 for the number of lines 1. In the case of the lost epilogue part of reach A in the first half of SP, there are no subtitles because there are no lines.

Further, in the case of reach B in the first half of SP, the number of subtitles is 3 for the number of lines of 5. Further, in the case of the hit epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, the number of subtitles is 3 for the number of lines 3. In the case of the lost epilogue part of reach B in the first half of SP, there are no subtitles because there are no lines. Further, in the case of the SP latter half reach A, the number of subtitles is 14 with respect to the number of lines 16. Further, in the case of the hit epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A, the number of subtitles is 1 for the number of lines 1. In the case of the lost epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A, the number of subtitles is 1 for the number of lines 1.

Further, in the case of the reach B in the latter half of the SP, the number of subtitles is 7 with respect to the number of lines 9. Further, in the case of the hit epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B, the number of subtitles is 3 for the number of lines 3. In the case of the lost epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B, the number of subtitles is 1 for the number of lines 1. Further, in the case of the SP final reach, the number of subtitles is 19 for the number of lines of 27. Further, in the case of the epilogue part hitting the final reach of the SP, the number of subtitles is 2 for the number of lines 2. In the case of the lost epilogue part of the SP final reach, the number of subtitles is 1 for the number of lines 1.

(Epilogue 2)
As shown in FIG. 175, the ratio of displaying subtitles for the character's dialogue in the epilogue part is higher than the ratio of displaying subtitles for the character in SP reach, which is the fanning part. According to this, by displaying the subtitles firmly in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easy to understand what the character is speaking. In addition, in the hit epilogue part, subtitles can be used to coordinate the feeling of blessing. In addition, since the screen changes more frequently in the fanning part than in the epilogue part, even if the subtitles are displayed, the display time will be shortened so that the production will not be disturbed by the auxiliary subtitle display. , It is possible to give the first priority to convey the effect by switching images. As a result, it is possible to perform a suitable effect in the fanning part.

(Epilogue 3)
As shown in FIG. 175, the epilogue part is configured to always display subtitles for dialogue. According to this, the blessing can be emphasized by clearly showing what the character is speaking in the hit epilogue part.

(Epilogue 5)
As shown in FIG. 175, there are a plurality of types of SP reach, which is a fanning part, and the development of the production is different for each, and the number of lines is also different. However, in any SP reach, the ratio of displaying subtitles for the character's dialogue in the epilogue part is higher than the ratio of displaying subtitles for the character in SP reach. According to this, it is possible to make it easy to understand what the character is speaking by firmly displaying the subtitles in the epilogue part regardless of which SP reach is executed. In addition, in the hit epilogue part, subtitles can be used to coordinate the feeling of blessing. In addition, since there are more screen changes in the fanning part than in the epilogue part, it is possible to prevent the production from being disturbed by the auxiliary subtitle display, with the first priority being to convey the effect by switching images. .. As a result, it is possible to perform a suitable effect in the fanning part.

[About re-lottery production 1, 4, 5, 7-18]
In FIGS. 176 and 177, the feature portions in the re-lottery part will be described by numbering.

(Detailed explanation of the re-lottery part)
FIG. 176 is a detailed explanatory view of parts (A1) to (A23) in the re-lottery part. FIG. 177 is a detailed explanatory view of the portions (A24) to (A46) in the re-lottery part.

When the jackpot display result is derived, the symbol is enlarged and displayed as shown in (A1) and (A2), and then the symbol is reduced as shown in (A3) and (A4). After that, as shown in (A5), the design becomes a normal size. Then, as shown in (A6), the background is switched to the background for the re-lottery effect, and the re-lottery effect starts. Here, from the state of (A5) to the state of (A6), the period in which the symbol is swaying is omitted. Specifically, when the design is the normal size, the design is shaking. Then, after reaching the normal size, the pattern shaking of the re-lottery part continues. At this time, at the timing related to the completion of the symbol output (for example, the timing immediately before the normal size, the timing after the normal size, the timing to start the symbol shaking, etc.), the game effect lamp 9 is set. It switches from blinking white to smooth lighting in rainbow color. As a result, it is possible to smoothly print out the symbol from the symbol to the re-lottery effect, shift to a smooth shaking period, and bless the pattern by emitting light from the screen and the lamp.

After that, as shown in (A7) and (A8), there is a shaking period in which the symbol swings up and down. After that, as shown in (A9) and (A10), the "2" symbol located at the center is temporarily reduced. After that, all of "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" used as decorative patterns from (A11) to (A23) are displayed. High-speed fluctuation is performed at. After that, all of "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" used as decorative patterns are displayed again from (A10') to (A23'). High-speed fluctuation is performed in this manner.

Then, as shown in (A24), after all the decorations have been cycled for two cycles, the button image is slightly displayed together with the initially displayed "2" symbol. After that, from (A25) to (A46), the decorative design fluctuates at high speed as "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and the passage of time. The time gauge displayed below the button image decreases according to. The time gauge is a display showing the validity period of the button operation. If the push button 31B is operated within the operation valid period, or if the push button 31B is not operated within the operation valid period and the effective period of the button operation ends, an odd number is shown as shown in FIGS. 157 to 164. The symbol or even symbol is derived and displayed, and the game shifts to a big hit.

(Re-lottery production 1)
As shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and shaken, and then the "2" symbol is used as it is for the re-lottery. The production starts. At the start of the re-extraction effect, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the change of the re-lottery effect is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery effect, a symbol feed effect is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery effect is started using the decorative symbol that was once temporarily stopped, and at the start of the re-lottery effect, the symbol feed effect is executed using the symbol that was once temporarily stopped. , It is easy for the player to understand from which decorative pattern the re-lottery started. As a result, the flow of a series of productions can be shown well.

(Re-lottery production 4)
At the start of the symbol feed effect in the re-lottery effect, the fluctuation starts from the reduced state of the decorative symbol that has been displayed from the hit epilogue part. According to this, it is possible to show the flow of a series of effects well without executing the process of changing to a different decorative pattern.

(Re-lottery production 5)
In the symbol feed effect, the variation is started by the reduced symbol, and the size of the variable symbol is a uniform reduced size. According to this, it is possible to smooth the appearance of the fluctuation at the time of the pattern feed effect, and it is possible to show the flow of a series of effects well.

(Re-lottery production 7)
As shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and shaken, and then the "2" symbol is used as it is for the re-lottery. The production starts. At the start of the re-extraction effect, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the change of the re-lottery effect is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery effect, a symbol feed effect is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations from the "2" symbol. Then, during the re-lottery production, all the decorative symbols such as "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" are sent in order, and then "2" is sent again. The symbol feed effect in which the symbol is displayed is executed. In this way, the re-lottery effect is started using the decorative symbol that was once temporarily stopped, and the decorative symbol that was initially temporarily stopped is displayed again after the variation of the plurality of types of decorative symbols. According to this, the flow of a series of effects can be clearly shown by the pattern feed effect in which the final display result is not displayed immediately and all the decorative patterns are shown.

(Re-lottery production 8)
In the symbol feed effect in the re-lottery effect, all the decorative symbols such as "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" are sent in order, and then "2" again. , "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1" and all the decorative patterns are sent in order. In this way, since the numbers of the decorative patterns are sent in order, it is possible to show the flow of a series of productions well.

(Re-lottery production 9)
In the symbol feed effect in the re-lottery effect, all the symbols are displayed by the transparency of the symbols when temporarily stopped, and the transparency is increased during the fluctuation. Specifically, a "2" symbol with 0% transmittance, a "2" symbol with 50% transmittance, a "3" symbol with 0% transmittance, a "3" symbol with 50% transmittance, and transparency. The symbols are switched, such as a "4" symbol with a degree of 0% and a "4" symbol with a transmittance of 50%. According to this, all the symbols can be accurately displayed in a mode with low transparency during the symbol feed effect, so that it is possible to grasp what kind of symbol is being fed.

(Re-lottery production 10)
In the symbol feed effect in the re-lottery effect, all the decorative symbols such as "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" are sent in order, but each symbol is sent. The displayed times are the same. According to this, all the symbols can be displayed for a certain period of time, and the flow of a series of productions can be clearly shown.

(Re-lottery production 11)
During the symbol feed effect, the promotion display formed from the button image and the time gauge is displayed. The position where the promotion display is displayed does not overlap with the position where the variation of the decorative symbol during the symbol feed effect is displayed. In this way, since the promotion display does not overlap with the decorative symbol during the symbol feed effect, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the symbol feed. It should be noted that a part of the promotion display may partially overlap with the decorative design during the design feed effect.

(Re-lottery production 12)
As shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the promotion display starts to be displayed at (A24) and (A25) after repeating the variation of displaying all the decorative symbols during the symbol feed effect twice. Since the promotion image is not displayed until the predetermined symbol feed pattern is repeated twice, the player can be made to firmly recognize the symbol feed effect.

(Re-lottery production 13)
The symbol at the start of the re-lottery effect may be other than the two symbols. Even in such a case, the timing at which the button image as the operation promotion display is displayed is constant. For example, in the case of two symbols, the timing at which the operation promotion display is displayed is the timing at which the two symbols are displayed again. Similarly, in the case of the five symbols, the timing at which the operation promotion display is displayed may be the timing at which the five symbols are displayed again. That is, the number of symbols sent is the same regardless of which symbol starts the re-lottery effect. According to this, since the control can be made constant, the processing load can be reduced.

(Re-lottery production 14)
In the lottery effect, a pattern that displays an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) and then an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols), and a pattern that displays an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) and then an odd numbered symbol (for example, 3 symbols) are displayed. It was provided. In addition to this, a pattern for displaying an odd number symbol (for example, 7 symbols) after displaying an odd number symbol (for example, 7 symbols) may be provided. In the effect of sending a symbol from an odd-numbered symbol to an odd-numbered symbol, the same odd-numbered symbol may be sent at the time of symbol feeding. However, regardless of the pattern, the scale of the effect of the symbol feed period in the re-lottery effect may be the same design. According to this, it is possible to obtain a suitable re-lottery effect in any pattern without increasing the data capacity.

(Re-lottery production 15)
In the lottery effect, a pattern in which an even number symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed and then an even number symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed, a pattern in which an even number symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed and then an odd number symbol (for example, 3 symbols) is displayed, Common data is used for any of the patterns in which the odd-numbered symbols (for example, 7 symbols) are displayed and then the odd-numbered symbols (for example, 7 symbols) are displayed. That is, the production data is the same, and the design is such that the data related to the decorative pattern is changed according to the pattern. According to this, since it is not necessary to provide a dedicated pattern, the amount of data can be reduced.

[About fanning 21-27]
In FIGS. 178 to 181, the characteristic portions in the fanning part will be described by numbering.

(Fade effect)
FIG. 178 is a detailed explanatory view of the parts (b4) to (b6) in the fanning part and a comparative view during the jackpot round. In the fanning part, a fade effect is added to the subtitles for the dialogue. The fade effect is an effect composed of a fade-in in which the display gradually becomes clear and a fade-out in which the display gradually disappears. In FIG. 178 (A), a part of the effect to which the fade effect is added in the SP first half reach A, which is the fanning part, will be described.

In the state of (b4), the screen where Yumemu-chan and Baku Chu confront each other is displayed. After that, as shown in (b4'), the subtitle of "I found it" corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line is displayed with a transmittance of 70%. After that, as shown in (b5), the subtitle of "I found it" corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. In this way, the fade-in effect is added when the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue are displayed. In the state of (b4'), the dialogue sound of "I found" is not output, and the dialogue sound is output when the subtitle transmittance is 0% as in the state of (b5). ..

After that, as shown in (b5'), the transparency of "found" corresponding to the line of Baku Chu is transparent to the layer under the subtitle with 0% transmittance of "found" corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line. Subtitles with a rate of 70% are displayed with a fade-in effect. After that, as shown in (b5 ″), the transmittance of the subtitle “found” and the transmittance of the subtitle “found” are both displayed in a state of 40%. After that, as shown in (b6), the subtitle of "found" corresponding to the dialogue of Baku Chu is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. In this way, the subtitle "I found it" corresponding to Yumemu-chan's lines gradually fades out from (b5') to (b6). On the other hand, the subtitles of "found" corresponding to the lines of Baku Chu gradually fade in from (b5') to (b6). In the states of (b5') and (b5''), the serif sound of "found" is not output, and the serif sound is heard when the subtitle transmittance is 0% as in the state of (b6). There is output.

As shown in FIG. 178, during the jackpot round, the effect of the character singing along with the music is executed. For example, in FIG. 178 (B), subtitles (lyrics) are displayed as "I'm sure I'll get it someday" as the song sung by Nana progresses. Immediately after that, the subtitles (lyrics) are displayed as the song progresses, saying "grab with this little hand". If such subtitles (lyrics) during the jackpot round are displayed continuously, the fade effect is not added. This is because when the music is playing, the progress of the music can be understood by the rhythm, so even if the subtitles (lyrics) are switched without the fade effect, the switching timing is easy to understand.

(Fan 21)
In the fanning part, as shown in FIG. 178 (A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed for the dialogue of the character. When the subtitles are displayed, there is a period in which the display period of the first subtitle displayed first and the display period of the second subtitle displayed next overlap each other. A fade effect is added when the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap each other. Due to the fade effect, changes occur when the transmittance of the displayed characters is different. According to this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap each other, the change of the subtitles can be easily understood by the fade effect, so that the switching of the subtitles can be easily understood.

(Fan 22)
As shown in FIG. 178 (A), in the scene where the characters face each other, the first subtitle corresponding to the dialogue of one character is displayed, and then the second subtitle corresponding to the dialogue of another character is displayed. There are times. In this case, the second subtitle is displayed overlapping the portion where the first subtitle is displayed with a transmittance of 0% and the second subtitle is displayed with a transmittance of 70%. After that, the first subtitle fades out, the second subtitle fades in, and the transmittance is displayed as 0%. According to this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the switching of the subtitles is easy to understand due to the fade effect.

(Modified example of subtitle display)
When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed at the overlapping timing, the fade effect may be added to one of the two subtitles instead of adding the fade effect to both of the two subtitles. .. Specifically, a pattern in which the first subtitle display is not given a fade effect but a second subtitle display is given a fade effect, the first subtitle display is given a fade effect, and the second subtitle display is given a fade effect. A pattern without the mark is conceivable. Either pattern may be applied by substituting the pattern for adding the fade effect to the first subtitle display described above and adding the fade effect to the second subtitle display. Further, when adding a fade effect, the second subtitle display may be superimposed on the first subtitle display, or the second subtitle display may be superimposed on the first subtitle display.

Further, when the timing of displaying the subtitles overlaps, the subtitles for the dialogue between the first character and the second character have been described. However, when the same character continuously emits lines, the subtitle display for the first line may be overlapped with the subtitle display for the second line. In such a case, a fade effect may be added to the subtitle display.

(Fan 24)
As shown in FIG. 178, during the jackpot round, the effect of the character singing along with the music is executed. Then, subtitles (lyrics) are displayed as the song progresses. However, during the jackpot round, the fade effect is not added even if the subtitles (lyrics) are displayed continuously. This is because when the music is playing, the progress of the music can be understood by the rhythm, so even if the subtitles (lyrics) are switched without adding a fade effect, the timing of switching is easy to understand. Further, since the music during the jackpot round is a typical music of the content mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, the lyrics displayed next are easy for the player to understand without adding a fade effect. According to this, the work of adding the fade effect can be omitted during the jackpot round, and a series of effects can be shown well.

(Relationship between subtitle transmittance and sound output)
FIG. 179 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the transmittance of subtitles for dialogue and the output of sound. FIG. 179 shows the situation when the line "I found" of Yumemu-chan in FIG. 178 (A) and the line "I found" of Baku Chu are issued. In FIG. 179, the horizontal axis of the graph indicates the number of frames. The subtitle of "I found it" is displayed with a transmittance of 70% after one frame from the transmittance of 100%. Further, one frame later, the transmittance is displayed at 0%. As a result, the subtitle of "I found it" is displayed with a fade-in effect over a period of 2 frames. During this period, the "I found it" line sound was not output.

After that, the subtitles of "I found" are displayed with a transmittance of 0% during the period when the dialogue sound of "I found" is output. Then, in the period of T1 which is a silent period of 3 frames after the output of the dialogue sound of "found" is completed, the subtitle of "found" is continuously displayed with a transmittance of 0% for 2 frames. .. After that, the subtitle of "I found it" is displayed with a transmittance of 0% to 100% for the remaining 1 frame of T1. As a result, the subtitle of "I found it" is displayed with a fade-out effect over a period of one frame.

Also, during the T1 period, the "found" dialogue sound is not output, but the "found" subtitles have a fade-in effect starting from one frame after the start of the T1 period. Is displayed. Specifically, the "found" subtitle is displayed with a transmittance of 70% after one frame from the transmittance of 100%. Further, one frame later, the transmittance is displayed at 0%. As a result, the "found" subtitles are displayed with a fade-in effect over a two-frame period.

After that, during the period when the "found" dialogue sound is output, the "found" subtitles are displayed with a transmittance of 0%. Then, in the period of T2, which is a silent period of 3 frames after the output of the "found" serif sound is completed, the "found" subtitles are continuously displayed with a transmittance of 0% for 2 frames. After that, the subtitle "found" is displayed with a transmittance of 0% to 100% for the remaining one frame of T2. As a result, the "found" subtitles are displayed with a fade-out effect over a period of one frame.

As shown in FIG. 179, the first subtitle of "found" corresponding to Yumemu-chan's character and the second subtitle of "found" corresponding to the character of Baku Chu have the same fade-in and fade-out fades. The effect is added. Further, the fade-in is executed over a period of two frames, while the fade-out is executed over a period of one frame.

(Fan 23)
As shown in FIG. 179, the output timing of the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle of "found" is displayed so that the first subtitle and the second subtitle overlap, and are output during the period when the fade effect is applied. Not done. Then, the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is output from the time when the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 0%. According to this, in addition to making it easy to understand the switching of subtitles due to the fade effect, since the dialogue sound is output after the second subtitle is displayed, it is possible to make it easier to grasp the content of the effect visually and audibly.

(Contrast of subtitles in the fanning part and the epilogue part)
FIG. 180 is a detailed explanatory view of the parts (b4) to (b6) and a detailed explanatory view of the parts (o3) to (o5). FIG. 180 (A) is a detailed explanatory view of the portions (b4) to (b6) in the fanning part. Further, FIG. 180 (B) is a detailed explanatory view of the portions (o3) to (o5). FIGS. 180 (A) and 180 (B) are common in that subtitles are continuously displayed for the lines emitted by the two characters. However, the period from the display of the first subtitle to the display of the second subtitle is different between FIGS. 180 (A) and 180 (B).

As shown in FIG. 180 (A), in the portions (b4) to (b7), in (b4), Yumemu-chan and Baku Chu confront each other. After that, in (b5), the first subtitle corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line "I found it" is displayed. Then, in (b6), the second subtitle corresponding to the line "found" of Baku Chu is displayed. After that, in (b6'), Yume-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. After that, the subtitles corresponding to Yumemu-chan's line "I'll catch you!" Are displayed. The time t1 from the start of (b4) to the end of (b6) is about 3 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 180 (B), in the parts (o3) to (o5), in (o3), the shop where the crab that was defeated with Jam and Nana became a signboard is displayed, and Jam's line "Good". The first subtitle corresponding to "Signboard" is displayed. After that, from (o3') to (o3'), the background of the shop where the crab without subtitles is a signboard is displayed. After that, in (o4), the second subtitle corresponding to Nana-chan's line "Work hard" is displayed. After that, the background of the shop where the crab became a signboard becomes a still image. The time t1 from the start of (o3) to the end of (o5) is about 10 seconds.

As shown in FIGS. 180A and 180B, the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue are displayed a plurality of times in one scene (period 0 to t1 or period 0 to t2) in the fanning part and the epilogue part. In some cases. When the subtitles are displayed a plurality of times and there is a margin in the time scale, it is conceivable to make it easier to understand the switching of the subtitle display by deleting the once displayed subtitle display. However, when there is no time scale such as the period from 0 to t1, it is difficult to take measures to temporarily delete the subtitle display. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, it is possible to make it easier to understand the switching of subtitles by adding a fade effect to the subtitle display.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a video is first created, and then voices such as dialogue are added. After that, the subtitle display corresponding to each line is attached. If it is assumed that the period from 0 to t1 where a large amount of time cannot be taken and the period for temporarily erasing the subtitle display is lengthened, it takes time and effort. Therefore, by adding a fade effect, it is possible to make it easier to understand the switching of subtitles without recreating the video. In addition, even if there is a margin in the time scale such as the epilogue part when the crab sign shop is displayed, by adding a uniform fade effect, the overall work load is reduced and when switching subtitles It is possible to prevent a feeling of strangeness from occurring.

(Fan 26)
As shown in FIG. 180, the fade effect is added to the subtitle display even in the predetermined scenes in the portions (o3) to (o5) where the first subtitle and the second subtitle do not cover. As for the fade effect, at least one of the fade-in effect and the fade-out effect may be added. In the subtitle display created after the video is created, it takes time and effort to add a fade effect depending on whether or not the subtitle display is covered. Therefore, by uniformly adding a fade effect to the subtitle display, it is possible to prevent the work load from increasing.

(Fan 25)
Here, although not shown, the timing of subtitle display may overlap even in the epilogue part. However, as shown in FIG. 180, in the epilogue part, there are many scenes in which the period from the subtitle display to the subtitle display is longer than that in the fan part. This is because the production of the fanning part progresses quickly, and the epilogue part does not progress as fast as the fanning part. As a result, the proportion of the fanned part being displayed at the timing when the subtitles are overlapped is higher than that of the epilogue part. In such a case, by effectively adding a fade effect to the subtitle display, it is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort when switching the subtitles.

[About fanning 27]
In FIG. 181, the characteristic portion in the fanning part will be described by numbering.

(Fan 27)
FIG. 181 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of subtitle display. For example, as shown in Comparative Example 1 of FIG. 181 (A), subtitles for similar lines such as "found" and "found" may be continuously displayed. In such a case, if the subtitle display is switched without any fade effect and without a blank period, it becomes difficult to understand the switching of the subtitle display. Also, regarding the display of subtitles for long lines and the display of subtitles for fast-moving lines, there is a possibility that a sense of incongruity may occur when the subtitles are switched without providing a blank period. In such a case, the discomfort can be eliminated by adding a fade effect to the subtitle display. Further, as shown in Comparative Example 2 of FIG. 181 (B), it is conceivable to superimpose "found" on the subtitle display of "found" and then display "found". In such a case, the subtitle display becomes difficult to see by not adding the fade effect. Further, as shown in Comparative Example 3 of FIG. 181 (C), it is conceivable to display the subtitle display of "found" and the subtitle display of "found" in two upper and lower rows. In such a case, since the display area of the effect is reduced by the subtitle display, the effect is hindered in the area other than the area where the subtitle display is displayed. On the other hand, such a problem can be solved by adding a fade effect to the subtitle display as in the present embodiment.

[About Epilogue 23]
In FIG. 182, the feature portions in the epilogue part will be described by numbering.

FIG. 182 is a detailed explanatory view of the portions (B4) to (B11). FIG. 182 describes the correspondence between the effect using the decorative pattern or the small pattern on the screen and the effect using the game effect lamp 9. As shown in (B4), the enlarged "3" symbol is reduced in the effect of displaying the symbol of the re-lottery part. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time blinks in white. Then, as shown in (B5), the "3" symbol is displayed in a normal size. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time blinks in a rainbow color. Next, as shown in (B6), the "3" symbol is slightly shaken up and down. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time blinks in a rainbow color.

Then, as shown in (B7), the screen changes from the background for re-lottery to the normal background, and in this normal background, the "3" symbol is continuously slightly shaken up and down. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time blinks in a rainbow color. After that, as shown in (B8), the decorative symbol and the small symbol are fixed and stopped based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time blinks in a rainbow color. As shown in (B9), the symbol determination period continues for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 s), and the same display as in (B8) is maintained on the screen. As for the mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time, the lighting mode of blinking rainbow colors is maintained.

After that, based on the reception of the fanfare command, the mode of the game effect lamp 9 is switched after about 10 msec to support fanfare. Further, based on the reception of the fanfare command, the screen is switched after about 33 msec to display "FEVER". Specifically, as shown in (D1), the screen maintains the state of (B9) during the fanfare period after receiving the fanfare command. On the other hand, the aspect of the game effect lamp 9 is switched to the fanfare correspondence earlier than the aspect of the screen. The aspect of the game effect lamp 9 in (D1) is extinguished. Then, as shown in (D2), the screen is switched to a screen in which the characters "FEVER" indicating the fanfare mode and Yumemu-chan are displayed behind the mode of the game effect lamp 9. Further, the game effect lamp 9 at this time maintains a lighting mode corresponding to fanfare.

[About Epilogue 28-31]
In FIG. 183, the feature portions in the epilogue part will be described by numbering.

FIG. 183 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of patterning. In the modified example, the design may be executed in the order of (Y1) to (Y7). Specifically, as shown in (Y1), the decorative symbols (reduced symbols) reduced in the scene of catching the Baku Chu are aligned in the state of "222" at the upper left of the screen. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 of the thing is rainbow lighting (smooth). Then, as shown in (Y2), the screen becomes a still image and the reduced symbol sways slightly up and down. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is rainbow lighting (smooth).

Then, as shown in (Y3), the reduced decorative pattern on the upper left of the screen is temporarily erased. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is rainbow lighting (smooth). Next, as shown in (Y4), the decoration of "222" that has been erased from the center of the screen is enlarged and displayed. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is blinking white. Next, as shown in (Y5), the decorative symbol of "222" is enlarged and displayed from the state of (Y4). The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is blinking white. Next, as shown in (Y6), the decorative symbol of "222" is enlarged and displayed from the state of (Y5). The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is blinking white. Next, as shown in (Y7), the decorative symbol of "222" is enlarged and displayed from the state of (Y6). The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is blinking white.

In the design of the modified example, the decorative design moves to the upper left corner of the screen in the reach mode at the start of SP reach, and the symbols are aligned at the hit epilogue part as shown in (Y1). Then, the reduced symbol once deleted after the reduced symbol shaking period as shown in (Y2) is enlarged from the position at the center of the screen, and the first effect of the symbol is executed.

(Epilogue 28)
In the hit epilogue part, when the images constituting the hit epilogue are sequentially displayed (the state in which the image of the hit epilogue is flowing), the decorative symbol is located at the edge side in the display area of the screen (in the upper left corner of the screen). Position). In relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the epilogue image ends, the reduced symbol is erased and the effect of displaying the enlarged symbol is executed using the central area of the screen. Further, the luminance data table switches from the luminance data table corresponding to the hit epilogue part to the luminance data table corresponding to the pattern output in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image. According to this, when the image of the hit epilogue part is flowing, the reduced symbol is positioned on the edge side of the screen so that the image of the hit epilogue part is not disturbed, and the development of the image of the hit epilogue part is completed and the symbol is put out. When doing so, the jackpot symbol can be emphasized and shown to the player by enlarging the decorative symbol so as to be continuous using the edge side of the screen and the center of the screen. Further, by switching the luminance data table, it is possible to make the scene switching look suitable. In this way, the hit epilogue part can be made to look good.

(Epilogue 29)
In the hit epilogue part, when the images constituting the hit epilogue are sequentially displayed (the state in which the image of the hit epilogue is flowing), the decorative symbol is located at the edge side in the display area of the screen (in the upper left corner of the screen). Position) is displayed in the same state as "222". According to this, the player can be made to recognize that the big hit display result is obtained by the reduced decorative pattern even while the hit epilogue image is being played.

(Epilogue 30)
In the hit epilogue part, when the images constituting the hit epilogue are sequentially displayed (the state in which the image of the hit epilogue is flowing), the decorative symbol is located at the edge side in the display area of the screen (in the upper left corner of the screen). Position) is displayed. In addition, the subtitle display displayed in (Y1) is erased, the reduced symbol at the upper left corner is erased, and the center of the screen is erased in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the epilogue image ends. The decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the area. According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from being displayed overlapping with the decorative pattern and being misunderstood that some message is being displayed when the pattern is displayed, and the hit epilogue part is preferably used. I can show you.

(Epilogue 31)
In the modified example, the decorative symbol moves to the upper left corner of the screen in the reach mode at the start of SP reach. According to this, by positioning the position from the start of the SP reach, it is possible to prevent the development of the production from being disturbed even during the SP reach, and it is possible to make a series of productions look suitable.

184 to 187 are diagrams for explaining a modified example of the re-lottery. In the modified example, for example, a case where the re-lottery is executed from the symbol appearance in the order of (F1) to (F12) will be described. Specifically, after the symbol is enlarged and displayed as shown in (F1) and (F2), the symbol is reduced as shown in (F3) and (F4). After that, as shown in (F5), the design becomes a normal size. Then, as shown in (F6), the background is switched to the background for the re-lottery effect, and the re-lottery effect starts. After that, as shown in (F7), there is a shaking period in which the symbol swings up and down. After that, the "3" symbol is reduced and displayed from (F8) to (F9).

After that, as shown in (F10), the button image and the time gauge are slightly displayed under the "3" symbol. After that, as shown in (F11), the button image and the time gauge are clearly displayed with the "3" symbol displayed. Then, as shown in (F12), the time gauge decreases with the passage of time. The time gauge is a display showing the validity period of the button operation.

FIG. 185 shows a case where the player operates the push button 31B from the state of (F12). FIG. 185 describes the re-lottery effect executed in (G1) to (G27). When the player operates the push button 31B from the state of (F12), "3", "4", "5", "6", which are used as decorative patterns from (G1) to (G13), High-speed fluctuation is performed in such a manner that "7", "1", and "2" are all displayed. After that, as shown in (G14), the "3" symbol that was displayed before the high-speed fluctuation is displayed.

After that, the symbol is enlarged and displayed as shown in (G15) and (G16), and then the symbol is reduced as shown in (G17) and (G18). After that, as shown in (G19), the design becomes a normal size. Then, the background is switched to the background for shaking the pattern. Here, as the symbol shaking, the operation of shaking the symbol is executed by rotating the symbol between the back side and the front side on the screen. Specifically, after the design sways to the back side from (G20) to (G21), the design changes to the initial position by swaying to the front side from (G22) to (G23). After that, the design swings toward the front side from (G24) to (G25), and then changes to the initial position by swinging the design toward the back side from (G26) to (G27).

FIG. 186 shows a case where the player does not operate the push button 31B from the state of (F12). FIG. 186 describes the re-lottery effect executed in (H1) to (H27). If the player does not operate the push button 31B from the state of (F12), the "3" symbol remains displayed from (H1) to (H6), and the time gauge decreases with the passage of time. .. After that, as shown in (H7), the button image is slightly displayed and the button image is erased. After that, all of "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and "2" used as decorative patterns from (H8) to (H20) are displayed. High-speed fluctuation is performed at. After that, as shown in (H21), the "3" symbol that was displayed before the high-speed fluctuation is displayed.

After that, the symbol is enlarged and displayed as shown in (H22) and (H23), and then the symbol is reduced as shown in (H24) and (H25). After that, as shown in (H26), the design becomes a normal size. Then, as shown in (H27), the background is switched to the background shown in (G20) to (G27). The movement of designing in (H22) to (H26) when the push button 31B is not operated is the same as the movement of designing in (G15) to (G19) when the push button 31B is operated. However, when the push button 31B is operated, the time of the decrease in the time gauge when the push button 31B is not operated is absorbed in the period during which the effect of shaking the three symbols is executed. That is, no matter when the button is operated, the period until the button is operated is absorbed by the scale of the effect that shakes the three symbols.

Then, after (G27) or (H27), the effect as shown in FIG. 187 is executed. FIG. 187 describes the re-lottery effect executed in (J1) to (J18). After (G27) or (H27), the screen temporarily whites out as shown in (J1). After that, the "3" symbol makes one rotation from (J2) to (J9). Specifically, from the state of (J2), counterclockwise around the vertical direction of "3 symbols" (J3), (J4), (J5), (J6), (J7), (J8), ( It rotates with J9). Since the movement of rotation is fast, it seems that the design rotates in an instant.

After that, as shown in (J10), after the "3" symbol is reduced and displayed, the symbol swings to the back side from (J11) to (J12), and then the symbol is moved to the front side from (J13) to (J14). It changes to the initial position by shaking. After that, the design swings toward the front side from (J15) to (J16), and then changes to the initial position by swinging the design toward the back side from (J17) to (J18). The movement of the symbol swaying from (J11) to (J18) is the same as the movement of the symbol swaying from (G20) to (G27). Then, in (J18), the symbol stops neatly at the normal position.

[About Loss 1-7]
The featured parts of the lost epilogue part will be numbered and explained.

(About the design confirmation period)
FIG. 188 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the symbol determination period. FIG. 188 (X1) is a diagram showing the timing of the winning / failing determination corresponding to (r54) in FIG. 132. The details of the symbol determination period when shifting from this state to the hit epilogue part will be described with reference to (X2) to (X5). In addition, the details of the symbol determination period in the case of shifting from the state of (X1) to the lost epilogue part will be described with reference to (X6) to (X9).

When shifting from the state of (X1) to the hit epilogue part, as shown in (X2), the image of the state of (s5) in which the explosion chew is captured is displayed. After that, as shown in (X3), after being controlled by the normal screen, the symbol confirmation period as in (B8) is set. The symbol confirmation period is continued for 0.5 s after receiving the symbol confirmation designation command. After that, as shown in (X4), the fanfare period as shown in (B11) is reached. After that, as shown in (X5), the jackpot round period is reached.

When shifting from the state of (X1) to the lost epilogue part, as shown in (X6), an image of the state of regret (u2) in which the Baku Chu was not caught is displayed. After that, as shown in (X7), the background is blacked out and a symbol combination indicating the loss display result of "232" is displayed. After that, as shown in (X8), an eye-catching image on which a character image having an effect of attracting the player's eyes is drawn is displayed. After that, after being controlled by the normal screen, the symbol confirmation period such as (X9) is set. The symbol confirmation period is continued for 0.5 s after receiving the symbol confirmation designation command. If there is a hold memory corresponding to the next variation display after the symbol confirmation period ends, the next variation display is started.

(Detailed explanation of blackout)
FIG. 189 is a detailed explanatory view of the blackout. The details of the blackout will be described in the order of FIGS. 189 (X10) to (X22). As shown in (X10), an image of the unfortunate (u2) state in which the Baku Chu was not caught is displayed. From this state, the blackout background is displayed with the transmittance gradually reduced, and the background of the medium symbol indicating "3", which is one of the decorative symbols displayed in the center, gradually decreases the transmittance. It is displayed. By lowering the transmittance, the blackout background gradually becomes darker, and the middle pattern gradually becomes clearer.

After (X10), as shown in (X11), the transmittance of the blackout background is 70%, and the transmittance of the middle symbol is 100%. After that, as shown in (X12), the transmittance of the blackout background is displayed at 60%, and the transmittance of the medium symbol is displayed at 90%. After that, as shown in (X13), the transmittance of the blackout background is displayed at 50%, and the transmittance of the medium symbol is displayed at 80%. After that, as shown in (X14), the transmittance of the blackout background is displayed at 40%, and the transmittance of the medium symbol is displayed at 60%. After that, as shown in (X15), the transmittance of the blackout background is displayed at 30%, and the transmittance of the medium symbol is displayed at 40%. After that, as shown in (X16), the transmittance of the blackout background is displayed at 20%, and the transmittance of the medium symbol is displayed at 20%. After that, as shown in (X17), the transmittance of the blackout background is displayed at 10%, and the transmittance of the medium symbol is displayed at 0%. After that, as shown in (X18), the transmittance of the blackout background is displayed as 0%, and the transmittance of the medium symbol is displayed as 0%.

After that, the symbol "3" symbol, which is the middle symbol, sways up and down from (X19) to (X20) during the symbol sway period. After the symbol shaking period, an eye-catching image is displayed as shown in (X21). After that, as shown in (X22), the symbol determination period is reached. As shown in FIG. 189, the background blackout starts earlier than the medium symbol fade-in, and the background blackout has more transmittance switching stages than the medium symbol fade-in. ..

(Loss 1)
As shown in FIG. 188, when a loss occurs after the winning / failing determination, the loss symbol is displayed in the loss epilogue part at the blackout background. After that, after the switching image by the eye-catching screen is displayed, the screen is switched to the normal background at the start of reach. According to this, the eye-catching screen makes it possible to preferably show the switching of the screen at the time of loss.

(Loss 2)
As shown in FIG. 189, in the loss epilogue part, the middle symbol gradually fades in while the background at the time of loss gradually blacks out. According to this, since the image at the time of loss and the middle symbol are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between the blackout and the fade-in, the display at the time of loss can be preferably shown due to the relationship between the two.

(Loss 3)
As shown in FIG. 189, in the loss epilogue part, the number of steps required to black out the background at the time of loss from 100% to 0% transmittance fades the middle symbol from 100% to 0%. There are more steps than required to get in. Specifically, the background blackout has eight stages from (X11) to (X18), while the middle symbol fade-in has six stages from (X12) to (X17). According to this, the image at the time of loss and the middle symbol are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between the blackout and the fade-in, and the number of steps for changing the transmittance is different. Can be shown favorably.

(Loss 4)
As shown in FIG. 189, the change in which the background at the time of loss is blacked out is started before the change in which the middle symbol fades in. According to this, the image at the time of loss and the middle symbol are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between the blackout and the fade-in, and the blackout is faster than the fade-in of the symbol. The time display can be shown favorably.

(Loss 5)
In the image at the time of loss before blackout, the displayed image is switched, whereas in the image at the time of blackout, there is no change in the displayed image. According to this, the blackout can be made to look good by starting the blackout in the state of the image without change. It should be noted that switching the image includes switching the picture on the screen, switching the angle of the image, and switching the displayed scene itself. Further, the fact that there is no change in the image includes that the image is the same still image, that the angle of the image does not change even if it is a moving image, and that even if it is moving, only a part of the image is moving minutely.

(Loss 6)
As the background at the time of loss is blacked out and the middle symbol fades in, as shown in (X18) to (X20), the medium symbol with a transmittance of 0% and the transmittance are 0%. The blacked out background of is displayed for a predetermined period. This predetermined period includes a symbol shaking period as shown in (X19) to (X20). The symbol shaking period may be such that the cycle of moving the middle symbol from the center position to the upper position, the center position, the lower position, and the center position is one cycle, and the symbol shaking is repeated for at least two cycles. The predetermined period including such a period may be set longer than the period during which the fade-in is executed from the state where the medium symbol has a transmittance of 100% to the state of the transmittance of 0%. Further, the predetermined period may be set longer than the period during which the eye catch is displayed. According to this, in the display in which the background is blacked out with a transmittance of 0%, there is a predetermined period in which the middle symbol is displayed in a clear state, so that it is possible to preferably show that there is a loss.

(Loss 7)
As shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, on the eye-catching screen, the characters "POWERFULII" in the title and images of the main characters Yumemu-chan, Jam-chan, and Nana-chan are displayed as information on the pachinko gaming machine 1. Will be done. According to this, the information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be accurately transmitted by the eye-catching image.

[About Loss 8, 10 to 17]
The featured parts of the lost epilogue part will be numbered and explained.

(About the game effect lamp at the time of loss)
FIG. 190 is a detailed explanatory view of the game effect lamp at the time of loss and a diagram for explaining a modified example at the time of loss. FIG. 190 also describes a lighting mode of the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50. FIGS. 190 (X30) to (X36) are detailed explanatory views of the game effect lamp at the time of loss, and FIGS. 190 (X40) to (X46) are diagrams showing a modified example at the time of loss. The example shown in FIG. 190 shows the effect at the time of loss in the SP final reach, but with respect to the effect at the time of loss in other reach such as SP first half reach A and B and SP second half reach A and B. The technique shown in FIG. 190 may be applied.

In the present embodiment, the luminance data table at the time of loss is used from the effect that the six ally characters of (X30) are disappointed to the effect that the background image of (X31) is blacked out. The luminance data table at the time of loss shown in FIG. 190 corresponds to the grandchild table specified by the time tu1 to tu3 of the child table WD17 in the loss epilogue part shown in FIG. 216, which will be described later.

After the background image is blacked out, an eye-catching image is displayed. The eye-catching image is an image that attracts the attention of the player, and in the present embodiment, as a result of a series of effects in the SP reach, the eye-catching image is drawn before the lost symbol is derived (temporarily stopped) and returned to the normal screen. The image is displayed.

From the switching period to the eye-catching screen of (X32) to the display of the eye-catching screen of (X33), the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used. After that, via the switching period to the normal screen of (X34) and the symbol confirmation period of (X35), the background changes to the next variation of (X36) executed when the variation pattern command with hold is received. Luminance data table is used. The luminance data table for the background shown in FIG. 190 corresponds to the grandchild table 26 specified by the time tu4 of the child table WD17 in the lost epilogue part shown in FIG. 216, which will be described later.

It should be noted that the brightness data table for the background is maintained even when the customer waiting command is received when there is no hold after the symbol determination period of (X35). In response to receiving the customer waiting command, the effect screen may be displayed as a demonstration, and the brightness data table for the demonstration may be used.

In relation to the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is blinking from (X30) to (X34). Then, by receiving the symbol confirmation command, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is turned off in the state of (X35). After that, by receiving the fluctuation pattern command when there is a hold, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 blinks in the state of (X36). When there is no hold after the symbol confirmation period of (X35), the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is kept off even if a customer waiting command is received.

Further, as a modification at the time of loss, the luminance data table in each state may be different from that of the present embodiment. Specifically, from the disappointment of (X40) to the background blackout of (X41), the luminance data table at the time of loss is used. After that, the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is displayed over the (X42) eye-catching screen switching period, (X43) eye-catching screen, (X44) normal screen switching period, and (X45) symbol confirmation period. It may be used. Then, in the next variation of (X36), the luminance data table for the background may be used.

Here, the first luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye catching) has a greater luminance than the final luminance data (turning off) in the luminance data table before the eye catch display (at the time of loss). Further, the first luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye catching) has a greater luminance than the first luminance data in the luminance data table (excluding extinguishing lights) corresponding to the background at the start of fluctuation.

(Loss 8)
The characteristic part of the detailed explanatory view of the game effect lamp 9 at the time of loss will be described. The effect screen is switched to the image at the time of loss after the effect of determining whether or not to win. After that, after the blackout display in which the loss display result is displayed, the screen is switched to the eye-catching screen. After that, a screen is displayed in which the symbol is fixed and stopped after the screen is switched to the normal screen. Further, the luminance data table is switched from the luminance data table at the time of winning / failing determination to the luminance data table at the time of losing. After that, it is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye catching). After that, it is switched to the background brightness data table at the start of fluctuation. Here, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen. Further, the luminance data table is switched to the background luminance data table at the timing when the screen is switched to the normal screen. Then, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from blinking to extinguished by receiving the symbol confirmation command, but the brightness data table for the background is not switched by receiving the symbol confirmation command. Further, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from extinguished to blinking by receiving the fluctuation pattern command of the next fluctuation, but the luminance data table for the background is not switched by receiving the symbol confirmation command. According to this, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for the background at the end of the eye-catching screen, and the luminance data table is continued until the next fluctuation. Therefore, the luminance data table corresponding to the reception of the symbol confirmation command is received. It is not necessary to create a separate image, and it is possible to show the effect by the lamp without any discomfort from the effect at the time of loss to the next fluctuation, and it is possible to show a series of effects preferably.

(Loss 10)
After the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background when the eye-catching screen ends, the brightness data table for the background is continuously used even if there is no hold storage and the customer waiting demo designation command is received. According to this, after switching to the brightness data table for the background, the same brightness data table can be continuously used, so that the effect of the lamp can be shown without discomfort, and a series of effects can be shown favorably. Can be done.

(Loss 11)
The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from blinking to extinguished by receiving a symbol confirmation command that triggers an effect of stopping the confirmation of the symbol. According to this, regarding the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50, it is possible to show the player the flow at the time of loss in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Loss 12)
The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from extinguished to blinking by receiving the fluctuation pattern command of the next fluctuation that triggers the start of the next fluctuation. According to this, regarding the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50, it is possible to show the player the flow at the time of loss in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Loss 13)
An example of deformation at the time of loss will be described. The brightness data table at the time of loss is used from the effect that the six ally characters of (X40) are disappointed to the effect that the background image of (X41) is blacked out. After the background image is blacked out, an eye-catching image is displayed. From the switching period to the eye-catching screen of (X42) to the symbol determination period of (X45), the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used. After that, when the variation pattern command with hold is received, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for the background. That is, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye catching) at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, the brightness data table is maintained during the symbol confirmation period, and the background is switched to the next fluctuation. You can switch to the brightness data table of. Further, in the symbol determination period, extinguishing, which is the final luminance data of the luminance data table for switching (for eye catching), is used. According to this, after switching to the background luminance data table, the final luminance data of the switching (for eye-catching) luminance data table is maintained until the next variation pattern command is received, so that it is a loss. Can be easily recognized, and as a result, the loss can be shown favorably.

(Loss 14)
The final luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye catching) is data that is turned off and maintained. Further, the luminance data table for the background does not use the data for keeping the light off. According to this, since the brightness data for keeping the light off is not used in the brightness data table for the background, it is peculiar to the case where the light is turned off when the background is displayed. It is possible to easily recognize that.

(Loss 15)
If there is no hold storage after the symbol is confirmed, the luminance data table for switching (for eye catching) is switched to the luminance data table for the background by receiving the customer waiting designation command. According to this, when the customer waiting designation command is received, the brightness data table for the background is switched to, so that it is possible to easily recognize that the data was lost.

(Loss 16)
The first luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) has a greater luminance than the final luminance data (turned off) in the luminance data table before the display of the eye-catching image (at the time of loss). According to this, since the game effect lamp 9 can emit light with higher brightness than before switching to the eye-catching screen, it is easy to recognize the switching by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9.

(Loss 17)
The first luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye catching) has a higher luminance than the first luminance data in the luminance data table (excluding extinguishing lights) corresponding to the background at the start of fluctuation. According to this, since the game effect lamp 9 can emit light with high brightness when switching to the eye-catching screen, it is easy to recognize the switching by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9.

[About 8-12]
The characteristic parts in the parts related to the judgment of success or failure will be described by numbering them.

(Detailed explanation of (r48) part)
FIG. 191 is a detailed explanatory view of the portion (r48). FIG. 191 (r48) is a scene in which the final fanning before the decision of success or failure is executed. FIG. 191 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing screen switching, and FIG. 191 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between screen switching and time. As shown in FIG. 191 (A), in the part (r48), after the display of the explosion chew as shown in (r48-1) is displayed, the display of six allies as shown in (r48-2) is displayed. After that, after the display of the explosion chew like (r48-1) is displayed again, the display of 6 allies like (r48-2) is displayed. After that, the switching of the still image between (r48-1) and (r48-2) is repeated, and as shown in FIG. 191 (B), the switching speed gradually increases. Then, the image of the ally character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed with the passage of time.

(Win 8)
The scene before the decision of whether or not to win (r48) in the fanning part is a slow motion period in which the movement of the image is slowed down. In addition, the effect executed before (r48) depicts the movement of the character from a plurality of image data, while the effect executed in (r48) is the image of Baku Chu and six allies. Performed with images. Then, the image of the ally character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed with the passage of time to make the character appear to be operating. Here, if a video is created in the slow motion period using the same amount of image data as in the period other than the slow motion period, the amount of data is small and the movement becomes awkward. However, if a large amount of data is used to smooth the movement during the slow motion period, the capacity becomes too large. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced by reducing the number of images used during the slow motion period and making the character appear to be moving by switching and enlarging the display. The number of images used in the slow motion period may be any number as long as it is smaller than the number other than the slow motion period.

(Win / Fail 9)
As shown in FIG. 191 (B), the switching speed between the image of the ally character and the image of the enemy character gradually increases. According to this, after the image switching speed becomes the fastest, the promotion display prompting the trigger operation is displayed, so that a scene in which the ally character is advantageous is developed or a scene in which the enemy character is advantageous is developed. It will be possible to inspire whether or not the game will be developed, and the interest will improve. In addition, by switching the images alternately, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the ally character and the enemy character are each executed using one image.

(Win 10)
The production of the slow motion period in (r48) may be executed at the timing of development from the SP first half reach to the SP second half reach and the SP final reach. According to this, the production can be suitably executed even at the timing of developing from the reach of the first half of the SP.

(Win 11)
In the slow motion period in (r48), at least one of the ally character and the enemy character may be configured by using two or more images. For example, in the case of a ally character, by repeatedly using four images such as image 1, image 2, image 3, image 4, image 1, ..., the character's hair and clothes may appear to move gradually. good. According to this, by changing only a part of the data while diverting the data of the character itself, it is possible to more faithfully express the state of operation while reducing the amount of data change work.

(Win 12)
In the slow motion period in (r48), when the character's hair and clothes appear to move gradually from a plurality of images, the movement of the hair and clothes is made to move at the same speed as the period other than the slow motion period. It may be a visible design. Here, if the number of images is increased according to the movement of slow motion in order to make the movement look smooth during the slow motion period, the capacity becomes large. However, by speeding up the movement during the slow motion period, the operation does not become awkward even if the number of images used is reduced, and it is possible to more faithfully express the operation while reducing the data capacity. can.

<Explanation of game effect lamps>
Next, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 260.

[About lamp control of game effect lamps using brightness data table]
The effect control CPU 120 uses the luminance data table stored in the ROM 121 or the RAM 122 to turn on / blink / extinguish one or a plurality of lamps among the plurality of lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 by lamp control.

Specifically, the display control unit 124 sets the sub-variation time according to the variation pattern command transmitted from the CPU 105 mounted on the main board 11. The sub-variation time is a counter that is subtracted by 1 in one frame (33 msec) of the displayed image. The display control unit 124 sets the ROM 121 or the RAM 122 when it is time to start the display corresponding to each part (for example, various displays (reach display, etc.) in each part such as the start part and the fan part). The display control of the image display device 5 is performed based on the image data (moving image data, animation data) stored in the image display device 5. The display control unit 124 sets an extended command corresponding to the effect display (effect scene) to be displayed on the image display device 5 according to the display control performed by itself, and transmits the extended command to the effect control CPU 120. do. The effect control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the effect display (effect scene) for which display control is performed by the display control unit 124, based on the extended command received from the display control unit 124.

For example, FIG. 272 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 272, when the display control unit 124 performs display control in the hit epilogue of the SP first half reach A, an extended command for designating the hit epilogue of the SP first half reach A is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the hit epilogue of the SP first half reach A based on the extended command received from the display control unit 124.

In the parent table, information that specifies the lamp (lighting location) to be controlled by the lamps among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 and information that specifies the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each lamp. , Information that specifies the child table that is referenced during lamp control for each lamp (specified address of the child table) is stored. In the parent table, only the lamps that are subject to lamp control are specified, and the lamps that are not subject to lamp control are not specified. For example, in the parent table shown in FIG. 192, which will be described later, the frame lamp, the accessory lamp 9A, the panel left lamp 9B, the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, and the electric chew lamp 9H are targeted for lamp control. It is specified, and 600,000 msec is specified as the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each lamp. Then, in the parent table shown in FIG. 192, the child table WD1 is designated for the frame lamp, the child table YD1 is designated for the accessory lamp 9A, and the child table LD1 is designated for the board left lamp 9B. , The child table AD1 is designated for the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, and the electric chew lamp 9H.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 206, but as shown in FIG. 272, in the parent table for epilogue per reach A in the first half of SP, the maximum time for lamp control for the frame lamp is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). The designated CPU 120 for effect control subtracts 1 from the counter every 10 msec in order to measure this 600,000 msec (10 minutes). That is, the effect control CPU 120 clocks 600,000 msec (10 minutes) by executing the counter subtraction process 60,000 times. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp using the child table designated by the parent table until the maximum time is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). In the parent table for epilogue per reach A in the first half of SP, WD3 is designated as a child table.

In the child table, information for designating the lamp (lighting location) to be controlled by the lamp among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 and the grandchild table referenced at each time when the lamp control is performed are specified. Information (specified address of grandchild table) and information are stored. For example, in the child table for the frame lamp shown in FIG. 193, which will be described later, grandchild tables (W4, W11, W12, W21, etc.) referred to for each time such as ta1 to ta19 are designated.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 206, but as shown in FIG. 272, in the child table WD3 for epilogue per reach A in the first half of the SP, 300 msec is specified as the time for which the lamp is controlled for the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 clocks 3000 msec by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and performs lamp control using the grandchild table specified by the child table WD3 until the time reaches 3000 msec. ing. In the child table WD3 for epilogue per reach A in the first half of SP, W4 is designated as the grandchild table.

In the grandchild table, information for designating a lamp (lighting location) to be controlled by the lamps among various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 and brightness data used at each time when the lamps are controlled are stored. ing. For example, in the grandchild table W4 shown in FIG. 230, which will be described later, the luminance data corresponding to RGB used every 30 msec is stored.

The value of the brightness data corresponds to the current value output to the lamp to be controlled by the lamp. For example, a frame lamp is composed of LEDs composed of three elements such as "R", "G", and "B", and the luminance data for each element corresponds to the current value output for each element. .. Specifically, the luminance data is divided into 16 stages from 0 to F, and when the luminance data is 0, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0), and when the luminance data is F, the current value is the lowest value. The current value becomes the maximum value. For example, when the luminance data of "A" is output to the element of "R", the current corresponding to the luminance data of "A" flows to the element of "R", and the element of "G" is "1". When the luminance data is output, the current corresponding to the luminance data of "1" flows to the element of "G", and when the luminance data of "F" is output to the element of "G", the "F" The current corresponding to the luminance data of is flowing through the "G" element.

The frame lamp can emit light in various colors by passing a current corresponding to the luminance data through each element of RGB. Further, the frame lamp can be lit in a color corresponding to each character described above by emitting light based on the luminance data. As an example, in a production where Yumemu-chan appears, the data of "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as the brightness data, and the LED lights up in red when the current corresponding to the data flows. .. In the production where the maid A appears, the data of "00F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as the brightness data, and the LED lights up in blue when the current corresponding to the data flows. In the production where the maid B appears, the data of "0AC" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as the brightness data, and the LED lights up in Hawaiian blue color when the current corresponding to the data flows. In an effect in which AD appears, the data of "FF0" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as the brightness data, and the LED lights up in yellow when the current corresponding to the data flows. In the production where Jam appears, the data of "A5F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as the brightness data, and the LED lights up in purple when the current corresponding to the data flows. In a production where Nana appears, the data of "F3F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as the brightness data, and the LED lights up in pink when the current corresponding to the data flows. In the production where the explosion chew appears, the data of "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as the brightness data, and the LED lights up in red when the current corresponding to the data flows. In a production in which Boingo appears, "FEA" data is output from the LED lamp to the LED as brightness data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, so that the LED lights up in cream color.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 230, but as shown in FIG. 272, in the grandchild table W4, “000” and “AAA” as brightness data (RGB data) are alternately arranged at intervals of 30 msec for each lamp. It is specified. The effect control CPU 120 clocks 3000 msec, which is the time specified by the child table, by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and outputs luminance data at 30 msec intervals based on the grandchild table W4 until the time reaches 300 msec. Output to the LED driver. Then, the LED driver causes a current corresponding to the brightness data to flow to the designated LED based on the received brightness data. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 can control each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 has a timer corresponding to each of the parent table, the child table, and the grandchild table, and the parent while subtracting the timer at a fixed cycle (for example, 10 msec cycle). Ramp control is performed based on the table, child table, and grandchild table.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data from the first designated place of the grandchild table, and when the output of the brightness data is completed up to the last designated place of the grandchild table, the grandchild table is output. If the value of the timer corresponding to the specified child table still remains, the output of the brightness data is started again from the first specified location of the grandchild table. On the other hand, if the value of the timer corresponding to the child table that specifies the grandchild table becomes 0 while the effect control CPU 120 is outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table, this time, the child table Set the timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table that specifies, and start outputting the brightness data from the first specified location of the grandchild table specified in the child table. As a result, the grandchild table is switched, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table after the switching.

The timer management of the child table by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 273 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table by managing a timer of a child table. As shown in FIG. 273, in the child table for epilogue per reach A in the first half of SP, 3000 msec is specified as the time for which the lamp is controlled for the frame lamp, and W4 is specified as the grandchild table. In the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are alternately designated as luminance data (RGB data) at intervals of 30 msec for each lamp. For convenience of explanation, the data "000" in the first 30 msec is the data 1, the data "AAA" in the next 30 msec is the data 2, the data "000" in the next 30 msec is the data 3, and the data "AAA" in the next 30 msec. Is referred to as data 4, data "000" in the next 30 msec is referred to as data 5, data "AAA" in the next 30 msec is referred to as data 6, and data "000" in the next 30 msec is referred to as data 7.

The effect control CPU 120 clocks 3000 msec specified by the child table WD3 by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and data 1 to data 7 at 30 msec intervals based on the grandchild table W4 until the time reaches 3000 msec. The brightness data of the above is output to the LED driver, but after the data 1 to the data 7 are output, if the timekeeping has not reached 3000 msec, the brightness data is output to the LED driver again in order from the first data 1. When the timekeeping reaches 3000 msec, the effect control CPU 120 stops outputting the luminance data based on the grandchild table W4 at that time, and starts outputting the luminance data based on the next grandchild table W1 specified by the child table. do. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 loops the output of the luminance data until the time specified by the child table elapses.

As in the parent table shown in FIG. 192, which will be described later, child data is specified over 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and the 10-minute data in such a parent table plays a role of troubleshooting. That is, the effect control CPU 120 switches the parent table based on the effect control command from the CPU 103 to perform lamp control, but some trouble occurs while the lamp control is performed based on a certain parent table, and the effect control is performed. Even if the CPU 120 does not receive the effect control command from the CPU 103, the lamp control is performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, so that it is possible to prevent the lamp control from being performed one after another from the place where the problem occurs. can do.

Further, as in the child table shown in FIG. 193 described later, grandchild data is specified over 600,000 msec (10 minutes) at the final designated location, and the 10-minute data in such a child table corresponds to the child table. When the value of the timer to be used becomes 0, the timer of the parent table still remains, so that the lamp control is prevented from being performed again from the first specified location of the child table.

Further, as in the grandchild table shown in FIG. 235, which will be described later, brightness data is specified over 600,000 msec (10 minutes) at the final designated location, and the 10-minute data in such a grandchild table corresponds to the grandchild table. When the value of the timer to be used becomes 0, the timer of the child table still remains, so that the lamp control is prevented from being performed again from the first specified location of the grandchild table.

In this way, by setting the brightness data specified at the end of the grandchild table as 10-minute data, the lamp is maintained with a predetermined one light emission, so that it is possible to prevent a problem that the lighting of the lamp continues to change. Can be done. Furthermore, by specifying the luminance data for 600,000 msec (10 minutes) at the end of the grandchild table specified at the end of the child table, it is possible to prevent the problem that the lamp lighting changes continuously more effectively. can.

As described above, the brightness data table is composed of a parent table, a child table, and a grandchild table. However, in the brightness data table used in each part described below, the parent table, the child table, and the grandchild table are used. Of these, only characteristic tables are shown, and other tables may be omitted.

[Brightness data table used in the start part]
FIG. 192 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the start part. As shown in FIG. 192, in the parent table in the brightness data table used for the start part, the maximum time for which the lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and the lamp for each game effect lamp 9. Information that specifies a child table (WD1, YD1, LD1, AD1) referred to at the time of control is stored.

FIG. 193 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the start part. As shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the frame lamp, the time of the start part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table referred to in each time zone is specified. In the present embodiment, only the grandchild table having a particular feature is described in the child table, and the other grandchild tables are indicated by "omitted" and the description thereof will be omitted.

For example, at time ta1, time ta4, and time ta7, the grandchild table W21 is specified. The grandchild table W21 is included in the normal background luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52, and corresponds to the grandchild table W21 for the frame lamp in the background luminance data table shown in FIG. 260, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 260, in the grandchild table W21, "550", "770", or "880" is designated as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W21 to light the frame lamps in yellow (yellow background lighting pattern) corresponding to the normal background.

At time ta3 and time ta6, the grandchild table W4 is specified. The grandchild table W4 corresponds to the grandchild table W4 for the frame lamp in the white blinking (white flash) luminance data table shown in FIG. 230, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 230, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are alternately designated as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp at intervals of 30 msec. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4. In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp twice in white by performing lamp control over 150 msec (30 msec × 5) based on the grandchild table W4.

At times ta10 to ta12, the grandchild table W11 is designated. The grandchild table W11 corresponds to the grandchild table W11 for the frame lamp in the shutter 1 luminance data table shown in FIG. 251 which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 251, in the grandchild table W11, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, the luminance data is gradually lowered from "A00" to "600" at 30 msec intervals. It is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W11 to gradually reduce the brightness in response to the effect of closing the shutter as shown in FIGS. 58 (a10) to 58 (a12). While turning on the frame lamp in red.

At times ta13 to ta18, the grandchild table W12 is designated. The grandchild table W12 corresponds to the grandchild table W12 for the frame lamp in the shutter 2 luminance data table shown in FIG. 251 which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 251, in the grandchild table W12, “600” is specified in 30 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W12, the effect control CPU 120 is predetermined from the state in which the shutters as shown in FIGS. 59 (a13) to (a15) and 60 (a16) to (a18) are completely closed. The frame lamp is turned on in red while maintaining the brightness in a reduced state in response to the effect of opening in stages after the time is maintained.

In this way, in the child table WD1 of the start part, at the time ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamp has a color or brightness such as background yellow lighting, red blinking, white blinking, and red lighting. While the brightness data is switched so as to light / blink while changing the brightness, during the time ta13 to ta18 after the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamp lights in red while maintaining the brightness lowered. Luminance data is maintained. As a result, before the shutter is closed, the effect in the start part is excited by the lighting mode of the frame lamp, and when the shutter is closed, the lighting mode of the frame lamp is maintained so that the player can adjust the content of the effect when the shutter is opened. As a result, it is possible to better show the player the production in the subsequent fanning part.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59 (a13), the brightness data is displayed so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining the brightness reduced from the timing when the shutter is completely closed. It was maintained, but not limited to this. For example, even if the brightness data is maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while keeping the brightness reduced after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the shutter is completely closed. good. Alternatively, from the timing related to the shutter closing operation (for example, the timing when the shutter starts closing, the timing just before the shutter starts closing, etc.), the brightness so that the frame lamp lights up in red while keeping the brightness lowered. Data may be maintained.

At the last time ta19 of the start part, the frame lamp is turned off in response to the effect that the shutter is maintained in a completely opened state as shown in FIG. 61 (a19). Note that "turning off" referred to here is a state in which the luminance data is "0" as described with reference to FIG. 53, but at time ta19, it is substantially turned off when the luminance data is "1". You may become. In addition, also in the following description, the part of "lighting off" may be "substantially turning off". In the time ta19, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame based on the grandchild table is used for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD1 becomes 0. The lamp stays off.

In this way, since the frame lamp is turned off when the shutter is fully opened, it is possible to inform the player of the timing when the shutter is fully opened in an easy-to-understand manner depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In addition, in the fanning part of SP first half reach A and the fanning part of SP first half reach B, which are executed after the start part, they are started with the shutter fully open and the frame lamp is off, and correspond to each SP first half reach. The frame lamp starts lighting and blinking based on the brightness data table. In this way, after the shutter is fully opened and the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp starts to light as the production progresses in the SP first half reach, so that the player knows that the SP first half reach has started. Can be communicated in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Brightness data table used in the SP first half reach A fanning part]
FIG. 194 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP first half reach A. As shown in FIG. 194, in the parent table in the brightness data table used for the fanning part of the SP first half reach A, the maximum time for lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and each game Information that specifies a child table (WD2, YD2, LD2, AD2) referred to during lamp control for the effect lamp 9 is stored.

FIG. 195 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP first half reach A. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD2 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 195, in the frame lamp child table WD2, the time of the fanning part of the SP first half reach A is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table referred to in each time zone is designated.

For example, the grandchild table W3 is specified during the 1560 msec of the time tb10. The grandchild table W3 corresponds to the grandchild table W3 for the frame lamp in the yellow haze brightness data table shown in FIG. 229, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, "440", "660", and "880" are sparsely designated as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp at 180 msec intervals. .. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W3, so that the frame lamps are turned on as if they were yellow, which corresponds to the background of the SP reach.

A grandchild table W4 is designated between 150 msec at time tb14 and 210 msec at time tb17, respectively. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4.

Here, as shown in FIG. 230, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are alternately designated as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp at intervals of 30 msec. , The first 30msec is "000" (lights off), the next 30msec is "AAA" (lights up in white), the next 30msec is "000" (lights off), the next 30msec is "AAA" (lights up in white), next The 30 msec of the above is "000" (lights off), the next 30 msec is "AAA" (lights up in white), and the last 30 msec is "000" (lights off). That is, the frame lamp blinks in white (white flash) a plurality of times by alternately repeating "off" and "on" for one cycle consisting of 210 msec (30 msec x 7). For example, when the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 for one cycle consisting of 210 msec (30 msec × 7), the frame lamp blinks white three times and the effect control CPU 120 flashes 150 msec. When the lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W4 for (30 msec × 5), the frame lamp blinks white twice.

The grandchild table W4 is specified in both the time tb14 and the time tb17, but in the time tb14, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec. The frame lamp blinks white twice, and at time tb17, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W4 in one cycle of 210 msec, so that the frame lamp is white three times. Flashes.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of different timings in one child table WD2, thereby blinking the frame lamps in white at a plurality of different timings. By differentiating the time for referring to the grandchild table W4 in the lamp control between a plurality of different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be set to 2 or 3 times. As a result, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings. The number of times the white blinks can be made different. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expression) using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

At tb18, which is the last time of the fanning part of the SP reach A in the first half of the SP, Yumemu-chan explodes before the decision of the success or failure (big hit, loss, development in the second half of the SP reach) as shown in FIG. 67 (b18). The frame lamp lights up in white in response to the production that incites whether or not to catch. At time tb18, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8 for a maximum of 10 minutes. For example, the grandchild table W8 corresponds to the grandchild table W8 for the frame lamp in the operation promotion non-fanning 2 luminance data table shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W8, “FDC” is specified at 100,000 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD2 is set. The frame lamp remains lit in white based on the grandchild table W8 for 10 minutes until it reaches zero.

As a result, in the hit / miss branch in the fanning part of the SP first half reach A, as shown in FIG. 67 (b18), the frame lamp is kept lit in white in the mute state, and the player is hit or miss. It is possible to convey the branch (decision timing) in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the child table WD2 of the reach A fanning part in the first half of the SP, when a character appears, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights in the color corresponding to the character. When the character emits a line, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in the color corresponding to the character.

For example, at time tb4, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to an effect in which Yume-chan located on the left side of the screen and Baku Chu located on the right side of the screen confront each other as shown in FIG. 63 (b4). , Turn on the frame left lamp in green corresponding to Yumemu-chan, and turn on the frame right lamp in red corresponding to Baku Chu. At time tb5, the effect control CPU 120 has a green frame corresponding to Yumemu-chan, corresponding to the effect that Yumemu-chan, located on the left side of the screen, emits a line as shown in FIG. 63 (b5). Blink the left lamp. At time tb6, the effect control CPU 120 has a red frame right lamp corresponding to the explosion chew, corresponding to the effect that the explosion chew located on the right side of the screen emits a line as shown in FIG. 63 (b6). Flashes.

As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters emitting lines are displayed, which character is emitting the lines can be suitably expressed by lighting / blinking the frame lamp, and the effect in the fanning part can be preferably expressed. Can be shown to others.

Further, in the child table WD2 of the reach A fanning part in the first half of the SP, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character when the character takes an action. ing.

For example, at time tb11, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to Yumemu-chan in response to an effect in which Yumemu-chan, located on the left side of the screen, chases the explosion chew as shown in FIG. 65 (b11). The left lamp of the frame blinks in green. Further, at the time tb8 and the time tb9, the effect control CPU 120 has a frame with a color corresponding to the character when there is a character line as shown in FIGS. 63 (b8) and (b9) but no subtitle. Make the lamp blink.

In this way, as shown in FIGS. 64 (b8) and 64 (b9), even if there is a character line but no subtitles, the frame lamp is lit / blinked in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified. As a result, even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, it is possible to preferably express that the character is emitting dialogue by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to preferably show the player the effect in the fanning part. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach A in the first half of SP]
FIG. 196 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the hit epilogue part of the first half reach A of the SP.

As shown in FIG. 196 (a1), in the parent table for the hit epilogue used for the hit epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, the maximum time during which the lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). And the information for designating the child tables (WD3, YD3, LD3, AD3) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 196 (a2), in the child table WD3 for the hit epilogue used for the hit epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, the time of the hit epilogue part in the hit epilogue part of the SP first half reach A is subdivided for the frame lamp. And the grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD3 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, at time tc1, the grandchild table W4 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to an effect of catching the explosion chew as shown in FIG. 68 (c1) after the success / failure branch shown in FIG. 67 (b18). Then, the frame lamp blinks in white.

As described above, the white lighting in the pass / fail branch (tb18) has the RGB data "FDC", whereas the white blinking in the tc1 after the hit is confirmed has the RGB data "FFF". At the time of hitting, the frame lamp blinks in the same color (white) as the winning / failing branch and brighter than the winning / failing branch, so that the player can be easily informed that the hit has been made depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9.

In the time tk2 and the time tk3, the grandchild table W1 is specified. The grandchild table W1 corresponds to the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp in the smooth rainbow luminance data table shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 225, in the grandchild table W1, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data of various luminances corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at intervals of 30 msec. ing. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W1 to hit and confirm the frame lamp in response to the effect of catching the explosion chew as shown in FIGS. 68 (c2) and 68 (c3). Light up in the rainbow color corresponding to.

As shown in FIG. 196 (b1), in the parent table for common design used for the hit epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). ) And the information for designating the child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 196 (b2), in the child table WD0 for common symbolizing used for the hit epilogue part of the first half of SP reach A, the time of the symbolizing part in the hit epilogue part of the first half of SP reach A is set for the frame lamp. Along with subdividing, the grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD0 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52. Further, the child table WD0 for displaying the common symbol is commonly used in the SP reach first half A and B, the SP reach second half A and B, and the SP final reach.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified between the time ct4 and the time tk5 of 5000 msec. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W4 to display the frame lamp as a pattern in response to the effect of producing a hit pattern as shown in FIGS. 69 (c4) and 69 (c5). Blink in the corresponding bright white.

At the last time tc6 of the hit epilogue part, the frame lamp is rainbow-colored and smooth in response to the effect that the hit symbol is finally displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 69 (c6). Light. In the time tk6, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and is based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD3 becomes 0. The frame lamp keeps the rainbow color lit.

In this way, in the child table of the hit epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is designated for the time tk2 and the time tk3, and based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamp corresponds to the effect of catching the explosive chew. Lights up smoothly in rainbow color, and the grandchild table W1 is also specified for the time tk6. Based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamp corresponds to the effect that the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen. Lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. As a result, in the hit epilogue part, the grandchild table for the hit epilogue used at the time of hit notification and the grandchild table for the symbol output used at the time of displaying the hit symbol are shared, so that they are separated at each of a plurality of different timings. It is possible to liven up each production with a sense of unity while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control for lighting in rainbow colors without preparing a grandchild table of. As a result, the effect in the hit epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in SP first half reach A loss epilogue part]
FIG. 197 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of the SP first half reach A.

As shown in FIG. 197 (a1), in the parent table for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). ) And the information for designating the child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 197 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the SP reach first half A, the time of the loss epilogue part in the SP reach first half A is subdivided for the frame lamp. , The grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD4 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52. Further, the child table WD4 for the common loss epilogue is commonly used in the SP reach first half A and B, the SP reach second half A and B, and the SP final reach.

For example, the grandchild table W13 is specified during 200 msec of time td1. The grandchild table W13 corresponds to the grandchild table W13 for the frame lamp in the loss 1 luminance data table shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 252, in the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified in the first 10 msec and "444" is specified in the next 190 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W13 to produce an effect that fails to catch the explosion chew as shown in FIG. 70 (d1) after the pass / fail branch shown in FIG. 67 (b18). Correspondingly, the frame lamp is turned on in white.

As described above, the white lighting in the pass / fail branch (tb18) has RGB data of "FDC", whereas the white lighting in td1 after the loss notification has RGB data of "888" or "444". .. As a result, at the time of loss, the frame lamp can be lit in white in a darker manner while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting in the pass / fail branch (tb18). Can be notified to.

The grandchild table W14 is specified during the 5800 msec of the time td2. The grandchild table W14 corresponds to the grandchild table W14 for the frame lamp in the loss 2 luminance data table shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 252, in the grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is designated at intervals of 250 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W14, so that the frame lamp can be changed from td1 in response to the effect that Yumemu-chan loses and is disappointed as shown in FIG. 70 (d2). Also lights up in dark white.

As described above, in the rainbow lighting at the time of hit (tc2, tk3), the RGB data is switched at intervals of 30 msec, whereas in the dark white lighting at the time of loss (td2), the RGB data is longer than the hit time at 250 msec. It switches at intervals. As a result, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals in the hit time than in the loss time, so that it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the hit is achieved depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, while the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more than when it is lost at the time of hitting, the lighting by the frame lamp can be calmed down more than when it is lost, and as a result, the lamp that contrasts the hit and loss. It is possible to convey to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time td3, grandchild table W15 is specified. The grandchild table W15 corresponds to the grandchild table W15 for the frame lamp in the loss 3 luminance data table shown in FIG. 253, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 253, in the grandchild table W15, "444" is specified in the first 10 msec and "111" is specified in the next 550 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. , "111" is specified in the last 600,000 msec (10 minutes). By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W15, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the frame lamp in response to an effect in which a loss as shown in FIG. 70 (d3) is notified and the screen goes dark. ..

At time td4, the grandchild table W21 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W21 to display a normal screen as shown in FIG. 71 (d4). Turn on with. That is, the grandchild table W21 used in the state where the normal screen is displayed at the time of loss is a lighting mode corresponding to the normal background, and is the grandchild table W21 designated by the time ta1, the time ta4, and the time ta7 in the start part. Common.

At the time td4, the lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 takes time until it receives a variation pattern command that specifies the next variation when there is a hold, or when there is no hold, based on the grandchild table W21 shown in FIG. 260, which will be described later. Until the customer waiting command is received in the lapse of time, the lamp control is performed while switching the RGB data, and even if the lamp control is performed based on the final RGB data, if the fluctuation pattern command or the customer waiting command is not received yet, the signal control is performed again. Lamp control is performed based on the first RGB data.

As shown in FIG. 190, from the time when the frame lamp is turned off at time td3 to the time when the frame lamp is turned on in the pattern of yellow background lighting in response to the effect that the normal screen is displayed at time td4. Is displayed, and the frame lamp based on the brightness data table corresponding to the eye-catching screen is turned on. In this way, in the lamp control of the frame lamp at the time of loss, after the brightness data table (grandchild table) corresponding to the eye-catching screen is used, the grandchild used in the start part as the brightness data table corresponding to the normal screen. Table W21 is used. As a result, it is not necessary to separately prepare a luminance data table to be used until the design is determined even after the eye-catching screen is displayed, and the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W21 also used in the start part. , The effect of the frame lamp can be shown to the player without any discomfort.

[Brightness data table used in the SP first half reach B fanning part]
FIG. 198 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP first half reach B. As shown in FIG. 198, in the parent table in the brightness data table used for the fanning part of the SP first half reach B, the maximum time for lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and each game Information that specifies a child table (WD5, YD5, LD5, AD5) referred to during lamp control for the effect lamp 9 is stored.

FIG. 199 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the reach B in the first half of the SP. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD5 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 199, in the frame lamp child table WD5, the time of the fanning part of the SP first half reach B is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table referred to in each time zone is designated.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified between 150 msec of time te8 and 210 msec of time te12, respectively. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4. The grandchild table W4 is specified in both the time te8 and the time te12, but in the time te8, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec. The frame lamp blinks white twice, and at time te12, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W4 in one cycle of 210 msec, so that the frame lamp is white three times. Flashes.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of different timings in one child table WD5, thereby blinking the frame lamps in white at a plurality of different timings. By differentiating the time for referring to the grandchild table W4 in the lamp control between a plurality of different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be set to 2 or 3 times. As a result, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings. The number of times the white blinks can be made different. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expression) using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

At the last time te17 of the fanning part of the SP reach B in the first half of the SP, it is necessary to fuel whether Yumemu-chan loses in the hit / fail branch (big hit, loss, development in the second half of the SP reach) as shown in Fig. 77 (e17). The frame lamp lights up in white in response to the various effects. At time te18, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8 for a maximum of 10 minutes.

As a result, in the hit / miss branch in the fanning part of the SP first half reach B, as shown in FIG. 77 (e17), the frame lamp is kept lit in white in the mute state, and the player is hit or miss. It is possible to convey the branch (decision timing) in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the child table WD5 of the reach B fanning part in the first half of the SP, when a character appears, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights in the color corresponding to the character. When the character emits a line, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in the color corresponding to the character.

For example, at time te4, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to an effect in which Yume-chan located on the left side of the screen and Boingo located on the right side of the screen confront each other as shown in FIG. 73 (e4). Turn on the left frame lamp in green corresponding to Yumemu-chan, and turn on the right frame lamp in cream color corresponding to Boingo. At time te5, the effect control CPU 120 has a green frame corresponding to Yumemu-chan, corresponding to the effect that Yumemu-chan, located on the left side of the screen, emits a line as shown in FIG. 73 (e5). Blink the left lamp. At time te6, the effect control CPU 120 sets the frame right lamp in a cream color corresponding to the boingo in response to the effect that the boingo located on the right side of the screen emits a line as shown in FIG. 73 (e6). Make it blink.

As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters emitting lines are displayed, which character is emitting the lines can be suitably expressed by lighting / blinking the frame lamp, and the effect in the fanning part can be preferably expressed. Can be shown to others.

Further, in the child table WD5 of the reach B fanning part in the first half of the SP, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights in the color corresponding to the character when the character takes an action. ing.

For example, at the time te11, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in a cream color corresponding to the boingo in response to the effect of the boingo hitting the puck as shown in FIG. 75 (e11). Further, at time te7, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in green corresponding to Yumemu-chan when there is no subtitle while there is a line of Yumemu-chan as shown in FIG. 74 (e7). Let me.

In this way, even if there is a character's dialogue but no subtitles as shown in FIG. 74 (e7), the luminance data (grandchildren) so that the frame lamp lights / blinks in the color corresponding to the character. RGB data in the table) is specified. As a result, even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, it is possible to preferably express that the character is emitting dialogue by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to preferably show the player the effect in the fanning part. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach B in the first half of SP]
FIG. 200 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the hit epilogue part of the SP first half reach B.

As shown in FIG. 200 (a1), in the parent table for the hit epilogue used for the hit epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, the maximum time during which the lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). And the information for designating the child tables (WD6, YD6, LD6, AD6) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 200 (a2), in the child table WD6 for the hit epilogue used for the hit epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, the time of the hit epilogue part in the hit epilogue part of the SP first half reach B is subdivided for the frame lamp. And the grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD6 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, at time tf1, the grandchild table W4 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 so that Yume-chan, as shown in FIG. 78 (f1), hits back the pack after the success / failure branch shown in FIG. 77 (e17). The frame lamp blinks in white in response to the production.

The white lighting in the pass / fail branch (te17) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later, and the RGB data is "FDC", whereas the white blinking in tf1 after the hit is confirmed is RGB. The data is "FFF". As a result, at the time of hitting, the frame lamp blinks in the same color (white) as the winning / failing branch and brighter than the winning / failing branch, so that the hit is made depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Can be conveyed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

At times tf2 to tf4, the grandchild table W1 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to an effect in which Boingo is attacked and Yumemu-chan wins as shown in FIGS. 78 (f2) to (f4). Then, turn on the frame lamp smoothly with the rainbow color corresponding to the hit confirmation.

As shown in FIG. 200 (b1), in the parent table for common design used for the hit epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). ) And the information for designating the child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 200 (b2), in the child table WD0 for common symbolizing used for the hit epilogue part of the first half of SP reach B, the time of the symbolizing part in the hit epilogue part of the first half of SP reach B is set for the frame lamp. Along with subdividing, the grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified.

For example, a grandchild table W4 is specified between 5000 msec of time tf5 and time tf6. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W4 to display the frame lamp as a pattern in response to the effect of producing a hit pattern as shown in FIGS. 79 (f5) and 79 (f6). Blink in the corresponding bright white.

At the final time tf7 of the hit epilogue part, the frame lamp is rainbow-colored and smooth in response to the effect that the hit symbol is finally displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 80 (f7). Light. At time tf7, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD6 becomes 0. The frame lamp keeps the rainbow color lit.

In this way, in the child table of the hit epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for the time tf2 to tf4, and based on the grandchild table W1, Boingo is attacked and Yumemu-chan wins. Correspondingly, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow color, and the grandchild table W1 is also specified for the time tf7, and the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen based on the grandchild table W1. Correspondingly, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow color. As a result, in the hit epilogue part, the grandchild table for the hit epilogue used at the time of hit notification and the grandchild table for the symbol output used at the time of displaying the hit symbol are shared, so that they are separated at each of a plurality of different timings. It is possible to liven up each production with a sense of unity while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control for lighting in rainbow colors without preparing a grandchild table of. As a result, the effect in the hit epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in SP first half reach B loss epilogue part]
FIG. 201 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the lost epilogue part of the SP first half reach B.

As shown in FIG. 201 (a1), in the parent table for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, the maximum time during which the lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). ) And the information for designating the child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 200 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the SP reach first half B, the time of the loss epilogue part in the SP reach first half B is subdivided for the frame lamp. , The grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W13 is specified between the time tg1 and the time tg2 for 200 msec. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, so that after the success / failure branch shown in FIG. 77 (e17), Yumemu-chan as shown in FIG. 81 (g1) is skipped. The frame lamp is turned on in white in correspondence with.

The white lighting in the pass / fail branch (te17) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249 described later, and the RGB data is "FDC", whereas the white lighting in tg1 after the loss notification is described later. Based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, the RGB data thereof are “888” and “444”. As a result, at the time of loss, the frame lamp can be turned on in white while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting in the pass / fail branch (te17). Can be notified to.

The grandchild table W14 is specified during the 5800 msec of the time tg3. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W14, so that the frame corresponds to the effect that Yumemu-chan is disappointed to lose as shown in FIGS. 70 (g2) and 70 (g3). The lamp is lit in white, which is darker than tg1.

The rainbow lighting at the time of hit (tf2 to tf4) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 225 described later, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 30 msec, whereas the rainbow lighting at the time of loss (tg3) is dark white lighting. Is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 250 msec, which is longer than the hit time. As a result, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals in the hit time than in the loss time, so that it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the hit is achieved depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, while the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more than when it is lost at the time of hitting, the lighting by the frame lamp can be calmed down more than when it is lost, and as a result, the lamp that contrasts the hit and loss. It is possible to convey to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time tg4, grandchild table W15 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W15, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the frame lamp in response to an effect in which a loss as shown in FIG. 82 (g4) is notified and the screen goes dark. ..

At time tg5, grandchild table W21 is designated. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W21 to display a normal screen as shown in FIG. 81 (g5). Turn on with. Further, at the time tg5, the lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in the accessory operation part during the development of the latter half of SP]
FIG. 202 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the accessory operation part at the time of the development of the latter half of the SP. The grandchild table included in the child table WD8 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 202, in the child table WD8 of the frame lamp, the grandchild table referred to in the accessory operation part is designated for the frame lamp. Further, the child table WD8 is used for lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the first half portion (falling portion) of the accessory operation shown in FIGS. 171 (h1) to (h3) (FIGS. 83 (h1) to (h3)). Be done.

For example, the grandchild table W2 is specified during the 7000 msec period of time th1 to th3. The grandchild table W2 corresponds to the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp in the accessory operation red blinking luminance data table shown in FIG. 228, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 228, in the grandchild table W2, "A00" is specified in the first 40 msec and "333" is specified in the next 30 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W2, the effect control CPU 120 drops the accessory as shown in FIGS. 83 (h1) to 83 (h3) after the success / failure branch shown in FIG. 77 (e17). The frame lamp blinks in red in response to such an effect.

The lamp control is also performed on the accessory lamp 9A during the 7000 msec period of the accessory falling time th1 to th3. For example, during the 7000 msec period of the time when the accessory falls, th1 to th3, the effect control CPU 120 is set to the child table corresponding to the drop operation of the accessory in the accessory lamp 9A and the grandchild table designated by the child table. Based on this, the accessory lamp 9A blinks in red.

As a result, the player can be more effectively focused on the effect of dropping the accessory depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp and the accessory lamp 9A.

[Brightness data table used in the SP second half reach A fanning part]
FIG. 203 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP latter half reach A. As shown in FIG. 203, in the parent table in the brightness data table used for the fanning part of the SP latter half reach A, the maximum time for which the lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and each game Information that specifies the child tables (WD9, YD9, LD9, AD9) referred to during lamp control for the effect lamp 9 is stored.

FIGS. 204 and 205 are diagrams for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP latter half reach A. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD9 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIGS. 204 and 205, in the frame lamp child table WD9, the time of the fanning part of the SP second half reach A is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table referred to in each time zone is specified. There is.

The luminance data corresponding to the times th4 to th10 are used for the lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the latter half portion (rising portion) of the accessory operation shown in FIGS. 171 (h4) to 172 (h10). Specifically, in the time th4 to th6, the frame lamp blinks in yellow in response to the effect of the accessory rising, and then in the time th7 to th10, the frame lamp reaches SP based on the grandchild table W3. It lights up as if it is hazy even in yellow corresponding to the background of. As a result, the frame lamp gradually changes from blinking yellow to a yellowish lighting corresponding to the background of the SP second half reach A, so that the player can easily understand that it has developed into the SP second half reach A. I can tell.

In addition, during the time th4 to th10 when the accessory rises, the lamp control is also performed on the accessory lamp 9A. For example, during the time period th4 to th10 when the accessory is raised, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the child table corresponding to the ascending operation of the accessory in the accessory lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table. The brightness of the accessory lamp 9A is gradually reduced so that the accessory lamp 9A is gradually turned off.

As a result, the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A does not make the player aware of the rising of the accessory, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp makes the screen showing that the SP latter half reach A has been developed. The player can be noticed.

The grandchild table W3 is designated between 1130 msec of time ti1, 1330 msec of time ti20, and 1560 msec of time ti11. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W3, so that the frame lamps are turned on as if they were yellow, which corresponds to the background of the SP reach.

Here, as shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the luminance data of the frame lamp is switched over one cycle consisting of 720 msec (180 msec × 4). At time th7 to th10 and time ti1, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which exceeds one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1130 msec. When the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 during 1330 msec, which exceeds one cycle, the frame lamp lights yellow for 1330 msec, and at time ti11, the effect control is performed during 1560 msec, which exceeds two cycles. When the CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W3, the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1560 msec.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps of one child table WD9 based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of different timings, so that the frame lamps are turned on in yellow at a plurality of different timings. Therefore, the time for turning on the frame lamp in yellow can be changed by making the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 different in the lamp control between the plurality of timings different from each other. As a result, in one child table WD9, it is used for lamp control by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3 without preparing different grandchild tables at each of a plurality of different timings. While reducing the data capacity, the time to turn on the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of SP reach can be changed. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expression) using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

A grandchild table W4 is designated between 150 msec of time ti15 and ti24 and 210 msec of time ti14, ti23, and time ti35, respectively. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4. The grandchild table W4 is specified in all of the time ti15, the time ti24, the time ti14, the time ti23, and the time ti35, but in the time ti15 and the time ti24, the effect control CPU 120 takes less than one cycle of 150 msec. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the frame lamp blinks white twice, and at the time ti14, the time ti23, and the time ti35, the effect control CPU 120 grandchildren in one cycle of 210 msec. By controlling the lamp based on the table W4, the frame lamp blinks white three times.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of different timings in one child table WD9, thereby blinking the frame lamps in white at a plurality of different timings. By differentiating the time for referring to the grandchild table W4 in the lamp control between a plurality of different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be set to 2 or 3 times. As a result, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings. The number of times the white blinks can be made different. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expression) using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

The grandchild table W7 is designated between 1000 msec of time ti36 to ti38. The grandchild table W7 corresponds to the grandchild table W7 for the frame lamp in the operation-promoting non-fanning 1-luminance data table shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W7, "FDC" and "300" are alternately designated as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp at intervals of 30 msec. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W7.

At the last time ti39 of the fanning part of the second half of the SP reach A, Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan will fan whether or not to catch the bomb chew at the hit / miss branch (big hit, loss) as shown in Fig. 95 (i39). The frame lamp lights up in white in response to such an effect. At time ti39, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8 for a maximum of 10 minutes. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W8, “FDC” is specified at 100,000 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD2 is set. The frame lamp remains lit in white based on the grandchild table W8 for 10 minutes until it reaches zero.

As described above, in the child table WD9 in the SP latter half reach A, the frame lamp blinks in white based on the grandchild table W7, and then the frame lamp lights in white based on the grandchild table W8. Specifically, in the pass / fail branch in the fanning part of the SP second half reach A where the operation promotion is not performed, the last luminance data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W7, "FDC" (lighting in white) is used. In addition, since the brightness data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W8 is designed, it is possible to inform the player of the success / failure branch (decision timing) in an easy-to-understand manner without increasing the data capacity used for lamp control too much. can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 95 (i39), the frame lamp is kept lit in white in the mute state, and it is possible to inform the player of the success / failure branch (decision timing) in an easy-to-understand manner. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 249, "FDC" is designated as the last RGB data of the grandchild table W7 used between 1000 msec of the time ti36 to ti38, and further, the grandchild table W8 used in the subsequent time ti39. The last RGB data is also designated as "FDC". As a result, the effect control CPU 120 maintains the state in which the brightness data of the "FDC" is output to the LED driver based on the grandchild table W7, and then continuously continues the brightness data of the "FDC" based on the grandchild table W8. Since it is output to the driver, it is possible to preferably produce the timing of determining the success / failure branch by simpler lamp control without increasing the amount of data too much.

Further, in the child table WD9 of the reach A fanning part in the latter half of the SP, when a character appears, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights in the color corresponding to the character. When the character emits a line, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in the color corresponding to the character.

For example, at time ti2, the effect control CPU 120 is used to produce an effect in which Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan located on the left side of the screen and Baku Chu located on the right side of the screen confront each other as shown in FIG. 84 (i2). Correspondingly, the frame left lamp is lit in white corresponding to Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan, and the frame right lamp is lit in red corresponding to Baku Chu. At time ti3, the effect control CPU 120 has a green frame corresponding to Yumemu-chan, corresponding to the effect that Yumemu-chan, located on the left side of the screen, emits a line as shown in FIG. 84 (i3). Blink the left lamp. At the time ti4, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the effect that the jam-chan located on the left side of the screen emits a line as shown in FIG. 85 (i4), and the purple frame left lamp corresponding to the jam-chan. Flashes. At time ti5, the effect control CPU 120 has a red frame right lamp corresponding to the explosion chew, corresponding to the effect that the explosion chew located on the right side of the screen emits a line as shown in FIG. 85 (i5). Flashes.

As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters emitting lines are displayed, which character is emitting the lines can be suitably expressed by lighting / blinking the frame lamp, and the effect in the fanning part can be preferably expressed. Can be shown to others.

Further, in the child table WD9 of the SP second half reach A fanning part, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character when the character takes an action. ing.

For example, at time ti21, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to Yumemu-chan, as shown in FIG. 90 (i21), in which Yumemu-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, chases the explosion chew. The left lamp of the frame blinks in green. Further, at the time ti32 and the time ti34, the effect control CPU 120 has a color corresponding to the character when there is a character line as shown in FIGS. 94 (i32) and 95 (i34) but no subtitle. Flashes the frame lamp with.

In this way, as shown in FIGS. 94 (i32) and 95 (i34), even if there are lines of the character but no subtitles, the frame lamp lights / blinks in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified as described above. As a result, even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, it is possible to preferably express that the character is emitting dialogue by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to preferably show the player the effect in the fanning part. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach A in the latter half of SP]
FIG. 206 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the hit epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A.

As shown in FIG. 206 (a1), in the parent table for the hit epilogue used for the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach A, the maximum time during which the lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). And the information for designating the child tables (WD10, YD10, LD10, AD10) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 206 (a2), in the child table WD10 for the hit epilogue used for the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach A, the time of the hit epilogue part in the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach A is subdivided for the frame lamp. And the grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD10 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, at times tj1 to tj3, the grandchild table W4 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to an effect of catching the explosion chew as shown in FIG. 97 (j1) after the success / failure branch shown in FIG. 96 (i39). Then, the frame lamp blinks in white.

The white lighting in the pass / fail branch (ti39) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later, and the RGB data is "FDC", whereas the white blinking in tj1 after the hit is confirmed is RGB. The data is "FFF". As a result, at the time of hitting, the frame lamp blinks in the same color (white) as the winning / failing branch and brighter than the winning / failing branch, so that the hit is made depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Can be conveyed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

At times tj2 and tj3, the grandchild table W1 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W1 to hit and confirm the frame lamp in response to the effect of catching the explosion chew as shown in FIGS. 97 (j2) and 97 (j3). Lights up smoothly with the rainbow color corresponding to.

As shown in FIG. 206 (b1), in the parent table for displaying the common symbol used for the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach A, the maximum time during which the lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). ) And the information for designating the child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 206 (b2), in the child table WD0 for common symbolizing used for the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach A, the time of the symbolizing part in the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach A is set for the frame lamp. Along with subdividing, the grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified between 5000 msec of time tj4 and time tj5. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W4 to display the frame lamp as a pattern in response to the effect of producing a hit pattern as shown in FIGS. 98 (j4) and (j5). Blink in the corresponding bright white.

At the last time tj6 of the hit epilogue part, the frame lamp is rainbow-colored and smooth in response to the effect that the hit symbol is finally displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 98 (j6). Light. At time tj6, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD10 becomes 0. The frame lamp keeps the rainbow color lit.

In this way, in the child table of the hit epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is designated for the time tj2 and tj3, and based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamp is set to correspond to the effect of catching the explosive chew. It lights up smoothly in rainbow color, and the grandchild table W1 is also specified for the time tj6. Based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamp is set to correspond to the effect that the winning pattern is displayed in the center of the screen. It lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. As a result, in the hit epilogue part, the grandchild table for the hit epilogue used at the time of hit notification and the grandchild table for the symbol output used at the time of displaying the hit symbol are shared, so that they are separated at each of a plurality of different timings. It is possible to liven up each production with a sense of unity while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control for lighting in rainbow colors without preparing a grandchild table of. As a result, the effect in the hit epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in SP second half reach A loss epilogue part]
FIG. 207 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A.

As shown in FIG. 207 (a1), in the parent table for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A, the maximum time during which the lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). ) And the information for designating the child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 207 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the SP second half reach A, the time of the loss epilogue part in the first half B of the SP reach is subdivided for the frame lamp. , The grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W13 is specified during 200 msec of time tk1. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, the effect control CPU 120 has an effect of failing to catch the explosion chew as shown in FIG. 99 (k1) after the success / failure branch shown in FIG. 96 (i39). Correspondingly, the frame lamp is turned on in white.

The white lighting in the pass / fail branch (ti39) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249 described later, and the RGB data is "FDC", whereas the white lighting in tk1 after the loss notification is described later. Based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, the RGB data thereof are “888” and “444”. As a result, at the time of loss, the frame lamp can be turned on in white while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting in the pass / fail branch (ti39). Can be notified to.

A grandchild table W14 is specified between 5800 msec of time tk2 and time tk3. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W14, so that the frame corresponds to the effect that Yumemu-chan is disappointed to lose as shown in FIGS. 99 (k2) and 99 (k3). The lamp is lit in white, which is darker than tk1.

The rainbow lighting at the time of hit (tj2, tj3) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 30 msec, whereas it is dark at the time of loss (tk2, tk3). The white lighting is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 250 msec, which is longer than the hit time. As a result, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals in the hit time than in the loss time, so that it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the hit is achieved depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, while the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more than when it is lost at the time of hitting, the lighting by the frame lamp can be calmed down more than when it is lost, and as a result, the lamp that contrasts the hit and loss. It is possible to convey to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time tk4, the grandchild table W15 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W15, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the frame lamp in response to an effect in which a loss as shown in FIG. 100 (k4) is notified and the screen goes dark. ..

At time tk5, the grandchild table W21 is designated. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W21 to display a normal screen as shown in FIG. 100 (k5). Turn on with. Further, at the time tk5, the lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in the SP second half reach B fanning part]
FIG. 208 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP latter half reach B. As shown in FIG. 208, in the parent table in the brightness data table used for the fanning part of the SP second half reach B, the maximum time during which the lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and each game Information that specifies a child table (WD12, YD12, LD12, AD12) referred to during lamp control for the effect lamp 9 is stored.

FIG. 209 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP latter half reach B. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD12 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 209, in the frame lamp child table WD12, the time of the fanning part of the SP latter half reach B is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table referred to in each time zone is designated.

The luminance data corresponding to the times th4 to th10 are used for the lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the latter half portion (rising portion) of the accessory operation shown in FIGS. 171 (h4) to 172 (h10). Specifically, in the time th4 to th6, the frame lamp blinks in yellow in response to the effect of the accessory rising, and then in the time th7 to th10, the frame lamp reaches SP based on the grandchild table W3. It lights up as if it is hazy even in yellow corresponding to the background of. As a result, the frame lamp gradually changes from blinking yellow to a yellowish lighting corresponding to the background of the SP second half reach B, so that the player can easily understand that it has developed into the SP second half reach B. I can tell.

In addition, during the time th4 to th10 when the accessory rises, the lamp control is also performed on the accessory lamp 9A. For example, during the time period th4 to th10 when the accessory is raised, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the child table corresponding to the ascending operation of the accessory in the accessory lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table. The brightness of the accessory lamp 9A is gradually reduced so that the accessory lamp 9A is gradually turned off.

As a result, the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A does not make the player aware of the rising of the accessory, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp makes the screen show that the SP second half reach B has been developed. The player can be noticed.

The grandchild table W3 is designated between 1130 msec at time tun5, 1330 msec at time tun14, and 1560 msec at time tun6. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W3, so that the frame lamps are turned on as if they were yellow, which corresponds to the background of the SP reach.

Here, as shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the luminance data of the frame lamp is switched over one cycle consisting of 720 msec (180 msec × 4). In the time th7 to th10, the time tn1, and the time tn5, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which exceeds one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1130 msec, and the time. In tun14, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which exceeds one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1330 msec. When the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3, the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1560 msec.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps of one child table WD12 based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of different timings, so that the frame lamps are turned on in yellow at a plurality of different timings. Therefore, the time for turning on the frame lamp in yellow can be changed by making the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 different in the lamp control between the plurality of timings different from each other. As a result, in one child table WD12, it is used for lamp control by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3 without preparing different grandchild tables at each of a plurality of different timings. While reducing the data capacity, the time to turn on the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of SP reach can be changed. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expression) using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

A grandchild table W4 is designated between 150 msec of time tun3, time tun12, and time tun25, and between 210 msec of time tun4, tun13, time tun15, time tun19, and time tun22, respectively. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4. Although the grandchild table W4 is specified in any of the time tun3, the time tun12, the time tun25, the time tun4, the time tun13, the time tun15, the time tun19, and the time tun22, in the time tun3, the time tun12, and the time tun25, the grandchild table W4 is specified. When the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, the frame lamp blinks white twice, and the time tun4, the time tun13, the time tun15, and the time nt19, At the time tn22, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W4 in one cycle of 210 msec, so that the frame lamp blinks white three times.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control on one child table WD12 based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of different timings, so that the frame lamps blink in white at a plurality of different timings. By differentiating the time for referring to the grandchild table W4 in the lamp control between a plurality of different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be set to 2 or 3 times. As a result, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings. The number of times the white blinks can be made different. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expression) using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

At the last time tn27 of the fanning part of the SP second half reach B, the effect of fanning whether or not to catch the crab at the hit / miss branch (big hit, loss) as shown in FIG. 109 (n27) is supported. The frame lamp lights up in white. At time tn27, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8 for a maximum of 10 minutes.

As a result, in the hit / miss branch in the fanning part of the SP second half reach B, as shown in FIG. 109 (n27), the frame lamp is kept lit in white in the mute state, and the player is hit / miss. It is possible to convey the branch (decision timing) in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the child table WD12 of the reach B fanning part in the latter half of the SP, when a character appears, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights in the color corresponding to the character. When the character emits a line, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in the color corresponding to the character.

For example, at time tn2, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to an effect in which Jam and Nana located on the left side of the screen and a crab located on the right side of the screen face each other as shown in FIG. 101 (n2). Then, the left frame lamp is blinked in white corresponding to Jam and Nana, and the right frame lamp is turned on in red corresponding to the crab. Further, since Jam and Nana located on the left side of the screen emit lines, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame left lamp in white.

As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters emitting lines are displayed, which character is emitting the lines can be suitably expressed by lighting / blinking the frame lamp, and the effect in the fanning part can be preferably expressed. Can be shown to others.

Further, in the child table WD12 of the SP second half reach B fanning part, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character when the character takes an action. ing.

For example, at the time tn18, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in the pink color corresponding to Nana-chan in response to the effect that Nana-chan prays as shown in FIG. 106 (n18). Further, at the time tn10, the effect control CPU 120 has a color (red) corresponding to the character (crab) when there is a line of the character (crab) as shown in FIG. 104 (n10) but no subtitle. Flashes the frame lamp with.

In this way, even if there is a character line but no subtitles as shown in FIG. 104 (n10), the luminance data (grandchildren) so that the frame lamp lights / blinks in the color corresponding to the character. RGB data in the table) is specified. As a result, even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, it is possible to preferably express that the character is emitting dialogue by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to preferably show the player the effect in the fanning part. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach B in the latter half of SP]
FIG. 210 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the hit epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B.

As shown in FIG. 210 (a1), in the parent table for the hit epilogue used for the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach B, the maximum time during which the lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). And the information for designating the child tables (WD13, YD13, LD13, AD13) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 210 (a2), in the child table WD13 for the hit epilogue used for the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach B, the time of the hit epilogue part in the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach B is subdivided for the frame lamp. And the grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD13 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, at time to1, the grandchild table W4 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to correspond to an effect of catching a crab as shown in FIG. 110 (o1) after the success / failure branch shown in FIG. 109 (n27). And blink the frame lamp in white.

The white lighting in the pass / fail branch (tn27) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later, and the RGB data is "FDC", whereas the white blinking in to1 after the hit is confirmed is RGB. The data is "FFF". As a result, at the time of hitting, the frame lamp blinks in the same color (white) as the winning / failing branch and brighter than the winning / failing branch, so that the hit is made depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Can be easily understood by the player.

At times to2 to to5, the grandchild table W1 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W1 so that the caught crabs as shown in FIGS. 110 (o2) to 111 (o5) can be used as the signboard of the shop, and Jam and Nana can work together. In response to a pleasing effect, the frame lamp is lit smoothly with a rainbow color that corresponds to the hit confirmation.

As shown in FIG. 210 (b1), in the parent table for displaying the common symbol used for the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach B, the maximum time during which the lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). ) And the information for designating the child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 210 (b2), in the child table WD0 for common symbolizing used for the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach B, the time of the symbolizing part in the hit epilogue part of the SP second half reach B is set for the frame lamp. Along with subdividing, the grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified between the time to 6 and the time to 7 for 5000 msec. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W4, so that the frame lamp is designed to correspond to the effect of producing a hit pattern as shown in FIGS. 111 (o6) and 112 (o7). Blink in bright white corresponding to the output.

At the last time to 8 of the hit epilogue part, the frame lamp is rainbow-colored and smooth in response to the effect that the hit symbol is finally displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 112 (o8). Light. In time to8, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD13 becomes 0. The frame lamp keeps the rainbow color lit.

In this way, in the child table of the hit epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is designated for the time to2 to to5, and based on the grandchild table W1, the caught crab is used as a sign of the shop, and Jam and Nana The frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors in response to a pleasing effect, and the grandchild table W1 is also specified for time to8, and the winning design is displayed in the center of the screen based on the grandchild table W1. The frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors in response to such an effect. As a result, in the hit epilogue part, the grandchild table for the hit epilogue used at the time of hit notification and the grandchild table for the symbol output used at the time of displaying the hit symbol are shared, so that they are separated at each of a plurality of different timings. It is possible to liven up each production with a sense of unity while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control for lighting in rainbow colors without preparing a grandchild table of. As a result, the effect in the hit epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in SP second half reach B loss epilogue part]
FIG. 211 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the lost epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B.

As shown in FIG. 211 (a1), in the parent table for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B, the maximum time during which the lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). ) And the information for designating the child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 211 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the SP reach second half B, the time of the loss epilogue part in the SP reach second half B is subdivided for the frame lamp. , The grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W13 is specified during 200 msec of time tp1. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to an effect of failing to catch the crab as shown in FIG. 113 (p1) after the success / failure branch shown in FIG. 109 (n27). Then, the frame lamp is turned on in white.

The white lighting in the pass / fail branch (tn27) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249 described later, and the RGB data is “FDC”, whereas the white lighting in tp1 after the loss notification is described later. Based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, the RGB data thereof are “888” and “444”. As a result, at the time of loss, the frame lamp can be lit in white in a darker manner while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting in the pass / fail branch (tun27). Can be notified to.

A grandchild table W14 is specified between 5800 msec of time tp2 and time tp3. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W14, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the effect that Jam and Nana are disappointed to lose as shown in FIGS. 113 (p2) and 113 (p3). The frame lamp is turned on in white, which is darker than tp1.

The rainbow lighting at the time of hit (to2 to to5) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 225 described later, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 30 msec, whereas the rainbow lighting at the time of loss (tp2, tp3) is dark. The white lighting is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 250 msec, which is longer than the hit time. As a result, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals in the hit time than in the loss time, so that it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the hit is achieved depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, while the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more than when it is lost at the time of hitting, the lighting by the frame lamp can be calmed down more than when it is lost, and as a result, the lamp that contrasts the hit and loss. It is possible to convey to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time tp4, the grandchild table W15 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W15, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the frame lamp in response to an effect in which a loss as shown in FIG. 114 (p4) is notified and the screen goes dark. ..

At time tp5, the grandchild table W21 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W21 to display a normal screen as shown in FIG. 114 (p5). Turn on with. Further, at the time tp5, the lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in SP final reach fanning part]
FIG. 212 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP final reach. As shown in FIG. 212, in the parent table in the brightness data table used for the fanning part of the SP final reach, the maximum time for which the lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and each game effect. Information for designating a child table (WD15, YD15, LD15, AD15) referred to during lamp control for the lamp 9 is stored.

FIGS. 213 and 214 are diagrams for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of the SP final reach. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD15 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, in the frame lamp child table WD15, the time of the fanning part of the SP final reach is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table referred to in each time zone is specified. ..

The luminance data corresponding to the times th4 to th10 are used for the lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the latter half portion (rising portion) of the accessory operation shown in FIGS. 171 (h4) to 172 (h10). Specifically, in the time th4 to th6, the frame lamp blinks in yellow in response to the effect of the accessory rising, and then in the time th7 to th10, the frame lamp reaches SP based on the grandchild table W3. It lights up as if it is hazy even in yellow corresponding to the background of. As a result, the frame lamp gradually changes from blinking yellow to a yellowish lighting corresponding to the background of the SP final reach, thereby informing the player that the SP final reach has been developed in an easy-to-understand manner. Can be done.

In addition, during the time th4 to th10 when the accessory rises, the lamp control is also performed on the accessory lamp 9A. For example, during the time period th4 to th10 when the accessory is raised, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the child table corresponding to the ascending operation of the accessory in the accessory lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table. The brightness of the accessory lamp 9A is gradually reduced so that the accessory lamp 9A is gradually turned off.

As a result, the player is not aware that the accessory is raised by the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A, while the game is displayed on the screen indicating that the SP final reach is achieved by the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Can be noticed by others.

The grandchild table W3 is designated between 1130 msec of time tr1, 1330 msec of time tr19 and tr22, and 1560 msec of time tr15. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W3, so that the frame lamps are turned on as if they were yellow, which corresponds to the background of the SP reach.

Here, as shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the luminance data of the frame lamp is switched over one cycle consisting of 720 msec (180 msec × 4). In the time th7 to th10 and the time tr1, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which exceeds one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1130 msec, and the time tr19 and the time. In tr22, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W3 in 1330 msec, which exceeds one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights in yellow for 1330 msec, and in the time tr15, in 1560 msec, which exceeds two cycles. When the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3, the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1560 msec.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps of one child table WD15 based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of different timings, so that the frame lamps are turned on in yellow at a plurality of different timings. Therefore, the time for turning on the frame lamp in yellow can be changed by making the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 different in the lamp control between the plurality of timings different from each other. As a result, in one child table WD15, it is used for lamp control by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3 without preparing different grandchild tables at each of a plurality of different timings. While reducing the data capacity, the time to turn on the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of SP reach can be changed. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expression) using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

Further, the child table WD9 used in the fanning part of the SP second half reach A, the child table WD12 used in the fanning part of the SP second half reach B, and the child table WD15 used in the fanning part of the SP final reach are different from each other. Since the reference time is changed while using the common grandchild table W3 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the plurality of timings, the data capacity used for lamp control is reduced in a plurality of reach effects. The time to turn on the frame lamp can be different in yellow corresponding to the background of SP reach. Similarly, in the child table WD2 used in the fanning part of the SP first half reach A and the child table WD5 used in the fanning part of the SP first half reach B, different grandchild tables should be prepared at each of a plurality of different timings. By changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, the data capacity used for lamp control is reduced, and the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of SP reach is different. May be good.

A grandchild table W4 is designated between 150 msec of time tr36 and 210 msec of time tr40 and time tr47, respectively. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4. The grandchild table W4 is specified in all of the time tr36, the time tr40, and the time tr47. In the time tr36, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec. By doing so, the frame lamp blinks white twice, and at the time tr40 and the time tr47, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W4 in one cycle time consisting of 210 msec, so that the frame lamp is lamped. Flashes white three times.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of different timings in one child table WD15, thereby blinking the frame lamps in white at a plurality of different timings. By differentiating the time for referring to the grandchild table W4 in the lamp control between a plurality of different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be set to 2 or 3 times. As a result, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings. The number of times the white blinks can be made different. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expression) using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

Further, the child table WD2 used in the fanning part of the SP first half reach A, the child table WD5 used in the fanning part of the SP first half reach B, the child table WD9 used in the fanning part of the SP second half reach A, and the fanning of the SP second half reach B. In both the child table WD12 used in the part and the child table WD15 used in the fanning part of the SP final reach, a common grandchild table W4 can be used without preparing a separate grandchild table at each of a plurality of different timings. By changing the reference time while using it, the number of times of blinking white can be made different while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expression) using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

At time tr41, grandchild table W5 or grandchild table W6 is designated. When the information for executing the red cut-in effect is set in the effect setting process, the grandchild table W5 is specified at the time tr41, and when the information for executing the green cut-in effect is set in the effect setting process, the grandchild table W5 is specified. The grandchild table W6 is specified at time tr41.

The grandchild table W5 corresponds to the grandchild tables W5a to W5e for the frame lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table shown in FIGS. 233 to 235, which will be described later. As shown in FIGS. 233 to 235, in the grandchild tables W5 (W5a to W5e), the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp is initially varied with respect to only the R data at 30 msec intervals. Data showing various brightness is specified, data showing various brightness is specified only for R data at the next 20 msec interval, and finally various brightness is specified only for R data alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. The data indicating is specified. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in red in correspondence with the cut-in effect (red cut-in effect) as shown in FIG. 128 (r41) by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W5.

The grandchild table W6 corresponds to the grandchild tables W6a to W6e for the frame lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table shown in FIGS. 242 to 244, which will be described later. As shown in FIGS. 242 to 244, in the grandchild tables W6 (W6a to W6e), the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp is initially varied with respect to only the G data at 30 msec intervals. Data showing various brightness is specified, data showing various brightness is specified only for G data at the next 20 msec interval, and finally various brightness is specified only for G data alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. The data indicating is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W6 to light the frame lamp in green in correspondence with the cut-in effect (green cut-in effect) as shown in FIG. 128 (r41).

As shown in FIGS. 128 (r40) and 128 (r41), when the push button 31B is displayed and the cut-in effect is executed, the character does not emit dialogue and the subtitles are not displayed. Further, the frame lamp that is the target of the lamp control in the scene other than the cut-in effect in the final reach of the SP is still the target of the lamp control in the cut-in effect.

As a result, the display (button display) prompting the player to operate the push button 31B and the subtitle display do not overlap when executing the cut-in effect, and the overlap makes it difficult to recognize either display. It is possible to prevent the contents of the display from being misunderstood. Further, the luminance data of the lamp control (RGB data in the grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) in the cut-in effect and the button display for the cut-in effect is the same frame as the lamp control in the fanning part of the SP final reach. By being designed to use a lamp, it is possible to prevent the lighting / blinking of an extra lamp from being mixed and spoiling the aesthetic appearance, and it is possible to provide an effect in a suitable fanning part.

In the present embodiment, the lamp control target is common in that the frame lamp is used for both the button display and the cut-in effect and the other SP final reach effects. Not exclusively. For example, only one or more game effect lamps 9 such as a frame lamp, a character lamp 9A, and a board left lamp 9B are used for the button display and the cut-in effect and the other effects in the SP final reach. The target of the lamp control may be common in terms of points, or the target of lamp control may be common in that all the game effect lamps 9 are used.

At 860 msec at time tr49 and time tr50, the grandchild table W9 is specified. The grandchild table W9 corresponds to the grandchild table W9 for the frame lamp in the trigger display luminance data table shown in FIG. 250, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 250, in the grandchild table W9, “D00” is designated at 30 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W9 to correspond to an effect in which the stick controller 31A (trigger) as shown in FIGS. 131 (r49) and (r50) is displayed in the center. Then, turn on the frame lamp in red.

The grandchild table W10 is designated at the time tr51 to tr54, which is the last time of the fanning part of the SP final reach. The grandchild table W10 corresponds to the grandchild table W10 for the frame lamp in the operation promotion luminance data table shown in FIG. 250, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 250, in the grandchild table W10, “500” or “D00] is specified at intervals of 30 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W10, the player is encouraged to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger) as shown in FIGS. 131 (r51) to 132 (r54). , The frame lamp blinks in red. At the time tr51 to tr54, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10 for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD15 becomes 0. Until then, the frame lamp keeps blinking red based on the grandchild table W10 for 10 minutes.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 131 (r49) to 132 (r54), the sound corresponding to the operation promotion and the sound corresponding to the reach (BGM) were output in the pass / fail branch in the fanning part of the SP final reach. In the state, the frame lamps are switched one after another, such as blinking white, lighting red, and blinking red, and it is possible to excite the effect of promoting the operation for the player at the success / failure branch (decision timing).

Here, the child table WD2 used in the fanning part of the SP first half reach A, the child table WD5 used in the fanning part of the SP first half reach B, the child table WD9 used in the fanning part of the SP second half reach A, and the SP second half reach B. When the operation promotion that prompts the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger) is not performed like the child table WD12 used in the fanning part, the frame lamp is set at the final hit / fail branch of the fanning part. It remains lit in white and then transitions to the hit epilogue part or the lost epilogue part. On the other hand, when the operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger) like the child table WD15 used in the fanning part of the SP final reach, it is shown in FIG. 130 (r47). After blinking white in a production that incites whether or not the ally character catches the explosive chew, the explosive chew and the ally character are alternately displayed as shown in FIG. 130 (r48). After the frame lamp lights up in red in response to such an effect, the stick controller 31A (trigger) as shown in FIGS. 131 (r49) and (r50) is switched to the grandchild table W9 and based on the grandchild table W9. The frame lamp lights up in red in response to the effect displayed in the center.

In this way, in the SP reach effect in which the operation is not promoted to encourage the player to operate in the pass / fail branch, the effect is stopped by keeping the mute state and keeping the frame lamp lit in white. Can be shown to the player, and the success / failure branch (decision timing) can be conveyed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. On the other hand, in the SP reach effect in which the operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to operate in the pass / fail branch, the sound corresponding to the operation promotion and the sound corresponding to the reach (BGM) are output, and further, the operation promotion is performed. By switching and using the grandchild table a plurality of times in order to control the frame lamp so as to correspond to the mode corresponding to the above, the timing of determining the success / failure branch can be suitably produced depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. As described above, it is possible to preferably produce the timing of determining the success / failure branch by different sound control and lamp control depending on whether the operation promotion is performed in the success / failure branch or the operation promotion is performed. Further, in the SP final reach in which the operation is promoted to encourage the player to operate in the pass / fail branch, the luminance data (RGB data) is set to "500" and "D00" at intervals of 30 msec based on the grandchild table W10. As a result, the timing of determining the success / failure branch can be suitably produced depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

Further, in the child table WD15 of the SP final reach fanning part, when a character appears, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights in the color corresponding to the character, and the character. Brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in the color corresponding to the character when the character emits a line.

For example, at time tr2, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to an effect in which six ally characters located on the left side of the screen and an explosive chew located on the right side of the screen face each other as shown in FIG. 115 (r2). Then, the left frame lamp is blinked in white corresponding to the six ally characters, and the right frame lamp is turned on in red corresponding to the explosion chew. Further, since the six ally characters located on the left side of the screen emit lines, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame left lamp in white. Further, at the time tr3, the effect control CPU 120 has a red frame corresponding to the explosive chew in response to the effect that the explosive chew located on the right side of the screen emits a line as shown in FIG. 115 (r3). Blink the right lamp.

As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters emitting lines are displayed, which character is emitting the lines can be suitably expressed by lighting / blinking the frame lamp, and the effect in the fanning part can be preferably expressed. Can be shown to others.

Further, in the child table WD15 of the SP final reach fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character when the character takes an action. There is.

For example, at the time tr11, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in blue corresponding to the maid A in response to the effect that the maid A chases the explosive chew as shown in FIG. 118 (r11). Further, at time tr25, time tr27, time tr29, time tr31, time tr33, and time tr35, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIGS. 123 (r25), (r27), 124 (r29), 125 (r31), When there is a character line as shown in (r33) and FIG. 126 (r35) but no subtitle, the frame lamp is blinked in the color corresponding to the character.

Thus, as shown in FIGS. 123 (r25), (r27), 124 (r29), 125 (r31), (r33), and 126 (r35), there are character lines while subtitles are present. Even if there is no such data, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights / blinks in the color corresponding to the character. As a result, even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, it is possible to preferably express that the character is emitting dialogue by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to preferably show the player the effect in the fanning part. can.

[Brightness data table used in epilogue part per SP final reach]
FIG. 215 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the hit epilogue part of the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 215 (a1), in the parent table for the accessory movement used for the hit epilogue part of the SP final reach, the maximum time during which the lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). And the information for designating the child tables (WD16a, YD16a, LD16a, AD16a) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 215 (a2), in the child table WD16a for the accessory movement used for the hit epilogue part of the SP final reach, the time of the accessory movement part in the hit epilogue part of the SP final reach is subdivided for the frame lamp. And the grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD16a of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, the grandchild table W18 is specified between 10000 msec of time ts1 to ts3. The grandchild table W18 corresponds to the grandchild table W18 for the frame lamp in the hit-determined luminance data table shown in FIG. 256, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 256, in the grandchild table W18, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data of various brightness corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec. Then, "333" is specified in the next 30 msec, and such RGB data is repeatedly specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, so that after the pass / fail branch shown in FIG. 132 (r54), the accessory as shown in FIGS. 133 (s1) to (s3) falls. The frame lamp blinks in seven colors in response to such an effect.

As shown in FIG. 215 (b1), in the parent table for the hit epilogue used for the hit epilogue part of the SP final reach, the maximum time for ramp control for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). , Information for designating the child tables (WD16b, YD16b, LD16b, AD16b) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is stored.

As shown in FIG. 215 (b2), in the child table WD16b for the hit epilogue used for the hit epilogue part of the SP final reach, the time of the hit epilogue portion in the hit epilogue part of the SP final reach is subdivided for the frame lamp. In addition, the grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD16b of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, at time ts3-2 to ts3-8, the grandchild table W4 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the effect control CPU 120 seems to have caught the explosive chew while raising the accessory as shown in FIGS. 173 (s3-2) to 174 (s3-8). The frame lamp blinks in white, which corresponds to the rise of the accessory, in response to the effect of the appearance of the display.

At times ts4 to ts7, the grandchild table W1 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W1 to make the frame lamp correspond to the effect of catching the explosion chew as shown in FIGS. 134 (s4) to 135 (s7). Lights up smoothly with the rainbow color that corresponds to the hit confirmation.

As shown in FIG. 215 (c1), in the parent table for common design used for the hit epilogue part of the SP final reach, the maximum time for lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). And the information for designating the child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 215 (c2), in the child table WD0 for common symbolizing used for the hit epilogue part of the SP final reach, the time of the symbolizing portion in the hit epilogue part of the SP final reach is subdivided for the frame lamp. At the same time, the grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified between 5000 msec of time ts8 and time ts9. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W4 to display the frame lamp as a pattern in response to the effect of producing a hit pattern as shown in FIGS. 135 (s8) and (s9). Blink in the corresponding bright white.

At the final time ts10 of the hit epilogue part, the frame lamp is smoothly lit in rainbow color in correspondence with the effect that the hit symbol as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) is displayed in the center of the screen. In the time ts10, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and is based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD16 becomes 0. The frame lamp keeps the rainbow color lit.

In this way, in the child table of the hit epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is designated for the times ts4 to ts7, and based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamp is set to correspond to the effect of catching the explosive chew. It lights up smoothly in rainbow color, and the grandchild table W1 is also specified for the time ts10. Based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamp is set to correspond to the effect that the winning pattern is displayed in the center of the screen. It lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. As a result, in the hit epilogue part, the grandchild table used at the time of hit notification and the grandchild table used at the time of displaying the hit symbol are shared, so that different grandchild tables are not prepared at each of a plurality of different timings. , While reducing the data capacity used for lamp control to light in rainbow colors, each effect can be enlivened with a sense of unity. As a result, the effect in the hit epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

In addition, in the child table WD16 of the epilogue part per SP final reach, in the production where the accessory falls, the rainbow color and the achromatic color (RGB data of "333") are switched alternately. The frame lamp is lamp controlled. As a result, by occasionally sandwiching an achromatic color with respect to the rainbow-colored chromatic color, it is possible to perform an effect that emphasizes the big hit and congratulates the player. After that, in the production where the ally character catches the Baku Chu, the player is blessed in a calm manner that the big hit was achieved by lighting the smooth rainbow color without sandwiching the achromatic color. be able to. As a result, the effect in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be preferably shown to the player.

[Brightness data table used in SP final reach loss epilogue part]
FIG. 216 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the lost epilogue part of the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 216 (a1), in the parent table for the lost epilogue used for the lost epilogue part of the SP final reach, the maximum time during which the lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). , Information for designating the child tables (WD17, YD17, LD17, AD17) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is stored.

As shown in FIG. 216 (a2), in the child table WD17 for the lost epilogue used for the lost epilogue part of the SP final reach, the time of the lost epilogue part in the SP final reach is subdivided and each time is divided for the frame lamp. The grandchild table referenced by the band is specified. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD17 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, the grandchild table W13 is specified during 200 msec of time tu1. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to an effect in which the explosion chew escapes as shown in FIG. 137 (u1) after the success / failure branch shown in FIG. 132 (r54). Then, the frame lamp is turned on in white.

The red blinking in the pass / fail branch (tr54) is based on the grandchild table W10 shown in FIG. 250 described later, and the RGB data includes "D00", whereas the white lighting in tu1 after the loss notification is described later. Based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, the RGB data thereof are “888” and “444”. As a result, at the time of loss, the frame lamp can be turned on in white, which is darker than the red blinking in the pass / fail branch (tr54), so that it is possible to notify the player that the loss has occurred.

The grandchild table W14 is specified during the time tr2 of 3900 msec. By controlling the lamps based on the grandchild table W14, the effect control CPU 120 sets the frame lamp to tu1 in response to the effect that six ally characters lose and are disappointed as shown in FIG. 137 (u2). Lights in a darker white color.

The rainbow lighting at the time of hit (ts4 to ts7) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 225 described later, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 30 msec, whereas the rainbow lighting at the time of loss (tu1) is dark white lighting. Is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 250 msec, which is longer than the hit time. As a result, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals in the hit time than in the loss time, so that it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the hit is achieved depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, while the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more than when it is lost at the time of hitting, the lighting by the frame lamp can be calmed down more than when it is lost, and as a result, the lamp that contrasts the hit and loss. It is possible to convey to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, the child table WD4 of the SP first half reach A, the child table WD7 of the SP first half reach B, the child table WD11 of the SP second half reach A, and the child table WD14 of the SP second half reach B are also the same as the child table WD17 of the SP final reach. In addition, the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode at the time of loss based on the grandchild table W14. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W14 for 5800 msec in the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, whereas in the SP final reach, it is 3900 msec. Meanwhile, the frame lamp is controlled by the grandchild table W14. In this way, it is possible to make the grandchild table used for lamp control at the time of loss common among a plurality of different reach, but to make the lamp control time different with reference to the grandchild table. As a result, in the child table used in each of the plurality of different reach, the reference time is changed while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a grandchild table dedicated to the time of loss in each of the different plurality of reach. As a result, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control and to make the time for lighting the frame lamp different in the lighting mode corresponding to the loss. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the loss in a suitable manner in each of the plurality of reach.

At time tu3, the grandchild table W15 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W15, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the frame lamp in response to an effect in which a loss as shown in FIG. 137 (u3) is notified and the screen goes dark. ..

At time tu4, the grandchild table W21 is designated. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W21 to display a normal screen as shown in FIG. 138 (u4). Turn on with. Further, at the time tu4, the lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in the relief part]
FIG. 217 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the relief per part. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD18 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 217, in the child table WD18 of the frame lamp, the time of the part per relief is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table referred to in each time zone is specified.

For example, at 1980 msec at time tv1, the grandchild table W16 is specified. The grandchild table W16 corresponds to the grandchild table W16 for the frame lamp in the one-luminance data table per relief shown in FIG. 254, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 254, in the grandchild table W16, “D00” is specified for each lamp in the first 30 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and each in the next 30 msec. "B00" is specified for the lamp. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W16 to turn on the frame lamp in red in accordance with the relief effect shown in FIG. 139 (v1).

In this way, from the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W21 designated last in each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used at the time of loss, the child table WD18 used for relief is first. By switching to the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the designated grandchild table W16, the frame lamp lights even brighter. As a result, at the time of relief hit, the frame lamp lights up brighter than the state after the loss notification, so that the player can easily understand the loss notification and the subsequent relief hit notification depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. I can show you.

In the present embodiment, the frame lamp lights up once in yellow corresponding to the normal background after the loss notification, and further, in the case of hitting the relief, the frame lamp lights up brighter in red corresponding to the relief effect. there were. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used at the time of loss, the grandchild table W15 is specified at the end, so that "111" is specified as the final luminance data (RGB data). May be done. As a result, at the end of the loss, the frame lamp turns off in white. Further, "AAA" may be designated as the first luminance data (RGB data) in the first designated grandchild table W16 of the child table WD18 used at the time of relief. As a result, at the beginning of the relief hit after the loss notification, the frame lamp lights up brightly with a white system. In this way, at the time of relief hit, the frame lamp lights up in the same color (white) as the state after the loss notification and brighter than the state after the loss notification, so that the loss depends on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. The notification and the subsequent relief hit notification can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

At 700 msec of time tv2, the grandchild table W17 is specified. The grandchild table W17 corresponds to the grandchild table W17 for the frame lamp in the two-luminance data table per relief shown in FIG. 255, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 255, in the grandchild table W17, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, white data such as “AAA” and “DDD” for each lamp at intervals of 30 msec. Is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W17 to turn on the frame lamp in white in accordance with the whiteout effect shown in FIG. 139 (v2).

The grandchild table W4 is specified between the time tv3 and the time tv4 of 5000 msec. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white in correspondence with the effect of displaying the patterns shown in FIGS. 140 (v3) and 140 (v4).

At the last time tv5 of the relief per part, the grandchild table W1 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, the effect control CPU 120 smoothly lights the frame lamp in the rainbow color corresponding to the hit confirmation in accordance with the effect of the patterning shown in FIG. 140 (v5). .. At time tv5, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD18 becomes 0. The frame lamp keeps the rainbow color lit.

[Brightness data table used in the re-lottery part]
FIG. 218 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the re-lottery part. As shown in FIG. 218, in the parent table in the brightness data table used for the re-lottery part, the maximum time for which the lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and for each game effect lamp 9. Information that specifies a child table (WD19, YD19, LD19, AD19) referred to during lamp control is stored.

(Brightness data table used before promoting operation)
FIG. 219 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the re-lottery part (before the operation is promoted). As shown in FIG. 219, as the child table WD19 of the frame lamp, a child table used before the start of movement of the symbol and a child table used after the start of movement of the symbol are prepared. In each child table in these re-lottery parts, the time of the re-lottery part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table referred to in each time zone is specified.

FIG. 219 (a) shows a child table used before the symbol starts to move. For example, at times tA6 to tA8, a grandchild table for turning off the frame lamp is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the designated grandchild table, and as shown in FIGS. 142 (A6) to 143 (A8), after the re-lottery effect is started, the symbol is generated by the re-lottery effect. Turn off the frame lamp once before it starts moving.

In this way, once the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp is lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the effect that the symbol starts to move by the re-lottery effect. Therefore, the symbol starts to move by the re-lottery effect depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. It is possible to convey this to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

FIG. 219 (b) shows a child table used after the start of movement of the symbol. At the times tA9 and tA10, the grandchild table W19 is specified. The grandchild table W19 corresponds to the grandchild table W19 for the frame lamp in the re-lottery effect brightness data table shown in FIG. 257, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 257, in the grandchild table W19, "F00" and "700" are alternately designated as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp at intervals of 60 msec. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W19 to correspond to an effect in which the symbol “2” as shown in FIGS. 143 (A9) and 144 (A10) is reduced. Flash the frame lamp in red.

At times tA11 to tA46, the grandchild table W20 is designated. The grandchild table W20 corresponds to the grandchild table W20 for the frame lamp in the re-lottery effect brightness data table shown in FIG. 258, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 258, in the grandchild table W20, "F00" and "700" are alternately designated as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp at intervals of 30 msec shorter than that of the grandchild table W20. Has been done. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W20, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the effect of changing at high speed while switching the symbols as shown in FIGS. 144 (A11) to 156 (A46). The frame lamp blinks red at high speed.

(Brightness data table used when the design is promoted after the operation is promoted)
FIG. 220 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a re-lottery part (promotion of a symbol after promotion of operation). The frame lamp child table WD20 shown in FIG. 220 is a continuation of the frame lamp child table WD19 shown in FIG. 219. As shown in FIG. 220, in the frame lamp child table WD20, the time of the re-lottery part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table referred to in each time zone is designated.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified between 5000 msec of times tB1 to tB4. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, and as shown in FIGS. 157 (B1) to 158 (B4), after the operation promotion is executed in the re-lottery part, "3". The frame lamp blinks in white in response to the effect of displaying the design so that the design of is enlarged.

At times tB5 to tB9, the grandchild table W18 is designated. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, the effect control CPU 120 reduces the design of "3" as shown in FIGS. 157 (B5) to (B9) and displays it in a normal size. The frame lamp is blinked in rainbow color in response to the effect of confirming the symbol after the symbol of "3" is shaken and displayed.

It should be noted that the blinking of the rainbow color by the lamp control at the times tB5 to tB9 is more intense than the smooth rainbow color lighting by the lamp control based on the grandchild table W1. For example, at time tB5 to tB9, it blinks more violently than the smooth lighting of the rainbow color. In the time tB5 to tB9, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the grandchild table is used for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD20 becomes 0. Based on the frame lamp keeps blinking rainbow color.

In this way, in the child table WD20 of the re-lottery part, as a lamp control when the symbol is finally decided after the re-lottery, the rainbow is the same as the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, WD16 of the hit epilogue part. The frame lamp lights up in color, but when the symbol is promoted from the symbol "2" and replaced with the symbol "3" by re-lottery, the blinking rainbow color at tB5 to tB9 is once "2" in the hit epilogue part. The lighting mode is more intense than the smooth rainbow-colored lighting when the symbol of is temporarily stopped. As a result, the player can effectively congratulate the player that the winning symbol has been promoted by the re-lottery depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

Further, when the symbol starts to move due to the re-lottery effect with the lights off and the symbol is swaying and displayed, a smooth rainbow color is obtained based on the brightness data corresponding to the re-lottery effect (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W19). Flashes red in a different lighting mode. As a result, the player does not misunderstand that the hit symbol temporarily stopped in the hit epilogue part is determined depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

In addition, the frame lamp is designed to blink in rainbow color with the start of an effect in which the symbol of "3" as shown in FIGS. 159 (B7) to 159 (B9) is shaken and displayed and then the symbol is confirmed. Therefore, it is easy for the designer to decide the start trigger for blinking the frame lamp in rainbow color.

Further, the blinking of the rainbow color when the symbol of "3" is shaken and displayed as shown in FIG. 159 (B7) is subsequently during the period for determining the symbol as shown in FIGS. 159 (B8) and (B9). Will also be taken over. In this way, during the symbol determination period that is performed in a short period of time, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare repertoire is performed as it is without preparing a special brightness data table for lamp control. Therefore, the data. No extra capacity is added.

(Brightness data table used when the symbol is not promoted after the operation is promoted)
FIG. 221 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the re-lottery part (after the operation is promoted). The frame lamp child table WD21 shown in FIG. 221 is a continuation of the frame lamp child table WD19 shown in FIG. 219. As shown in FIG. 221, in the child table WD21 of the frame lamp, the time of the re-lottery part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table referred to in each time zone is designated.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified between 5000 msec of times tC1 to tC4. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, and as shown in FIGS. 161 (C1) to 162 (C4), after the operation promotion is executed in the re-lottery part, "2" The frame lamp blinks in white in response to the effect of displaying the design so that the design of is enlarged.

At times tC5 to tC9, the grandchild table W1 is designated. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 so that the design of "2" as shown in FIGS. 162 (C5) to 163 (C9) is shaken and displayed, and then the design is determined. The frame lamp is lit smoothly in rainbow color. In the time tC5 to tC9, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the grandchild table W1 is performed for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD21 becomes 0. The frame lamp keeps the rainbow color lit based on.

In this way, in the child table WD21 of the re-lottery part, as a lamp control when the symbol is finally decided after the re-lottery, the grandchildren in common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, WD16 of the hit epilogue part. Table W1 is used. This eliminates the need to prepare separate grandchild tables for rainbow color lighting for the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part, reducing the data capacity used for lamp control and providing a sense of unity even for different parts (timing). It is possible to show the player a certain effect. As a result, it is possible to show the player better the production in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part while reducing the data capacity.

In addition, in the state where the hit symbol is temporarily stopped in the hit epilogue part, after the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow color, the symbol starts to move by the re-lottery effect with the lights off, and the symbol is shaken and displayed. At that time, the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow color based on the luminance data corresponding to the re-lottery effect (for example, the RGB data in the grandchild tables W19 and W20). As a result, the player does not misunderstand that the hit symbol temporarily stopped in the hit epilogue part is determined depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

In addition, when the symbol is promoted from the symbol "2" by the re-lottery and replaced with the symbol "3", the rainbow color lighting at the time tB5 to tB9 is "2" without being promoted from the symbol "2" by the re-lottery. The lighting mode is more intense than the smooth lighting of the rainbow color at the time tC5 to tC9 when the symbol of 1 is maintained. As a result, when the winning symbol is promoted in the re-lottery, the player can effectively congratulate the promotion of the winning symbol in the re-lottery depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp, and the winning symbol is promoted in the re-lottery. If not, the data capacity can be reduced by using the grandchild table W1 which is used in the hit epilogue part and is common to the grandchild table W1.

Further, with the start of the production in which the symbol of "2" becomes the normal size and the symbol is fixed after the symbol of "2" as shown in FIGS. 163 (C7) to (C9) is finished. Since the frame lamp is designed to light in the rainbow color, it is easy for the designer to decide the start trigger for lighting the frame lamp in the rainbow color.

Further, when the symbol "3" as shown in FIG. 163 (C7) is shaken and displayed, the rainbow color is lit during the period in which the symbol is fixed as shown in FIGS. 163 (C8) and (C9). Will also be taken over. In this way, during the symbol determination period that is performed in a short period of time, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare repertoire is performed as it is without preparing a special brightness data table for lamp control. Therefore, the data. No extra capacity is added.

[Brightness data table used in fanfare repertoire]
FIG. 222 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a fanfare repertoire. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD22 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 222, in the child table WD22 of the frame lamp, the time of the fanfare repertoire is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table referred to in each time zone is specified.

For example, at times tD1 and tE1, a grandchild table for turning off the frame lamp is specified. By performing lamp control based on the designated grandchild table, the effect control CPU 120 temporarily sets the frame lamp before the fanfare display is performed, as shown in FIG. 160 (D1) or FIG. 164 (E1). Turn off the lights.

At times tD2 and tE2, a grandchild table for lighting the frame lamp in a fanfare manner is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the designated grandchild table, and as shown in FIG. 160 (D2) or FIG. 164 (E2), sets the frame lamp in a fanfare mode in accordance with the fanfare effect. It is lit in the lighting mode. At the time tD2 and tE2, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the grandchild table is used for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD22 becomes 0. Based on this, the frame lamp keeps the fanfare mode lit.

[Smooth Rainbow Luminance Data Table]
FIG. 223 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 223, in the parent table in the smooth rainbow brightness data table, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes), which is referred to when the lamp is controlled for each game effect lamp 9. Information that specifies the child table (WS1, YS1, LS1, AS1) to be created is stored.

FIG. 224 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 224, in the child table in the smooth rainbow brightness data table, grandchild tables (W1, Y1, L1, A1) referred to in a predetermined time zone are designated for each game effect lamp 9.

FIG. 225 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 225, in the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp, the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp has various brightness corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) at intervals of 30 msec. The data is sparsely specified. The effect control CPU 120 smoothly lights the frame lamp in the rainbow color corresponding to the hit confirmation by performing the lamp control based on the grandchild table W1.

FIG. 226 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the accessory lamp and the grandchild table for the left panel lamp in the smooth rainbow brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 226, in the grandchild table Y1 for the accessory lamp, the data of "FFFF" is specified for 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the data of "RRRR" output to the accessory lamp 9A. There is. The effect control CPU 120 lights the accessory lamp 9A in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table Y1. In the grandchild table L1 for the left panel lamp, the data of "FFFFF" is specified for 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the data of "WWWWWW" output to the left panel lamp 9B. The effect control CPU 120 lights the left panel lamp 9B in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table L1.

FIG. 227 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 227, in the grandchild table A1 for the attacker lamp, the “RGB” data output to the attacker lamp 9E, the “WWW” data output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and the output to the electric chew lamp 9H. As the "RGB" data to be output, data of various brightness corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at intervals of 30 msec. The effect control CPU 120 smoothly lights each of the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, and the electric chew lamp 9H in a rainbow color corresponding to the hit confirmation by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table A1.

[Characteristic operation red blinking brightness data table]
FIG. 228 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the accessory operation red blinking luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 228, in the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp, "A00" is specified in the first 40 msec as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and in the next 30 msec. "333" is specified. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W2.

[Yellow haze brightness data table]
FIG. 229 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a yellow haze brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, "440", "660", and "880" are sparsely designated as "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp at 180 msec intervals. ing. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W3, so that the frame lamps are turned on as if they were yellow.

[Blinking white (white flash) brightness data table]
FIG. 230 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a white blinking (white flash) luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 230, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are alternately designated as "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp at intervals of 30 msec. The first 30 msec is "000" (lights off), the next 30 msec is "AAA" (lights up in white), the next 30 msec is "000" (lights off), the next 30 msec is "AAA" (lights up in white), and the next The 30 msec is "000" (lights off), the next 30 msec is "AAA" (lights up in white), and the last 30 msec is "000" (lights off). That is, the frame lamp blinks in white (white flash) a plurality of times by alternately repeating "off" and "on" for one cycle consisting of 210 msec (30 msec x 7). The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4.

[Common red cut-in brightness data table]
FIG. 231 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 231, in the parent table in the common red cut-in brightness data table, the time during which the lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 3970 msec, and the child referred to during the lamp control for each game effect lamp 9. Information that specifies a table (WS5, YS5, LS5, AS5) is stored.

FIG. 232 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 232, in the child table in the common red cut-in luminance data table, for each game effect lamp 9, the grandchild tables (W5 (W5a to W5e), Y5 (Y5a to Y5e)) referred to in a predetermined time zone. , L5 (L5a to L5e), A5 (A5a to A5e)) are specified.

233 to 235 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 233 to 235, in the grandchild tables W5a, W5b, and W5c, the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp is various for only the R data at 30 msec intervals. Data indicating the brightness is specified. In the grandchild table W5d, as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data showing various luminances with respect to only the R data is specified at intervals of 20 msec. In the grandchild table W5e, as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data showing various luminances are specified alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec with respect to only the R data. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild tables W5 (W5a to W5e).

FIG. 236 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the accessory lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 236, in the grandchild tables Y5a, Y5b, and Y5c for the accessory lamp, data showing various brightness is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the accessory lamp 9A at intervals of 30 msec. There is. In the grandchild table Y5d, as the "RRRR" data output to the accessory lamp 9A, data showing various luminances are specified at intervals of 20 msec. In the grandchild table Y5e, as the data of "RRRR" output to the accessory lamp 9A, data showing various brightness alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec are specified. The effect control CPU 120 lights or blinks the accessory lamp 9A in a color corresponding to the common red cut-in by performing lamp control based on the grandchild tables Y5 (Y5a to Y5e).

FIG. 237 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the left lamp of the panel in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 237, in the grandchild tables L5a, L5b, and L5c for the left panel lamp, data indicating various luminances are designated as "WWWWWW" data output to the left panel lamp 9B at intervals of 30 msec. There is. In the grandchild table L5d, as the data of "WWWWWW" output to the left lamp 9B of the board, data showing various brightness is specified at intervals of 20 msec. In the grandchild table L5e, as the data of "WWWWWW" output to the left lamp 9B of the board, data showing various brightness alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec are specified. The effect control CPU 120 lights or blinks the panel left lamp 9B in a color corresponding to the common red cut-in by performing lamp control based on the grandchild tables L5 (L5a to L5e).

238 and 239 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 238 and 239, in the grandchild tables A5a, A5b, and A5c for the attacker lamp, the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "WWW" data output to the V attacker lamp 9F. , And as the "RGB" data output to the electric chew lamp 9H, data showing various brightness is specified at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric chew lamp 9H, data showing various luminances are specified only for the R data. In the grandchild table A5d, 20 msec as "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E, "WWW" data output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and "RGB" data output to the electric chew lamp 9H. Data showing various brightness is specified at intervals. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric chew lamp 9H, data showing various luminances are specified only for the R data. In the grandchild table A5e, 30 msec is used as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric chew lamp 9H. Data showing various brightnesses are alternately specified at 40 msec and 40 msec. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric chew lamp 9H, data showing various luminances are specified only for the R data. The effect control CPU 120 lights the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, and the electric chew lamp 9H in a color corresponding to the common red cut-in by performing lamp control based on the grandchild tables A5 (A5a to A5e). Or make it blink.

[Common green cut-in brightness data table]
FIG. 240 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 240, in the parent table in the common green cut-in brightness data table, the time during which the lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 3970 msec, and the child referred to during the lamp control for each game effect lamp 9. Information that specifies a table (WS6, YS6, LS6, AS6) is stored.

FIG. 241 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 241 in the child table in the common green cut-in luminance data table, the grandchild tables (W6 (W6a to W6e), Y6 (Y6a to Y6e)) referred to in a predetermined time zone for each game effect lamp 9. , L6 (L6a to L6e), A6 (A6a to A6e)) are specified.

FIGS. 242 to 244 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 242 to 244, in the grandchild tables W6a, W6b, and W6c, the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp is various with respect to only the G data at intervals of 30 msec. Data indicating the brightness is specified. In the grandchild table W6d, as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data showing various luminances with respect to only the G data is specified at intervals of 20 msec. In the grandchild table W6e, as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data showing various luminances are specified alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec with respect to only the G data. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in green by performing lamp control based on the grandchild tables W6 (W6a to W6e).

FIG. 245 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the accessory lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 245, in the grandchild tables Y6a, Y6b, and Y6c for the accessory lamp, data indicating various brightness is designated as the "RRRR" data output to the accessory lamp 9A at intervals of 30 msec. There is. In the grandchild table Y6d, as the "RRRR" data output to the accessory lamp 9A, data showing various luminances are specified at intervals of 20 msec. In the grandchild table Y6e, as the data of "RRRR" output to the accessory lamp 9A, data showing various brightness alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec are specified. The effect control CPU 120 lights or blinks the accessory lamp 9A in a color corresponding to the common green cut-in by performing lamp control based on the grandchild tables Y6 (Y6a to Y6e).

FIG. 246 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the left lamp of the panel in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 246, in the grandchild tables L6a, L6b, and L6c for the left panel lamp, data indicating various luminances are designated as "WWWWWW" data output to the left panel lamp 9B at intervals of 30 msec. There is. In the grandchild table L6d, as the data of "WWWWWW" output to the left lamp 9B of the board, data showing various brightness is specified at intervals of 20 msec. In the grandchild table L6e, as the data of "WWWWWW" output to the left lamp 9B of the board, data showing various brightness alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec are specified. The effect control CPU 120 lights or blinks the panel left lamp 9B in a color corresponding to the common 6 cut-ins by performing lamp control based on the grandchild tables L6 (L6a to L6e).

247 and 248 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 247 and 248, in the grandchild tables A6a, A6b, and A6c for the attacker lamp, the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "WWW" data output to the V attacker lamp 9F. , And as the "RGB" data output to the electric chew lamp 9H, data showing various brightness is specified at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric chew lamp 9H, data showing various brightness is specified only for the G data. In the grandchild table A6d, 20 msec as "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E, "WWW" data output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and "RGB" data output to the electric chew lamp 9H. Data showing various brightness is specified at intervals. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric chew lamp 9H, data showing various brightness is specified only for the G data. In the grandchild table A6e, 30 msec is used as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric chew lamp 9H. Data showing various brightnesses are alternately specified at 40 msec and 40 msec. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric chew lamp 9H, data showing various brightness is specified only for the G data. The effect control CPU 120 lights the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, and the electric chew lamp 9H in a color corresponding to the common green cut-in by performing lamp control based on the grandchild tables A6 (A6a to A6e). Or make it blink.

[Furning brightness data table without operation promotion]
FIG. 249 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the fanning brightness data table without operation promotion. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W7, "FDC" and "300" are alternately designated as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp at intervals of 30 msec. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W7.

In the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100,000 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W8.

[Furning brightness data table with operation promotion]
FIG. 250 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the trigger display luminance data table and the operation promotion luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 250, in the grandchild table W9, “D00” is designated at 30 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W9.

In the grandchild table W10, “500” or “D00] is designated as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp at intervals of 30 msec. The effect control CPU 120 is a lamp based on the grandchild table W10. By controlling, the frame lamp blinks in red.

[Shutter brightness data table]
FIG. 251 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the shutter brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 251, in the grandchild table W11, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, the luminance data is gradually lowered from "A00" to "600" at 30 msec intervals. It is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W11 to light the frame lamps in red while gradually reducing the brightness.

In the grandchild table W12, "600" is specified in 30 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W12.

[Loss brightness data table]
252 and 253 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the loss luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 252, in the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified in the first 10 msec and "444" is specified in the next 190 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13.

In the grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at intervals of 250 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W14 to light the frame lamp in white, which is darker than td1.

As shown in FIG. 253, in the grandchild table W15, "444" is specified in the first 10 msec and "111" is specified in the next 550 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. , "111" is specified in the last 600,000 msec (10 minutes). The effect control CPU 120 turns off the frame lamp by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W15.

[Brightness data table per relief]
FIGS. 254 and 255 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the brightness data table per relief. As shown in FIG. 254, in the grandchild table W16, “D00” is specified for each lamp in the first 30 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and each in the next 30 msec. "B00" is specified for the lamp. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W17.

As shown in FIG. 255, in the grandchild table W17, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, white data such as “AAA” and “DDD” for each lamp at intervals of 30 msec. Is specified. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W18.

[Hit confirmed brightness data table]
FIG. 256 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the hit determination brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 256, in the grandchild table W18, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data of various brightness corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec. Then, "333" is specified in the next 30 msec, and such RGB data is repeatedly specified. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in seven colors by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W18.

[Re-lottery effect brightness data table]
257 and 258 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the re-lottery effect luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 257, in the grandchild table W19, "F00" and "700" are alternately designated as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp at intervals of 60 msec. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W19.

As shown in FIG. 258, in the grandchild table W20, "F00" and "700" are alternately designated as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp at intervals of 30 msec. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in red. As described above, the grandchild table W20 is designed to blink the frame lamp in red while switching the luminance data faster than the grandchild table W19.

[Background brightness data table]
FIG. 259 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the background luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 259, in the child table in the background brightness data table, for each game effect lamp 9, the grandchild tables (W21 (W21a, W21b), Y21 (Y21a, Y21b), L21 ( L21a, L21b), A21 (A21a, A21b)) are designated.

FIG. 260 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the background luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 260, in the grandchild table W21a, "550" or "880" is designated as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in yellow (yellow background lighting pattern) by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W21a.

In the grandchild table W21b, "550", "770", or "880" is designated as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in yellow (yellow background lighting pattern) by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W21b.

<Reference of brightness data>
The brightness data table has been described as described above, but in the following, the brightness data table used by the lamp control after the hit epilogue part will be described while arranging for each effect content.

268 to 271 are diagrams for explaining the reference of the luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 268, at the time ts1 to ts3 of the hit epilogue part, the child table for the accessory operation in the hit epilogue part is used, and the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table 18. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, and after the success / failure branch shown in FIG. 132 (r54), the accessory as shown in FIGS. 133 (s1) to (s3). The frame lamp blinks in seven colors in response to the effect of falling.

At the time ts3-2 to ts3-8 of the hit epilogue part, the child table for the hit epilogue in the hit epilogue part is used, and the lamp control based on the grandchild table 4 is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so that the accessory as shown in FIGS. 173 (s3-2) to 174 (s3-8) rises and the explosion chew is performed. The frame lamp blinks in white, which corresponds to the rise of the accessory, in response to the effect that the display appears as if it was caught.

At the time ts4 to ts7 of the hit epilogue part, the child table for the hit epilogue in the hit epilogue part is used, and the lamp control based on the grandchild table 1 is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to correspond to the effect of catching the explosion chew as shown in FIGS. 134 (s4) to 135 (s7). Light the frame lamp smoothly with the rainbow color corresponding to the hit confirmation.

As shown in FIG. 269, at the time tA1 to tA4 of the hit epilogue part, the child table for patterning in the hit epilogue part is used, and the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table 4. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, thereby corresponding to an effect of producing a hit pattern as shown in FIGS. 141 (A1) to 142 (A4), and a frame. Flash the lamp in a bright white color that corresponds to the pattern.

At the time tA5 of the hit epilogue part, the child table for patterning in the hit epilogue part is used, and the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 so that the frame lamp corresponds to the effect that the hit pattern as shown in FIG. 141 (A5) is displayed in the center of the screen. Lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

As shown in FIG. 270, at the times tA6 to tA8 of the re-lottery part, the child table before the symbol starts to move in the re-lottery part is used, and the lamp control based on the grandchild table for turning off the lights is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the designated grandchild table, and as shown in FIGS. 142 (A6) to 143 (A8), after the re-lottery effect is started, the re-lottery is performed. Turn off the frame lamp once before the design starts to move due to the production.

At the time tA9 and tA10 of the re-lottery part, the child table after the start of movement of the symbol in the re-lottery part is used, and the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W19. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 supports an effect in which the symbol “2” as shown in FIGS. 143 (A9) and 144 (A10) is reduced by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W19. Then, the frame lamp blinks in red.

At the time tA11 to tA46 of the re-lottery part, the child table after the start of movement of the symbol in the re-lottery part is used, and the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W20. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 supports an effect of changing at high speed while switching the symbols as shown in FIGS. 144 (A11) to 156 (A46) by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W20. Then, the frame lamp blinks in red at high speed.

As shown in FIG. 271, at the times tC1 to tC4 of the re-lottery part, the child table for patterning in the re-lottery part is used, and the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table 4. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, and as shown in FIGS. 161 (C1) to 162 (C4), after the operation promotion is executed in the re-lottery part, the operation is promoted. The frame lamp is blinked in white in response to the effect of displaying the design so that the design of "2" is enlarged and displayed.

At the time tC5 to tC9 of the re-lottery part, the child table for displaying the symbols in the re-lottery part is used, and the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table 1. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to determine the symbol after the symbol of "2" as shown in FIGS. 162 (C5) to 163 (C9) is shaken and displayed. The frame lamp is lit smoothly in rainbow color in response to such an effect.

At the fanfare repertoire time tE1, a child table for the fanfare repertoire is used, and a grandchild table for turning off the frame lamp is designated. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the designated grandchild table, and as shown in FIG. 160 (D1) or FIG. 164 (E1), once before the fanfare display is performed. Turn off the frame lamp.

At the time tE2 of the fanfare repertoire, a child table for the fanfare repertoire is used, and a grandchild table for lighting the frame lamp in the fanfare mode is designated. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the designated grandchild table, and as shown in FIG. 160 (D2) or FIG. 164 (E2), causes the frame lamp to correspond to the fanfare effect. It is lit in the lighting mode of the fanfare mode.

In this way, a predetermined child table is set at each timing of each effect part, and the effect control CPU 120 refers to the child table set at each timing of each effect part, and is determined by the child table. Lamp control corresponding to the effect is performed using the luminance data (for example, RGB data) included in the designated grandchild table (luminance data table).

In addition, in FIGS. 268 to 271, the child table from the winning epilogue to the fanfare repart via the re-lottery part when the symbol is not promoted is illustrated, but other routes, for example, the symbol from the winning epilogue is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 192 to 260, a predetermined child table is set at each timing of each production part for the child table leading to the fanfare repart via the re-lottery part in the case of promotion. There is.

<Explanation of characteristic parts in lamp control of pachinko gaming machine 1>
Next, the feature portion and the modification example in the lamp control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be described in detail.

(Start 9)
As shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, the frame lamp is turned off when the shutter is fully opened, so that the player can easily understand the timing when the shutter is fully opened depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. I can tell. In addition, in the fanning part of SP first half reach A and the fanning part of SP first half reach B, which are executed after the start part, they are started with the shutter fully open and the frame lamp is off, and correspond to each SP first half reach. The frame lamp starts lighting and blinking based on the brightness data table. In this way, after the shutter is fully opened and the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp starts to light as the production progresses in the SP first half reach, so that the player knows that the SP first half reach has started. Can be communicated in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Start 11, Start 14)
As shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, at the times ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamps are lit in yellow, red, white, red, and the like. While the brightness data is switched so that it lights up / blinks while changing the color and brightness, in the time ta13 to ta18 after the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamp keeps the brightness lowered and turns red. Luminance data is maintained so that it lights up. As a result, before the shutter is closed, the effect in the start part is excited by the lighting mode of the frame lamp, and when the shutter is closed, the lighting mode of the frame lamp is maintained so that the player can adjust the content of the effect when the shutter is opened. As a result, it is possible to better show the player the production in the subsequent fanning part.

(Fan 7, Fan 9)
64 (b8), (b9), 74 (e7), 94 (i32), 95 (i34), 104 (n10), 123 (r25), (r27), 124 (r29), As shown in FIGS. 125 (r31), (r33), 126 (r35), and the like, even if there is a character's dialogue but no subtitle, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. / Brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so as to blink. As a result, even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, it is possible to preferably express that the character is emitting dialogue by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to preferably show the player the effect in the fanning part. can.

(Fan 10)
Brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights in the color corresponding to the character when the character appears, and when the character emits a line, the color corresponding to the character is used. Brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks. For example, as shown in Fig. 63 (b4), the green frame corresponding to Yumemu-chan corresponds to the production in which Yumemu-chan located on the left side of the screen and Baku Chu located on the right side of the screen confront each other. Turn on the left lamp, and turn on the frame right lamp in red corresponding to the explosion chew. At time tb5, the effect control CPU 120 has a green frame corresponding to Yumemu-chan, corresponding to the effect that Yumemu-chan, located on the left side of the screen, emits a line as shown in FIG. 63 (b5). Blink the left lamp. At time tb6, the effect control CPU 120 has a red frame right lamp corresponding to the explosion chew, corresponding to the effect that the explosion chew located on the right side of the screen emits a line as shown in FIG. 63 (b6). Flashes. As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters emitting lines are displayed, it is possible to preferably express which character is emitting the lines by lighting / blinking the frame lamp, and the production in the fanning part is preferably played. Can be shown to others.

(Fan 17)
The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of different timings in one child table used in the fanning part, so that the frame lamps are turned on in yellow at a plurality of different timings. Therefore, the time for turning on the frame lamp in yellow can be changed by making the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 different in the lamp control between the plurality of timings different from each other. As a result, in one child table WD9, it is used for lamp control by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3 without preparing different grandchild tables at each of a plurality of different timings. While reducing the data capacity, the time to turn on the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of SP reach can be changed. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expression) using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

(Fan 18)
The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamps in white at a plurality of different timings by performing lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of different timings in one child table used in the fanning part. By differentiating the time for referring to the grandchild table W4 in the lamp control between a plurality of different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be set to 2 or 3 times. As a result, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings. The number of times the white blinks can be made different. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expression) using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

(Fan 19)
A plurality of different child tables WD9 used in the fanning part of the SP second half reach A, the child table WD12 used in the fanning part of the SP second half reach B, and the child table WD15 used in the fanning part of the SP final reach. Since the reference time is changed while using the common grandchild table W3 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each timing, SP reach while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control in multiple reach effects. The time to turn on the frame lamp can be changed in yellow corresponding to the background of. Similarly, in the child table WD2 used in the fanning part of the SP first half reach A and the child table WD5 used in the fanning part of the SP first half reach B, different grandchild tables should be prepared at each of a plurality of different timings. By changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, the data capacity used for lamp control is reduced, and the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of SP reach is different. May be good.

(Fan 20)
Child table WD2 used in the fanning part of SP first half reach A, child table WD5 used in the fanning part of SP first half reach B, child table WD9 used in the fanning part of SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B fanning part In both the child table WD12 used and the child table WD15 used in the fanning part of the SP final reach, the common grandchild table W4 is used without preparing a separate grandchild table at each of a plurality of different timings. By changing the reference time, the number of white blinks can be made different while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expression) using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

(Fan cut-in 1)
The brightness data of the lamp control (RGB data in the grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) in the cut-in effect and the button display for the cut-in effect is the frame lamp at the same position as the lamp control in the fanning part of the SP final reach. Designed to be used. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lighting / blinking of the extra lamp from being mixed and spoiling the aesthetic appearance, and it is possible to provide an effect in a suitable fanning part.

(Win / Fail 13)
In the SP reach production in which the operation is not promoted to encourage the player to operate in the pass / fail branch, the player is given a production in which the production is stopped by keeping the mute state and keeping the frame lamp lit in white. It can be shown, and it is possible to convey the success / failure branch (decision timing) to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. On the other hand, in the SP reach effect in which the operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to operate in the pass / fail branch, the sound corresponding to the operation promotion and the sound corresponding to the reach (BGM) are output, and further, the operation promotion is performed. By switching and using the grandchild table a plurality of times in order to control the frame lamp so as to correspond to the mode corresponding to the above, the timing of determining the success / failure branch can be suitably produced depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. As described above, it is possible to preferably produce the timing of determining the success / failure branch by different sound control and lamp control depending on whether the operation promotion is performed in the success / failure branch or the operation promotion is performed.

(Win 15)
In the child table WD9 in the SP latter half reach A, there is no operation promotion, and the frame lamp blinks in white based on the grandchild table W7, and then the frame lamp lights in white based on the grandchild table W8. Specifically, in the pass / fail branch in the fanning part of the SP second half reach A where the operation promotion is not performed, the last luminance data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W7, "FDC" (lighting in white) is used. In addition, since the brightness data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W8 is designed, it is possible to inform the player of the success / failure branch (decision timing) in an easy-to-understand manner without increasing the data capacity used for lamp control too much. can.

(Win 17)
In the child table WD15 in the SP final reach, as shown in FIGS. 131 (r49) to 132 (r54), the frame lamp is in a state where the sound corresponding to the operation promotion and the sound corresponding to the reach (BGM) are output. Will switch one after another, such as blinking white, lit red, and blinking red, and it is possible to excite the effect of promoting the operation for the player at the right / wrong branch (decision timing).

(Win / Fail 20)
In the child table WD4 of the SP first half reach A, the child table WD7 of the SP first half reach B, the child table WD11 of the SP second half reach A, and the child table WD14 of the SP second half reach B, as in the SP final reach child table WD17, Based on the grandchild table W14, the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode at the time of loss. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W14 for 5800 msec in the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, whereas in the SP final reach, it is 3900 msec. Meanwhile, the frame lamp is controlled by the grandchild table W14. In this way, it is possible to make the grandchild table used for lamp control at the time of loss common among a plurality of different reach, but to make the lamp control time different with reference to the grandchild table. As a result, in the child table used in each of the plurality of different reach, the reference time is changed while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a grandchild table dedicated to the time of loss in each of the different plurality of reach. As a result, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control and to make the time for lighting the frame lamp different in the lighting mode corresponding to the loss. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the loss in a suitable manner in each of the plurality of reach.

(Win / Fail 21)
From the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W26 last specified in each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used at the time of loss, the first designated grandchild of the child table WD18 used for relief. By switching to the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the table W16, the frame lamp is lit in the same color (yellow) and brighter. As a result, at the time of relief hit, the frame lamp lights up in the same color (yellow) as the state after the loss notification and brighter than the state after the loss notification. The subsequent relief hit notification can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Epilogue 9)
When the accessory is raised, the effect control CPU 120 gradually raises the accessory lamp 9A based on the child table corresponding to the ascending operation of the accessory lamp 9A and the grandchild table designated by the child table. The brightness of the accessory lamp 9A is gradually reduced so as to turn it off. As a result, the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A does not make the player aware of the rising of the accessory, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp makes the screen showing that the SP latter half reach A has been developed. The player can be noticed.

(Epilogue 26)
In the hit epilogue part, by making the grandchild table used at the time of hit notification and the grandchild table used at the time of displaying the hit symbol common, the rainbow color without preparing a separate grandchild table at each of a plurality of different timings. While reducing the amount of data used for lamp control to turn on the lights, each effect can be enlivened with a sense of unity. As a result, the effect in the hit epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

(Epilogue 27)
In the child tables WD21 and WD22 of the re-lottery part, the grandchild table W1 is common to the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, WD16 of the hit epilogue part as lamp control when the symbol is finally decided after the re-lottery. Is used. This eliminates the need to prepare separate grandchild tables for rainbow color lighting for the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part, reducing the data capacity used for lamp control and providing a sense of unity even for different parts (timing). It is possible to show the player a certain effect. As a result, it is possible to show the player better the production in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part while reducing the data capacity.

(Re-lottery production 2)
As shown in FIG. 142 (tA6), when the hit symbol is temporarily stopped while the frame lamp is smoothly lit in rainbow color in the hit epilogue part, the frame lamp is temporarily turned on before the re-lottery effect is executed. After the lights are turned off, the frame lamp lights up in a lighting mode corresponding to the re-lottery effect, so that the player can be easily informed that the re-lottery effect will start depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

(Re-lottery production 7, re-lottery production 14, re-lottery production 16)
In the hit epilogue part, when the hit symbol is temporarily stopped, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow color, then the re-lottery effect is executed with the lights off, and when the symbol is shaking, the re-lottery effect is displayed. Based on the luminance data corresponding to (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow color. As a result, the player does not misunderstand that the hit symbol temporarily stopped in the hit epilogue part is determined depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Further, the rainbow-colored lighting when the symbols "3" and "2" are shaken and displayed is inherited even during the period when the symbols are fixed. In this way, during the symbol determination period that is performed in a short period of time, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare repertoire is performed as it is without preparing a special brightness data table for lamp control. Therefore, the data. No extra capacity is added.

(Re-lottery production 19)
In the child table WD21 of the re-lottery part, the grandchild table W1 is used in common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, WD16 of the hit epilogue part as the lamp control when the symbol is finally decided after the re-lottery. Be done. This eliminates the need to prepare separate grandchild tables for rainbow color lighting for the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part, reducing the data capacity used for lamp control and providing a sense of unity even for different parts (timing). It is possible to show the player a certain effect. As a result, it is possible to show the player better the production in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part while reducing the data capacity.

(Re-lottery production 20)
In the child table WD20 of the re-lottery part, the frame lamp lights up in the same rainbow color as the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, WD16 of the hit epilogue part as lamp control when the design is finally decided after the re-lottery. However, when the symbol of "2" is promoted to the symbol of "3" by the re-lottery, the rainbow color lighting at the time tB7 to tB9 is temporarily stopped in the hit epilogue part. The lighting mode is more intense than the smooth rainbow-colored lighting in the case. As a result, the player can effectively congratulate the player that the winning symbol has been promoted by the re-lottery depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

<Detailed explanation of lamp control>
Next, regarding the above-mentioned lamp control, a feature portion to be particularly mentioned will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 261 to 263.

[Comparison of lamp control between hit and miss]
FIGS. 261 to 263 are diagrams for explaining a comparison of lamps at the time of hit and at the time of loss.

First, the lamp control at the time of loss will be described with reference to FIG. 261. As shown in FIG. 261, at the final stage of the fanning part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8. In the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100,000 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W8 to light the frame lamp in white in accordance with the effect of the success / failure branch (determined timing). Further, at the final of the fanning part in the SP final reach, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10. In the grandchild table W10, “500” or “D00] is designated as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W10. By doing so, the frame lamp blinks in red in response to the effect of the success / failure branch (decision timing).

After that, in the lost epilogue part via the fan part in each of the SP first half reach A and B, the SP second half reach A and B, and the SP final reach, the lamp control is first performed based on the grandchild table W13. .. In the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified in the first 10 msec and "444" is specified in the next 190 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W13, so that the frame lamp is lit in white in response to the effect that the ally character is defeated in the reach effect after the success / failure branch.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W13, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W14. In the grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at intervals of 250 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W14, so that the frame lamp is lit in a darker white color than the white lighting based on the grandchild table W13 in response to the effect that the ally character is disappointed with. Let me.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W14, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W15. In the grandchild table W15, "444" is specified in the first 10 msec, "111" is specified in the next 550 msec, and the last 600,000 msec (10 minutes) is specified as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ) Specifies "111". By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W15, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the frame lamp in response to an effect in which a loss is notified and the screen goes dark.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W15, the lamp control is performed based on the luminance data table for switching (for eye catching) as described with reference to FIG. 190, and then the start part before reach is performed. Lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W26, which was also used in the above. In the grandchild table W26, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, the data corresponding to the yellow pattern corresponding to the normal background is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W26, the effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in yellow (background yellow lighting pattern) corresponding to the normal background, as in the start part before the reach.

Next, with reference to FIG. 262, the ramp control at the time of hit will be described in the case of shifting to the hit epilogue part via the fan part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B.

As shown in FIG. 262, at the final stage of the fanning part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W8 to light the frame lamp in white in accordance with the effect of the success / failure branch (determined timing).

After that, in the hit epilogue part via the fan part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, the lamp control is first performed based on the grandchild table W19. In the grandchild table W19, "FFF" is specified in the first 40 msec and "333" is specified in the next 30 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white in response to the effect that the ally character wins by performing the lamp control based on the grandchild table W19.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W19, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1 this time. In the grandchild table W1, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data of various luminances corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at intervals of 30 msec. The effect control CPU 120 smoothly lights the frame lamp in the rainbow color corresponding to the hit confirmation by performing the lamp control based on the grandchild table W1.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W21. In the grandchild table W21, "AAA" is sequentially specified for each lamp at intervals of 20 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and finally to each lamp in 600,000 msec (10 minutes). On the other hand, "000" is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W21 to turn on the frame lamp in a bright white color corresponding to the pattern output, in response to the effect of producing a hit symbol.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W21, the lamp control is performed again based on the grandchild table W1. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly turn on the frame lamp in a rainbow color in response to the effect that the hit symbol is finally displayed in the center of the screen.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the ramp control at the time of hit will be described in the case of shifting to the hit epilogue part via the fan part in the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 263, at the final stage of the fanning part in the SP final reach, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in red in response to the effect of the success / failure branch (determined timing) by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W10.

After that, in the hit epilogue part via the fanning part in the SP final reach, first, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W20. In the grandchild table W20, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data of various luminances corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec, and in the next 30 msec, " 333 ”is specified, and such RGB data is repeatedly specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W20 to blink the frame lamps in seven colors in response to the effect of dropping the accessory.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W20, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1 this time. The effect control CPU 120 smoothly lights the frame lamp in the rainbow color corresponding to the hit confirmation by performing the lamp control based on the grandchild table W1.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W21. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W21 to turn on the frame lamp in a bright white color corresponding to the pattern output, in response to the effect of producing a hit symbol.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W21, the lamp control is performed again based on the grandchild table W1. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly turn on the frame lamp in a rainbow color in response to the effect that the hit symbol is finally displayed in the center of the screen.

In the examples described with reference to FIGS. 261 to 263, characteristic portions will be described below.

(Win 19)
As shown in FIG. 261, when the transition to the lost epilogue part is performed via the fanning part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, the final luminance data (RGB data) in the fanning part is obtained. Whereas "FDC", the first luminance data (RGB data) in the lost epilogue part is "888" or "444". As a result, at the time of loss in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, it is possible to light the frame lamp darker in white while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting in the pass / fail branch. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that the loss has been preferably achieved. Further, when the transition to the lost epilogue part is performed via the fanned part in the SP final reach, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the fanned part includes "D00", whereas the first brightness in the lost epilogue part is included. The data (RGB data) is "888" or "444". As a result, at the time of loss in the final reach of the SP, the frame lamp can be turned on in white, which is darker than the red blinking in the pass / fail branch, so that it is possible to notify the player that the loss has occurred.

(Character movement 1)
As shown in FIGS. 262 and 263, in the hit epilogue part, the frame lamp is smoothly lit in rainbow color based on the grandchild table W1, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 30 msec. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 261, at the time of loss, the frame lamp lights up darkly in white based on the grandchild table W14, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 250 msec, which is longer than the hit time. As a result, in the hit time, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than in the case of the loss, so that it is possible to inform the player that the hit has occurred in an easy-to-understand manner depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Furthermore, while the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more than when it is lost at the time of hitting, the lighting by the frame lamp can be calmed down more than when it is lost, and as a result, the lamp that contrasts the hit and loss. It is possible to convey to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Character movement 2)
As shown in FIG. 263, in the hit epilogue part of the SP final reach, in the production where the accessory falls, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W20, and the rainbow color and the achromatic color ("" The frame lamp lights up so that the RGB data of 333 ”is alternately switched. As a result, by occasionally sandwiching an achromatic color with respect to the rainbow-colored chromatic color, it is possible to perform an effect that emphasizes the big hit and congratulates the player. After that, in the production where the ally character wins, the frame lamp is controlled by the lamp based on the grandchild table W21, and the frame lamp lights up in a smooth rainbow color without sandwiching the achromatic color, so that it became a big hit. It is possible to perform an effect that congratulates the player in a calm manner. As a result, the effect in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be preferably shown to the player.

(About the shaking mode of the design)
Here, the shaking mode of the symbol will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 264. FIG. 264 is a diagram for explaining the shaking mode of the symbol. During the symbol shaking period in the fanning part and the re-lottery part described above, the decorative symbol moves as in the first to third aspects shown in FIG. 264 (a) and the first to third aspects shown in FIG. 264 (b). It behaves like three modes. Specifically, the first aspect shown in FIG. 264 (a) is an aspect in which the decorative symbol is located at the center position of the screen. The second aspect shown in FIG. 264 (a) is an aspect in which the decorative symbol is located above the first aspect. The third aspect shown in FIG. 264 (a) is an aspect in which the decorative symbol is located below the first aspect.

Further, the first aspect shown in FIG. 264 (b) is an aspect in which the decorative symbol is located at the center position of the screen in the front view. The second aspect shown in FIG. 264 (b) is an aspect in which the decorative symbol is oriented to the left more than the first aspect by rotating clockwise with the center of the decorative symbol as the vertical axis. The third aspect shown in FIG. 264 (b) is an aspect in which the decorative symbol is oriented to the right rather than the first aspect by rotating counterclockwise with the center of the decorative symbol as the vertical axis.

(Modified example of re-lottery production)
FIG. 265 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the re-lottery effect. FIG. 265 (A) is a detailed explanatory view of the re-lottery effect with 7 symbols. Further, FIG. 265 (B) is a timing chart of each re-lottery effect. As shown in FIG. 265 (A), after the symbol is enlarged and displayed as shown in (D1) and (D2), the symbol is reduced as shown in (D3) and (D4). After that, as shown in (D5), the design becomes a normal size. Then, as shown in (D6), the background is switched to the background for the re-lottery effect, and the re-lottery effect starts. After that, as shown in (D7), there is a shaking period in which the symbol swings up and down. After that, the "7" symbol is reduced and displayed from (D8) to (D9).

After that, as shown in (D10), the button image and the time gauge are slightly displayed under the "7" symbol. After that, as shown in (D11), the button image and the time gauge are clearly displayed with the "7" symbol displayed. Then, as shown in (F12), the time gauge decreases with the passage of time. The time gauge is a display showing the validity period of the button operation. When the player operates the push button 31B from the state of (D12), as shown in (D13) to (D20), "7" fluctuates at high speed, and a thin display and a clear display are repeated. After (D20), the same high-speed fluctuation is repeated.

As shown in FIG. 265 (B), as shown in the timing chart of each re-lottery effect, the symbol feed period when the re-lottery effect that fluctuates at high speed by button operation is executed is the same for all the re-lottery effects. be. Here, the re-lottery effect includes a first re-lottery effect in which even-numbered symbols are changed to odd-numbered symbols, a second re-lottery effect in which even-numbered symbols do not change from even-numbered symbols, and a third re-lottery effect in which 7 symbols do not change. There is a production. For example, in the first re-lottery effect, when the symbol feed effect is started by being operated immediately from the timing when the button can be operated, there is a swing period (t1) of the decorative symbol after the end of the symbol feed period, and then the symbol is confirmed. do.

Further, in the second re-lottery effect, when the button is operated after t2 from the timing when the button can be operated and the symbol feed effect is started, there is a swing period (t1-t2) of the decorative symbol after the end of the symbol feed period. After that, the design is fixed. Further, in the third re-lottery effect, when the button is operated after t1 from the timing when the button can be operated and the symbol feed effect is started, there is no shaking period of the decorative symbol after the end of the symbol feed period, and the symbol is fixed as it is. .. In this way, the symbol feed period is constant regardless of the timing at which the button is operated, and the time from the subsequent symbol shaking period to the symbol confirmation is absorbed until the button operation. .. Such a relationship is the same when the button operation is executed in any of the re-lottery effects of the first re-lottery effect to the third re-lottery effect.

[About re-lottery production 26-28]
The featured parts of the re-lottery part will be numbered and explained.

(Modified example of re-lottery production)
FIG. 266 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the re-lottery effect. As shown in FIGS. 266 (K1) to (K3), the decorative symbol moves in the same manner after the whiteout regardless of the timing of the winning / failing determination scene. Specifically, when the button is operated immediately after the promotion display is displayed as shown in (K1), the character movement and the hit epilogue part are executed, and the epilogue part as shown in (K4) is executed. The design is put out. After that, after 5 seconds in the symbol shaking period, as shown in (K5), the three symbols are in a state of facing the front.

In addition, as shown in (K2), when the button is operated 1 second after the promotion display is displayed in the scene of winning / failing, the character movement and the hit epilogue part are executed, as shown in (K4). Designs will be displayed in the epilogue part. After that, after 4 seconds in the symbol shaking period, as shown in (K6), the three symbols are in a state of facing the left side from the front. In addition, as shown in (K3), when the button is operated 2 seconds after the promotion display is displayed in the scene of winning / failing, the character movement and the hit epilogue part are executed, and as shown in (K4). Designs will be displayed in the epilogue part. After that, after 3 seconds in the symbol shaking period, as shown in (K7), the three symbols are in a state of facing to the right from the front.

As described above, in the first operation timing, the symbol is in the front position after the symbol shaking period, in the second operation timing, the symbol is in the position facing the left side after the symbol shaking period, and in the third operation timing, the symbol is in the leftward position. After the shaking period of the symbol, the symbol may be in a position facing to the right. However, even if the orientation of the symbol is different during the shaking period of the symbol depending on the operation timing, after that, as shown in (K8) to (K17) as a common effect, the symbol is reduced while rotating after whiteout. A lottery effect is executed. Then, after (K17), the symbol feed effect is executed. Although the description has been made using odd-numbered symbols in FIG. 266, the same effect is executed for even-numbered symbols.

(Re-lottery production 26)
As shown in FIG. 266, when the image showing the stick controller 31A and the time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, the re-lottery effect is subsequently executed regardless of the timing of the operation. A time for shaking the symbol for absorbing the scale may be provided in the time up to the predetermined timing (the period of shaking of the symbol from (K4)). Then, when the re-lottery effect is executed at a predetermined timing, a common effect with whiteout as shown in (K8) to (K17) may be executed. According to this, regardless of the timing at which the stick controller 31A is operated, the symbol is once shaken and displayed, and then the common effect accompanied by whiteout is executed, and then the re-lottery effect is executed. Therefore, at the start of the re-lottery. It is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort in the mode of movement of the symbol, and it is possible to make a series of effects look suitable.

(Re-lottery production 27)
From the time when the whiteout screen is displayed until the re-lottery effect is executed, any of the multiple reach may be common. According to this, the data capacity of the effect data can be reduced.

(Re-lottery production 28)
The movement of the symbol after the whiteout screen may be an extension of the movement of the symbol in front of the whiteout screen. For example, if the movement of the design in front of the whiteout screen is a movement that swings between the front side and the back side by the axis rotation around the vertical direction of the design on the spot, the movement after the whiteout screen is The movement may be one rotation clockwise by the axial rotation centered on the vertical direction of the symbol while enlarging. According to this, by displaying a whiteout between the movements on the extension of the same axial rotation, it is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort in the mode of movement of the symbol, and a series of effects can be preferably shown. be able to.

(Re-lottery production 29)
Among the plurality of SP reach, there are those in which the promotion of operation such as button operation is not notified at the branch at the time of determining whether or not the control is in an advantageous state. In such SP reach, the scale shift due to the operation does not occur. However, even with such an SP reach, the same re-lottery effect as the SP reach in which the scale shift occurs may be executed. According to this, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity even if there is only one re-lottery effect due to the common effect regardless of the presence or absence of the scale deviation. In addition, the data capacity can be reduced by using one re-lottery effect.

(Re-lottery production 30)
As shown in FIG. 266, the timing is set so that the movement of the symbol after the whiteout screen is an extension of the movement of the symbol in front of the whiteout screen. For example, the movement of the symbol in front of the whiteout screen is one of a series of movements in which the symbol moves from the right position (K3) to the left position (K6) via the front position (K5). It is designed to be. That is, when the shaking of the symbol is one of a series of clockwise movements, the whiteout by the re-lottery effect is executed, and then the movement of expanding the symbol and rotating clockwise continues. According to this, it is possible to prevent the movement of the symbol from causing a sense of discomfort due to the series of movements of the clockwise rotating symbol from the period of the symbol shaking to the re-lottery effect.

[About re-lottery production 21-25]
The featured parts of the re-lottery part will be numbered and explained.

(Modified example of re-lottery production)
FIG. 267 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the re-lottery effect. (L1) is a diagram when the operation is operated at an early timing after the operation promotion display is displayed in the symbol feed period. (L2) is a diagram when the operation is operated at a timing later than (L1) after the operation promotion display is displayed. (L3) is a diagram when the operation is operated at a timing later than (L2) after the operation promotion display is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 267 (L1) to (L3), the symbol output is performed in the same manner regardless of the timing at which the button is operated during the symbol feed period in the re-lottery effect. After that, the decorative design moves in the same way with the whiteout in between, and then stops. Specifically, as shown in (L1), when the button is operated immediately after the operation promotion display is displayed, the symbol is output as shown in (L4) to (L5), and then the symbol is displayed. Is the normal size. After that, as shown in (L6), the symbols start to sway, and after a predetermined period of time, the three symbols as shown in (L7) are in a state of facing to the right from the front.

Further, as shown in (L2), when the button is operated at a timing later than (L1) after the operation promotion display is displayed, the symbols as shown in (L4) to (L5) are executed. After that, the design becomes the normal size. After that, as shown in (L6), the swaying of the symbols is started, and after the lapse of the symbol swaying period shorter than that in (L1), the three symbols as shown in (L8) are facing to the right from the front. Become. Further, as shown in (L3), when the button is operated at a timing later than (L2) after the operation promotion display is displayed, the symbols as shown in (L4) to (L5) are executed. After that, the design becomes the normal size. After that, as shown in (L6), the swaying of the symbols is started, and after the lapse of the symbol swaying period shorter than that in (L2), the three symbols as shown in (L9) are in a state of facing the front.

As described above, in the first operation timing, the symbol is in the position facing the right side after the symbol shaking period, and in the second operation timing, the symbol is in the position facing the left side after the symbol shaking period, and the third operation timing is set. Then, after the shaking period of the symbol, the symbol may be in a position facing the front. However, even if the orientation of the symbol is different during the shaking period of the symbol depending on the operation timing, after that, as shown in (J1) to (J10) as a common effect, the effect of reducing the design while rotating it after whiteout. Is executed. After that, as shown in (J11) to (J17), the symbol stops after the period of shaking of the symbol. Although the description has been made using odd-numbered symbols in FIG. 267, the same effect is executed for even-numbered symbols.

(Re-lottery production 21)
In the modified example, as shown in FIGS. 267 (L1) to (L3), the operation promotion display by the button image and the time gauge is displayed during the symbol feeding of the re-lottery effect. When the player operates the push button 31B during the period in which the operation promotion display is displayed, the common symbolizing effect shown in (L4) to (L6) is executed. Regardless of which timing the push button 31B is operated, the effect of producing a common symbol by enlarging and reducing the symbol as shown in (L4) to (L5) is executed. After that, the symbol shake is executed during the symbol shake period. The shaking period of the symbol differs depending on the button operation timing. Therefore, after the shaking period of the symbol, for example, in the first operation timing, the symbol is in the position facing the right side, in the second operation timing, the symbol is in the position facing the left side, and in the third operation timing, the symbol is in the position facing the left side. , The design may be in a position facing the front. However, regardless of the operation timing, a whiteout effect is sandwiched as a common effect from (J1) to (J18) thereafter, and an effect in which the symbol sways after the symbol is rotated and the symbol is reduced is executed. According to this, regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, by performing a common effect, the design can be stopped neatly, and a series of effects can be preferably shown.

(Re-lottery production 22)
When the push button 31B is operated at the first timing during the operation valid period, the decorative symbol is displayed to sway after the notification of promotion is executed (example of FIG. 267 (L3) without operation). ). When the push button 31B was operated at the second timing earlier than the first timing during the operation valid period, the display that the decorative symbol shook was earlier than the first timing after the notification of whether to promote or not was executed. The display is extended by a minute (the operation shown in FIG. 267 (L2) is an example of the second timing). When the push button 31B was operated at the third timing earlier than the second timing during the operation valid period, the display that the decorative symbol shook was earlier than the second timing after the notification of whether to promote or not was executed. The display is extended by a minute (the operation shown in FIG. 267 (L1) is an example of the first timing). In this way, regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, the scale of the effect can be absorbed by the shaking time of the symbol. By performing a common effect after that, the design can be stopped neatly, and a series of effects can be shown favorably.

(Re-lottery production 23)
As shown in FIG. 267, after performing whiteout as a common effect, an effect different from the conventional pattern mode in which the swaying decorative pattern is enlarged and rotated once is executed. According to this, regardless of the position of the symbol in the shaking of the shaku absorption symbol, by executing the effect of a different mode after sandwiching the whiteout, the flow of the effect until the symbol is stopped. It is possible to prevent discomfort.

(Re-lottery production 24)
As shown in FIG. 267, in the shaking period of the symbol, the symbol swings to the back side from (J10) to (J12), and then the symbol swings to the front side from (J13) to (J14) to the initial position. Change. After that, the design swings toward the front side from (J15) to (J16), and then changes to the initial position by swinging the design toward the back side from (J17) to (J18). Such a series of movements may be repeated a plurality of times. However, during the period when the symbol is fixed, it is designed so that the symbol is always located at the initial position facing the front as shown in (J18). According to this, the symbol can be fixedly stopped in a manner that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player.

(Re-lottery production 25)
The game effect lamp 9 is designed to light up in a rainbow color at the timing of the whiteout shown in FIG. 267 (J1). The timing of (J1) is an effect executed as a common effect regardless of the operation timing. By setting the place where such a common effect is executed as the starting point of the change of the game effect lamp 9, it is easy for the designer to decide the start trigger. It should be noted that the timing of (J2) when the common start display is started may be used as the start trigger instead of the timing of (J1), and the start trigger may be any timing of the commonly executed effects.

<Main composition and effects>
The technical effects obtained by various configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are individually listed below.

(F2019-116)
A gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, accessories, movable bodies 32) and
A display means (for example, an image display device 5) is provided.
It is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not the control is in the advantageous state (for example, a notification effect for notifying whether or not a big hit is achieved).
The notification effect includes an introduction part (for example, a fanning part) until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and a right / wrong notification part (for example, a hit epilogue part) in which the right / wrong is notified. The hit / miss notification part that notifies the jackpot by moving the accessory, and the epilogue part (for example, the hit epilogue part) that is executed after the hit / miss notification is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state. Consists of including
In the introductory part, the first character to which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound is a friendly character (for example, the example shown in FIG. 115 (r2)).
The display means gives priority to the introduction display of the promotion display that prompts a specific operation with respect to the effect display in the introduction part at the timing of transition from the introduction part to the success / failure notification part, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the effect display. After that, the promotion display is performed in a state where the effect display can be visually recognized (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 131 (r49) to 132 (r54)).
In the hit / fail notification part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the movable body moves from the first position (for example, the retracted position) to the second position on the front side of the display means. Advance to a position (eg, advance position) (eg, example shown in FIG. 133),
The display means
When the movable body advances to the second position, an effect display for moving the movable body is performed, and the effect display is terminated while the movable body is retracting from the second position to the first position. Display corresponding to the epilogue part (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 173 and 174).
In the epilogue part, the final dialogue subtitle is displayed for the final dialogue sound emitted by the character, and then the display of the final dialogue subtitle is finished, and then the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area (for example,). Examples shown in FIGS. 134 to 136),
In the epilogue part, the ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character is higher than the ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the introduction part (for example, the example shown in FIG. 175). ..

Specifically, the character that first emits a line in each SP reach as a fanning part is a ally character (for example, FIG. 115 (r2)). According to this, the player can accurately recognize the ally character at the start of SP reach. In addition, at the timing of transition from the fan part to the hit / miss notification part, the introduction image of the trigger display that prompts the operation of the trigger is displayed with priority over the display of the effect in the fan part, so that the effect display of the fan part disappears, and then The image of operating the trigger button and the effect of the fanning part can be visually recognized (for example, FIGS. 131 (r48) to (r51)). According to this, while giving an impact to the introductory image, the introduction image becomes an image of the trigger button, so that the production of the fanning part can be confirmed, so that the player can be excited. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled in the flow of the production, which is the background display of the epilogue part by the time the evacuation of the accessory is completed. Further, since the symbol is enlarged and displayed after the display of the final dialogue subtitle is completed in the hit epilogue part, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from overlapping the symbol and being mistaken as a message for displaying the symbol. In addition, the above-mentioned fanning part that fanns the right or wrong was updated by the development in which the ally character and the enemy character alternately compete with each other (for example, SP first half reach B and SP second half reach B, etc.). There is a scene in which a ally character is damaged in the production in such a fanning part. In addition, in the production of such a fan part, the image display switching interval is earlier than that of the epilogue part, and the number of image display switchings is also large. According to this, it is possible to make the fanning part look more suitable by making the fanning part develop faster than the epilogue part. In addition, since the subtitles are firmly attached in the slow-developing hit epilogue part, it is possible to make it easy to understand what the character is speaking and emphasize the blessing. In addition, in the fast-developing fanning part, it is possible to convey the content by switching the video first, and to prevent the development of the video from being disturbed by the auxiliary subtitle display. As a result, a series of effects can be preferably shown.

(F2019-117)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that it will be done,
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect.
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output.
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, there are cases where the dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound emitted by the character and cases where the dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
The number of lines emitted by the character differs between the first notification effect and the second notification effect.
The ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the introduction part of the first notification effect. high,
The ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the second notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the introduction part of the second notification effect. high.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, the ratio of displaying subtitles for the character's dialogue in the epilogue part is higher than the ratio of displaying subtitles for the character in SP reach, which is the fanning part. ing. According to this, by displaying the subtitles firmly in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easy to understand what the character is speaking. In addition, in the hit epilogue part, subtitles can be used to coordinate the feeling of blessing. In addition, since the screen changes more frequently in the fanning part than in the epilogue part, even if the subtitles are displayed, the display time will be shortened so that the production will not be disturbed by the auxiliary subtitle display. , It is possible to give the first priority to convey the effect by switching images. As a result, it is possible to perform a suitable effect in the fanning part.

(F2019-118)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Directing execution means and
Light emitting means and
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is decided that the epilogue is to be performed, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The effect executing means is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state is controlled, of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, the first re-lottery in which the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. The production can be performed,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part after the first symbol is displayed in the first half part. The second re-lottery production can be executed,
Using the first symbol displayed in the epilogue part, the first re-lottery effect or the second re-lottery effect is executed.
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is used. The brightness data table for controlling the light emitting means is controlled, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol, which was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery, is enlarged, reduced, and shaken, and then the "2" symbol is displayed as it is. The re-lottery production is started using. At the start of the re-extraction effect, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the change of the re-lottery effect is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery effect, a symbol feed effect is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery effect is started using the decorative symbol that was once temporarily stopped, and at the start of the re-lottery effect, the symbol feed effect is executed using the symbol that was once temporarily stopped. , It is easy for the player to understand from which decorative pattern the re-lottery started. As a result, the flow of a series of productions can be shown well.

(F2019-119)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Directing execution means and
Light emitting means and
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is decided that the epilogue is to be performed, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The effect executing means is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state is controlled, among a plurality of types of re-lottery effects, a replacement display in which the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol is displayed. It is possible to perform the first re-lottery effect of displaying the second symbol in the latter half part.
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, the replacement display is performed in the first half part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. Re-lottery production is possible,
The first re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all the other symbols between the start of the replacement display in the first half part and the display of the second symbol in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all the other symbols between the start of the replacement display in the first half part and the display of the first symbol in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is used. The brightness data table for controlling the light emitting means is controlled, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. do

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol, which was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery, is enlarged, reduced, and shaken, and then the "2" symbol is displayed as it is. The re-lottery production is started using. At the start of the re-extraction effect, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the change of the re-lottery effect is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery effect, a symbol feed effect is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations from the "2" symbol. Then, during the re-lottery production, all the decorative symbols such as "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" are sent in order, and then "2" is sent again. The symbol feed effect in which the symbol is displayed is executed. In this way, the re-lottery effect is started using the decorative symbol that was once temporarily stopped, and the decorative symbol that was initially temporarily stopped is displayed again after the variation of the plurality of types of decorative symbols. According to this, the flow of a series of effects can be clearly shown by the pattern feed effect in which the final display result is not displayed immediately and all the decorative patterns are shown.

(F2019-120)
(5) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Directing execution means and
Light emitting means and
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is decided that the epilogue is to be performed, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The effect executing means is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state is controlled, among a plurality of types of re-lottery effects, a replacement display in which the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol is displayed. It is possible to perform the first re-lottery effect of displaying the second symbol in the latter half part.
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, the replacement display is performed in the first half part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. Lottery production is possible,
When it is determined that the second symbol is controlled to the second advantageous state, the second symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the second symbol is repeatedly displayed, and the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. It is possible to execute the third re-lottery effect to be displayed again,
The first re-lottery effect, the second re-lottery effect, and the third re-lottery effect have the same effect scale.
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is used. The brightness data table for controlling the light emitting means is controlled, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. do.

Specifically, a pattern that displays an even number symbol (for example, 2 symbols) and then an even number symbol (for example, 2 symbols), and a pattern that displays an even number symbol (for example, 2 symbols) and then an odd number symbol (for example, 3 symbols). Was provided. In addition to this, a pattern for displaying an odd number symbol (for example, 7 symbols) after displaying an odd number symbol (for example, 7 symbols) may be provided. In the effect of sending a symbol from an odd-numbered symbol to an odd-numbered symbol, the same odd-numbered symbol may be sent at the time of symbol feeding. However, regardless of the pattern, the scale of the effect of the symbol feed period in the re-lottery effect may be the same design. According to this, it is possible to obtain a suitable re-lottery effect in any pattern without increasing the data capacity.

(F2019-121)
(6) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Directing execution means and
Light emitting means and
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is decided that the epilogue is to be performed, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The effect executing means is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state is controlled, of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, the first re-lottery in which the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. The production can be performed,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part after the first symbol is displayed in the first half part. The second re-lottery production can be executed,
The first symbol is displayed with the same or substantially the same animation when the first symbol is once displayed in the epilogue part and when the first symbol is displayed again in the latter half part of the second re-lottery effect.
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is used. The brightness data table for controlling the light emitting means is controlled, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. do.

Specifically, the above-mentioned designing in the parts of FIGS. 141 (A1) to 142 (A5) and the designing in the parts of FIGS. 161 (C1) to 162 (C5) are executed using substantially the same image. Will be done. Specifically, the same image is used for the pattern output by the “2” symbol and the effect image, and the pattern output is executed in such a manner that the background portion is different. According to this, since the images of the symbols can be made substantially the same, it is possible to clearly show the player that the symbol has not been promoted to the probabilistic symbol. It should be noted that the image of the patterning portion including the background may be exactly the same.

(F2019-122)
(7) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Directing execution means and
Light emitting means and
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is decided that the epilogue is to be performed, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The effect executing means is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state is controlled, of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, the first re-lottery in which the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. The production can be performed,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part after the first symbol is displayed in the first half part. The second re-lottery production can be executed,
By changing the display mode of the first symbol into the first aspect, the second aspect, and the third aspect from the time when the first symbol is displayed again in the latter half part until the symbol determination period is reached, the first symbol is displayed. Shake display to display the first symbol as if it is shaking,
By changing the display mode of the second symbol into the first aspect, the second aspect, and the third aspect from the display of the second symbol in the latter half part until the symbol determination period is reached, the second symbol is displayed. 2 Perform a shaking display to display the second symbol as if the symbol is shaking.
The first aspect is a mode in which the player can easily see the design as compared with any of the second aspect and the third aspect.
The effect executing means is
In the re-lottery part, it is possible to execute a movement promotion display that encourages the player to move.
When the operation is performed at the first timing while the operation promotion display is being executed in the first re-lottery effect, when the predetermined timing is reached after the effect corresponding to the first re-lottery effect is executed. The second symbol is displayed in the shaking display while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol so that the second symbol becomes the second aspect.
When the operation promotion display is being executed in the first re-lottery effect, if the operation is performed at a second timing different from the first timing, after the effect corresponding to the first re-lottery effect is executed. When the predetermined timing is reached, the second symbol is displayed in the shaking display while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol so that the second symbol becomes the third aspect.
When the operation promotion display is being executed in the first re-lottery effect, regardless of whether the operation is performed at the first timing or the second timing, the shaking display of the second symbol is displayed from the predetermined timing. A display that makes it difficult to see is performed, and then the second symbol is displayed again in a shaking display, and then, when the symbol confirmation period is reached, the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol is maintained and the second symbol is displayed. 2 The symbols are stopped and displayed in the first aspect,
If the operation is performed at the first timing while the operation promotion display is being executed in the second re-lottery effect, the predetermined timing is reached after the effect corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is executed. At that time, the first symbol is displayed in the shaking display while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol so that the first symbol becomes the second aspect.
If the operation is performed at the second timing while the operation promotion display is being executed in the second re-lottery effect, the predetermined timing is reached after the effect corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is executed. At that time, the first symbol is displayed in the shaking display while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol so that the first symbol becomes the third aspect.
When the operation promotion display is being executed in the second re-lottery effect, regardless of whether the operation is performed at the first timing or the second timing, the shaking display of the first symbol is displayed from the predetermined timing. A display that makes it difficult to see is performed, and then the first symbol is displayed again in a shaking display, and then, when the symbol confirmation period is reached, the shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol is maintained and the first symbol is displayed. 1 symbol is stopped and displayed in the first aspect,
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is used. The brightness data table for controlling the light emitting means is controlled, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. do.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 267 (L1) to (L3), the operation promotion display by the button image and the time gauge is displayed during the symbol feeding of the re-lottery effect. When the player operates the push button 31B during the period in which the operation promotion display is displayed, the common symbolizing effect shown in (L4) to (L6) is executed. Regardless of which timing the push button 31B is operated, the effect of producing a common symbol by enlarging and reducing the symbol as shown in (L4) to (L5) is executed. After that, the symbol shake is executed during the symbol shake period. The shaking period of the symbol differs depending on the button operation timing. Therefore, after the shaking period of the symbol, for example, in the first operation timing, the symbol is in the position facing the right side, in the second operation timing, the symbol is in the position facing the left side, and in the third operation timing, the symbol is in the position facing the left side. , The design may be in a position facing the front. However, regardless of the operation timing, a whiteout effect is sandwiched as a common effect from (J1) to (J18) thereafter, and an effect in which the symbol sways after the symbol is rotated and the symbol is reduced is executed. According to this, regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, by performing a common effect, the design can be stopped neatly, and a series of effects can be preferably shown.

(F2019-126)
(8) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that it will be done,
The introductory part is
A scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are displayed, and
It is composed of a scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are not displayed.
In the luminance data table used in the scene where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed, the luminance data using the emission color corresponding to the character is switched according to the action of the character. It is composed of.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, there are scenes in which the character emits lines but does not have subtitles in the fanning part (for example, scenes of r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, r35). ). However, even in such a specific scene, the luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) of the game effect lamp 9 is specified so that the frame lamp lights in the color corresponding to the character. In this way, even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue sound, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. As a result, the effect corresponding to the character can be suitably executed, and the fanning part can be preferably shown to the player. Further, FIGS. 64 (b8), (b9), 74 (e7), 94 (i32), 95 (i34), 104 (n10), 123 (r25), (r27), 124 (r29). ), FIG. 125 (r31), (r33), FIG. 126 (r35), etc., even if there is a character's dialogue but no subtitle, the frame lamp is in the color corresponding to the character. Brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that is lit / blinking. As a result, even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, it is possible to preferably express that the character is emitting dialogue by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to preferably show the player the effect in the fanning part. can.

(F2019-127)
(9) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Movable body and
Sound output means and
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that it will be done,
Up to the hit / fail notification part, when the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, the scene change is notified.
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the effect is being retracted from the second position to the first position. Exit the display, display the corresponding scene after switching, and
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the movable body movable brightness data table when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. In the middle of saving to, the moving body movable brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the scene after switching.
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and switches while the movable body is retracting from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the later scene.

Specifically, the effect may be switched from the effect at the start of the reach to the effect of the reach of the first half of the SP by the operation of the accessory. Further, the effect image corresponding to the accessory movement may be displayed according to the movement of the accessory falling. After that, the display may be gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the accessory movement to the screen corresponding to the SP first half reach while the accessory is rising. Further, the luminance data table may be switched from the luminance data table of the accessory operating part to the luminance data table of the reach of the first half of the SP while the accessory is rising. Further, the sound corresponding to the reach of the first half of the SP may be output while the accessory is rising. Here, the effect image corresponding to the accessory operation is displayed on the premise that the accessory is at a position where the accessory is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled by switching to the background display corresponding to the reach of the first half of the SP by the time the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position. Further, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the first half of the SP during the ascending of the accessory, the fanning part of the first half of the SP can be preferably displayed.

(F2019-128)
(10) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that it will be done,
The display means
In the introductory part, a promotion display is performed to encourage the player to perform a specific action, and when the specific action is performed, a cut-in display is performed.
In the introductory part, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and the dialogue subtitles are displayed in the specific area of the display means for the dialogue sound.
At the timing of performing the promotion display in the introduction part, the dialogue subtitles are not displayed in the specific area, and the dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
The luminance data table includes a luminance data table for cut-in display corresponding to the cut-in display and a luminance data table for the introduction part corresponding to the introduction part.
The light emitting means in which the brightness data is set in the cut-in display brightness data table includes at least the same portion as the light emitting means in which the brightness data is set in the introduction part brightness data table.

Specifically, the brightness data of the lamp control (RGB data in the grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) in the cut-in effect and the button display for the cut-in effect is the same as the lamp control in the fanning part of the SP final reach. It is designed to use a frame lamp at the location. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lighting / blinking of the extra lamp from being mixed and spoiling the aesthetic appearance, and it is possible to provide an effect in a suitable fanning part.

(F2019-129)
(11) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Sound output means and
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that it will be done,
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect.
In the period before shifting from the introduction part in the first notification effect to the success / failure notification part
The display means performs a promotion display that encourages the player to perform a specific action.
The sound output means continues the sound output and
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table for the first notification effect.
In the period before shifting from the introduction part in the second notification effect to the success / failure notification part
The display means does not perform the promotion display that encourages the specific operation, but performs a hit / fail display.
The sound output means does not output sound,
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table for the second notification effect.
The luminance data table for the first notification effect is configured so that the luminance data is switched.
The luminance data table for the second notification effect is configured so that the luminance data is not switched.

Specifically, in the SP reach effect in which the operation is not promoted to encourage the player to operate in the pass / fail branch, the effect is stopped by keeping the mute state and keeping the frame lamp lit in white. The production can be shown to the player, and the success / failure branch (decision timing) can be conveyed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. On the other hand, in the SP reach effect in which the operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to operate in the pass / fail branch, the sound corresponding to the operation promotion and the sound corresponding to the reach (BGM) are output, and further, the operation promotion is performed. By switching and using the grandchild table a plurality of times in order to control the frame lamp so as to correspond to the mode corresponding to the above, the timing of determining the success / failure branch can be suitably produced depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. As described above, it is possible to preferably produce the timing of determining the success / failure branch by different sound control and lamp control depending on whether the operation promotion is performed in the success / failure branch or the operation promotion is performed.

(F2019-130)
(12) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that it will be done,
The introductory part is composed of a first scene and a second scene after the first scene.
In the first scene, the first moving image data is used,
In the second scene, the second moving image data is used,
The second scene has a slower progress speed than the first scene.
The first moving image data is moving image data in which the movement of a specific character is expressed by a plurality of specific character images.
The second moving image data is moving image data in which the movement of the specific character is expressed by the specific character image and the effect image of 1.

Specifically, the scene before the decision of whether or not to win (r48) in the fanning part is a slow motion period in which the movement of the image is slowed down. In addition, the effect executed before (r48) depicts the movement of the character from a plurality of image data, while the effect executed in (r48) is the image of Baku Chu and six allies. Performed with images. Then, the image of the ally character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed with the passage of time to make the character appear to be operating. Here, if a video is created in the slow motion period using the same amount of image data as in the period other than the slow motion period, the amount of data is small and the movement becomes awkward. However, if a large amount of data is used to smooth the movement during the slow motion period, the capacity becomes too large. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced by reducing the number of images used during the slow motion period and making the character appear to be moving by switching and enlarging the display. The number of images used in the slow motion period may be any number as long as it is smaller than the number other than the slow motion period.

(F2019-131)
(13) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that it will be done,
There is a shielding display that makes the effect display invisible by entering the closing mode after the closing operation, and makes the effect display visible by performing the opening operation after the closing operation.
The shield display can be executed at the timing related to the introduction part,
When the shield display performs a closing operation, the brightness of the effect display decreases as the visible area of the effect display becomes smaller.
When the shield display performs an opening operation, the brightness of the effect display increases as the visible area of the effect display increases.

Specifically, the shutter described above is an image that makes the image of the effect executed behind by making it invisible by closing it, and makes the image of the effect executed behind by opening visible after closing. In addition, the shutter is executed at a timing related to the fanning part, that is, before the start of the fanning part. Then, when the shutter is closed, the screen brightness is lowered as the visible area of the effect is narrowed, and when the shutter is opened, the screen brightness is reduced as the visible area of the effect is widened. Will be higher. According to this, the flow of the production can be shown favorably by giving reality when the shutter is closed and opened. In addition, although the image of the effect executed behind is made invisible or visible using the image of the shutter, the image may be an image other than the shutter, and the same effect is executed with the accessory. You may.

(F2019-132)
(14) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that it will be done,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character and the operation sound corresponding to the movement of the character are output.
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound is output louder than the operating sound.

Specifically, in the fanning part, there is a scene where the SP reach BGM is output and the dialogue sound and the physical sound (also referred to as the operating sound) are output at the timing of overlapping. When the dialogue sound and the physical sound are output at the overlapping timing, the dialogue sound is output at a louder volume when it is output from the speakers 8L and 8R than the physical sound. According to this, while the physical sound is output as a part of the production to bring out the reality of the production, the content of the production is given to the player by outputting a large dialogue sound when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap. It can be easily communicated. Therefore, as a result, it is possible to make the production in the fanning part look better.

(F2019-133)
(15) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Directing execution means and
Light emitting means and
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is decided that the epilogue is to be performed, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The effect executing means is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state is controlled, of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, the first re-lottery in which the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. The production can be performed,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part after the first symbol is displayed in the first half part. The second re-lottery production can be executed,
In the epilogue part, when the first symbol is once displayed, the display mode of the first symbol is changed to the first aspect, the second aspect, and the third aspect so that the first symbol is shaken. It displays the first symbol,
In the case of shifting from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part, when the first symbol shifts from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing displayed in the first aspect, and when the first symbol shifts to the re-lottery part in the second aspect. There are times when the epilogue part shifts to the re-lottery part at the timing displayed, and times when the first symbol shifts from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing displayed in the third aspect.
The effect executing means shifts from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the first aspect, and at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the second aspect. The first symbol is visually recognized in both the transition from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part and the transition from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the third aspect. A specific display that is difficult is performed, the first symbol is displayed in a common display mode, and the first re-lottery effect or the second re-lottery effect is executed.
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is used. The brightness data table for controlling the light emitting means is controlled, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, when the image showing the stick controller 31A and the time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, regardless of the timing of the operation, after that, A time for shaking the symbol for absorbing the scale may be provided in the time until the predetermined timing when the re-lottery effect is executed (the period of shaking of the symbol from (K4)). Then, when the re-lottery effect is executed at a predetermined timing, a common effect with whiteout as shown in (K8) to (K17) may be executed. According to this, regardless of the timing at which the stick controller 31A is operated, the symbol is once shaken and displayed, and then the common effect accompanied by whiteout is executed, and then the re-lottery effect is executed. Therefore, at the start of the re-lottery. It is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort in the mode of movement of the symbol, and it is possible to make a series of effects look suitable.

(F2020-005)
(16) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that it will be done,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the first serif subtitle is displayed for the first serif sound emitted by the character, and the second serif subtitle is displayed for the second serif sound emitted by the character.
In the specific scene, the display of the second dialogue subtitle is started while the first dialogue subtitle is displayed, then the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed. In the state of
The fade effect is applied to at least one of the time when the display of the first serif subtitle ends and the time when the display of the second serif subtitle starts.

Specifically, in the fanning part, as shown in FIG. 178 (A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed for the dialogue of the character. When the subtitles are displayed, there is a period in which the display period of the first subtitle displayed first and the display period of the second subtitle displayed next overlap each other. A fade effect is added when the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap each other. Due to the fade effect, changes occur when the transmittance of the displayed characters is different. According to this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap each other, the change of the subtitles can be easily understood by the fade effect, so that the switching of the subtitles can be easily understood.

(F2020-006)
(17) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed is the introduction part until the notification of whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state, and after the notification of the success or failure. It is configured to include a first epilogue part that is informed that it is controlled to the advantageous state.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is not controlled is the introduction part until the notification of whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state, and after the notification of the success or failure. It is configured to include a second epilogue part that is informed that it is not controlled to the advantageous state.
The display means
In the second epilogue part, a display is performed to notify that the advantageous state is not controlled.
After that, switch display is performed.
After that, display the background and
After that, with the symbol confirmation command as an opportunity, the symbol is stopped and displayed.
After that, with the fluctuation command as an opportunity, the fluctuation display of the symbol is started.
The light emission control means
In the second epilogue part, the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part is used to control the light emitting means for directing.
When the switching display is performed, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display to control the light emitting means for the effect.
When the background display is performed, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the background display to control the light emitting means for the effect.
When the symbol stop display is performed, the luminance data table is switched to the fourth luminance data table for stopping the symbol, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol is controlled, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continued. To control the light emitting means for directing,
When the symbol variation display is started, the luminance data table is switched to the fourth symbol variation brightness data table, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol is controlled, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continued. To control the light emitting means for the effect.

Specifically, the feature portion of the detailed explanatory view of the game effect lamp 9 at the time of loss will be described. The effect screen is switched to the image at the time of loss after the effect of determining whether or not to win. After that, after the blackout display in which the loss display result is displayed, the screen is switched to the eye-catching screen. After that, a screen is displayed in which the symbol is fixed and stopped after the screen is switched to the normal screen. Further, the luminance data table is switched from the luminance data table at the time of winning / failing determination to the luminance data table at the time of losing. After that, it is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye catching). After that, it is switched to the background brightness data table at the start of fluctuation. Here, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen. Further, the luminance data table is switched to the background luminance data table at the timing when the screen is switched to the normal screen. Then, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from blinking to extinguished by receiving the symbol confirmation command, but the brightness data table for the background is not switched by receiving the symbol confirmation command. Further, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from extinguished to blinking by receiving the fluctuation pattern command of the next fluctuation, but the luminance data table for the background is not switched by receiving the symbol confirmation command. According to this, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for the background at the end of the eye-catching screen, and the luminance data table is continued until the next fluctuation. Therefore, the luminance data table corresponding to the reception of the symbol confirmation command is received. It is not necessary to create a separate image, and it is possible to show the effect by the lamp without any discomfort from the effect at the time of loss to the next fluctuation, and it is possible to show a series of effects preferably.

[Start 1]
Up to the hit / fail notification part, when the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, the scene change is notified.
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the effect display while the movable body is retracting from the second position to the first position. , Display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the movable body movable brightness data table when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body is in the process of retracting from the second position to the first position. , The brightness data table for moving the movable body is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the scene after switching.
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retracting from the second position to the first position, the scene after switching is displayed. Output the corresponding sound.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the operation of the accessory switches the effect from the effect of the SP first half reach A to the effect of the SP second half reach A. In addition, an effect image corresponding to the accessory movement is displayed according to the movement of the accessory falling. After that, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the character movement to the screen corresponding to the SP second half reach A while the character is rising. Further, from the brightness data table of the accessory operation part (child table WD8 shown in FIG. 202 described later) to the brightness data table of the SP latter half reach A (child table WD9 shown in FIGS. 204 and 205 described later) while the accessory is rising. ) Is switched to the brightness data table. In addition, a sound corresponding to the latter half of the SP (for example, BGM in the latter half of the SP) is output while the accessory is rising. Here, the effect image corresponding to the accessory operation is displayed on the premise that the accessory is at a position where the accessory is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled by switching to the background display corresponding to the latter half of the SP by the time the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position. Further, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the latter half of the SP while the accessory is returning to the initial position, the fanning part of the latter half of the SP can be preferably displayed.

[Start 2]
Before the movable body moves, a reduced pattern is displayed at a specific display position,
By moving the movable body, the movable body covers the specific display position.
Depending on the movement of the movable body, the effect display corresponding to the movement of the movable body is performed in the layer that has priority over the display layer of the symbol that is reduced and displayed.
After the movable body starts retracting and is no longer located at the specific display position, the effect display is switched to the display corresponding to the effect after switching the state in which the reduced symbol is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the operation of the accessory switches the effect from the effect of the SP first half reach A to the effect of the SP second half reach A. Further, before the operation of the accessory, the "2" symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower left and right corners of the screen. When the accessory moves, the accessory falls so that the letter "P" of the letters of the accessory is positioned to the position where it overlaps with the place where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" was displayed. do. Further, the effect image corresponding to the accessory movement is displayed in the priority layer in front of the reduced "2" symbol according to the movement of the accessory falling. Then, after the accessory rises from the falling position and the "2" symbol does not overlap with the accessory, the effect image gradually becomes thinner, and the background and "2" symbol corresponding to the SP second half reach A become. It is displayed faintly. According to this, it is possible to prevent the display from being unattractive by displaying the reduced decorative pattern during the operation of the accessory. Further, the effect image corresponding to the accessory movement is displayed on the premise that the accessory is in a position where the accessory is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled by switching to the background display corresponding to the latter half of the SP by the time the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position. In addition, since a reduced decorative pattern is displayed in the middle of ascending the accessory, it is possible to switch a suitable effect according to the movement of the accessory.

[Start 3]
The movable body is movable, and the effect is displayed before reaching the specific display position.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171, the accessory operates and the effect image is displayed before reaching the position of the lowermost end of the fall. According to this, the reduced decorative pattern can be hidden at an early stage, and it is possible to switch a suitable effect with a character.

[Start 4]
When switching from the effect display to the post-developed production display, the effect display is switched using the image associated with the movable body.

Specifically, when switching from the effect image to the image of the effect when developing in the latter half, the image related to the accessory may be displayed. Specifically, in the scenes corresponding to FIGS. 172 (h7) to (h10), the characters "POWERFULII" and images of the main characters Yumemu-chan, Jam-chan, and Nana-chan when the character rises, etc. May be displayed. According to this, it is possible to show a suitable switching of the production with the accessory by giving the interlocking when the production is switched.

[Start 5]
There is a shielding display that makes the effect display invisible by entering the closing mode after the closing operation, and makes the effect display visible by performing the opening operation after the closing operation.
Obstruction display can be executed at the timing related to the introduction part,
When the shield display performs a closing operation, the brightness of the effect display decreases as the visible area of the effect display becomes smaller.
When the shield display performs an opening operation, the brightness of the effect display increases as the visible area of the effect display increases.

Specifically, the shutter described above is an image that makes the image of the effect executed behind by making it invisible by closing it, and makes the image of the effect executed behind by opening visible after closing. In addition, the shutter is executed at a timing related to the fanning part, that is, before the start of the fanning part. Then, when the shutter is closed, the screen brightness is lowered as the visible area of the effect is narrowed, and when the shutter is opened, the screen brightness is reduced as the visible area of the effect is widened. Will be higher. According to this, the flow of the production can be shown favorably by giving reality when the shutter is closed and opened. In addition, although the image of the effect executed behind is made invisible or visible using the image of the shutter, the image may be an image other than the shutter, and the same effect is executed with the accessory. You may.

[Start 6]
The image corresponding to the shield display has a shape in which the door closes from both ends of the screen in the center of the screen, or a shape in which the door closes from one end of the screen toward the other end.

Specifically, the shutter described above is a mode in which the shutter closes from the upper and lower edges of the screen toward the center of the screen. According to this, it is possible to preferably show an effect in which the screen brightness gradually changes. Further, the shutter may be closed from both ends of the screen toward the center like a sliding door. Further, the shutter may be closed from the upper end of the screen toward the lower end of the screen.

[Start 7]
In the shield display, the color of the edge between the facing doors that makes the effect display invisible is expressed in black.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 described above, the image of the edge of the shutter is represented in black. According to this, it is possible to blur the boundary between the effect executed when the screen brightness is lowered and the edge of the shutter just before the shutter is completely closed as shown in FIG. 58 (a12), and to eliminate the sense of incongruity. .. Similarly, when the shutter as shown in FIG. 60 (a16) starts to open, the discomfort can be eliminated.

[Start 8]
After the shield display goes through the closing operation and then opens, the display corresponding to the introduction part is performed.
While the obstruction display is in the middle of the opening operation, the display corresponding to the introduction part is performed, and the brightness of the display corresponding to the introduction part gradually increases, while the obstruction display release operation is completed. , The display corresponding to the introduction part does not proceed, and the display corresponding to the introduction part starts to progress after the release operation of the shield display is completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 described above, the reach of the first half of the SP is started after the shutter is opened. Until the shutter is fully opened, the effect of the reach of the first half of the SP is not started, the screen brightness gradually increases, and the effect of the first half of the SP progresses after the shutter is released. According to this, since the production of the reach in the first half of the SP is a production that the player wants to pay attention to, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction due to the production being executed before the shutter is opened.

[Start 9]
When the release operation of the shield display is completed, the light emitting means is turned off.
After the release operation of the shield display is completed and the image for one frame is displayed, the display corresponding to the introduction part proceeds and the light emitting means starts to emit light.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, the frame lamp is turned off when the shutter is fully opened. Therefore, the timing when the shutter is fully opened depends on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. It can be easily understood by the player. In addition, in the fanning part of SP first half reach A and the fanning part of SP first half reach B, which are executed after the start part, they are started with the shutter fully open and the frame lamp is off, and correspond to each SP first half reach. The frame lamp starts lighting and blinking based on the brightness data table. In this way, after the shutter is fully opened and the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp starts to light as the production progresses in the SP first half reach, so that the player knows that the SP first half reach has started. Can be communicated in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Start 10]
The effect display begins to darken before the start of the closing operation of the shield display, and ends the closing operation at the timing when the effect display completely darkens.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 57 (a9) described above, the brightness of the screen is lowered first before the shutter closing is started, and the shutter is closed at the timing when the shutter is completely closed. It has become. Here, if the brightness of the screen is lowered at the timing when the shutter is closed, the speed of darkening of the screen may become too fast. Therefore, by starting to reduce the screen brightness in advance, it is possible to make a series of effects more suitable by making the speed of screen darkening appropriate.

[Start 11] (2019-1944)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is executed when it is determined that the introduction part is notified of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and that the control is controlled to the advantageous state after the notification of the result. Consists of including an epilogue part that is
The display means can make the effect display invisible by entering the closed mode after the closing operation, and can perform a shield display that makes the effect display visible by performing the opening operation after the closing operation. can be,
The obstruction display is executed at the timing related to the introduction part,
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the luminance data table for the shield display when performing the shield display.
The luminance data table for the shielding display is configured so that the luminance data is switched when the shielding display performs the closing operation, so that the luminance data is not switched during the period until the shielding display is closed and the opening operation is performed. It is configured.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, in the times ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is completely closed, the background is lit in yellow, blinking in red, blinking in white, and lit in red. In addition, the brightness data is switched so that the frame lamp lights / blinks while changing the color and brightness, whereas in the time ta13 to ta18 after the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamp is in a state where the brightness is lowered. The luminance data is maintained so that it lights up in red while maintaining it. As a result, before the shutter is closed, the effect in the start part is excited by the lighting mode of the frame lamp, and when the shutter is closed, the lighting mode of the frame lamp is maintained so that the player can adjust the content of the effect when the shutter is opened. As a result, it is possible to better show the player the production in the subsequent fanning part.

[Start 12]
The production display includes the display before the introduction part is started and the display during the introduction part.
In the start part, the shield display closes while the display corresponding to the predetermined effect is performed, and then the shield display releases, so that the introduction part starts.
There are multiple types of introduction parts, and it is not possible to recognize which introduction part will be executed until the release operation of the shield display is completed.

Specifically, until the shutter is released, the player does not know which SP first half reach will be started. According to this, it is possible to have an expectation as to which effect will be executed.

[Start 13]
The shield display may be performed at a timing other than the timing of shifting to the introduction part.

Specifically, the above-mentioned effect by the shutter may be executed at a timing other than the timing of development in the first half of the SP. For example, the timing may be from the second re-variation to the third re-variation in the pseudo-ream. In addition, when the shutter is closed and then released, an icon image (for example, a green hold image) suggesting a change in the active hold, which is a hold display of the fluctuation, is displayed, and the active hold is displayed corresponding to the icon image. It may change (for example, change from blue to green). Further, the effect by the shutter may be executed at the timing of developing from the reach of the first half of the SP to the reach of the second half of the SP. According to this, it is possible to improve the interest of the production by the shutter.

[Start 14]
The timing at which the luminance data is maintained is the timing at which the closing operation of the shielding display is completed, the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed after the closing operation of the shielding display is completed, or the timing related to the closing operation of the shielding display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, in the times ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is completely closed, the background is lit in yellow, blinking in red, blinking in white, and lit in red. In addition, the brightness data is switched so that the frame lamp lights / blinks while changing the color and brightness, whereas in the time ta13 to ta18 after the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamp is in a state where the brightness is lowered. The luminance data is maintained so that it lights up in red while maintaining it. As a result, before the shutter is closed, the effect in the start part is excited by the lighting mode of the frame lamp, and when the shutter is closed, the lighting mode of the frame lamp is maintained so that the player can adjust the content of the effect when the shutter is opened. As a result, it is possible to better show the player the production in the subsequent fanning part.

[Start 15]
The period during which the luminance data is maintained is the period from when the shield display is in the closed mode until the release operation is performed as it is, or until the shield display is in the closed mode and the promotion display for encouraging the operation by the player is performed. Is the period of.

Specifically, in addition to the above-mentioned pattern in which the shutter closes and automatically opens, a pattern in which a button image is displayed after the shutter closes and the shutter is released by executing a button operation may be provided. According to this, since a plurality of types of effects by the shutter are provided, the interest of the effects by the shutter is improved.

[Start 16]
At the timing when the shield display is closed and the promotion display is performed, the maintenance brightness data is switched to the changing brightness data, and the brightness data is switched to the maintenance brightness data again after the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, in the effect using the shutter display as shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, after the shutter is displayed in the closed mode, the player's action (for example, the action of pressing a button, the infrared sensor) A promotion display is performed to encourage (such as an action of holding a hand), and when the movement of the player corresponding to the promotion display is detected, an effect of opening the shutter may be performed. Then, while such a shutter display is in the closed mode, the lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table in which the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 (for example, the frame lamp) is maintained, while the shutter display is closed. After switching to the brightness data table in which the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes at the timing when the promotion display is performed as the mode, the lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table, and then the promotion display is performed ( In the state where the promotion display is continued), the lamp control may be performed again based on the brightness data table in which the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained. The brightness data table for maintaining the lighting mode used again after the promotion display is performed may be the same as the brightness data table for maintaining the lighting mode used before the promotion display is performed. However, they may be different. According to this, since the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained while the shutter display is in the closed mode, the player is asked to perform the next effect after the shutter display is in the open mode. Can be easily noticed.

[Start 17]
The promotion display is a display including a button image and a promotion character that encourages the player's movement.
When the facilitating character is displayed, the sound corresponding to the facilitating character is output, and the luminance data in which the luminance data changes in association with the sound is incorporated.

Specifically, in the effect using the shutter display as shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, after the shutter is displayed in the closed mode, the player's action (for example, the action of pressing a button, the infrared sensor) A promotion display is performed to encourage (such as an action of holding a hand), and when the movement of the player corresponding to the promotion display is detected, an effect of opening the shutter may be performed. Then, in the promotion display, even if a voice prompting the player's action (for example, the voice of "press") is output and a character prompting the player's action (for example, the character "press") is displayed. good. Further, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 may be performed based on the luminance data table that changes the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 (for example, the frame lamp) in response to the voice prompting the player's operation. In this way, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes in response to the voice prompting the player's movement. Therefore, the player's operation depends on the voice prompting the player's movement and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. It is possible to emphasize the character display that prompts the player, and it is possible to make the player perform an action corresponding to the promotion display more effectively.

[Fan 1]
The introductory part is
It is a part until the right or wrong of whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state is notified.
Includes scenes where the display is updated as the ally character and the enemy character compete, and scenes where the ally character suffers damage.
The display switching interval is faster than the epilogue part,
The number of display switching is larger than that of the epilogue part.

Specifically, the above-mentioned fanning part that fanned the right or wrong was updated by the development in which the ally character and the enemy character alternately competed (for example, SP first half reach B and SP second half reach B). .. There is a scene in which a ally character is damaged in the production in such a fanning part. In addition, in the production of such a fan part, the image display switching interval is earlier than that of the epilogue part, and the number of image display switchings is also large. According to this, it is possible to make the fanning part look more suitable by making the fanning part develop faster than the epilogue part.

[Fan 2]
In the introduction part, first, the dialogue sound of the ally character is output, and the dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63 (b5) described above, in the fanning part, the dialogue of the ally character was generated at the very beginning, and the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue were displayed. According to this, the ally character can be suitably recognized in the fanning part.

[Fan 3]
In the introductory part, the display scale of the first dialogue subtitles is set longer.

Specifically, the subtitle display of the ally character displayed first may be set to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display in another scene of the fanning part. According to this, the ally character can be firmly recognized.

[Fan 4]
There is a scene in which the dialogue sound of a ally character is output, but the dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67 (b17) described above, there is a scene in which the subtitles are not displayed when the ally character emits a dialogue. According to this, it is possible to preferably show the subtitle display of the ally character displayed first, and more preferably show the screen display than adding the subtitle display to all the lines.

[Fan 5]
It may be expanded from the first introduction part to the second introduction part,
Ally characters play an active part in both the 1st introduction part and the 2nd introduction part,
In the first introduction part, the dialogue sound of the ally character is output first, and the dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.
In the second introduction part, the dialogue sound of the ally character is first output, and the dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, in the above-mentioned fanning part, SP first half reach A and SP first half reach B as the first fanning part executed at the timing of the first half, and SP as the second fanning part executed at the timing of the second half. There were the second half reach A, the second half reach B, and the SP final reach. Then, there is a scene in which the ally character plays an active part in both the first fanning part and the second fanning part. In addition, in any of the fanning parts, the dialogue of the ally character was generated at the very beginning, and the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue were displayed. According to this, it is possible to preferably recognize the ally character in any of the fanning parts.

[Fan 6]
In the first introduction part, the first character plays an active part,
In the second introduction part, the second character plays an active part,
In the first introduction part, the dialogue sound of the first character is first output, and the dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are displayed.
In the second introduction part, the serif sound of the second character is first output, and the serif subtitle corresponding to the serif sound is displayed.

Specifically, in the above-mentioned fanning part, Yumemu-chan's character plays an active part in the fanning part corresponding to the SP first half reach B, and in the fanning part corresponding to the SP second half reach B, Jam-chan and Nana-chan. There was a scene where the character of was active. Then, in the first half of the SP reach B, a line was generated by Yume-chan, a ally character who was active first, and the subtitles corresponding to the line were displayed. Further, in the second half of the SP reach B, a line was generated by the first active ally characters Jam and Nana, and the subtitles corresponding to the line were displayed. According to this, the ally character can be suitably recognized in any of the fanning parts. The number of active characters may be one or two or more. In addition, the characters that are active in the first half of the fanning part and the second half of the fanning part may be the same.

[Fan 7]
The introductory part is
A scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are displayed, and
It is composed of a scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are not displayed.
In the luminance data table used in the scene where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed, the luminance data using the emission color corresponding to the character is switched according to the action of the character. It is composed of.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, there are scenes in which the character emits lines but does not have subtitles in the fanning part (for example, scenes of r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, r35). ). In such a specific scene, sounds that are difficult to express with subtitles are output as dialogue, so the setting is such that subtitles are not displayed. However, even in such a specific scene, the luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) of the game effect lamp 9 is specified so that the frame lamp lights in the color corresponding to the character. In this way, even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue sound, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. As a result, the effect corresponding to the character can be suitably executed, and the fanning part can be preferably shown to the player. Further, FIGS. 64 (b8), (b9), 74 (e7), 94 (i32), 95 (i34), 104 (n10), 123 (r25), (r27), 124 (r29). ), FIG. 125 (r31), (r33), FIG. 126 (r35), etc., even if there is a character's dialogue but no subtitle, the frame lamp is in the color corresponding to the character. Brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that is lit / blinking. As a result, even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, it is possible to preferably express that the character is emitting dialogue by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to preferably show the player the effect in the fanning part. can.

[Fan 8]
In the character appearance scene, the light emitting means emits light in a color other than the color corresponding to the character.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, in the scene where the character appears (for example, r24, r26, r28, r30, r32, r34), the color corresponding to the corresponding character in the scene before that. Control is performed to light the game effect lamp 9 in a color other than the above. Specifically, in front of the scene of (r24), the game effect lamp 9 is lit / blinked in yellow of (r22) or red of (r23), and then the game effect lamp 9 is colored orange corresponding to the AD character. It will be a lighting scenario. Further, in front of the scene of (r26), the game effect lamp 9 lights / blinks in orange of (r25) or white of (r25'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights in blue corresponding to the character of maid A. It becomes a scenario to do. In front of the scene of (r28), the game effect lamp 9 is lit / blinked in blue of (r27) or white of (r27'), and then the game effect lamp 9 is in Hawaiian blue color corresponding to the character of maid B. It will be a lighting scenario. Also, in front of the scene of (r30), the game effect lamp 9 is lit / blinked in Hawaiian blue color of (r29) or white of (r29'), and then the game effect lamp 9 is pink corresponding to Nana's character. Is a scenario in which is lit. Also, in front of the scene of (r32), the game effect lamp 9 lights / blinks in pink of (r31) or white of (r31'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's character. It becomes a scenario to do. Also, in front of the scene of (r34), a scenario in which the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yumemu-chan's character after the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple (r33) or white in (r33'). It becomes. In this way, after the control is performed to light the game effect lamp 9 in a color different from the color corresponding to the corresponding character before the character appears, the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in the color corresponding to the character. Control is done. Therefore, it is possible to express in the form of a lamp that the displayed character changes and which character the changed character is in an easy-to-understand manner, and it can be a suitable fanning part.

[Fan 9]
The light emitting means emits light in a color corresponding to the character located on one side of the screen, and the light emitting means emits light in a color corresponding to the character located on the other side of the screen.

Specifically, FIGS. 64 (b8), (b9), 74 (e7), 94 (i32), 95 (i34), 104 (n10), 123 (r25), (r27), FIG. As shown in 124 (r29), 125 (r31), (r33), 126 (r35), etc., the color corresponding to the character even if there is a character line but no subtitle. The brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights / blinks in. As a result, even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, it is possible to preferably express that the character is emitting dialogue by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to preferably show the player the effect in the fanning part. can.

[Fan 10] (2019-1930)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is executed when it is determined that the introduction part is notified of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and that the control is controlled to the advantageous state after the notification of the result. Consists of including an epilogue part that is
The introductory part is
The first scene in which the first character and the second character are displayed and the dialogue sound emitted by the first character is output, and
The first character and the second character are displayed, and the second scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the second character is output is included.
The light emission control means
In the first scene, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the first scene.
In the second scene, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the second scene.
In the luminance data table corresponding to the first scene, the light emitting means on the side where the first character is displayed among the plurality of light emitting means is set to the light emitting color corresponding to the first character, and the second character among the plurality of light emitting means is used. When the luminance data in which the light emitting means on the displayed side is the light emitting color corresponding to the second character is switched corresponding to the dialogue sound emitted by the first character, the first character among the plurality of light emitting means is displayed. The brightness of the light emitting means on the side of the light emitting means is switched, and the brightness of the light emitting means on the side in which the second character is displayed among the plurality of light emitting means is not switched.
In the luminance data table corresponding to the second scene, the light emitting means on the side where the first character is displayed among the plurality of light emitting means is set to the light emitting color corresponding to the first character, and the second character among the plurality of light emitting means is used. When the luminance data in which the light emitting means on the displayed side is the light emitting color corresponding to the second character is switched in response to the dialogue sound emitted by the second character, the first character among the plurality of light emitting means is displayed. The brightness of the light emitting means on the side of the light emitting means is not switched, and the brightness of the light emitting means on the side in which the second character is displayed is switched among the plurality of light emitting means.

Specifically, when a character appears, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights in the color corresponding to the character, and when the character emits a line, the character The brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in the color corresponding to. For example, as shown in Fig. 63 (b4), the green frame corresponding to Yumemu-chan corresponds to the production in which Yumemu-chan located on the left side of the screen and Baku Chu located on the right side of the screen confront each other. Turn on the left lamp and turn on the right lamp of the frame in red corresponding to the explosion chew. At time tb5, the effect control CPU 120 has a green frame corresponding to Yumemu-chan, corresponding to the effect that Yumemu-chan, located on the left side of the screen, emits a line as shown in FIG. 63 (b5). Blink the left lamp. At time tb6, the effect control CPU 120 has a red frame right lamp corresponding to the explosion chew, corresponding to the effect that the explosion chew located on the right side of the screen emits a line as shown in FIG. 63 (b6). Flashes. As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters emitting lines are displayed, which character is emitting the lines can be suitably expressed by lighting / blinking the frame lamp, and the effect in the fanning part can be preferably expressed. Can be shown to others.

[Fan 11]
In the state where the first character and the second character are displayed, the dialogue subtitles are displayed in each of the scene where the dialogue sound of the first character is output and the scene where the dialogue sound of the second character is output. , The dialogue subtitle is displayed in a certain position in a certain font.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 63 (b5) and 63 (b6) described above, there is a scene in which each character emits a line in a situation where a friendly character and an enemy character are displayed. Under such circumstances, the subtitle display for the dialogue has a certain size and is displayed at a certain display position. According to this, it is possible to reduce the chance that a bug or the like gets angry by not changing the display mode of the dialogue for each character.

[Fan 12]
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character and the operation sound corresponding to the movement of the character are output.
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound is output louder than the operating sound.

Specifically, in the fanning part, there is a scene where the SP reach BGM is output and the dialogue sound and the physical sound (also referred to as the operating sound) are output at the timing of overlapping. When the dialogue sound and the physical sound are output at the overlapping timing, the dialogue sound is output at a louder volume when it is output from the speakers 8L and 8R than the physical sound. According to this, while the physical sound is output as a part of the production to bring out the reality of the production, the content of the production is given to the player by outputting a large dialogue sound when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap. It can be easily communicated. Therefore, as a result, it is possible to make the production in the fanning part look better.

[Fan 13]
Various sounds such as BGM, operating sounds, sound effects, and dialogue sounds are output according to the production performed in the introductory part.
At the design stage, the volume of the various sounds is adjusted by outputting various sounds together with the display corresponding to the effect performed in the introduction part.

Specifically, a work process for actually creating various effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. First, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a video for each production corresponding to a fluctuation time such as SP reach is created. According to this video, directing sounds such as BGM, physical sounds, onomatopoeia, sound effects, and dialogue sounds are added one by one with dedicated software. The finished image and sound are played, and the strength of the sound is further added. In such a series of work processes, rather than outputting the sound with reality while keeping the actual sense of distance on the image, the sound is output ignoring the actual sense of distance that is easily transmitted to the player by discarding the reality. Sound data is set as follows. Thereby, a series of effects can be preferably shown.

[Fan 14]
When the output of the operation sound corresponding to one character and the output of the dialogue sound overlap, the volume is adjusted so that the volume of the dialogue sound is louder than the volume of the operation sound.

Specifically, when the physical sound of the character and the dialogue sound are output in an overlapping manner, the dialogue sound is adjusted and output so as to be heard louder than the physical sound. For example, when the physical sound and the dialogue sound are output in an overlapping manner, as shown in FIG. 166 (B), the SP reach BGM is adjusted to be reduced according to the output period of the dialogue sound. In this way, it is possible to easily convey the content of the production to the player while giving reality.

[Fan 15]
When the output of the dialogue sound of the first character with a long sense of distance and the output of the operation sound of the second character with a close sense of distance overlap in the front view of the screen, the volume of the dialogue sound is higher than the volume of the operation sound. The volume is adjusted so that

Specifically, when the dialogue sound of a character whose distance is far from the player and the physical sound whose distance is close to the player overlap, the dialogue sound is heard louder than the physical sound. The data is set. As a result, the sound that ignores the actual sense of distance that is easily transmitted to the player by discarding the reality is output, so that the content of the production can be easily transmitted to the player.

[Fan 16]
The volume of the dialogue sound that is not displayed in subtitles depending on whether the output of the operation sound and the dialogue sound overlaps and the subtitles are not displayed, or the output of the operation sound and the dialogue sound overlaps and the subtitles are displayed. The volume is adjusted so that the volume of the dialogue sound in which the subtitles are displayed is louder than that.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 166 (B) and 166 (C), there is a subtitle in the dialogue sound that overlaps with the physical sound, and there is no subtitle in the dialogue sound that overlaps with the physical sound. If there is subtitles, it is adjusted so that it sounds louder by lowering the volume of the SP reach BGM. The dialogue sound with subtitles is more related to the content of SP reach than the dialogue sound without subtitles. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the production by outputting a large amount of dialogue sound with subtitles related to the content of the SP reach.

[Fan 17] (2019-1933)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table composed of the brightness data according to the time data set in the upper table.
The upper table includes the first upper table and the second upper table.
The luminance data table includes a specific luminance data table.
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state.
The notification effect is executed when it is determined that the introduction part is notified of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and that the control is controlled to the advantageous state after the notification of the result. Consists of including an epilogue part that is
The light emission control means
In the first scene in the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the first upper table and the specific luminance data table.
In the second scene in the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the second upper table and the specific luminance data table.
The specific luminance data table used in the first scene in the introduction part and the specific luminance data table used in the second scene in the introduction part are common luminance data tables.
The specific luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data, and the total time for using each of the plurality of luminance data is configured to be the specific time.
The first upper table is composed of the storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and the time data in which the specific luminance data table is used for the first hour longer than the specific time.
The second upper table is composed of the storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and the time data in which the specific luminance data table is used for the second hour longer than the specific time.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of different timings in one child table used in the fanning part, so that the frame lamps are set at a plurality of different timings. On the other hand, the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow can be changed by making the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 different in the lamp control between a plurality of timings different from each other. As a result, in one child table WD9, it is used for lamp control by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3 without preparing different grandchild tables at each of a plurality of different timings. While reducing the data capacity, the time to turn on the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of SP reach can be changed. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expression) using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Fan 18] (2019-1934)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table composed of the brightness data according to the time data set in the upper table.
The upper table includes the first upper table and the second upper table.
The luminance data table includes a specific luminance data table.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is executed when it is determined that the introduction part is notified of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and that the control is controlled to the advantageous state after the notification of the result. Consists of including an epilogue part that is
The light emission control means
In the first scene in the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the first upper table and the specific luminance data table.
In the second scene in the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the second upper table and the specific luminance data table.
The specific luminance data table used in the first scene in the introduction part and the specific luminance data table used in the second scene in the introduction part are common luminance data tables.
The specific luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data, and the total time for using each of the plurality of luminance data is configured to be the specific time.
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data using the specific luminance data table for a specific time.
The second upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data in which the specific luminance data table is used for a predetermined time shorter than the specific time.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of different timings in one child table used in the fanning part, so that the frame lamps are set at a plurality of different timings. While blinking in white, the time to refer to the grandchild table W4 in the lamp control is different between multiple timings that are different from each other, so that the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white is set to 2 or 3 times. Can be done. As a result, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings. The number of times the white blinks can be made different. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expression) using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Fan 19] (2019-1935)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table composed of the brightness data according to the time data set in the upper table.
The upper table includes the first upper table and the second upper table.
The luminance data table includes a specific luminance data table.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is executed when it is determined that the introduction part is notified of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and that the control is controlled to the advantageous state after the notification of the result. Consists of including an epilogue part that is
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect.
The light emission control means
In one scene of the introduction part in the first notification effect, the light emitting means is controlled by using the first upper table and the specific luminance data table.
In one scene of the introduction part in the second notification effect, the light emitting means is controlled by using the second upper table and the specific luminance data table.
The specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the first notification effect and the specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the second notification effect are common luminance data tables.
The specific luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data, and the total time for using each of the plurality of luminance data is configured to be the specific time.
The first upper table is composed of the storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and the time data in which the specific luminance data table is used for the first hour longer than the specific time.
The second upper table is composed of the storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and the time data in which the specific luminance data table is used for the second hour longer than the specific time.

Specifically, in any of the child table WD9 used in the fanning part of the SP second half reach A, the child table WD12 used in the fanning part of the SP second half reach B, and the child table WD15 used in the fanning part of the SP final reach. , Since the reference time is changed while using the common grandchild table W3 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, the data capacity used for lamp control is reduced in a plurality of reach effects. However, the time for turning on the frame lamp can be changed in yellow corresponding to the background of SP reach. Similarly, in the child table WD2 used in the fanning part of the SP first half reach A and the child table WD5 used in the fanning part of the SP first half reach B, different grandchild tables should be prepared at each of a plurality of different timings. By changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, the data capacity used for lamp control is reduced, and the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of SP reach is different. May be good.

[Fan 20] (2019-1936)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table composed of the brightness data according to the time data set in the upper table.
The upper table includes the first upper table and the second upper table.
The luminance data table includes a specific luminance data table.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is executed when it is determined that the introduction part is notified of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and that the control is controlled to the advantageous state after the notification of the result. Consists of including an epilogue part that is
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect.
The light emission control means
In one scene of the introduction part in the first notification effect, the light emitting means is controlled by using the first upper table and the specific luminance data table.
In one scene of the introduction part in the second notification effect, the light emitting means is controlled by using the second upper table and the specific luminance data table.
The specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the first notification effect and the specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the second notification effect are common luminance data tables.
The specific luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data, and the total time for using each of the plurality of luminance data is configured to be the specific time.
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data using the specific luminance data table for a specific time.
The second upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data in which the specific luminance data table is used for a predetermined time shorter than the specific time.

[Fan 21]
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the first serif subtitle is displayed for the first serif sound emitted by the character, and the second serif subtitle is displayed for the second serif sound emitted by the character.
In a specific scene, the display of the second dialogue subtitle is started while the first dialogue subtitle is displayed, then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is finished, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed. Next,
A fade effect is applied to at least one of the time when the display of the first serif subtitle ends and the time when the display of the second serif subtitle starts.

Specifically, in the fanning part, as shown in FIG. 178 (A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed for the dialogue of the character. When the subtitles are displayed, there is a period in which the display period of the first subtitle displayed first and the display period of the second subtitle displayed next overlap each other. A fade effect is added when the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap each other. Due to the fade effect, changes occur when the transmittance of the displayed characters is different. According to this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap each other, the change of the subtitles can be easily understood by the fade effect, so that the switching of the subtitles can be easily understood.

[Fan 22]
In a fanning scene where multiple characters confront each other
When the dialogue sound of one character is output, the first subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed, and then when the dialogue sound of the other character is output, the second subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed. Being done
The second subtitle is displayed with a transmittance of 50% so that the first subtitle overlaps the portion displayed with a transmittance of 0%, and then the first subtitle is displayed when the second subtitle is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. Is finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178 (A), in the scene where the characters confront each other, the first subtitle corresponding to the dialogue of one character is displayed, and then the second subtitle corresponding to the dialogue of another character is displayed. Subtitles may be displayed. In this case, the second subtitle is displayed overlapping the portion where the first subtitle is displayed with a transmittance of 0% and the second subtitle is displayed with a transmittance of 70%. After that, the first subtitle fades out, the second subtitle fades in, and the transmittance is displayed as 0%. According to this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the switching of the subtitles is easy to understand due to the fade effect.

[Fan 23]
The dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is
It is not output when the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap and at least one of them has a fade effect.
Output when only the second subtitle is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 179, the output timing of the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle of "found" is displayed so that the first subtitle and the second subtitle overlap, and a fade effect is added. It is not output during the period. Then, the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is output from the time when the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 0%. According to this, in addition to making it easy to understand the switching of subtitles due to the fade effect, since the dialogue sound is output after the second subtitle is displayed, it is possible to make it easier to grasp the content of the effect visually and audibly.

[Fan 24]
In the advantageous state, the music is output and the lyrics are displayed.
When switching from the display of the first subtitle in the lyrics display to the display of the second subtitle, the fade effect is not added to the display of any of the subtitles.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178, during the jackpot round, the effect of the character singing along with the music is executed. Then, subtitles (lyrics) are displayed as the song progresses. However, during the jackpot round, the fade effect is not added even if the subtitles (lyrics) are displayed continuously. This is because when the music is playing, the progress of the music can be understood by the rhythm, so even if the subtitles (lyrics) are switched without adding a fade effect, the timing of switching is easy to understand. Further, since the music during the jackpot round is a typical music of the content mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, the lyrics displayed next are easy for the player to understand without adding a fade effect. According to this, the work of adding the fade effect can be omitted during the jackpot round, and a series of productions can be shown well.

[Fan 25]
Character dialogue sounds may overlap in both the introductory part and the epilogue part.
The introductory part has a higher rate of overlapping dialogue sounds than the epilogue part.

Specifically, although not shown, the timing of subtitle display may overlap even in the epilogue part. However, as shown in FIG. 180, in the epilogue part, there are many scenes in which the period from the subtitle display to the subtitle display is longer than that in the fan part. This is because the production of the fanning part progresses quickly, and the epilogue part does not progress as fast as the fanning part. As a result, the proportion of the fanned part being displayed at the timing when the subtitles are overlapped is higher than that of the epilogue part. In such a case, by effectively adding a fade effect to the subtitle display, it is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort when switching the subtitles.

[Fan 26]
Even in a given scene where the subtitles do not overlap
The fade effect is added when the subtitles are displayed or when the subtitles disappear.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 180, a fade effect is added to the subtitle display even in the predetermined scenes in the portions (o3) to (o5) where the first subtitle and the second subtitle are not covered. As for the fade effect, at least one of the fade-in effect and the fade-out effect may be added. In the subtitle display created after creating the video, it takes time and effort to add a fade effect depending on whether or not the subtitle display is covered. Therefore, by uniformly adding a fade effect to the subtitle display, it is possible to prevent the work load from increasing.

[Fan 27]
The display of the first subtitle without the fade effect and the display of the second subtitle may be interchanged.
It is conceivable to set a blank period between the display of the first subtitle and the display of the second subtitle, but if a long dialogue sound or a fast-paced dialogue sound is output, a feeling of strangeness appears. Therefore, the blank period is not provided.

Specifically, FIG. 181 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of subtitle display. For example, as shown in Comparative Example 1 of FIG. 181 (A), subtitles for similar lines such as "found" and "found" may be continuously displayed. In such a case, if the subtitle display is switched without any fade effect and without a blank period, it becomes difficult to understand the switching of the subtitle display. Also, regarding the display of subtitles for long lines and the display of subtitles for fast-moving lines, there is a possibility that a sense of incongruity may occur when the subtitles are switched without providing a blank period. In such a case, the discomfort can be eliminated by adding a fade effect to the subtitle display. Further, as shown in Comparative Example 2 of FIG. 181 (B), it is conceivable to superimpose "found" on the subtitle display of "found" and then display "found". In such a case, the subtitle display becomes difficult to see by not adding the fade effect. Further, as shown in Comparative Example 3 of FIG. 181 (C), it is conceivable to display the subtitle display of "found" and the subtitle display of "found" in two upper and lower rows. In such a case, since the display area of the effect is reduced by the subtitle display, the effect is hindered in the area other than the area where the subtitle display is displayed. On the other hand, such a problem can be solved by adding a fade effect to the subtitle display as in the present embodiment.

[Fan cut-in 1]
The display means is
In the introductory part, a promotion display is performed to encourage the player to perform a specific action, and when the specific action is performed, a cut-in display is performed.
In the introductory part, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and the dialogue subtitles are displayed in a specific area of the display means for the dialogue sound.
At the timing of performing the promotion display in the introduction part, the dialogue subtitles are not displayed in the specific area,
The luminance data table includes a luminance data table for cut-in display corresponding to the cut-in display and a luminance data table for the introduction part corresponding to the introduction part.
The light emitting means in which the luminance data is set in the cut-in display luminance data table includes at least the same portion as the luminous means in which the luminance data is set in the introduction part luminance data table.

Specifically, the brightness data of the lamp control (RGB data in the grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) in the cut-in effect and the button display for the cut-in effect is the same as the lamp control in the fanning part of the SP final reach. It is designed to use a frame lamp at the location. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lighting / blinking of the extra lamp from being mixed and spoiling the aesthetic appearance, and it is possible to provide an effect in a suitable fanning part.

[Fan cut-in 2]
Dialogue subtitles are displayed in the scene before the button where the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 127 (r39) to 128 (r42) described above, the subtitle display is displayed before the promotion display of the button image is displayed at the timing when the cut-in display is executed. .. According to this, since the button image can be continuously shown to the player who is watching the screen paying attention to the subtitle display, it is possible not to miss the button image, and the cut-in display can be preferably executed. Can be done.

[Fan cut-in 3]
At the timing when the cut-in display ends, the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are not displayed, and after a period during which the dialogue sound is not output, the dialogue sound is output and the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 128 (r41) to 130 (r47) described above, the design is such that there is no dialogue during a predetermined period after the cut-in display is separated. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined period without dialogue, a dialogue is issued, and a subtitle display is attached to the dialogue. According to this, the player can concentrate on the production in the period after the cut-in display, and a suitable cut-in display can be obtained.

[Win / Fail 1]
In the success / failure notification part,
The player is notified of whether or not the control is in an advantageous state, and the player is notified.
A promotion display is made to encourage the player to perform a specific action.
Performed between the introductory part and the epilogue part,
The movable body moves after the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 132 (r54) described above, the scene of winning or failing was between the fanning part and the epilogue part. Then, in the scene of determining whether or not to win, the player was notified whether or not it was a big hit after that, triggered by operating the trigger as the operating means. In addition, in the scene of winning / failing, the accessory was movable after the trigger operation in the case of a big hit. According to this, the interest of the production is improved by setting a suitable scene for determining whether or not the result is made by using the operating means.

[Win / Fail 2]
In the success / failure notification part that is executed after the introduction part,
When the expansion display is performed before the promotion display is performed, the introduction display of the promotion display is performed, so that the expansion display becomes invisible, and then the promotion display is performed in a state where the expansion display can be visually recognized. ..

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r47) to 132 (r54) described above, the subtitles are displayed by the ally character before the image corresponding to the operating means is displayed, and then the operating means is supported. The screen makes it impossible to see the effect that was being executed. Then, the effect executed after that can be recognized again together with the image of the operating means. According to this, while giving an impact by displaying the introduction of the operating means on the entire screen, it is possible to display the effect that was firmly executed at the timing when the operating means can be operated, and to show the progress of the effect appropriately. ..

[Win / Fail 3]
The expansion display is performed on the back side of the introduction display.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r48) to 131 (r51) described above, the introduction images (images of (r49) to (r50)) for enabling the operation means to be operated are displayed. The production is in progress during the process. According to this, by advancing the effect behind the scenes, it is possible to pay attention to the image (image of (r51)) in which the operating means can be operated, and also to pay attention to the development of the effect.

[Win / Fail 4]
The expansion display is performed while the promotion display is being performed.

Specifically, in FIGS. 132 (r51) to 132 (r54) described above, when the trigger image as the promotion display is displayed, the tail moves slightly at each image change in the image of the explosion chew. Was there. In this way, the effect may be advanced while the promotion display is displayed. Here, as the progress of the production, there may be scene switching or character movements rather than the movement of the tail. According to this, it is possible to pay attention to the development of the effect during the promotion display.

[Pass / Fail 5]
When the expansion display is performed while the promotion display is being performed, it progresses later than before the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, the effect that progresses during the display of the promotion display is slower than the effect that was executed before the promotion display was displayed. According to this, the player can pay attention to the promotion display for operating the operating means, and the promotion display and the progress of the effect can be balanced. It should be noted that the effect of progressing during the display of the promotion display may be slower than the effect of progressing during the display of the introduced image. According to this, it is possible to make a difference in the progress speed of the effect between the display of the promotion display and the display of the introduced image.

[Win / Fail 6]
Echo is applied to the dialogue sound before the introduction display.

Specifically, it is preferable to apply an echo to the dialogue before the introduction image as shown in FIG. 130 (r47) described above is displayed. According to this, the player can be excited before the introductory image is displayed.

[Win 7]
The introduction display is performed after the output of the dialogue sound that was displayed during the expansion display before the promotion display is performed is terminated.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r47) to 131 (r49) described above, the introduced image is displayed after the subtitle display before the introduced image is displayed is deleted. According to this, it is possible to prevent the display timings of the introduced image and the subtitle display from overlapping.

[Pass / Fail 8]
The introductory part consists of a predetermined period and a slow motion period after the predetermined period and before the success / failure notification.
In a predetermined period, the movement of the character is depicted using a plurality of image data, and the movement of the character is depicted.
In the slow motion period, the movement of the character is depicted by adding an effect effect to one image data.

Specifically, the scene before the decision of whether or not to win (r48) in the fanning part is a slow motion period in which the movement of the image is slowed down. In addition, the effect executed before (r48) depicts the movement of the character from a plurality of image data, while the effect executed in (r48) is the image of Baku Chu and six allies. Performed with images. Then, the image of the ally character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed with the passage of time to make the character appear to be operating. Here, if a video is created in the slow motion period using the same amount of image data as in the period other than the slow motion period, the amount of data is small and the movement becomes awkward. However, if a large amount of data is used to smooth the movement during the slow motion period, the capacity becomes too large. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced by reducing the number of images used during the slow motion period and making the character appear to be moving by switching and enlarging the display. The number of images used in the slow motion period may be any number as long as it is smaller than the number other than the slow motion period.

[Win / Fail 9]
There is a production that includes an introductory part where ally characters and enemy characters appear, and a finalization part after the introductory part.
In the introduction part, there is a predetermined period in which the scene where the ally is displayed and the scene where the enemy is displayed are switched alternately.
It is possible to shift to the final part by performing the action of the player when the promotion display is performed during the predetermined period.
In a predetermined period, the speed at which the scene where the ally is displayed and the scene where the enemy is displayed alternately increases gradually, and the promotion display is performed after the speed becomes the fastest.
As for the depiction in which the scene in which the ally is displayed and the scene in which the enemy is displayed are alternately switched, each of the enemy and the ally is reproduced with one image data.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 191 (B), the image switching speed between the image of the ally character and the image of the enemy character gradually increases. According to this, after the image switching speed becomes the fastest, the promotion display prompting the trigger operation is displayed, so that a scene in which the ally character is advantageous is developed or a scene in which the enemy character is advantageous is developed. It will be possible to inspire whether or not the game will be developed, and the interest will improve. In addition, by switching the images alternately, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the ally character and the enemy character are each executed using one image.

[Win 10]
The above-mentioned predetermined period in which the scene in which the ally is displayed and the scene in which the enemy is displayed are alternately switched is also applied to the scene in which the reach effect develops from one reach effect to another.

Specifically, the production of the slow motion period in (r48) may be executed at the timing of development from the SP first half reach to the SP second half reach and the SP final reach. According to this, the production can be suitably executed even at the timing of developing from the reach of the first half of the SP.

[Win / Fail 11]
The enemy character is depicted using a plurality of image data in order to change a part of the enemy character, but the image data of the enemy character itself is diverted and only the part is changed.

Specifically, in the slow motion period in (r48), at least one of the ally character and the enemy character may be configured by using two or more images. For example, in the case of a ally character, by repeatedly using four images such as image 1, image 2, image 3, image 4, image 1, ..., the character's hair and clothes may appear to move gradually. good. According to this, by changing only a part of the data while diverting the data of the character itself, it is possible to more faithfully express the state of operation while reducing the amount of data change work.

[Win 12]
During the slow motion period, a part of the character changes.

Specifically, in the slow motion period in (r48), when the character's hair and clothes appear to move gradually from a plurality of images, the movement of the hair and clothes is about the same as the period other than the slow motion period. It may be designed to appear to move at speed. Here, if the number of images is increased according to the movement of slow motion in order to make the movement look smooth during the slow motion period, the capacity becomes large. However, by speeding up the movement during the slow motion period, the operation does not become awkward even if the number of images used is reduced, and it is possible to more faithfully express the operation while reducing the data capacity. can.

[Win / Fail 13]
In the period before shifting from the introduction part in the first notification production to the success / failure notification part
The display means is a promotion display that encourages the player to perform a specific action.
The sound output means continues the sound output,
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table for the first notification effect.
In the period before shifting from the introduction part in the second notification production to the success / failure notification part
The display means does not perform a promotion display that encourages a specific action, but displays a hit or miss display.
The sound output means does not output sound,
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table for the second notification effect.
The luminance data table for the first notification effect is configured so that the luminance data is switched.
The luminance data table for the second notification effect is configured so that the luminance data is not switched.

Specifically, in the SP reach effect in which the operation is not promoted to encourage the player to operate in the pass / fail branch, the effect is stopped by keeping the mute state and keeping the frame lamp lit in white. The production can be shown to the player, and the success / failure branch (decision timing) can be conveyed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. On the other hand, in the SP reach effect in which the operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to operate in the pass / fail branch, the sound corresponding to the operation promotion and the sound corresponding to the reach (BGM) are output, and further, the operation promotion is performed. By switching and using the grandchild table a plurality of times in order to control the frame lamp so as to correspond to the mode corresponding to the above, the timing of determining the success / failure branch can be suitably produced depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. As described above, it is possible to preferably produce the timing of determining the success / failure branch by different sound control and lamp control depending on whether the operation promotion is performed in the success / failure branch or the operation promotion is performed.

[Win / Fail 14]
When the promotion display is not performed, the display changes in the order of the first display period consisting of the moving image, the second display period consisting of the still image, and the third display period consisting of the moving image branching depending on whether the image is correct or not.

Specifically, from FIG. 95 (i36) to FIG. 96 (i39) described above, the image in which the two characters Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan are displayed is gradually enlarged and displayed, and the timing of (i39) is displayed. Then, one image is displayed at rest for a predetermined period. After that, if it is a big hit, the video of the hit epilogue part will be played, and if it is lost, the video of the lost epilogue part will be played. In the period in which one image is stationary and displayed for a predetermined period, one image can be diverted and used, so that it is possible to preferably agitate the scene of winning or failing while reducing the data capacity. During the period in which the images in which the two characters are displayed are gradually enlarged and displayed, many images (for example, 10 images) are displayed as shown in FIGS. 95 (i36) to 96 (i39). You may use it.

[Pass / Fail 15]
The scenario for controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data when the promotion display is not performed is
The first scenario corresponding to the first display period and
The second scenario corresponding to the second display period and
There is a third scenario corresponding to the third display period,
The first scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched.
The second scenario is a scenario in which predetermined luminance data is maintained.
The third scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched.

Specifically, in the child table WD9 in the SP latter half reach A, there is no operation promotion, and the frame lamp blinks in white based on the grandchild table W7, and then the frame lamp lights in white based on the grandchild table W8. .. Specifically, in the pass / fail branch in the fanning part of the SP second half reach A where the operation promotion is not performed, the last luminance data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W7, "FDC" (lighting in white) is used. In addition, since the brightness data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W8 is designed, it is possible to inform the player of the success / failure branch (decision timing) in an easy-to-understand manner without increasing the data capacity used for lamp control too much. can.

[Win / Fail 16]
The display when the promotion display is performed changes in the order of the first display period in which the introduction display is performed before the promotion display is performed, the second display period consisting of moving images, and the third display period consisting of moving images branching depending on whether or not it is correct. do.

Specifically, from FIG. 131 (r49) to FIG. 132 (r54) described above, the display period of the introduced image in which the image corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) is gathered in the center of the screen is displayed. be. After that, there is a period in which a promotion display for operating the trigger is displayed. During the display period of the promotion display, a plurality of images are gradually moved to make the character appear to be moving. After that, by operating the trigger at the branching scene of the winning / failing decision, the video of the hit epilogue part will be played if it is a big hit, and the video of the lost epilogue part will be played if it is lost. All of these periods are periods in which the image is dynamically displayed as if it were moving. According to this, a series of effects can be executed in a dynamic flow, and a suitable flow of effects can be obtained.

[Win / Fail 17]
The scenario for controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data when the promotion display is performed is
The first scenario corresponding to the first display period and
The second scenario corresponding to the second display period and
There is a third scenario corresponding to the third display period,
The first scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched.
The second scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched.
The third scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched.

Specifically, in the child table WD15 in the SP final reach, as shown in FIGS. 131 (r49) to 132 (r54), a sound corresponding to operation promotion and a sound corresponding to reach (BGM) are output. In this state, the frame lamps are switched one after another, such as blinking white, lighting red, and blinking red, and it is possible to excite the effect of promoting the operation for the player at the success / failure branch (decision timing).

[Win / Fail 18]
As a flow from the success / failure notification part,
When it is determined that the favorable state is not controlled, the display when it is determined that the advantageous state is not controlled is performed, and then the display corresponding to the normal background is performed.

Specifically, the hit epilogue part and the lost epilogue part after the scene of the winning / failing determination shown in FIGS. 133 (s1) to 136 (s10) and 137 (u1) to 138 (u4) described above will be described. In the hit epilogue part, the video corresponding to the hit epilogue part is played after the production of the character movement. Further, in the lost epilogue part, the screen goes dark after the production corresponding to the lost epilogue part, and then returns to the normal screen. According to this, since it is a flow of switching a plurality of images after the scene of determining whether or not to win, it is possible to make a suitable flow of production.

[Win / Fail 19] (2019-1937)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is controlled by the introduction part until the right or wrong of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the advantageous state. It is composed including the first epilogue part that is notified to the effect.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the advantageous state is not controlled includes the introduction part until the propriety of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified, and the fact that the advantageous state is not controlled. Consists of including a second epilogue part to be notified
The light emission control means
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the introduction part.
In the second epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.
The luminance data first used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part is set to have a lower luminance than the luminance data last used in the luminance data table corresponding to the introduction part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 261, when the transition to the lost epilogue part is performed via the fanning part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, the final luminance data in the fanning part ( The RGB data) is "FDC", while the first luminance data (RGB data) in the lost epilogue part is "888" or "444". As a result, at the time of loss in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, it is possible to light the frame lamp darker in white while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting in the pass / fail branch. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that the loss has been preferably achieved. Further, when the transition to the lost epilogue part is performed via the fanned part in the SP final reach, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the fanned part includes "D00", whereas the first brightness in the lost epilogue part is included. The data (RGB data) is "888" or "444". As a result, at the time of loss in the final reach of the SP, the frame lamp can be turned on in white, which is darker than the blinking red in the pass / fail branch, so that it is possible to notify the player that the loss has occurred.

[Win / Fail 20] (2019-1938)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect, and the first notification effect for notifying that the advantageous state is controlled is notified of whether or not the first notification effect is controlled to the advantageous state. It is composed of an introduction part until it is done and an epilogue part that is notified that it is controlled to the advantageous state.
The first notification effect for notifying that the advantageous state is not controlled includes an introduction part until the propriety of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified, and an epilogue for notifying that the advantageous state is not controlled. Consists of including parts
The second notification effect for notifying that the advantageous state is controlled is notified of the introduction part until the propriety of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified and the fact that the advantageous state is controlled. Consists of including the epilogue part
The second notification effect for notifying that the advantageous state is not controlled includes an introduction part until the propriety of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified, and an epilogue for notifying that the advantageous state is not controlled. Consists of including parts
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table composed of the brightness data according to the time data set in the upper table.
The upper table includes a first upper table, a second upper table, a third upper table, and a fourth upper table.
The luminance data table includes a first luminance data table for notification effect, a second luminance data table for announcement effect, and a specific luminance data table.
The light emission control means
In the introduction part in the first notification effect for notifying that the advantageous state is not controlled, the light emitting means is controlled by using the first upper table and the brightness data table for the first notification effect.
In the introduction part in the second notification effect for notifying that the advantageous state is not controlled, the light emitting means is controlled by using the second upper table and the brightness data table for the second notification effect.
In the epilogue part in the first notification effect for notifying that the advantageous state is not controlled, the light emitting means is controlled by using the third upper table and the specific luminance data table.
In the epilogue part in the second notification effect for notifying that the advantageous state is not controlled, the light emitting means is controlled by using the fourth upper table and the specific luminance data table.
A specific brightness data table used in the epilogue part in the first notification effect notifying that the advantageous state is not controlled, and a specific brightness data table used in the epilogue part in the second notification effect notifying that the advantageous state is not controlled. Is a common luminance data table,
The third upper table is composed of the storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and the time data using the specific luminance data table for the first hour.
The fourth upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data in which the specific luminance data table is used for the second hour different from the first hour.

Specifically, the child table WD4 of the SP first half reach A, the child table WD7 of the SP first half reach B, the child table WD11 of the SP second half reach A, and the child table WD14 of the SP second half reach B also have the child table of the SP final reach. Similar to WD17, the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode at the time of loss based on the grandchild table W14. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W14 for 5800 msec in the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, whereas in the SP final reach, it is 3900 msec. Meanwhile, the frame lamp is controlled by the grandchild table W14. In this way, it is possible to make the grandchild table used for lamp control at the time of loss common among a plurality of different reach, but to make the lamp control time different with reference to the grandchild table. As a result, in the child table used in each of the plurality of different reach, the reference time is changed while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a grandchild table dedicated to the time of loss in each of the different plurality of reach. As a result, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control and to make the time for lighting the frame lamp different in the lighting mode corresponding to the loss. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the loss in a suitable manner in each of the plurality of reach.

[Win / Fail 21] (2019-1939)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the advantageous state is controlled is
A first pattern composed of an introduction part for notifying whether or not it is controlled in the advantageous state and a first epilogue part for notifying that it is controlled in the advantageous state.
The introduction part until it is notified whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state, the second epilogue part that is notified that it is not controlled to the advantageous state, and the second epilogue part that is executed after the second epilogue part, and the advantageous state is executed. There is a second pattern, which includes a relief notification part that is notified that it is controlled by.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the advantageous state is not controlled includes the introduction part until the propriety of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified, and the fact that the advantageous state is not controlled. Consists of including a second epilogue part to be notified
The light emission control means
In the second epilogue part in the notification effect of the second pattern, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.
In the relief notification part in the notification effect of the second pattern, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the relief notification part.
The luminance data first used in the luminance data table corresponding to the relief notification part is set to have a higher luminance than the luminance data last used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.

[Loss 1]
As a flow from the success / failure notification part,
When it is determined that the advantageous state is not controlled, the image when it is determined that the advantageous state is not controlled is displayed, and the decorative symbol notifies the decision that the advantageous state is not controlled. When the epilogue part is executed,
After that, the switching display is performed, and the image is switched to the image corresponding to the background at the start of reach.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 188, when a loss occurs after the determination of success or failure, the loss symbol is displayed in the loss epilogue part at the blackout background. After that, after the switching image by the eye-catching screen is displayed, the screen is switched to the normal background at the start of reach. According to this, the eye-catching screen makes it possible to preferably show the switching of the screen at the time of loss.

[Loss 2]
In the lost epilogue part, the image when it is determined that the advantageous state is not controlled is displayed in blackout, and the middle symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed in fade-in.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, in the lost epilogue part, the middle symbol gradually fades in while the background at the time of lost is gradually blacked out. According to this, since the image at the time of loss and the middle symbol are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between the blackout and the fade-in, the display at the time of loss can be preferably shown due to the relationship between the two.

[Loss 3] (2020-400)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is controlled by the introduction part until the right or wrong of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the advantageous state. It is composed including the first epilogue part that is notified to the effect.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the advantageous state is not controlled includes the introduction part until the propriety of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified, and the fact that the advantageous state is not controlled. Consists of including a second epilogue part to be notified
The display means displays the decorative pattern in the second epilogue part so as to be gradually clear, and displays the display in the story development corresponding to the second epilogue part so as to be gradually darkened. A display is displayed to notify that the advantageous state is not controlled.
The number of steps in which the display in the story development corresponding to the second epilogue part is displayed so as to be dark is larger than the number of steps in which the decorative pattern is displayed so as to be clear.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, in the loss epilogue part, the number of steps required to black out the background at the time of loss from 100% to 0% of the transmittance is 100% for the medium symbol. It is more than the number of steps required to fade in from to 0%. Specifically, the background blackout has eight stages from (X11) to (X18), while the middle symbol fade-in has six stages from (X12) to (X17). According to this, the image at the time of loss and the middle symbol are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between the blackout and the fade-in, and the number of steps for changing the transmittance is different. Can be shown favorably.

[Loss 4]
The blackout of the image when it is determined that it is not controlled to the advantageous state is performed before the fade-in of the medium symbol of the decorative symbol.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, the change in which the background at the time of loss is blacked out is started before the change in which the middle symbol fades in. According to this, the image at the time of loss and the middle symbol are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between the blackout and the fade-in, and the blackout is faster than the fade-in of the symbol. The time display can be shown favorably.

[Loss 5]
When it is determined that the image is not controlled to the advantageous state before blackout, the cut of the displayed image changes.
The cut of the displayed image does not change in the image when it is determined that it is not controlled by the advantageous state at the time of blackout.

Specifically, the displayed image is switched in the image at the time of loss before blackout, whereas the displayed image is unchanged in the image at the time of blackout. According to this, the blackout can be made to look good by starting the blackout in the state of the image without change. It should be noted that switching the image includes switching the picture on the screen, switching the angle of the image, and switching the displayed scene itself. Further, the fact that there is no change in the image includes that the image is the same still image, that the angle of the image does not change even if it is a moving image, and that even if it is moving, only a part of the image is moving minutely.

[Loss 6]
The image when it is determined that it is not controlled to the advantageous state is blacked out, and as a result of the middle symbol of the decorative symbol fading in, the transmittance of the middle symbol becomes 0%, which is required for blackout 1 The period during which the transmittance of one image is 0% is maintained for a predetermined period, and the period is maintained.
In a predetermined period, the symbol itself is shaken for at least two cycles.
The predetermined period is longer than the period in which the image of the medium symbol changes from the state of 100% transmittance to the state of 0% transmittance, and is longer than the period in which the switching display is performed.

Specifically, as a result of blacking out the background at the time of loss and fading in the middle symbol, as shown in (X18) to (X20), the medium symbol having a transmittance of 0% and the medium symbol. A blacked-out background with a transmittance of 0% is displayed for a predetermined period. This predetermined period includes a symbol shaking period as shown in (X19) to (X20). The symbol shaking period may be such that the cycle of moving the middle symbol from the center position to the upper position, the center position, the lower position, and the center position is one cycle, and the symbol shaking is repeated for at least two cycles. The predetermined period including such a period may be set longer than the period during which the fade-in is executed from the state where the medium symbol has a transmittance of 100% to the state of the transmittance of 0%. Further, the predetermined period may be set longer than the period during which the eye catch is displayed. According to this, in the display in which the background is blacked out with a transmittance of 0%, there is a predetermined period in which the middle symbol is displayed in a clear state, so that it is possible to preferably show that there is a loss.

[Loss 7]
The switching display is a display configured to include information about the gaming machine.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, on the eye-catching screen, as information on the pachinko gaming machine 1, the characters "POWERFULII" in the title and the main characters Yumemu-chan, Jam-chan, and Nana-chan Image and is displayed. According to this, the information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be accurately transmitted by the eye-catching image.

[Loss 8]
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is advantageous after the introduction part until the notification of whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state and the success or failure notification. It is configured to include a first epilogue part that is informed that it is controlled by the state.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the advantage state is not controlled includes the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not the advantage state is controlled is notified, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of a second epilogue part that is informed that it is not controlled by
The display means is
In the second epilogue part, a display is displayed to notify that the control is not performed in an advantageous state.
After that, switch display is performed.
After that, display the background and
After that, with the symbol confirmation command as an opportunity, the symbol is stopped and displayed.
After that, with the fluctuation command as an opportunity, the fluctuation display of the symbol is started.
The light emission control means
In the second epilogue part, the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part is used to control the light emitting means for the production.
When the switching display is performed, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the switching display to control the light emitting means for the effect.
When the background display is performed, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the background display to control the light emitting means for the effect.
When the symbol stop display is performed, the brightness data table is switched to the fourth symbol stop luminance data table, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol is controlled, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used. To control the light emitting means for production,
When the symbol variation display is started, the luminance data table is switched to the fourth symbol variation brightness data table, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol is controlled, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used. It is used to control the light emitting means for the effect.

Specifically, the feature portion of the detailed explanatory view of the game effect lamp 9 at the time of loss will be described. The effect screen is switched to the image at the time of loss after the effect of determining whether or not to win. After that, after the blackout display in which the loss display result is displayed, the screen is switched to the eye-catching screen. After that, a screen is displayed in which the symbol is fixed and stopped after the screen is switched to the normal screen. Further, the luminance data table is switched from the luminance data table at the time of winning / failing determination to the luminance data table at the time of losing. After that, it is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye catching). After that, it is switched to the background brightness data table at the start of fluctuation. Here, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen. Further, the luminance data table is switched to the background luminance data table at the timing when the screen is switched to the normal screen. Then, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from blinking to extinguished by receiving the symbol confirmation command, but the brightness data table for the background is not switched by receiving the symbol confirmation command. Further, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from extinguished to blinking by receiving the fluctuation pattern command of the next fluctuation, but the luminance data table for the background is not switched by receiving the symbol confirmation command. According to this, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for the background at the end of the eye-catching screen, and the luminance data table is continued until the next fluctuation. Therefore, the luminance data table corresponding to the reception of the symbol confirmation command is received. It is not necessary to create a separate image, and it is possible to show the effect by the lamp without any discomfort from the effect at the time of loss to the next fluctuation, and it is possible to show a series of effects preferably.

[Loss 9]
The luminance data table corresponding to the background at the start of reach loops and refers to the luminance data until the change condition is satisfied.
In the introduction part, the luminance data corresponding to the background is not used, but the luminance data corresponding to the background is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52, the lamp control based on the background brightness data table develops into SP reach, and when a specific change condition is satisfied, it corresponds to the effect of SP reach after the change. It is switched to the SP reach luminance data table, and thereafter, lamp control based on the SP reach luminance data table is performed. In this case, while the SP reach effect is being executed, the switching of the brightness data in the background brightness data table is stopped with the passage of time in the background of the lamp control based on the SP reach brightness data table. Continue without. Further, the lamp control based on the background brightness data table is switched to the error brightness data table corresponding to the error state when a specific change condition such as an error occurs, and thereafter, the error brightness Lamp control is performed based on the data table. In this case, in the error state, in the background of the lamp control based on the error luminance data table, the switching of the luminance data in the background luminance data table continues without stopping with the passage of time. As a result, it is possible to make the series of effects to be executed look more preferable.

[Loss 10]
After switching to the brightness data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introduction part, the brightness data table corresponding to the background is used even if the symbol confirmation command is received, and then even if the customer waiting command is received when there is no hold. The brightness data table corresponding to the background is continuously used.

Specifically, after the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background when the eye-catching screen ends, the brightness data table for the background continues even if there is no hold storage and the customer waiting demo specification command is received. Used for. According to this, after switching to the brightness data table for the background, the same brightness data table can be continuously used, so that the effect of the lamp can be shown without discomfort, and a series of effects can be shown favorably. Can be done.

[Loss 11]
When the design is confirmed, the light emitting means of the special figure stops,
Upon receiving the symbol confirmation command, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol is switched from blinking to extinguished.

Specifically, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from blinking to extinguished by receiving a symbol confirmation command that triggers an effect of stopping the confirmation of the symbol. According to this, regarding the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50, it is possible to show the player the flow at the time of loss in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Loss 12]
When the next fluctuation starts, the light emitting means of the special figure blinks,
By receiving the next variable command, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol is switched from extinguished to blinking.

Specifically, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from extinguished to blinking by receiving the fluctuation pattern command of the next fluctuation that triggers the start of the next fluctuation. According to this, regarding the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50, it is possible to show the player the flow at the time of loss in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Loss 13] (2020-401)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is controlled by the introduction part until the right or wrong of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the advantageous state. It is composed including the first epilogue part that is notified to the effect.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the advantageous state is not controlled includes the introduction part until the propriety of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified, and the fact that the advantageous state is not controlled. Consists of including a second epilogue part to be notified
The display means
In the second epilogue part, a display is performed to notify that the advantageous state is not controlled.
After that, switch display is performed.
After that, display the background and
After that, with the symbol confirmation command as an opportunity, the symbol is stopped and displayed.
After that, with the fluctuation command as an opportunity, the fluctuation display of the symbol is started.
The light emission control means
In the second epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.
When the switching display is performed, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display, and the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is used to control the light emitting means.
When the background display is performed, the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is continuously used to control the light emitting means.
When the stop display of the symbol is performed, the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is continuously used to control the light emitting means.
When the variation display of the symbol is started, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the variation display, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the variation display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 190, the luminance data table at the time of loss is used from the effect that the six ally characters of (X40) are disappointed to the effect that the background image of (X41) is blacked out. .. After the background image is blacked out, an eye-catching image is displayed. From the switching period to the eye-catching screen of (X42) to the symbol determination period of (X45), the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used. After that, when the variation pattern command with hold is received, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for the background. That is, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye catching) at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, the brightness data table is maintained during the symbol confirmation period, and the background is switched to the next fluctuation. You can switch to the brightness data table of. Further, in the symbol determination period, extinguishing, which is the final luminance data of the luminance data table for switching (for eye catching), is used. According to this, after switching to the background luminance data table, the final luminance data of the switching (for eye-catching) luminance data table is maintained until the next variation pattern command is received, so that it is a loss. Can be easily recognized, and as a result, the loss can be shown favorably.

[Loss 14]
The final luminance data is extinguished data, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introduction part does not include the luminance data for maintaining the extinguishing.

Specifically, the final luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is data that is kept off. Further, the luminance data table for the background does not use the data for keeping the light off. According to this, since the brightness data for keeping the light off is not used in the brightness data table for the background, it is peculiar to the case where the light is turned off when the background is displayed. It is possible to easily recognize that.

[Loss 15]
By receiving the customer waiting command, the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the customer waiting command.

Specifically, if there is no hold storage after the symbol is confirmed, the luminance data table for switching (for eye catching) is switched to the luminance data table for the background by receiving the customer waiting designation command. According to this, when the customer waiting designation command is received, the brightness data table for the background is switched to, so that it is possible to easily recognize that the data was lost.

[Loss 16] (2020-402)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect for notifying that the advantageous state is controlled includes an introduction part until the propriety of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified, and a notification that the advantageous state is controlled. Consists of including one epilogue part,
The notification effect for notifying that the advantageous state is not controlled includes an introduction part until the propriety of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified, and a second epilogue for notifying that the advantageous state is not controlled. Consists of including parts
The display means
In the second epilogue part, a display is performed to notify that the advantageous state is not controlled.
After that, switch display is performed.
After that, display the background and
After that, with the symbol confirmation command as an opportunity, the symbol is stopped and displayed.
The light emission control means
In the second epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.
When the switching display is performed, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display, and the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is used to control the light emitting means.
When the background display is performed, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the background display, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
The luminance data first used in the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is set to have a higher luminance than the luminance data last used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.

Specifically, the first luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye catching) has a higher luminance than the final luminance data (turning off) in the luminance data table before displaying the eye-catching image (at the time of loss). It has become. According to this, since the game effect lamp 9 can emit light with higher brightness than before switching to the eye-catching screen, it is easy to recognize the switching by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9.

[Loss 17]
The first luminance data in the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is set to be higher in luminance than the first luminance data in the luminance data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introduction part.

Specifically, the first luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye catching) has a higher luminance than the first luminance data in the luminance data table (excluding extinguishing lights) corresponding to the background at the start of fluctuation. ing. According to this, since the game effect lamp 9 can emit light with high brightness when switching to the eye-catching screen, it is easy to recognize the switching by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9.

[Characteristic operation 1] (2019-1940)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is controlled by the introduction part until the right or wrong of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the advantageous state. It is composed including the first epilogue part that is notified to the effect.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the advantageous state is not controlled includes the introduction part until the propriety of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified, and the fact that the advantageous state is not controlled. Consists of including a second epilogue part to be notified
The light emission control means
In both the introduction part in the notification effect executed when it is determined to be controlled in the advantageous state and the introduction part in the notification effect executed when it is determined not to be controlled in the advantageous state. The light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the common introduction part.
In the first epilogue part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part.
In the second epilogue part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the advantageous state is not controlled, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.
The average time to switch to the next brightness data after the brightness data of 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part is after the brightness data of 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time to switch to the next brightness data.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 262 and 263, in the hit epilogue part, the frame lamp is smoothly lit in rainbow color based on the grandchild table W1, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 30 msec. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 261, at the time of loss, the frame lamp lights up darkly in white based on the grandchild table W14, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 250 msec, which is longer than the hit time. As a result, in the hit time, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than in the case of the loss, so that it is possible to inform the player that the hit is made in an easy-to-understand manner depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Furthermore, while the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more than when it is lost at the time of hitting, the lighting by the frame lamp can be calmed down more than when it is lost, and as a result, the lamp that contrasts the hit and loss. It is possible to convey to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Character movement 2] (2019-1941)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Movable body and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that it will be done,
In the hit / fail notification part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means.
The light emission control means
In the hit / fail notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table for moving the movable body.
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part.
The luminance data table for moving a movable body is configured so that the luminance data representing a chromatic color and the luminance data representing an achromatic color are sequentially used.
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured such that the luminance data representing the first chromatic color and the luminance data representing the plurality of chromatic colors including the luminance data representing the second chromatic color are sequentially used.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 263, in the hit epilogue part of the SP final reach, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W20 in the production where the accessory falls, and the rainbow color is chromatic. , The frame lamp lights up so that the achromatic color (RGB data of "333") is switched alternately. As a result, by occasionally sandwiching an achromatic color with respect to the rainbow-colored chromatic color, it is possible to perform an effect that emphasizes the big hit and congratulates the player. After that, in the production where the ally character wins, the frame lamp is controlled by the lamp based on the grandchild table W21, and the frame lamp lights up in a smooth rainbow color without sandwiching the achromatic color, so that it became a big hit. It is possible to perform an effect that congratulates the player in a calm manner. As a result, the effect in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be preferably shown to the player.

[Epilog 1]
The epilogue part is a blessing part after the decision to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, there is a scene where the enemy character is killed, there is no scene where the ally character is damaged, and the number of display switching is introduced part There are fewer parts.

Specifically, the above-mentioned hit epilogue part is a part that does not shift at the time of loss, and there is a scene in which the enemy character is disadvantageous and a scene in which the ally character is advantageous. In addition, in the hit epilogue part, the number of switching of image display in the production is smaller than that in the fanning part. According to this, an appropriate effect can be executed in each part, and the flow of a series of effects can be appropriately shown.

[Epilog 2]
In the epilogue part, the ratio of the dialogue subtitles displayed for the character's dialogue is higher than the ratio of the dialogue subtitles displayed for the character's dialogue in the introductory part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, the ratio of displaying subtitles for the character's dialogue in the epilogue part is higher than the ratio of displaying subtitles for the character in SP reach, which is the fanning part. ing. According to this, by displaying the subtitles firmly in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easy to understand what the character is speaking. In addition, in the hit epilogue part, subtitles can be used to coordinate the feeling of blessing. In addition, since the screen changes more frequently in the fanning part than in the epilogue part, even if the subtitles are displayed, the display time will be shortened so that the production will not be disturbed by the auxiliary subtitle display. , It is possible to give the first priority to convey the effect by switching images. As a result, it is possible to perform a suitable effect in the fanning part.

[Epilog 3]
In the epilogue part, dialogue subtitles are always displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, the epilogue part is configured to always display subtitles for dialogue. According to this, the blessing can be emphasized by clearly showing what the character is speaking in the hit epilogue part.

[Epilogue 4]
In the introductory part, if the dialogue sound is output in the scene where the enemy character is damaged, the dialogue subtitles will not be displayed,
In the epilogue part, if the dialogue sound is output in the scene where the enemy character is damaged, the dialogue subtitles are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104 (n10) described above, subtitles are not added to the lines of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character is damaged in the fanning part. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 110 (o1), subtitles are added to the lines of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character in the hit epilogue part is damaged (the scene of catching a crab). According to this, the subtitle display that was not displayed in the fanning part is displayed in the hit epilogue part, so that the feeling of blessing can be emphasized.

[Epilogue 5]
There are a first introduction part and a second introduction part, each of which has a different development and a different number of lines, but in the epilogue part, the ratio of the line subtitles displayed to the output of the character's line sound is in the introduction part. It is higher than the ratio of the dialogue subtitles displayed to the output of the dialogue sound of the character.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, there are a plurality of types of SP reach, which is a fanning part, and the development of the production is different for each, and the number of lines is also different. However, in any SP reach, the ratio of displaying subtitles for the character's dialogue in the epilogue part is higher than the ratio of displaying subtitles for the character in SP reach. According to this, it is possible to make it easy to understand what the character is speaking by firmly displaying the subtitles in the epilogue part regardless of which SP reach is executed. In addition, in the hit epilogue part, subtitles can be used to coordinate the feeling of blessing. In addition, since there are more screen changes in the fanning part than in the epilogue part, it is possible to prevent the production from being disturbed by the auxiliary subtitle display, with the first priority being to convey the effect by switching images. .. As a result, it is possible to perform a suitable effect in the fanning part.

[Epilogue 6]
The final dialogue subtitles displayed in the epilogue part are longer than the dialogue subtitles of the same number of characters displayed in other scenes.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 134 (s5) to 134 (s6) described above, the subtitle display displayed in the hit epilogue part is designed to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display displayed in the fan part. ing. According to this, by displaying the subtitle display in the final hit epilogue part for a long period of time, the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the big hit and the feeling of blessing can be emphasized. When displaying the subtitle display, the one with a large number of characters may be displayed longer than the case with a small number of characters. Even in such a case, if the same number of subtitles (for example, 5 characters) are displayed in the hit epilogue part and the fan part, the subtitle display period is longer in the hit epilogue part. It should be designed as follows.

[Epilogue 7]
When the movable body is in the advanced position, the background display for the movable body is performed, and
The movable body operates according to the evacuation pattern in which the movable body retracts, and the background display for the movable body is switched to the epilogue display by the end of the evacuation pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 173 to 174, an effect image corresponding to the accessory movement is displayed according to the movement of the accessory falling. After that, the accessory moves to the initial position according to a predetermined evacuation pattern. The display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the character movement to the screen corresponding to the SP final reach hit epilogue part while the character is rising. Here, the effect image corresponding to the accessory operation is displayed on the premise that the accessory is at a position where the accessory is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled by switching to the background display corresponding to the reach of the first half of the SP by the time the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position.

[Epilog 8]
The deformed member performs a retracting operation and a returning operation.
The timing of switching to the epilogue display is linked to the start timing of the return operation.

Specifically, on the premise that the accessory returns to the initial position, the timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue is the rising timing related to the start timing of the return operation. According to this, since the display corresponding to the epilogue is switched at the timing related to the start of the return operation, the display of the effect image corresponding to the accessory operation ends before the accessory returns to the initial position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the situation where the effect image is displayed when the accessory returns to the initial position, and the aesthetic appearance of the production is not spoiled. The timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue may be the same as the timing at which the accessory starts to rise. Further, the accessory may perform a rotation operation or a movement operation at the falling position.

[Epilogue 9]
During the return operation, the light emitting means of the movable body approaches turning off due to fading out.

Specifically, when the accessory is raised, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the child table corresponding to the ascending operation of the accessory in the accessory lamp 9A and the grandchild table designated by the child table. The brightness of the accessory lamp 9A is gradually reduced so that the object lamp 9A is gradually turned off. As a result, the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A does not make the player aware of the rising of the accessory, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp makes the screen showing that the SP latter half reach A has been developed. The player can be noticed.

[Epilogue 10]
BGM linked to the image corresponding to the epilogue suggests switching,
BGM is output in conjunction with the start of epilogue display.

Specifically, the BGM corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return operation of the accessory to the initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. According to this, the epilogue part can be preferably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part by BGM.

[Epilogue 11]
A sound effect suggesting switching is output in conjunction with the start of the epilogue display.

Specifically, the sound effect corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return operation of the accessory to the initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. According to this, the epilogue part can be preferably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part by the sound effect.

[Epilogue 12]
In conjunction with the start of the epilogue display, a BGM and a sound effect suggesting switching are output.

Specifically, the BGM and the sound effect corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return operation of the accessory to the initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. According to this, the epilogue part can be preferably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part by the BGM and the sound effect.

[Epilogue 13]
In the epilogue display during the return operation of the movable body, no dialogue sound is output.
In the epilogue display after the movable body is stored, a serif sound is output and a serif subtitle corresponding to the serif sound is displayed.

Specifically, the dialogue sound is not output in the situation where the accessory returns to the initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, and the dialogue sound is output in the epilogue display after the accessory returns to the initial position. All you have to do is output and display the subtitles. According to this, it is possible to avoid displaying the subtitles at a timing when the subtitles are difficult to see, and to preferably execute the epilogue part.

[Epilogue 14]
A dialogue sound is output and generated at the timing of evacuation of the movable body.
A dialogue sound is output when the storage of the movable body is completed, and the dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, when the accessory returns to the initial position, the dialogue sound may be output and the subtitles may be displayed in the epilogue display. According to this, the dialogue can be recognized firmly, and the epilogue part can be preferably executed.

[Epilogue 15]
The display of the dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound output at the end of the epilogue part ends at the start timing of the symbol output.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 134 (s6) to 135 (s8) described above, the final subtitle display for the final dialogue in the hit epilogue part is erased before the patterning effect is executed. It is designed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from being covered with the decorative pattern and to be misunderstood as a message in the effect of displaying the pattern. Therefore, the production in the hit epilogue part can be shown favorably.

[Epilogue 17]
The moving image that was playing during the epilogue is a still image at the timing when the symbol drawing is completed and the player finally recognizes the aligned symbols.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, at the timing when the effect of displaying the symbol is completed and the player can recognize the decorative symbol, the image of the decorative symbol and the character displayed as the background is displayed. It is a still image. According to this, it is possible to prevent the decorative pattern from becoming difficult to see because the background of the decorative pattern is a moving image.

[Epilogue 18]
The moving image that is playing before the start of patterning is regarded as a still image.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (s7) described above, the image flowing in the hit epilogue part becomes a still image at the timing before the effect of patterning is executed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the symbol from becoming difficult to see from the timing of the start of the symbol output.

[Epilogue 19]
Special effects are added at the same time as resting.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (s7) described above, the still image displayed in the hit epilogue part has a special aspect of a graphic novel style. According to this, by adding an effect of a special aspect to the still image, it is possible to make a suitable hit epilogue part by emphasizing that the image is still and suggesting that the scene has been switched.

[Epilogue 20] (2019-1931)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Movable body and
Sound output means and
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that it will be done,
In the hit / fail notification part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means.
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the effect is being retracted from the second position to the first position. The display is finished, the display corresponding to the epilogue part is performed, and after the movable body is retracted to the first position, the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sounds emitted by the character are displayed.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, the brightness data table for moving the movable body is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part.
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the epilogue is in the process of retracting the movable body from the second position to the first position. Output the sound corresponding to the part.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 173 to 174, the mode of the production is switched to the hit epilogue part by moving the accessory from the scene before the winning / failing decision in the fanning part. In addition, an effect image corresponding to the accessory movement is displayed according to the movement of the accessory falling. After that, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the character movement to the screen corresponding to the hit epilogue part of the SP final reach while the character is rising. Further, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the accessory movement to the brightness data table corresponding to the hit epilogue part while the accessory is rising. In addition, a hit epilogue part-corresponding sound is output while the accessory is rising. In addition, no dialogue sound is output when the background is displayed corresponding to the hit epilogue part that is displayed before the accessory changes to the initial position from (s3-5) to (s3-8). .. After that, in the state (s4) in which the movement of the accessory to the initial position is completed and the display of the effect image is completed, the dialogue sound is output and the subtitle display is displayed. Here, the effect image corresponding to the accessory operation is displayed on the premise that the accessory is at a position where the accessory is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled by switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part by the time the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position. Further, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the hit epilogue part during the ascending of the accessory, the hit epilogue part can be preferably displayed. Further, since the subtitle is displayed after the return operation to the initial position is completed, the hit epilogue part can be preferably displayed.

[Epilogue 21] (2019-1932)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is executed when it is determined that the introduction part is notified of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and that the control is controlled to the advantageous state after the notification of the result. Consists of including an epilogue part that is
In the introductory part, the first scene that displays the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character,
In the epilogue part, the final dialogue subtitle is displayed for the final dialogue sound emitted by the character, and then the display of the final dialogue subtitle is finished, and then the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area. There is
The switching effect is not applied when the display of the final dialogue subtitle is terminated in the second scene, while the switching effect is applied when the display of the dialogue subtitle is terminated in the first scene.

[Epilogue 22]
At the time of designing, both the decorative design and the small design are displayed.
An effect is attached to the decorative symbol, but since the display layer of the small symbol is displayed so as to be prioritized, the visibility of the small symbol is not hindered by the effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the decorative symbol and the small symbol are displayed at the time of producing the symbol. Then, the effect image by the concentrated line is added to the decorative symbol, but the effect image is not added to the small symbol. Further, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the front side. According to this, it is possible to recognize that the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner by the small symbol while enhancing the effect of the effect image, and it is possible to make a suitable hit epilogue part.

[Epilogue 23]
At the time of designing, both the decorative design and the small design are displayed.
The movements of the decorative symbol and the small symbol are synchronized at the timing when the decorative symbol is finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the decorative symbol and the small symbol are displayed at the time of producing the symbol. Here, the movements of the decorative symbol and the small symbol may be synchronized at the timing when the decorative symbol is finished. Specifically, during the symbol shaking period in which the decorative symbol is finished and the symbol is swaying up and down, the small symbol may be swayed up and down in the same motion as the decorative symbol. According to this, by matching the movements of the decorative symbol and the small symbol, it is possible to preferably show the flow of the production in the hit epilogue part.

[Epilogue 24]
At the time of the design in the re-lottery part, both the decorative design and the small design are displayed.
An effect is attached to the decorative symbol, but since the display layer of the small symbol is displayed so as to be prioritized, the visibility of the small symbol is not hindered by the effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 157 (B1) to 158 (B5) described above, both the decorative symbol and the small symbol are displayed when the symbol is displayed in the re-lottery part. Then, the effect image by the concentrated line is added to the decorative symbol, but the effect image is not added to the small symbol. Further, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the front side. According to this, it is possible to recognize that the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner by the small symbol while enhancing the effect of the effect image.

[Epilogue 25]
In front of the re-lottery part, the small symbol is in a mode indicating that it is determined that the small symbol is controlled in an advantageous state, and the small symbol fluctuates again in conjunction with the transition to the re-lottery part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, when the design is produced, both the decorative design and the small design may be displayed once the symbols are aligned. good. Then, in conjunction with the transition to the re-lottery part, both the decorative symbol and the small symbol may be changed again. According to this, it is possible to synchronize the decorative symbol and the small symbol to obtain a suitable display.

[Epilogue 26] (2019-1942)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the upper table composed of the storage destination data indicating the storage destination of the luminance data table and the luminance data table composed of the luminance data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is executed when it is determined that the introduction part is notified of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and that the control is controlled to the advantageous state after the notification of the result. Consists of including an epilogue part that is
The epilogue part is
The first scene where the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed, and
It is composed of a second scene in which the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area.
The light emission control means
In the first scene in the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the first upper table.
In the second scene in the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the second upper table.
In the first scene in the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and at a specific timing, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is changed to the brightness data table for changing to the rainbow light emitting mode. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for switching and rainbow light emitting mode.
In the second scene in the epilogue part, the luminance data table for the enlarged display is used to control the light emitting means, and the rainbow emission is emitted from the luminance data table for the enlarged display at the timing related to the end of the enlarged display of the decorative pattern. The light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table for the embodiment.
The brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode used in the first scene in the epilogue part and the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode used in the second scene in the epilogue part are common brightness data tables. can be,
The first upper table is composed of the storage destination data of the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part and the storage destination data of the luminance data table for the rainbow emission mode.
The second upper table is composed of the storage destination data of the luminance data table for the enlarged display and the storage destination data of the luminance data table for the rainbow emission mode.

Specifically, in the hit epilogue part, by sharing the grandchild table used for the hit notification effect and the grandchild table used for displaying the hit symbol, different grandchild tables are prepared at each of a plurality of different timings. While reducing the data capacity used for lamp control for lighting in rainbow colors, each effect can be enlivened with a sense of unity. As a result, the effect in the hit epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Epilogue 27] (2019-1943)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the upper table composed of the storage destination data indicating the storage destination of the luminance data table and the luminance data table composed of the luminance data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is executed when it is determined that the introduction part is notified of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and that the control is controlled to the advantageous state after the notification of the result. It is composed of an epilogue part to be performed and a re-lottery part executed after the epilogue part.
The epilogue part is configured to include a result notification scene in which the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area and the result of the notification effect is notified.
The re-lottery part is configured to include a re-lottery result notification scene in which the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area and the result of the re-lottery is notified.
The light emission control means
In the result notification scene in the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the first upper table.
In the re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the second upper table.
In the result notification scene in the epilogue part, the brightness data table for the result notification scene enlargement display is used to control the light emitting means, and at the timing related to ending the enlargement display of the decorative pattern, the result notification scene enlargement display is used. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for making the rainbow light emitting mode from the brightness data table.
In the re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part, the re-lottery is performed at a timing related to controlling the light emitting means by using the luminance data table for the re-lottery result notification scene enlarged display and ending the enlarged display of the decorative symbol. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode from the brightness data table for the result notification scene enlargement display.
The brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode used in the result notification scene in the epilogue part and the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode used in the re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part have a common brightness. It is a data table
The first upper table is composed of the storage destination data of the luminance data table for the enlarged display of the result notification scene and the storage destination data of the luminance data table for the rainbow emission mode.
The second upper table is composed of the storage destination data of the brightness data table for displaying the enlarged display of the re-lottery result notification scene and the storage destination data of the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode.

Specifically, the child tables WD21 and WD22 of the re-lottery part are common to the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, WD16 of the hit epilogue part as lamp control when the symbol is finally decided after the re-lottery. Then, the grandchild table W1 is used. This eliminates the need to prepare separate grandchild tables for rainbow color lighting for the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part, reducing the data capacity used for lamp control and providing a sense of unity even for different parts (timing). It is possible to show the player a certain effect. As a result, it is possible to show the player better the production in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part while reducing the data capacity.

[Epilogue 28] (2020-399)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is executed when it is determined that the introduction part is notified of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and that the control is controlled to the advantageous state after the notification of the result. Consists of including an epilogue part that is
The display means
In the epilogue part, while displaying the decorative pattern on the edge side of the display area, the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed.
After that, the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is finished, and
At the timing related to the end of the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area.
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part.
When the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to the brightness data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is used by using the brightness data table for enlarged display. Control.

Specifically, in the hit epilogue part, when the images constituting the hit epilogue are sequentially displayed (the state in which the image of the hit epilogue is flowing), the decorative symbol is the position on the edge side in the display area of the screen. (Position of the upper left corner of the screen). In relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the epilogue image ends, the reduced symbol is erased and the effect of displaying the enlarged symbol is executed using the central area of the screen. Further, the luminance data table switches from the luminance data table corresponding to the hit epilogue part to the luminance data table corresponding to the pattern output in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image. According to this, when the image of the hit epilogue part is flowing, the reduced symbol is positioned on the edge side of the screen so that the image of the hit epilogue part is not disturbed, and the development of the image of the hit epilogue part is completed and the symbol is put out. When doing so, the jackpot symbol can be emphasized and shown to the player by enlarging the decorative symbol so as to be continuous using the edge side of the screen and the center of the screen. Further, by switching the luminance data table, it is possible to make the scene switching look suitable. In this way, the hit epilogue part can be made to look good.

[Epilogue 29]
In the epilogue part
While the image corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, it is located on the edge side of the display area with the decorative patterns aligned.

Specifically, in the hit epilogue part, when the images constituting the hit epilogue are sequentially displayed (the state in which the image of the hit epilogue is flowing), the decorative symbol is the position on the edge side in the display area of the screen. It is displayed in the same state as "222" at (the position of the upper left corner of the screen). According to this, the player can be made to recognize that the big hit display result is obtained by the reduced decorative pattern even while the hit epilogue image is being played.

[Epilogue 30]
In the epilogue part
While the image corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, the decorative pattern is located on the edge side of the display area,
In relation to the timing when the display of the image corresponding to the epilogue ends, the output of the displayed dialogue sound ends, the state in which the decorative symbol is displayed on the edge side of the display area ends, and the decorative symbol is displayed. Enlarge and display using the center of the area.

Specifically, in the hit epilogue part, when the images constituting the hit epilogue are sequentially displayed (the state in which the image of the hit epilogue is flowing), the decorative symbol is the position on the edge side in the display area of the screen. It is displayed at (the position of the upper left corner of the screen). In addition, the subtitle display displayed in (Y1) is erased, the reduced symbol at the upper left corner is erased, and the center of the screen is erased in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the epilogue image ends. The decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the area. According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from being displayed overlapping with the decorative pattern and being misunderstood that some message is being displayed when the pattern is displayed, and the hit epilogue part is preferably used. I can show you.

[Epilogue 31]
At the beginning of the introductory part, the decorative design is located on the edge side of the display area.

Specifically, the decorative symbol may be moved to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach mode at the start of SP reach. According to this, by positioning the position from the start of the SP reach, it is possible to prevent the development of the production from being disturbed even during the SP reach, and it is possible to make a series of productions look suitable.

[Re-lottery production 1]
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The notification effect includes an introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state is notified, a right / wrong notification part in which the right / wrong is notified, and the fact that the notification effect is controlled to an advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when is determined, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The means of performing the production is
Of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, when it is determined that the control is controlled to the second advantageous state, the first re-lottery effect in which the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. Is feasible and
Of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, when it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part after the first symbol is displayed in the first half part. Re-lottery production is possible,
Using the first symbol displayed in the epilogue part, the first re-lottery effect or the second re-lottery effect is executed.
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table to be used or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is used. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for controlling the light emitting means, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. ..

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol, which was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery, is enlarged, reduced, and shaken, and then the "2" symbol is displayed as it is. The re-lottery production is started using. At the start of the re-extraction effect, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the change of the re-lottery effect is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery effect, a symbol feed effect is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery effect is started using the decorative symbol that was once temporarily stopped, and at the start of the re-lottery effect, the symbol feed effect is executed using the symbol that was once temporarily stopped. , It is easy for the player to understand from which decorative pattern the re-lottery started. As a result, the flow of a series of productions can be shown well.

[Re-lottery production 2]
When the image corresponding to the background in which the decorative pattern alignment is temporarily stopped is displayed, the light emitting means is turned off, and when the screen shifts to the re-lottery screen, the light emitting means emits light in the light emitting mode corresponding to the re-lottery. ..

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 142 (tA6), when the hit symbol is temporarily stopped while the frame lamp is smoothly lit in rainbow color in the hit epilogue part, before the re-lottery effect is executed, Once the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp is turned on in a lighting mode corresponding to the re-lottery effect, so that the player can be easily informed that the re-lottery effect is started depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

[Re-lottery production 3]
When shifting to the re-lottery screen, temporarily stop the decoration pattern alignment and
When temporarily stopped, the decorative pattern alignment is performing a shaking display with an effect, but while the shaking display with the effect is maintained, the light emitting mode of the image corresponding to the background and the light emitting means is renewed. Switch to the one for lottery.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 142 (A5) described above, in the final state of the effect of displaying the symbol in the hit epilogue part, the decorative symbol is shaken and displayed, and the effect image by the concentrated line is added. Even when switching from that state to the background of the re-lottery effect as shown in (A6), the effect image by the concentrated line is still added. Further, the game effect lamp 9 switches from the smooth rainbow lighting to the extinguishing. In other words, from the design to the re-lottery effect, the design is such that the pattern shaking and the mode of the effect continue, and the background and the lamp are switched. According to this, it is possible to make it easy to understand from which decorative pattern the re-lottery effect started.

[Re-lottery production 4]
At the start of symbol feeding, the decorative symbol whose display was maintained from the epilogue was reduced.
After reducing the size, the symbol feed starts.

Specifically, at the start of the symbol feed effect in the re-lottery effect, the fluctuation starts from the reduced state of the decorative symbol that has been displayed from the hit epilogue part. According to this, it is possible to show the flow of a series of effects well without executing the process of changing to a different decorative pattern.

[Re-lottery production 5]
The symbol feed starts with the reduced size, and the reduced sizes of all other symbols are also uniform.

Specifically, in the symbol feed effect, the variation is started by the reduced symbol, and the size of the variable symbol is a uniform reduced size. According to this, it is possible to smooth the appearance of the fluctuation at the time of the pattern feed effect, and it is possible to show the flow of a series of effects well.

[Re-lottery production 6]
While a plurality of types of decorative symbols are being fed in a reduced size, the transition is made in the order of operation promotion display, operation acceptance, display of a decorative symbol slightly larger than the reduced size, and display of an enlarged decorative symbol.

Specifically, as shown in the flow shown in FIGS. 144 (A10) to 156 (A46) and 157 (B1) to 158 (B5) described above, in the re-lottery effect, the symbol is fed by a reduced size decorative symbol. Is executed, and the operation promotion display of the button is displayed. Then, when the player operates the button, the effect of displaying the symbol in an enlarged manner is executed. That is, the decorative symbol that is finally notified from the moment when the symbol is put out is enlarged and displayed. According to this, since it is a symbol that is finally notified from the beginning of expansion, it is possible to show the player what the final notification symbol is in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Re-lottery production 7]
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The notification effect includes an introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state is notified, a right / wrong notification part in which the right / wrong is notified, and the fact that the notification effect is controlled to an advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when is determined, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The means of performing the production is
When it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, the first symbol is displayed in the first half part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol. , It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect that displays the second symbol in the second half part.
When it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, the second re-lottery effect in which the first half part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects is replaced and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. Is feasible and
The first re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all the other symbols between the start of the replacement display in the first half part and the display of the second symbol in the second half part.
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all the other symbols between the start of the replacement display in the first half part and the display of the first symbol in the second half part.
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table to be used or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is used. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for controlling the light emitting means, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. ..

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol, which was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery, is enlarged, reduced, and shaken, and then the "2" symbol is displayed as it is. The re-lottery production is started using. At the start of the re-extraction effect, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the change of the re-lottery effect is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery effect, a symbol feed effect is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations from the "2" symbol. Then, during the re-lottery production, all the decorative symbols such as "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" are sent in order, and then "2" is sent again. The symbol feed effect in which the symbol is displayed is executed. In this way, the re-lottery effect is started using the decorative symbol that was once temporarily stopped, and the decorative symbol that was initially temporarily stopped is displayed again after the variation of the plurality of types of decorative symbols. According to this, the flow of a series of effects can be clearly shown by the pattern feed effect in which the final display result is not displayed immediately and all the decorative patterns are shown. In addition, when the hit symbol is temporarily stopped in the hit epilogue part, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow color, and then the re-lottery effect is executed with the lights off, and when the symbol is shaking and displayed, it is re-displayed. Based on the luminance data corresponding to the lottery effect (for example, the RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow color. As a result, the player does not misunderstand that the hit symbol temporarily stopped in the hit epilogue part is determined depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Further, the rainbow-colored lighting when the symbols "3" and "2" are shaken and displayed is inherited even during the period when the symbols are fixed. In this way, during the symbol determination period that is performed in a short period of time, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare repertoire is performed as it is without preparing a special brightness data table for lamp control. Therefore, the data. No extra capacity is added.

[Re-lottery production 8]
The symbol feed according to the predetermined pattern is sent in order from the symbol that was temporarily stopped to the next symbol, and after the last symbol is sent, it returns to the symbol that was temporarily stopped again, and then in order to the next symbol. It is a production that is sent to
The predetermined pattern is a pattern that loops in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.

Specifically, in the symbol feed effect in the re-lottery effect, all the decorative symbols such as "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" are sent in order. , Again, "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1" and all the decorative symbols are sent in order. In this way, since the numbers of the decorative patterns are sent in order, it is possible to show the flow of a series of productions well.

[Re-lottery production 9]
While the symbols are being fed in a predetermined pattern, all of the decorative symbols to be sent are displayed at the same resolution as when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped.

Specifically, in the symbol feed effect in the re-lottery effect, all the symbols are displayed by the transparency of the symbols when temporarily stopped, and the transparency is increased during the fluctuation. Specifically, a "2" symbol with 0% transmittance, a "2" symbol with 50% transmittance, a "3" symbol with 0% transmittance, a "3" symbol with 50% transmittance, and transparency. The symbols are switched, such as a "4" symbol with a degree of 0% and a "4" symbol with a transmittance of 50%. According to this, all the symbols can be accurately displayed in a mode with low transparency during the symbol feed effect, so that it is possible to grasp what kind of symbol is being fed.

[Re-lottery production 10]
After the symbol feed is started, each of the display times of the plurality of types of decorative symbols is the same until the notification of whether or not to promote is given.

Specifically, in the symbol feed effect in the re-lottery effect, all the decorative symbols such as "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" are sent in order. However, the time when each symbol is displayed is the same. According to this, all the symbols can be displayed for a certain period of time, and the flow of a series of productions can be clearly shown.

[Re-lottery production 11]
The operation promotion display is performed during the symbol feed,
The position where the operation promotion display is performed is a position that does not overlap with the symbol being fed.

Specifically, the promotion display formed from the button image and the time gauge is displayed during the symbol feed effect. The position where the promotion display is displayed does not overlap with the position where the variation of the decorative symbol during the symbol feed effect is displayed. In this way, since the promotion display does not overlap with the decorative symbol during the symbol feed effect, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the symbol feed. It should be noted that a part of the promotion display may partially overlap with the decorative design during the design feed effect.

[Re-lottery production 12]
The operation promotion display is started during the symbol feed, and is started during the second loop of the predetermined pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the promotion display is displayed in (A24) and (A25) after repeating the fluctuation of displaying all the decorative symbols during the symbol feed effect twice. It will be started. Since the promotion image is not displayed until the predetermined symbol feed pattern is repeated twice, the player can be made to firmly recognize the symbol feed effect.

[Re-lottery production 13]
When the symbol feed is started from the symbol of "1", the timing at which the operation promotion display is performed is, for example, the symbol of "5".
When the symbol feed is started from the symbol of "4", the timing at which the operation promotion display is performed is, for example, the symbol of "8".

Specifically, the symbol at the start of the re-lottery effect may be other than the two symbols. Even in such a case, the timing at which the button image as the operation promotion display is displayed is constant. For example, in the case of two symbols, the timing at which the operation promotion display is displayed is the timing at which the two symbols are displayed again. Similarly, in the case of the five symbols, the timing at which the operation promotion display is displayed may be the timing at which the five symbols are displayed again. That is, the number of symbols sent is the same regardless of which symbol starts the re-lottery effect. According to this, since the control can be made constant, the processing load can be reduced.

[Re-lottery production 14]
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The notification effect includes an introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state is notified, a right / wrong notification part in which the right / wrong is notified, and the fact that the notification effect is controlled to an advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when is determined, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The means of performing the production is
When it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, the first symbol is displayed in the first half part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol. , It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect that displays the second symbol in the second half part.
When it is determined that the control is controlled to the first advantageous state, the replacement display is performed in the first half part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. Is feasible and
When it is determined that the control is controlled to the second advantageous state, the second symbol is displayed repeatedly in the first half part, then the second symbol is repeatedly displayed, and the second symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to execute the third re-lottery production
The first re-lottery effect, the second re-lottery effect, and the third re-lottery effect have the same production scale.
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is used. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for controlling the light emitting means, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. ..

Specifically, a pattern that displays an even number symbol (for example, 2 symbols) and then an even number symbol (for example, 2 symbols), and a pattern that displays an even number symbol (for example, 2 symbols) and then an odd number symbol (for example, 3 symbols). Was provided. In addition to this, a pattern for displaying an odd number symbol (for example, 7 symbols) after displaying an odd number symbol (for example, 7 symbols) may be provided. In the effect of sending a symbol from an odd-numbered symbol to an odd-numbered symbol, the same odd-numbered symbol may be sent at the time of symbol feeding. However, regardless of the pattern, the scale of the effect of the symbol feed period in the re-lottery effect may be the same design. According to this, it is possible to obtain a suitable re-lottery effect in any pattern without increasing the data capacity. In addition, when the hit symbol is temporarily stopped in the hit epilogue part, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow color, and then the re-lottery effect is executed with the lights off, and when the symbol is shaking and displayed, it is re-displayed. Based on the luminance data corresponding to the lottery effect (for example, the RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow color. As a result, the player does not misunderstand that the hit symbol temporarily stopped in the hit epilogue part is determined depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Further, the rainbow-colored lighting when the symbols "3" and "2" are shaken and displayed is inherited even during the period when the symbols are fixed. In this way, during the symbol determination period that is performed in a short period of time, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare repertoire is performed as it is without preparing a special brightness data table for lamp control. Therefore, the data. No extra capacity is added.

[Re-lottery production 15]
The re-lottery effect displays a combination of display data other than the decorative pattern and display data of various decorative patterns, and reproduces each pattern of multiple types of re-lottery effect.
By using common display data in each re-lottery effect, the effect scale is common between each re-lottery effect, and only the type of symbol being sent and the symbol displayed in the symbol output are each re-lottery effect. Different in lottery production.

Specifically, in the lottery effect, a pattern that displays an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) and then an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols), and an odd numbered symbol (for example, 3 symbols) after displaying an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols). Common data is used regardless of whether it is a pattern for displaying an odd number symbol (for example, 7 symbols) or a pattern for displaying an odd number symbol (for example, 7 symbols). That is, the production data is the same, and the design is such that the data related to the decorative pattern is changed according to the pattern. According to this, since it is not necessary to provide a dedicated pattern, the amount of data can be reduced.

[Re-lottery production 16]
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The notification effect includes an introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state is notified, a right / wrong notification part in which the right / wrong is notified, and the fact that the notification effect is controlled to an advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when is determined, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The means of performing the production is
Of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, when it is determined that the control is controlled to the second advantageous state, the first re-lottery effect in which the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. Is feasible and
Of the multiple types of re-lottery effects, when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. Lottery production is possible,
The first symbol is displayed with the same or substantially the same animation when the first symbol is displayed once in the epilogue part and when the first symbol is displayed again in the latter half part of the second re-lottery effect.
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table to be used or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is used. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for controlling the light emitting means, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. ..

Specifically, the above-mentioned designing in the parts of FIGS. 141 (A1) to 142 (A5) and the designing in the parts of FIGS. 161 (C1) to 162 (C5) are executed using substantially the same image. Will be done. Specifically, the same image is used for the pattern output by the “2” symbol and the effect image, and the pattern output is executed in such a manner that the background portion is different. According to this, since the images of the symbols can be made substantially the same, it is possible to clearly show the player that the symbol has not been promoted to the probabilistic symbol. It should be noted that the image of the patterning portion including the background may be exactly the same. In addition, when the hit symbol is temporarily stopped in the hit epilogue part, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow color, and then the re-lottery effect is executed with the lights off, and when the symbol is shaking and displayed, it is re-displayed. Based on the luminance data corresponding to the lottery effect (for example, the RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow color. As a result, the player does not misunderstand that the hit symbol temporarily stopped in the hit epilogue part is determined depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Further, the rainbow-colored lighting when the symbols "3" and "2" are shaken and displayed is inherited even during the period when the symbols are fixed. In this way, during the symbol determination period that is performed in a short period of time, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare repertoire is performed as it is without preparing a special brightness data table for lamp control. Therefore, the data. No extra capacity is added.

[Re-lottery production 17]
The animation for displaying the first identification information includes an animation from the display of the symbol to the first position while enlarging.

Specifically, in the above-mentioned effect of displaying the symbol, a series of effects of enlarging the symbol once and then setting the normal size at the center of the screen are executed. According to this, it is possible to preferably show a series of design effects by enlarging and reducing the design.

[Re-lottery production 18]
The display means refers to the common display data when temporarily stopping the decorative symbol alignment before the re-lottery is executed and when notifying whether or not the decorative symbol alignment is promoted in the notification part.
By combining the common display data and the display data of a plurality of types of decorative symbols, a plurality of types of symbols are displayed.

Specifically, in the above-mentioned design output effect, common symbol output data may be used for the design output effect data in the hit epilogue part and the design output effect data in the re-lottery effect. Then, a series of patterning effects may be executed by using the common patterning data and the combination of the plurality of decorative symbols. According to this, it is possible to reduce the data capacity while making the effect of displaying the pattern look favorable. It should be noted that substantially the same data may be used for the data of the symbolizing effect in the hit epilogue part and the data of the symbolizing effect in the re-lottery effect.

[Re-lottery production 19]
If you are not promoted in the re-lottery production
The light emitting mode in the symbol output is the same when the decorative symbol alignment is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is executed and when the re-lottery is notified that the decorative symbol alignment is not promoted.

Specifically, in the child table WD21 of the re-lottery part, as a lamp control when the symbol is finally decided after the re-lottery, it is common to the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, WD16 of the hit epilogue part. The grandchild table W1 is used. This eliminates the need to prepare separate grandchild tables for rainbow color lighting for the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part, reducing the data capacity used for lamp control and providing a sense of unity even for different parts (timing). It is possible to show the player a certain effect. As a result, it is possible to show the player better the production in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part while reducing the data capacity.

[Re-lottery production 20]
In the case of promotion in the re-lottery production
When the decorative symbol alignment is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is executed, and when the notification that the decorative symbol alignment is promoted is performed by the re-lottery, the light emitting mode in the symbol output is different.
When the re-lottery is notified that the decorative symbol alignment is promoted, the light emission mode in the symbol output is more intense than when the decorative symbol alignment is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is executed.

Specifically, in the child table WD20 of the re-lottery part, the same rainbow color as the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, WD16 of the hit epilogue part is used as a lamp control when the symbol is finally decided after the re-lottery. The frame lamp lights up at, but when the symbol is promoted from the symbol "2" and replaced with the symbol "3" by the re-lottery, the rainbow color lighting at tB5 to tB9 is once "2" in the hit epilogue part. The lighting mode is more intense than the smooth rainbow-colored lighting when the symbol is temporarily stopped. As a result, the player can effectively congratulate the player that the winning symbol has been promoted by the re-lottery depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

[Re-lottery production 21]
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The notification effect includes an introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state is notified, a right / wrong notification part in which the right / wrong is notified, and the fact that the notification effect is controlled to an advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when is determined, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The means of performing the production is
Of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, when it is determined that the control is controlled to the second advantageous state, the first re-lottery effect in which the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. Is feasible and
Of the multiple types of re-lottery effects, when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. Lottery production is possible,
The first symbol is shaken by changing the display mode of the first symbol to the first aspect, the second aspect, and the third aspect from the display of the first symbol again in the latter half part to the symbol confirmation period. Shake display to display the first symbol as shown
By changing the display mode of the second symbol to the first aspect, the second aspect, and the third aspect from the display of the second symbol in the latter half part to the symbol confirmation period, the second symbol is shaken. Shake display to display the second symbol as if
The first aspect is a mode in which the player can easily see the design as compared with any of the second aspect and the third aspect.
The means of performing the production is
In the re-lottery part, it is possible to execute a movement promotion display that encourages the player to move.
If the operation is performed at the first timing while the operation promotion display is being executed in the first re-lottery effect, the second operation is performed when the predetermined timing is reached after the effect corresponding to the first re-lottery effect is executed. The second symbol is displayed in the shaking display while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol so that the symbol becomes the second aspect.
If the operation is performed at a second timing different from the first timing while the operation promotion display is being executed in the first re-lottery effect, the predetermined timing is reached after the effect corresponding to the first re-lottery effect is executed. At that time, the second symbol is displayed in the shaking display while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol so that the second symbol becomes the third aspect.
When the operation promotion display is being executed in the first re-lottery effect, regardless of whether the operation is performed at the first timing or the second timing, a display that makes it difficult to visually recognize the shaking display of the second symbol from a predetermined timing is displayed. After that, the second symbol is displayed again in the shaking display, and then, when the symbol confirmation period is reached, the second symbol is displayed in the first aspect while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol. Stop display and
If the operation is performed at the first timing while the operation promotion display is being executed in the second re-lottery effect, the first is when the predetermined timing is reached after the effect corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is executed. The first symbol is displayed in the shaking display while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol so that the symbol becomes the second aspect.
If the operation is performed at the second timing while the operation promotion display is being executed in the second re-lottery effect, the first is when the predetermined timing is reached after the effect corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is executed. The first symbol is displayed in the shaking display while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol so that the symbol becomes the third aspect.
When the movement promotion display is being executed in the second re-lottery effect, regardless of whether the movement is performed at the first timing or the second timing, a display that makes it difficult to visually recognize the shaking display of the first symbol from a predetermined timing is displayed. After that, the first symbol is displayed again in the shaking display, and then, when the symbol confirmation period is reached, the first symbol is displayed in the first aspect while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol. Stop display and
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table to be used or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is used. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for controlling the light emitting means, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. ..

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 267 (L1) to (L3), the operation promotion display by the button image and the time gauge is displayed during the symbol feeding of the re-lottery effect. When the player operates the push button 31B during the period in which the operation promotion display is displayed, the common symbolizing effect shown in (L4) to (L6) is executed. Regardless of which timing the push button 31B is operated, the effect of producing a common symbol by enlarging and reducing the symbol as shown in (L4) to (L5) is executed. After that, the symbol shake is executed during the symbol shake period. The shaking period of the symbol differs depending on the button operation timing. Therefore, after the shaking period of the symbol, for example, in the first operation timing, the symbol is in the position facing the right side, in the second operation timing, the symbol is in the position facing the left side, and in the third operation timing, the symbol is in the position facing the left side. , The design may be in a position facing the front. However, regardless of the operation timing, a whiteout effect is sandwiched as a common effect from (J1) to (J18) thereafter, and an effect in which the symbol sways after the symbol is rotated and the symbol is reduced is executed. According to this, regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, by performing a common effect, the design can be stopped neatly, and a series of effects can be preferably shown.

[Re-lottery production 22]
When the operation is performed at the first timing of the valid period of the operation, after the notification of promotion or not is performed, the decorative pattern is displayed swayingly until the predetermined timing of the fluctuation comes.
When the operation is performed at the second timing earlier than the first timing of the valid period of the operation, the operation is performed at the second timing earlier than the first timing until the predetermined timing of the fluctuation comes after the notification of promotion or not is performed. The decorative pattern is displayed swaying as soon as it is, and the scale is absorbed.

Specifically, when the push button 31B is operated at the first timing during the operation valid period, the decorative symbol is displayed to sway after the notification of whether or not to promote is executed (FIG. 267 (L3)). Example without operation). When the push button 31B was operated at the second timing earlier than the first timing during the operation valid period, the display that the decorative symbol shook was earlier than the first timing after the notification of whether to promote or not was executed. The display is extended by a minute (the operation shown in FIG. 267 (L2) is an example of the second timing). When the push button 31B was operated at the third timing earlier than the second timing during the operation valid period, the display that the decorative symbol shook was earlier than the second timing after the notification of whether to promote or not was executed. The display is extended by a minute (the operation shown in FIG. 267 (L1) is an example of the first timing). In this way, regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, the scale of the effect can be absorbed by the shaking time of the symbol. By performing a common effect after that, the design can be stopped neatly, and a series of effects can be shown favorably.

[Re-lottery production 23]
The predetermined effect starts after the swaying decorative pattern is rotated while being enlarged while blinking white.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 267, after performing whiteout as a common effect, an effect different from the conventional pattern mode in which the swaying decorative pattern is enlarged and rotated once is executed. According to this, regardless of the position of the symbol in the shaking of the shaku absorption symbol, by executing the effect of a different mode after sandwiching the whiteout, the flow of the effect until the symbol is stopped. It is possible to prevent discomfort.

[Re-lottery production 24]
The swaying display of the decorative pattern is displayed with the decorative pattern swaying around the first position.
In the shaking display, the decorative symbols are displayed in the order of 1st position, 2nd position, 3rd position, 2nd position, 1st position, 4th position, 5th position, 4th position, 1st position, and 2nd position. It is positioned, and when the fixed period is reached, the predetermined effect is designed so that the decorative pattern is always swayed and displayed in the order of the second position and the first position.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 267, during the shaking period of the symbol, the symbol swings to the back side from (J10) to (J12), and then the symbol swings to the front side from (J13) to (J14). Changes to the initial position. After that, the design swings toward the front side from (J15) to (J16), and then changes to the initial position by swinging the design toward the back side from (J17) to (J18). Such a series of movements may be repeated a plurality of times. However, during the period when the symbol is fixed, it is designed so that the symbol is always located at the initial position facing the front as shown in (J18). According to this, the symbol can be fixedly stopped in a manner that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player.

[Re-lottery production 25]
The starting point when the light emitting mode of the light emitting means is made to emit light by rainbow during the second part is to make the light emitted by rainbow at the start of a predetermined effect.

Specifically, the game effect lamp 9 is designed to light up in a rainbow color at the timing of the whiteout shown in FIG. 267 (J1). The timing of (J1) is an effect executed as a common effect regardless of the operation timing. By setting the place where such a common effect is executed as the starting point of the change of the game effect lamp 9, it is easy for the designer to decide the start trigger. It should be noted that the timing of (J2) when the common start display is started may be used as the start trigger instead of the timing of (J1), and the start trigger may be any timing of the commonly executed effects.

[Re-lottery production 26]
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The notification effect includes an introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state is notified, a right / wrong notification part in which the right / wrong is notified, and the fact that the notification effect is controlled to an advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when is determined, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The means of performing the production is
Of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, when it is determined that the control is controlled to the second advantageous state, the first re-lottery effect in which the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. Is feasible and
Of the multiple types of re-lottery effects, when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. Lottery production is possible,
In the epilogue part, when the first symbol is once displayed, the display mode of the first symbol is changed to the first aspect, the second aspect, and the third aspect so that the first symbol is shaken. It displays the first design,
In the case of shifting from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part, when the first symbol is shifted from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when it is displayed in the first aspect, and when the first symbol is displayed in the second aspect. There is a transition from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing, and a transition from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the third aspect.
The effect execution means shifts from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the first aspect, and when the first symbol is displayed in the second aspect, the re-lottery is performed from the epilogue part. In both the transition to the part and the transition from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the third aspect, a specific display is performed to make the first symbol difficult to see. The first symbol is displayed in a common display mode, and the first re-lottery effect or the second re-lottery effect is executed.
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table to be used or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is used. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for controlling the light emitting means, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. ..

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, when the image showing the stick controller 31A and the time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, regardless of the timing of the operation, after that, A time for shaking the symbol for absorbing the scale may be provided in the time until the predetermined timing when the re-lottery effect is executed (the period of shaking of the symbol from (K4)). Then, when the re-lottery effect is executed at a predetermined timing, a common effect with whiteout as shown in (K8) to (K17) may be executed. According to this, regardless of the timing at which the stick controller 31A is operated, the symbol is once shaken and displayed, and then the common effect accompanied by whiteout is executed, and then the re-lottery effect is executed. Therefore, at the start of the re-lottery. It is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort in the mode of movement of the symbol, and it is possible to make a series of effects look suitable.

[Re-lottery production 27]
The re-lottery effect is the same regardless of which of the multiple types of introduction parts is hit.

Specifically, from the time when the whiteout screen is displayed until the re-lottery effect is executed, any of a plurality of reach may be common. According to this, the data capacity of the effect data can be reduced.

[Re-lottery production 28]
The movement of the decorative symbol after the specific display is an extension of the movement in which the decorative symbol was once swayed and displayed before the specific display.

Specifically, the movement of the symbol after the whiteout screen may be an extension of the movement of the symbol in front of the whiteout screen. For example, if the movement of the design in front of the whiteout screen is a movement that swings between the front side and the back side by the axial rotation around the vertical direction of the design on the spot, the movement after the whiteout screen is The movement may be one rotation clockwise by the axial rotation centered on the vertical direction of the symbol while enlarging. According to this, by displaying a whiteout between the movements on the extension of the same axial rotation, it is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort in the mode of movement of the symbol, and a series of effects can be preferably shown. be able to.

[Re-lottery production 29]
The multiple types of introduction parts are branches of notification of whether or not they are controlled in an advantageous state, and include a predetermined introduction part that is not notified triggered by the operation of the operating means.
Since there is no point where the scale shifts in the predetermined introduction part, if it is decided that the predetermined introduction part will be controlled in an advantageous state, the decorative symbol will be temporarily stopped until the re-lottery effect is executed. There is no blurring in the shaking display, but the same re-lottery effect as the reach where the scale shift occurs is executed.

Specifically, the plurality of SP reach includes those in which the promotion of operation such as button operation is not notified at the branch at the time of determining whether or not the control is in an advantageous state. In such SP reach, the scale shift due to the operation does not occur. However, even with such an SP reach, the same re-lottery effect as the SP reach in which the scale shift occurs may be executed. According to this, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity even if there is only one re-lottery effect due to the common effect regardless of the presence or absence of the scale deviation. In addition, the data capacity can be reduced by using one re-lottery effect.

[Re-lottery production 30]
In the flow of going to the re-lottery production after the shaking display of the decorative pattern at the jackpot in the predetermined introduction part
The timing for shifting to the re-lottery effect is designed so that the movement is an extension of the decorative pattern after the specific display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, the timing is set so that the movement of the symbol after the whiteout screen is an extension of the movement of the symbol in front of the whiteout screen. For example, the movement of the symbol in front of the whiteout screen is one of a series of movements in which the symbol moves from the right position (K3) to the left position (K6) via the front position (K5). It is designed to be. That is, when the shaking of the symbol is one of a series of clockwise movements, the whiteout by the re-lottery effect is executed, and then the movement of expanding the symbol and rotating clockwise continues. According to this, it is possible to prevent the movement of the symbol from causing a sense of discomfort due to the series of movements of the clockwise rotating symbol from the period of the symbol shaking to the re-lottery effect.

<Explanation of terms>
The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has been described above. In the following, some terms used in the present specification will be described.

"Variable display" (variable display) includes displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), a plurality of types of ordinary symbols, and a plurality of types of decorative symbols in a variable manner.

"Variation" of a symbol is an updated display of multiple types of symbols such as multiple types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), multiple types of ordinary symbols, and multiple types of decorative symbols, and multiple types of symbols. Scroll display, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, lighting / blinking / extinguishing of lamps (fourth symbol unit 50, special figure 1 variable display unit 53, special figure 2 variable display unit 54, etc.) And so on.

The "decorative symbol" includes a symbol that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game.

The "reduced symbol" is a symbol in a state in which the decorative symbol is reduced, and includes a symbol smaller than the decorative symbol. When the reduced symbol is stopped and displayed, the same number symbol as the decorative symbol is displayed at the edge of the screen smaller than the decorative symbol.

The "small symbol" includes a symbol corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a size smaller than the decorative symbol. The small symbols are displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L, the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C, and the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R. The symbols corresponding to each of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction.

In the "design confirmation", the fluctuations of the fourth symbol unit 50, the special diagram 1 variable display unit 53, the special diagram 2 variable display unit 54, the decorative symbol, etc. are stopped, and finally the special symbol game Includes the determination of the design in. For example, a state in which the fluctuation of the decorative symbol that fluctuates in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol that fluctuates in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbol that fluctuates in the right decorative symbol display area 5R has stopped. include.

In the "design confirmation period", the display result is determined by stopping the fluctuation of the fourth symbol unit 50, the special figure 1 variable display unit 53, the special figure 2 variable display unit 54, the decorative symbol, and the like. Includes period. For example, the variation of the decorative symbol that fluctuates in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol that fluctuates in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbol that fluctuates in the right decorative symbol display area 5R stops and is displayed. Includes a deterministic display of the results.

In "reach", when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form a part of the jackpot combination, the variable display continues for the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed. For example, the decorative symbol of "2" stops in the decorative symbol display area 5L on the left, and the decorative symbol of "2" stops in the decorative symbol display area 5R on the right, but the decorative symbol of "2" stops in the decorative symbol display area 5C inside. Then, the variable display of the decorative pattern is still continued.

“Extinguishing” of the lighting means (light emitting means) includes a state in which the value of the luminance data for lighting (lighting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) becomes “0” (value indicating the lowest brightness). In addition, "turning off" of the lighting means (light emitting means) means brightness data corresponding to turning off such that the value of the brightness data for turning on (lighting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is "1" or "2". It may include a state in which the value is close to "0". In addition, the state where the value of the brightness data for turning on (lighting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is close to the brightness data "0" corresponding to the extinguishing such as "1" or "2" is ". It may be included in "lighting" or "substantially extinguished".

The "lighting" or "light emission" of the lighting means (light emitting means) is a state in which the value of the luminance data for lighting (lighting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is higher than that when the lamp (light emitting means) is turned off. It includes a state in which the value is equal to or higher than the value of the luminance data (“0”) corresponding to the above-mentioned “light off”. "Lighting" includes constant lighting in which the lamps are always lit, wave lighting in which a plurality of lamps are sequentially switched from extinguished to lit, and moya lighting in which the lamps are dimly lit while changing the brightness.

"Blinking" of the lighting means (light emitting means) means that the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is in a state other than "off", "substantially off", or "lighting", and the lamp is "lighting" or "turning off". Includes repeating over time. Further, "blinking" of the lighting means (light emitting means) includes repeating "lighting" and "substantially extinguishing" of the lamp with the passage of time.

The “luminance” is a value indicating the brightness of the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means), and in the present embodiment, the brightness data is represented by a hexadecimal number as the data corresponding to the brightness. For example, when the brightness data used to control a predetermined lamp is "0", the lamp control is performed so that the predetermined lamp has the lowest brightness (the lamp is dark), and the predetermined lamp is controlled. When the brightness data used for this purpose is "F", the lamp control is performed so that the predetermined lamp has the highest brightness (the lamp is bright). As described above, the luminance data corresponds to the value of the current flowing through the lamp, and when the luminance data used to control the predetermined lamp is "0", the current flowing through the predetermined lamp is the smallest. When the luminance data used to control the predetermined lamp is "F", the current flowing through the predetermined lamp is the largest. The "lamp" is not limited to an LED (light emitting diode) lamp, but includes any kind of lamp such as an EL (electroluminescence) lamp and an incandescent lamp.

The "lighting color" or "emission color" of a lamp includes a color represented by the emission of one or more light emitting elements included in the lamp. For example, when the lamp is composed of an LED consisting of three light emitting elements such as "R" (red), "G" (green), and "B" (blue), the 3 is adjusted by the LED driver based on the brightness data. The three light emitting elements emit light by the current applied to the three light emitting elements, so that the LEDs are lit in various colors. The "lighting color" of the lamp differs depending on the color of the light emitting element. For example, in the case of an LED consisting of only "W" (white) of the light emitting element, the brightness differs depending on the flowing current, but the lamp lights in white, and " In the case of an LED consisting of a light emitting element only for "R" (red), the lamp lights in red although the brightness varies depending on the flowing current.

The "rainbow color" (seven colors) among the lighting colors of the lamp includes a color composed of seven kinds of colors. For example, "rainbow color" includes red, orange (orange), yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple. The "rainbow color" is not limited to the colors described above, and may be composed of seven other colors. Even if the same "rainbow color" is used, the lighting mode is different between the smooth lighting based on the brightness data table (grandchild table) shown in FIG. 225 and the blinking based on the brightness data table (grandchild table) shown in FIG. 256. In addition, the lighting mode depending on the rainbow color may differ depending on the set luminance data.

The “color corresponding to the character” includes a color predetermined for each character appearing in the production of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the color corresponding to Yumemu-chan's character is green, the color corresponding to Jam-chan is purple, and the color corresponding to Bakuchu is red.

The “emission color corresponding to the character” is a lighting color (emission color) of the game effect lamp 9, and includes a color predetermined for each character appearing in the production of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the "emission color corresponding to the character" is the lighting color (emission color) of the game effect lamp 9 in green corresponding to Yumemu-chan's character, and the lighting color of the game effect lamp 9 in purple corresponding to Jam-chan. (Emission color), the lighting color (emission color) of the game effect lamp 9 in red corresponding to the explosion chew, and the like are included.

The “line sound” includes a sound corresponding to the word output at the timing when the character appearing in the pachinko gaming machine 1 utters the word. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a sound (sound) corresponding to a word uttered by the character is output according to the image of the character appearing by the production.

The “serif subtitle” includes characters corresponding to the serif sound displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 when the serif sound is output. Serif subtitles are also called subtitle display.

The "physical sound" includes a physical sound generated by the movement of an object such as a character or an object appearing in the production. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a physical sound (physical sound) that will be generated by the movement of the object is output according to the image of an object such as a character or an object that appears by the production.

The "onomatopoeia" includes a pseudo sound that expresses the movement of an object such as a character or an object that appears in the production. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a pseudo sound (onomatopoeia) expressing the movement of the object is output according to the image of the object such as a character or an object appearing by the production.

The "character action" includes an effect in which the character appearing in the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 performs some action. For example, the action of Yume-chan's character chasing the character of Baku Chu is included.

In the "re-lottery effect", the normal jackpot symbol that does not become a probabilistic jackpot in the variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, an even-numbered symbol such as the symbol "2") is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the normal jackpot symbol is a probabilistic jackpot. Includes an effect that is performed before the symbol is finalized to encourage whether or not it is promoted to a symbol (for example, an odd symbol such as the symbol of "3").

The "replacement display" is an effect included in the "re-lottery effect", and includes an image display in which the decorative symbols that have been temporarily stopped are sequentially replaced with other symbols, so that the decorative symbols are switched one after another. In the present embodiment, the "replacement display" is a display in which the symbol "2" fluctuates at high speed and is sequentially replaced with another symbol, and finally the symbol "2" or "3" is stopped. include.

"Repeat display" means repeating the same display, and refers to repeating the display using the same animation. It is an effect included in the "re-lottery effect", and includes a display in which a temporarily stopped decorative pattern is displayed many times with the same animation. As an example, the "repeated display" includes a display in which the symbol "7" is finally stopped while being sequentially replaced with another symbol while fluctuating at high speed.

"Shaking display" is to display while shaking the decorative pattern, and indicates that the fluctuation has not been completed and is being changed.

The "stop display" is to display the decorative symbol stationary without moving it, and indicates that the fluctuation has ended.

The "swaying speed" is the speed at which the decorative symbol operates from the first position to the second position when the decorative symbol is swaying.

The "first aspect of the symbol", the "second aspect of the symbol", and the "third aspect of the symbol" are aspects that indicate the position of the decorative symbol. For example, in the case where the decorative pattern is swayed up and down, when the first aspect is the central position, the second aspect is the upper position and the third aspect is the lower position. Further, in the case where the decorative pattern is swayed in the front-rear direction, when the first aspect is the front position, the second aspect is the position facing left and the third aspect is the position facing right.

The "fanfare effect" is an effect that is executed at the start of the jackpot game state and notifies that the jackpot game state has been reached.

The "advancement" of a movable body (role) is an action in which the movable body (role) moves from the initial position. The position at the end of the movable area where the accessory moves is the advance position.

The "evacuation" of the movable body (accessory) is an operation in which the accessory as a movable body moves from the advance position to the initial position. The initial position in the movable area where the accessory moves is the evacuation position.

The "effect display for moving the movable body" is a display for enhancing the visual effect around the accessory on the screen as the accessory moves to the advanced position as the movable body. For example, an effect image is displayed to make the accessory movement stand out according to the accessory movement when the reach develops in the latter half or when a big hit is notified.

"Story development" refers to the progress of a story or a series of productions. That is, the story of a series of flows is continuously displayed to the player without interruption due to a change of scenes or the like.

"Parts and scenes" refer to the groups that make up the production, and the parts are larger than the scenes. The parts are divided by role.

"Scene switching"
Switching scenes mainly means switching the display, and in particular, switching the displayed background, characters, and the like.

The "cut-in display" is an effect in which another image is interrupted and displayed on the displayed image. In addition, the cut-in display can indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit with the color of the cut-in display. For example, when the cut-in display is red, the jackpot expectation is higher than when it is green.

The "switching display (eye-catching display)" is an effect displayed when changing scenes. In the present embodiment, the eye-catching display is used when the scene is changed from the state showing the loss to the state of the normal game. The eye-catching display has the role of making it easy to understand that the super reach has ended.

In the "shield display (shutter display)", the image display device 5 displays an image such as a shutter so as to cover the entire area displayed by the image display device 5, and the image displayed before the shield display is displayed. Is a display that shields. The image may be shielded by displaying something other than the shutter as the shield display.

"Switching the luminance data" means that the timer of the luminance data defined in the grandchild table becomes 0 and the next luminance data is used. By switching the luminance data, the light emitting mode of the lamp is switched. By switching the light emitting mode of the lamp, the player is given the impression that the story development of the currently displayed scene is updated.

"The luminance data does not switch" means that the timer of the luminance data defined in the grandchild table does not become 0, and the luminance data continues to be used. Since the brightness data is not switched, the light emitting mode of the lamp becomes constant. By making the light emitting mode of the lamp constant, the player is given the impression that the story development of the currently displayed scene is not updated and is stopped.

The "video data" is data for displaying a moving image including an animation. The images displayed on the image display device 5 are switched at high speed for several tens of images per second to make them appear to be moving. The moving image data may be stored by compressing the data.

The "first moving image data" is moving image data created by using many images in order to operate a character among the moving image data.

The "second moving image data" is moving image data created by using a small number of images in order to operate the character among the moving image data.

The "movement of a specific character" is a movement corresponding to a specific character among a plurality of characters appearing in the production.

The “blackout” is an effect of displaying a black image in the display area to darken (blackout) the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The blackout may be in a mode in which the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot differs depending on the duration of the darkened state.

The “whiteout” is an effect of displaying (whitening out) a white image in the display area in order to make the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 invisible. The whiteout may be in a mode in which the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot differs depending on the duration of the state in which the white image is displayed.

The "specific display that makes it difficult to see" means that an image for making the displayed decorative pattern invisible to the player is displayed on the screen. For example, by displaying a white image on the entire screen (whitening out), the decorative pattern becomes invisible to the player.

"Fade effect" refers to fade-in and fade-out used in video technology. Fade-in means that the state in which the background image or the like is displayed gradually changes to the state in which a predetermined image is visible. In the present embodiment, for example, an image showing dialogue is gradually displayed from the state where the room background is displayed. Gradually displaying means gradually reducing the transparency of the image showing the dialogue. For example, after displaying the dialogue image with 100% transparency, the transparency is reduced by 10% every 0.1 seconds, so that the dialogue image is displayed after 1 second. Further, the fade-out means that, contrary to the fade-in, the state in which the predetermined image is visible overlapping the background image gradually shifts to only the background image. In the present embodiment, for example, the image showing the dialogue is gradually hidden from the state where the image showing the dialogue is displayed on the room background. Gradually hiding means gradually increasing the transparency of the image showing the dialogue. For example, after displaying the dialogue image with a transmittance of 0%, the transparency is increased by 10% every 0.1 seconds, so that the dialogue image is hidden after 1 second. Further, the fade effect includes a crossfade in which the fade-in and the fade-out are performed at the same time and the images are exchanged.

<Explanation of the invention using a plurality of configurations>
An invention having the above-mentioned plurality of feature points and exerting a particularly synergistic effect will be described below. A plurality of feature points may be feature points in the same part or feature points in different parts.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (1)] (2020-297)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state.
The notification effect is executed when it is determined that the introduction part is notified of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and that the control is controlled to the advantageous state after the notification of the result. Consists of including an epilogue part that is
The introductory part is
A scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are displayed.
A scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are not displayed.
It is composed of a specific scene in which a dialogue sound emitted by a character, an operation sound corresponding to the movement of the character, and a specific scene are output.
The luminance data table used in the scene where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed is configured so that the luminance data using the emission color corresponding to the character is switched according to the action of the character. ,
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the operation sound corresponding to the movement of the character.
[Drawings] FIGS. 165 to 170, 213, 214.
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, in the introduction part , While outputting the physical sound as a part of the production to bring out the reality of the production, the content of the production can be easily conveyed to the player by outputting a large dialogue sound when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap. Furthermore, even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue sound, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and as a result, the flow of the series of effects to be executed can be shown better. It will be possible.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (2)] (2020-298)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Movable body and
Sound output means and
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that it will be done,
Up to the hit / fail notification part, when the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, the scene change is notified.
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retracting from the second position to the first position, the movable body is movable. End the effect display for body movement, display the corresponding scene after switching,
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, the brightness data table for moving the movable body is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the scene after switching. ,
The sound output means
In the specific scene in the introduction part, the dialogue sound emitted by the character and the operation sound corresponding to the movement of the character are output.
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the operation sound corresponding to the movement of the character.
When the movable body advances to the second position, a sound for moving the movable body is output, and the movable body corresponds to the scene after switching while the movable body is retracting from the second position to the first position. Output sound.
[Drawings] FIGS. 165 to 167, 171 and 172.
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, in the introduction part , While outputting the physical sound as a part of the production to bring out the reality of the production, the content of the production can be easily conveyed to the player by outputting a large dialogue sound when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap. Furthermore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the scene after switching by the time the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after switching while the accessory is rising, the accessory is movable and the flow in which the introduction part is executed is smoothly executed. It can be shown, and as a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of productions to be executed.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (3)] (2020-300)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Movable body and
Sound output means and
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that it will be done,
In the hit / fail notification part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means.
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves while retracting from the second position to the first position. The effect display for body movement is finished, the display corresponding to the epilogue part is performed, and after the movable body is retracted to the first position, the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character are displayed.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, the brightness data table for moving the movable body is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part.
The sound output means
In the specific scene in the introduction part, the dialogue sound emitted by the character and the operation sound corresponding to the movement of the character are output.
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the operation sound corresponding to the movement of the character.
When the movable body advances to the second position, a sound for moving the movable body is output, and while the movable body is retracting from the second position to the first position, a sound corresponding to the epilogue part is output. Output.
[Drawings] FIGS. 165 to 167, 173, 174.
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, in the introduction part , While outputting the physical sound as a part of the production to bring out the reality of the production, the content of the production can be easily conveyed to the player by outputting a large dialogue sound when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap. Furthermore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part by the time the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part while the accessory is rising, the accessory is movable and the flow in which the epilogue part is executed is shown smoothly. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of productions to be executed.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (4)] (2020-301)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is controlled by the introduction part until the right or wrong of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the advantageous state. It is composed including the first epilogue part that is notified to the effect.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the advantageous state is not controlled includes the introduction part until the propriety of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified, and the fact that the advantageous state is not controlled. Consists of including a second epilogue part to be notified
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character and the operation sound corresponding to the movement of the character are output.
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the operation sound corresponding to the movement of the character.
The light emission control means
In both the introduction part in the notification effect executed when it is determined to be controlled in the advantageous state and the introduction part in the notification effect executed when it is determined not to be controlled in the advantageous state. The light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the common introduction part.
In the first epilogue part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part.
In the second epilogue part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the advantageous state is not controlled, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.
The average time to switch to the next brightness data after the brightness data of 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part is after the brightness data of 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time to switch to the next brightness data.
[Drawings] FIGS. 165 to 167, 261 and 262.
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, in the introduction part , While outputting the physical sound as a part of the production to bring out the reality of the production, the content of the production can be easily conveyed to the player by outputting a large dialogue sound when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap. In addition, in the first epilogue part executed at the time of hit, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part executed at the time of loss, so that the hit is made depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. It is possible to convey this to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more than when it is lost, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is calmed down more than when it hits, so that the epilogue part can be made to look more suitable. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects to be executed.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (5)] (2020-302)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Movable body and
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that it will be done,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character and the operation sound corresponding to the movement of the character are output.
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the operation sound corresponding to the movement of the character.
In the hit / fail notification part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means.
The light emission control means
In the hit / fail notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table for moving the movable body.
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part.
The luminance data table for moving a movable body is configured so that the luminance data representing a chromatic color and the luminance data representing an achromatic color are sequentially used.
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured such that the luminance data representing the first chromatic color and the luminance data representing the plurality of chromatic colors including the luminance data representing the second chromatic color are sequentially used.
[Drawings] FIGS. 165 to 167, 263.
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, in the introduction part , While outputting the physical sound as a part of the production to bring out the reality of the production, the content of the production can be easily conveyed to the player by outputting a large dialogue sound when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap. Furthermore, the brightness data table for moving the movable body, which is used when moving the accessory to notify the hit, has a configuration in which chromatic and achromatic colors are alternately repeated, so that the rainbow emits light in a flash mode. After that, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part where the story is developed shall be a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner by sequentially using chromatic colors without sandwiching achromatic colors. Then, by intuitively telling the player that it is a hit by the flash mode, and then giving a blessing feeling without overemphasizing it by the smooth mode, it is possible to show the flow from the hit / fail notification to the epilogue favorably. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects to be executed.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (6)] (2020-303)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that it will be done,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character and the operation sound corresponding to the movement of the character are output.
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the operation sound corresponding to the movement of the character, and the notification effect includes the first notification effect and the second notification effect.
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output.
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, there are cases where the dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound emitted by the character and cases where the dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
The number of lines emitted by the character differs between the first notification effect and the second notification effect.
The ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the introduction part of the first notification effect. high,
The ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the second notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the introduction part of the second notification effect. high.
[Drawings] FIGS. 165 to 167, 175.
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided, and by inciting up to the notification of success or failure, the player's uplifting feeling is enhanced and the hit is notified. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, in the introduction part , While outputting the physical sound as a part of the production to bring out the reality of the production, the content of the production can be easily conveyed to the player by outputting a large dialogue sound when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap. Furthermore, by designing the epilogue part to display a higher ratio of dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound than in the introduction part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is speaking, and the blessing in the epilogue part. It is possible to enhance the feeling, and as a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of productions to be executed.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (7)] (2020-304)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Directing execution means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state.
The notification effect is executed when it is determined that the introduction part is notified of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and that the control is controlled to the advantageous state after the notification of the result. It is composed of an epilogue part to be performed and a re-lottery part executed after the epilogue part.
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character and the operation sound corresponding to the movement of the character are output.
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the operation sound corresponding to the movement of the character.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The effect executing means is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state is controlled, among a plurality of types of re-lottery effects, a replacement display in which the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol is displayed. It is possible to perform the first re-lottery effect of displaying the second symbol in the latter half part.
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, the replacement display is performed in the first half part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. Re-lottery production is possible,
The first re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all the other symbols between the start of the replacement display in the first half part and the display of the second symbol in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all the other symbols between the start of the replacement display in the first half part and the display of the first symbol in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is used. The brightness data table for controlling the light emitting means is controlled, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. ..
[Drawings] FIGS. 165 to 167, 176, 177, 182.
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, in the introduction part , While outputting the physical sound as a part of the production to bring out the reality of the production, the content of the production can be easily conveyed to the player by outputting a large dialogue sound when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap. In addition, in the re-lottery part, when the re-lottery effect is performed, the symbols that may be replaced (promoted) by the re-lottery effect are replaced and displayed using all the symbols, which is suitable for the player. At a specific timing of the re-lottery part (timing after the symbol is enlarged and displayed), it switches to the brightness data table that emits light in the rainbow, and then the timing to stop the symbol (symbol confirmation command is sent). By continuing to use the brightness data table that emits light in the rainbow without switching the brightness data table even in the timing), the light emission mode is switched in a short period when the symbol is stopped, resulting in poor appearance. By preventing the player from being dissatisfied with the flicker caused by the switching of the light emission, the epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be made to look suitable, and as a result, the flow of the series of productions to be performed can be shown better. Is possible.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (8)] (2020-305)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Movable body and
Sound output means and
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that it will be done,
The introductory part is
A scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are displayed.
It is composed of a scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are not displayed.
The luminance data table used in the scene where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed is configured so that the luminance data using the emission color corresponding to the character is switched according to the action of the character. ,
Up to the hit / fail notification part, when the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, the scene change is notified.
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retracting from the second position to the first position, the movable body is movable. End the effect display for body movement, display the corresponding scene after switching,
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, the brightness data table for moving the movable body is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the scene after switching. ,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and switches while the movable body is retracting from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the later scene.
[Drawings] FIGS. 168 to 172, 213, 214.
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, in the introduction part , Even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue sound, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and further, the scene after switching is completed by the time when the accessory returns to the initial position. By switching to the corresponding background display, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after switching while the accessory is rising, the accessory is movable and the flow in which the introduction part is executed is smoothly executed. It can be shown, and as a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of productions to be executed.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (9)] (2020-306)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Movable body and
Sound output means and
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that it will be done,
The introductory part is
A scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are displayed.
It is composed of a scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are not displayed.
The luminance data table used in the scene where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed is configured so that the luminance data using the emission color corresponding to the character is switched according to the action of the character. ,
In the hit / fail notification part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means.
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves while retracting from the second position to the first position. The effect display for body movement is finished, the display corresponding to the epilogue part is performed, and after the movable body is retracted to the first position, the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character are displayed.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, the brightness data table for moving the movable body is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part.
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the epilogue is in the process of retracting the movable body from the second position to the first position. Output the sound corresponding to the part.
[Drawings] FIGS. 168-170, 173, 174, 213, 214.
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, in the introduction part , Even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue sound, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and further, the epilogue part is supported by the time when the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position. By switching to the background display, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part while the accessory is rising, the accessory is movable and the flow in which the epilogue part is executed is shown smoothly. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of productions to be executed.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (10)] (2020-307)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is controlled by the introduction part until the right or wrong of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the advantageous state. It is composed including the first epilogue part that is notified to the effect.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the advantageous state is not controlled includes the introduction part until the propriety of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified, and the fact that the advantageous state is not controlled. Consists of including a second epilogue part to be notified
The introductory part is
A scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are displayed.
It is composed of a scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are not displayed.
The luminance data table used in the scene where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed is configured so that the luminance data using the emission color corresponding to the character is switched according to the action of the character. ,
The light emission control means
In both the introduction part in the notification effect executed when it is determined to be controlled in the advantageous state and the introduction part in the notification effect executed when it is determined not to be controlled in the advantageous state. The light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the common introduction part.
In the first epilogue part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part.
In the second epilogue part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the advantageous state is not controlled, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.
The average time to switch to the next brightness data after the brightness data of 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part is after the brightness data of 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time to switch to the next brightness data.
[Drawings] FIGS. 168-170, 213, 214, 261 and 262.
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, in the introduction part , Even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue sound, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and further, in the first epilogue part executed at the time of hit, the second executed at the time of loss. Since the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than the epilogue part, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the hit is achieved depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more than when it is lost, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is calmed down more than when it hits, so that the epilogue part can be made to look more suitable. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects to be executed.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (11)] (2020-308)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Movable body and
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that it will be done,
The introductory part is
A scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are displayed.
It is composed of a scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are not displayed.
The luminance data table used in the scene where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed is configured so that the luminance data using the emission color corresponding to the character is switched according to the action of the character. ,
In the hit / fail notification part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means.
The light emission control means
In the hit / fail notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table for moving the movable body.
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part.
The luminance data table for moving a movable body is configured so that the luminance data representing a chromatic color and the luminance data representing an achromatic color are sequentially used.
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured such that the luminance data representing the first chromatic color and the luminance data representing the plurality of chromatic colors including the luminance data representing the second chromatic color are sequentially used.
[Drawings] FIGS. 168-170, 213, 214, 263.
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, in the introduction part , Even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue sound, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and further, for moving the movable body used when moving the accessory to notify the hit. The brightness data table of is configured to alternate between chromatic and achromatic colors to create a rainbow that emits light in a flash mode, and there is no brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part where the story is developed thereafter. By using the chromatic colors in sequence without sandwiching the colors, the rainbow emits light in a smooth manner, which intuitively informs the player that it is a hit by the flash mode, and then by the smooth mode. By giving a sense of blessing without overemphasizing, the flow from the result notification to the epilogue can be shown favorably, and as a result, the flow of the series of effects to be executed can be shown better.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (12)] (2020-309)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is executed when it is determined that the introduction part is notified of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and that the control is controlled to the advantageous state after the notification of the result. Consists of including an epilogue part that is
The introductory part is
A scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are displayed.
It is composed of a scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are not displayed.
The luminance data table used in the scene where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed is configured so that the luminance data using the emission color corresponding to the character is switched according to the action of the character. ,
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect.
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output.
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, there are cases where the dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound emitted by the character and cases where the dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
The number of lines emitted by the character differs between the first notification effect and the second notification effect.
The ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the introduction part of the first notification effect. high,
The ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the second notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the introduction part of the second notification effect. high.
[Drawings] FIGS. 168-170, 175, 213, 214.
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, in the introduction part , Even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue sound, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and the ratio of the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound is increased in the epilogue part as compared with the introduction part. The design makes it easier to understand what the character is speaking, enhances the blessing in the epilogue part, and as a result, makes the flow of the series of productions to be performed look better. It will be possible.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (13)] (2020-310)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Directing execution means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The notification effect is executed when it is determined that the introduction part is notified of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and that the control is controlled to the advantageous state after the notification of the result. It is composed of an epilogue part to be performed and a re-lottery part executed after the epilogue part.
The introductory part is
A scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are displayed.
It is composed of a scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are not displayed.
The luminance data table used in the scene where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed is configured so that the luminance data using the emission color corresponding to the character is switched according to the action of the character. ,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The effect executing means is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state is controlled, among a plurality of types of re-lottery effects, a replacement display in which the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol is displayed. It is possible to perform the first re-lottery effect of displaying the second symbol in the latter half part.
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, the replacement display is performed in the first half part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. Re-lottery production is possible,
The first re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all the other symbols between the start of the replacement display in the first half part and the display of the second symbol in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all the other symbols between the start of the replacement display in the first half part and the display of the first symbol in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is used. The brightness data table for controlling the light emitting means is controlled, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. ..
[Drawings] FIGS. 168-170, 176, 177, 182, 213, 214.
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by increasing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, in the introduction part , Even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue sound, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and further, when the re-lottery effect is performed in the re-lottery part, the effect is replaced by the re-lottery effect ( By replacing the symbols that may be promoted) using all the symbols, the player can be appropriately fanned, and at the specific timing of the re-lottery part (the timing after the symbols are enlarged and displayed). , Switch to the luminance data table that emits light in rainbow, and then continue to use the luminance data table that emits light in rainbow without switching the luminance data table even at the timing when the symbol stops (the timing when the symbol confirmation command is sent). So, in a short period when the design is stopped, the appearance is not good due to the switching of the light emitting mode, and the flicker caused by the switching of the light emission prevents the player from being dissatisfied. The lottery part can be shown favorably, and as a result, the flow of the series of effects to be executed can be shown better.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (14)] (2020-311)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Movable body and
Sound output means and
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that it will be done,
Up to the hit / fail notification part, when the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, the scene change is notified.
When the movable body advances to the second position, the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body at the time of scene switching, and the movable body is in the process of retracting from the second position to the first position. , End the effect display for moving the movable body when switching the scene, and display the corresponding scene after switching.
When the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table for moving the movable body at the time of scene switching, and the movable body moves from the second position. While retracting to the first position, the brightness data table for moving the movable body at the time of switching the scene is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the brightness data table corresponding to the scene after switching is used. By controlling the light emitting means,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body at the time of scene switching when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body is in the process of retracting from the second position to the first position. Then, output the sound corresponding to the scene after switching,
In the hit / fail notification part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means. , It is notified that it is controlled to an advantageous state,
When the movable body advances to the second position, the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body at the time of notification of success / failure, and the movable body is in the process of retracting from the second position to the first position. , The effect display for moving the movable body at the time of the hit / fail notification is ended, the display corresponding to the epilogue part is performed, and after the movable body is retracted to the first position, the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character are displayed. Do,
When the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table for moving the movable body at the time of notification of success / failure, and the movable body moves from the second position. While retracting to the first position, the brightness data table for moving the movable body at the time of notification of success / failure is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and the light emitting means is used by using the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part. Control and
When the movable body advances to the second position, the sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body at the time of notification of success / failure, and the movable body is in the process of retracting from the second position to the first position. Then, the sound corresponding to the epilogue part is output.
[Drawings] FIGS. 171 to 174
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, the character is By switching to the background display corresponding to the scene after switching by the time the return operation to the initial position is completed, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after switching while the accessory is rising, the accessory is movable and the flow in which the introduction part is executed is smoothly executed. It can be shown, and further, by switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part by the time the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part while the accessory is rising, the accessory is movable and the flow in which the epilogue part is executed is shown smoothly. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of productions to be executed.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (15)] (2020-312)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Movable body and
Sound output means and
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is controlled by the introduction part until the right or wrong of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the advantageous state. It is composed including the first epilogue part that is notified to the effect.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the advantageous state is not controlled includes the introduction part until the propriety of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified, and the fact that the advantageous state is not controlled. Consists of including a second epilogue part to be notified
In the introduction part, when the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, the change of the scene is notified.
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retracting from the second position to the first position, the movable body is movable. End the effect display for body movement, display the corresponding scene after switching,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and switches while the movable body is retracting from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the later scene,
The light emission control means
When the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table for moving the movable body, and the movable body is in the process of retracting from the second position to the first position. , The brightness data table for moving the movable body is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the scene after switching.
In both the introduction part in the notification effect executed when it is determined to be controlled in the advantageous state and the introduction part in the notification effect executed when it is determined not to be controlled in the advantageous state. The light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the common introduction part.
In the first epilogue part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part.
In the second epilogue part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the advantageous state is not controlled, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.
The average time to switch to the next brightness data after the brightness data of 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part is after the brightness data of 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time to switch to the next brightness data.
[Drawings] FIGS. 171 and 172, 261 and 262.
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, the character is By switching to the background display corresponding to the scene after switching by the time the return operation to the initial position is completed, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after switching while the accessory is rising, the accessory is movable and the flow in which the introduction part is executed is smooth. In addition, in the first epilogue part executed at the time of hit, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part executed at the time of loss, so that the hit is made depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. It is possible to convey to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more than when it is lost, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is calmed down more than when it hits, so that the epilogue part can be made to look more suitable. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects to be executed.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (16)] (2020-313)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Movable body and
Sound output means and
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that it will be done,
Up to the hit / fail notification part, when the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, the scene change is notified.
When the movable body advances to the second position, the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body at the time of scene switching, and the movable body is in the process of retracting from the second position to the first position. , End the effect display for moving the movable body when switching the scene, and display the corresponding scene after switching.
When the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table for moving the movable body at the time of scene switching, and the movable body moves from the second position. While retracting to the first position, the brightness data table for moving the movable body at the time of switching the scene is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the brightness data table corresponding to the scene after switching is used. By controlling the light emitting means,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body at the time of scene switching when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body is in the process of retracting from the second position to the first position. Then, output the sound corresponding to the scene after switching,
In the hit / fail notification part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means. , It is notified that it is controlled to an advantageous state,
The light emission control means
In the hit / fail notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table for moving the movable body at the time of hit / miss notification.
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part.
The luminance data table for moving the movable body at the time of notification of success / failure is configured so that the luminance data representing the chromatic color and the luminance data representing the achromatic color are sequentially used.
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured such that the luminance data representing the first chromatic color and the luminance data representing the plurality of chromatic colors including the luminance data representing the second chromatic color are sequentially used.
[Drawings] FIGS. 171 and 172, 263.
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, the character is By switching to the background display corresponding to the scene after switching by the time the return operation to the initial position is completed, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after switching while the character is rising, the character is movable and the flow in which the introduction part is executed is smoothly executed. In addition, the brightness data table for moving the movable body, which is used when moving the accessory to notify the hit, emits light in a flash mode by alternately repeating chromatic and achromatic colors. The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part where the story is developed is configured to use chromatic colors in sequence without sandwiching the achromatic color, so that the rainbow emits light in a smooth manner. By doing so, the player is intuitively informed that the game is a hit by the flash mode, and then the smooth mode gives a sense of blessing without overemphasizing it, thereby showing the flow from the result notification to the epilogue. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of a series of effects to be executed.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (17)] (2020-314)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Movable body and
Sound output means and
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that it will be done,
Up to the hit / fail notification part, when the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, the scene change is notified.
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retracting from the second position to the first position, the movable body is movable. End the effect display for body movement, display the corresponding scene after switching,
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, the brightness data table for moving the movable body is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the scene after switching. ,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and switches while the movable body is retracting from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the later scene,
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect.
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output.
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, there are cases where the dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound emitted by the character and cases where the dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
The number of lines emitted by the character differs between the first notification effect and the second notification effect.
The ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the introduction part of the first notification effect. high,
The ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the second notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the introduction part of the second notification effect. high.
[Drawings] FIGS. 171 and 172, 175
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, the character is By switching to the background display corresponding to the scene after switching by the time the return operation to the initial position is completed, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after switching while the character is rising, the character is movable and the flow in which the introduction part is executed is smoothly executed. In addition, the epilogue part can be shown, and by designing the epilogue part to display a higher ratio of dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound than in the introduction part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is speaking, and the epilogue part. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of productions to be performed.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (18)] (2020-315)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means and
Directing execution means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is decided that the epilogue is to be performed, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
Up to the hit / fail notification part, when the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, the scene change is notified.
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retracting from the second position to the first position, the movable body is movable. End the effect display for body movement, display the corresponding scene after switching,
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, the brightness data table for moving the movable body is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the scene after switching. ,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and switches while the movable body is retracting from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the later scene,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The effect executing means is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state is controlled, among a plurality of types of re-lottery effects, a replacement display in which the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol is displayed. It is possible to perform the first re-lottery effect of displaying the second symbol in the latter half part.
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, the replacement display is performed in the first half part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. Re-lottery production is possible,
The first re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all the other symbols between the start of the replacement display in the first half part and the display of the second symbol in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all the other symbols between the start of the replacement display in the first half part and the display of the first symbol in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is used. The brightness data table for controlling the light emitting means is controlled, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. ..
[Drawings] FIGS. 171 and 172, 176, 177, 182.
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, the character is By switching to the background display corresponding to the scene after switching by the time the return operation to the initial position is completed, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after switching during the ascending of the character, the character moves and the flow in which the introduction part is executed is smoothly executed. In addition, in the re-lottery part, when the re-lottery effect is performed, the symbols that may be replaced (promoted) by the re-lottery effect are replaced and displayed using all the symbols. At a specific timing of the re-lottery part (timing after the symbol is enlarged and displayed), it is switched to the brightness data table that emits light in the rainbow, and then the timing to stop the symbol (symbol confirmation command is sent). By continuing to use the brightness data table that emits light in the rainbow without switching the brightness data table even at the timing of coming), the light emission mode is switched in a short period when the design is stopped, resulting in poor appearance. By preventing the player from being dissatisfied with the flickering caused by the switching of the light emission, the epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be made to look good, and as a result, the flow of the series of productions to be performed is improved. It becomes possible to show.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (19)] (2020-316)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Movable body and
Sound output means and
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is controlled by the introduction part until the right or wrong of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the advantageous state. It is composed including the first epilogue part that is notified to the effect.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the advantageous state is not controlled includes the introduction part until the propriety of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified, and the fact that the advantageous state is not controlled. Consists of including a second epilogue part to be notified
In the first epilogue part, it is notified that the movable body is controlled to an advantageous state by advancing from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means.
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves while retracting from the second position to the first position. The effect display for body movement is finished, the display corresponding to the first epilogue part is performed, and after the movable body is retracted to the first position, the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character are displayed.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, the brightness data table for moving the movable body is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part. ,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retracting from the second position to the first position, the first Outputs the sound corresponding to one epilogue part,
The light emission control means
In both the introduction part in the notification effect executed when it is determined to be controlled in the advantageous state and the introduction part in the notification effect executed when it is determined not to be controlled in the advantageous state. The light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the common introduction part.
In the second epilogue part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the advantageous state is not controlled, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.
The average time to switch to the next brightness data after the brightness data of 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part is after the brightness data of 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time to switch to the next brightness data.
[Drawings] FIGS. 173, 174, 261 and 262.
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, in the epilogue part By switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part by the time the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part while the accessory is rising, the accessory is movable and the flow in which the epilogue part is executed is shown smoothly. In addition, in the first epilogue part executed at the time of hit, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part executed at the time of loss, so that the lighting mode of the frame lamp is a hit. It is possible to convey this to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more than when it is lost, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is calmed down more than when it hits, so that the epilogue part can be made to look more suitable. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects to be executed.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (20)] (2020-317)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Movable body and
Sound output means and
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that it will be done,
In the hit / fail notification part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means.
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves while retracting from the second position to the first position. The effect display for body movement is finished, the display corresponding to the epilogue part is performed, and after the movable body is retracted to the first position, the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character are displayed.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, the brightness data table for moving the movable body is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part.
The luminance data table for moving a movable body is configured so that the luminance data representing a chromatic color and the luminance data representing an achromatic color are sequentially used.
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured to sequentially use the luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including the luminance data representing the first chromatic color and the luminance data representing the second chromatic color.
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the epilogue is in the process of retracting the movable body from the second position to the first position. Output the sound corresponding to the part.
[Drawing] Fig. 173, Fig. 174, Fig. 263.
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, in the epilogue part By switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part by the time the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part while the character is rising, the character is movable and the flow in which the epilogue part is executed is shown smoothly. Furthermore, the brightness data table for moving the movable body, which is used when moving the accessory to notify the hit, has a configuration in which chromatic and achromatic colors are alternately repeated, so that the rainbow emits light in a flash mode. After that, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part where the story is developed shall be a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner by sequentially using chromatic colors without sandwiching achromatic colors. Then, by intuitively telling the player that it is a hit by the flash mode, and then giving a blessing feeling without overemphasizing it by the smooth mode, it is possible to show the flow from the hit / fail notification to the epilogue favorably. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects to be executed.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (21)] (2020-318)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Movable body and
Sound output means and
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that it will be done,
In the hit / fail notification part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means.
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves while retracting from the second position to the first position. The effect display for body movement is finished, the display corresponding to the epilogue part is performed, and after the movable body is retracted to the first position, the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character are displayed.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, the brightness data table for moving the movable body is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part.
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the epilogue is in the process of retracting the movable body from the second position to the first position. Output the sound corresponding to the part,
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect.
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output.
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, there are cases where the dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound emitted by the character and cases where the dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
The number of lines emitted by the character differs between the first notification effect and the second notification effect.
The ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the introduction part of the first notification effect. high,
The ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the second notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the introduction part of the second notification effect. High [Drawing] Figures 173 to 175
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, in the epilogue part By switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part by the time the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part while the character is rising, the character is movable and the flow in which the epilogue part is executed is shown smoothly. Furthermore, by designing the epilogue part to display a higher ratio of dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound than in the introduction part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is speaking, and the blessing in the epilogue part. The feeling can be enhanced, and as a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of the series of productions to be executed.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (22)] (2020-319)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Movable body and
Sound output means and
Directing execution means and
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is decided that the epilogue is to be performed, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
In the hit / fail notification part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means.
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves while retracting from the second position to the first position. The effect display for body movement is finished, the display corresponding to the epilogue part is performed, and after the movable body is retracted to the first position, the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character are displayed.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, the brightness data table for moving the movable body is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part.
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the epilogue is in the process of retracting the movable body from the second position to the first position. Output the sound corresponding to the part,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The effect executing means is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state is controlled, among a plurality of types of re-lottery effects, a replacement display in which the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol is displayed. It is possible to perform the first re-lottery effect of displaying the second symbol in the latter half part.
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, the replacement display is performed in the first half part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. Re-lottery production is possible,
The first re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all the other symbols between the start of the replacement display in the first half part and the display of the second symbol in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all the other symbols between the start of the replacement display in the first half part and the display of the first symbol in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is used. The brightness data table for controlling the light emitting means is controlled, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emission means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. [Drawings] FIGS. 173, 174, 176, 177, 182.
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, in the epilogue part By switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part by the time the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the brightness data table of the sound effect and the game effect lamp 9 is switched to the one corresponding to the epilogue part while the character is rising, the character is movable and the flow in which the epilogue part is executed is shown smoothly. In addition, in the re-lottery part, when the re-lottery effect is performed, the symbols that may be replaced (promoted) by the re-lottery effect are replaced and displayed using all the symbols, which is suitable for the player. At the specific timing of the re-lottery part (the timing after the symbol is enlarged and displayed), the brightness data table is switched to the rainbow, and then the symbol is stopped (the symbol confirmation command is sent). By continuing to use the brightness data table that emits light in the rainbow without switching the brightness data table even in the timing), the light emission mode is switched in a short period when the design is stopped, resulting in poor appearance. By preventing the player from being dissatisfied with the flicker caused by the switching of the light emission, the epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be made to look suitable, and as a result, the flow of the series of productions to be executed can be shown better. Is possible.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (23)] (2020-320)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Movable body and
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is controlled by the introduction part until the right or wrong of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the advantageous state. It is composed including the first epilogue part that is notified to the effect.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the advantageous state is not controlled includes the introduction part until the propriety of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified, and the fact that the advantageous state is not controlled. Consists of including a second epilogue part to be notified
In the first epilogue part, it is notified that the movable body is controlled to an advantageous state by advancing from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means.
The light emission control means
In both the introduction part in the notification effect executed when it is determined to be controlled in the advantageous state and the introduction part in the notification effect executed when it is determined not to be controlled in the advantageous state. The light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the common introduction part.
In the first epilogue part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for moving the movable body, and then from the brightness data table for moving the movable body. The brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part is switched to, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part.
In the second epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.
The luminance data table for moving a movable body is configured so that the luminance data representing a chromatic color and the luminance data representing an achromatic color are sequentially used.
The luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part is configured so that the luminance data representing the first chromatic color and the luminance data representing the plurality of chromatic colors including the luminance data representing the second chromatic color are sequentially used. ,
The average time to switch to the next brightness data after the brightness data of 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part is after the brightness data of 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time to switch to the next brightness data.
[Drawing], FIGS. 261 to 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and it is executed at the time of hit in the series of flow in the notification production. In the first epilogue part to be performed, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part executed at the time of loss, so that it is easy for the player to understand that the hit is made depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. I can tell. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more than when it is lost, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is calmed down more than when it hits, so that the epilogue part can be made to look more suitable. Furthermore, the brightness data table for moving the movable body, which is used when moving the accessory to notify the hit, has a configuration in which chromatic and achromatic colors are alternately repeated, so that the rainbow emits light in a flash mode. After that, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part where the story is developed is configured to sequentially use chromatic colors without sandwiching achromatic colors, so that the rainbow emits light in a smooth manner. , By intuitively telling the player that it is a hit by the flash mode, and then giving a blessing feeling without overemphasizing it by the smooth mode, it is possible to show the flow from the success / failure notification to the epilogue favorably. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects to be executed.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (24)] (2020-321)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is controlled by the introduction part until the right or wrong of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the advantageous state. It is composed including the first epilogue part that is notified to the effect.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the advantageous state is not controlled includes the introduction part until the propriety of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified, and the fact that the advantageous state is not controlled. Consists of including a second epilogue part to be notified
The light emission control means
In both the introduction part in the notification effect executed when it is determined to be controlled in the advantageous state and the introduction part in the notification effect executed when it is determined not to be controlled in the advantageous state. The light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the common introduction part.
In the first epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part.
In the second epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.
The average time to switch to the next brightness data after the brightness data of 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part is after the brightness data of 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time to switch to the next brightness data,
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect.
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output.
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, there are cases where the dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound emitted by the character and cases where the dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
The number of lines emitted by the character differs between the first notification effect and the second notification effect.
The ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the first epilogue part in the first notification effect is the ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the introduction part in the first notification effect. Higher than
The ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the first epilogue part in the second notification effect is the ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the introduction part in the second notification effect. Higher than.
[Drawings] FIGS. 175, 261 and 262.
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and it is executed at the time of hit in the series of flow in the notification production. In the first epilogue part to be performed, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part executed at the time of loss, so that it is easy for the player to understand that the hit is made depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. I can tell. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more than when it is lost, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is calmed down more than when it hits, so that the epilogue part can be made to look more suitable. In addition, by designing the epilogue part to display a higher ratio of dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound than in the introduction part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is speaking, and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of a series of productions to be performed. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects to be executed.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (25)] (2020-322)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Directing execution means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is controlled by the introduction part until the propriety of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the control to the advantageous state. It is composed of a first epilogue part in which the fact is notified and a re-lottery part executed after the first epilogue part.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the advantageous state is not controlled includes the introduction part until the propriety of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified, and the fact that the advantageous state is not controlled. Consists of including a second epilogue part to be notified
The light emission control means
In both the introduction part in the notification effect executed when it is determined to be controlled in the advantageous state and the introduction part in the notification effect executed when it is determined not to be controlled in the advantageous state. The light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the common introduction part.
In the first epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part.
In the second epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.
The average time to switch to the next brightness data after the brightness data of 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part is after the brightness data of 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time to switch to the next brightness data,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The effect executing means is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state is controlled, among a plurality of types of re-lottery effects, a replacement display in which the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol is displayed. It is possible to perform the first re-lottery effect of displaying the second symbol in the latter half part.
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, the replacement display is performed in the first half part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. Re-lottery production is possible,
The first re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all the other symbols between the start of the replacement display in the first half part and the display of the second symbol in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all the other symbols between the start of the replacement display in the first half part and the display of the first symbol in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means
In the first epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is used. The brightness data table for controlling the light emitting means is controlled, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. ..
[Drawings] FIGS. 176, 177, 182, 261 and 262.
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and it is executed at the time of hit in the series of flow in the notification production. In the first epilogue part to be performed, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part executed at the time of loss, so that it is easy for the player to understand that the hit is made depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. I can tell. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more than when it is lost, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is calmed down more than when it hits, so that the epilogue part can be made to look more suitable. In addition, in the re-lottery part, when the re-lottery effect is performed, the symbols that may be replaced (promoted) by the re-lottery effect are replaced and displayed using all the symbols, thereby making the player suitable. It can be fanned, and at the specific timing of the re-lottery part (timing after the symbol is enlarged and displayed), it switches to the brightness data table that emits light in the rainbow, and then the timing to stop the symbol (timing when the symbol confirmation command is sent). ), Without switching the brightness data table, by continuing to use the brightness data table that emits light in the rainbow, the light emission mode is switched in a short period when the design is stopped, resulting in poor appearance or light emission. By preventing the player from being dissatisfied with the flicker caused by switching, the epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be made to look good, and as a result, the flow of the series of productions to be executed can be made to look better. It will be possible.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (26)] (2020-323)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Movable body and
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that it will be done,
In the hit / fail notification part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means.
The light emission control means
In the hit / fail notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table for moving the movable body.
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part.
The luminance data table for moving a movable body is configured so that the luminance data representing a chromatic color and the luminance data representing an achromatic color are sequentially used.
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured to sequentially use the luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including the luminance data representing the first chromatic color and the luminance data representing the second chromatic color.
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect.
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output.
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, there are cases where the dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound emitted by the character and cases where the dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
The number of lines emitted by the character differs between the first notification effect and the second notification effect.
The ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the introduction part of the first notification effect. high,
The ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the second notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the introduction part of the second notification effect. high.
[Drawing] Fig. 175, Fig. 263
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, the hit is notified. The brightness data table for moving the movable body, which is used to move the accessory, is configured to alternate between chromatic and achromatic colors to create a rainbow that emits light in a flash mode, and then the story is developed. The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part is configured to sequentially use chromatic colors without sandwiching achromatic colors, and by making it a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner, it is a hit depending on the flash mode. By intuitively telling the player that, and then giving a sense of blessing without overemphasizing it in a smooth manner, it is possible to show the flow from the result notification to the epilogue appropriately, and it is also introduced in the epilogue part. By designing the display ratio of the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound higher than that of the part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is speaking, and it is possible to enhance the sense of blessing in the epilogue part, and as a result. , It is possible to better show the flow of the series of productions to be executed.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (27)] (2020-324)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Movable body and
Display means and
Directing execution means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is decided that the epilogue is to be performed, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
In the hit / fail notification part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means.
The light emission control means
In the hit / fail notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table for moving the movable body.
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part.
The luminance data table for moving a movable body is configured so that the luminance data representing a chromatic color and the luminance data representing an achromatic color are sequentially used.
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured to sequentially use the luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including the luminance data representing the first chromatic color and the luminance data representing the second chromatic color.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The effect executing means is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state is controlled, among a plurality of types of re-lottery effects, a replacement display in which the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol is displayed. It is possible to perform the first re-lottery effect of displaying the second symbol in the latter half part.
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, the replacement display is performed in the first half part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. Re-lottery production is possible,
The first re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all the other symbols between the start of the replacement display in the first half part and the display of the second symbol in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all the other symbols between the start of the replacement display in the first half part and the display of the first symbol in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means
In the first epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is used. The brightness data table for controlling the light emitting means is controlled, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. ..
[Drawing] Fig. 176, Fig. 177, Fig. 182, Fig. 263.
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided, and by inciting up to the notification of success or failure, the player's uplifting feeling is enhanced and the hit is notified. After that, by setting up an epilogue part and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, the hit is notified. The brightness data table for moving the movable body, which is used to move the accessory, is configured to alternate between chromatic and achromatic colors to create a rainbow that emits light in a flash mode, and then the story is developed. The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part is configured to sequentially use chromatic colors without sandwiching the achromatic colors, so that the rainbow emits light in a smooth manner, and it is a hit depending on the flash mode. By intuitively telling the player that, and then giving a sense of blessing without overemphasizing it in a smooth manner, the flow from the result notification to the epilogue can be shown favorably, and in the re-lottery part. , When performing a re-lottery effect, the player can be appropriately fanned by displaying the symbols that may be replaced (promoted) by the re-lottery effect using all the symbols, and the re-lottery part can be performed. Switch to the luminance data table that emits light in the rainbow at the specific timing of (the timing after the symbol is enlarged and displayed), and then switch the luminance data table at the timing when the symbol stops (the timing when the symbol confirmation command is sent). By continuing to use the brightness data table that emits light in the rainbow, the light emission mode is switched in a short period of time when the design is stopped, resulting in poor appearance or flickering due to the switching of light emission. By preventing dissatisfaction with the table, the epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown favorably, and as a result, the flow of the series of effects to be executed can be shown better.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (28)] (2020-325)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Directing execution means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state.
The notification effect is executed when it is determined that the introduction part is notified of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and that the control is controlled to the advantageous state after the notification of the result. It is composed of an epilogue part to be performed and a re-lottery part executed after the epilogue part.
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect.
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output.
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, there are cases where the dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound emitted by the character and cases where the dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
The number of lines emitted by the character differs between the first notification effect and the second notification effect.
The ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the introduction part of the first notification effect. high,
The ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the second notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the introduction part of the second notification effect. high,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The effect executing means is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state is controlled, among a plurality of types of re-lottery effects, a replacement display in which the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol is displayed. It is possible to perform the first re-lottery effect of displaying the second symbol in the latter half part.
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, the replacement display is performed in the first half part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. Re-lottery production is possible,
The first re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all the other symbols between the start of the replacement display in the first half part and the display of the second symbol in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all the other symbols between the start of the replacement display in the first half part and the display of the first symbol in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is used. The brightness data table for controlling the light emitting means is controlled, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. ..
[Drawings] FIGS. 175-177, 182
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, in the epilogue part By designing the display ratio of the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound higher than that of the introductory part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is speaking, and it is possible to enhance the sense of blessing in the epilogue part. , In the re-lottery part, when the re-lottery effect is performed, the symbols that may be replaced (promoted) by the re-lottery effect can be replaced and displayed using all the symbols, thereby appropriately inciting the player. It can be done, and at the specific timing of the re-lottery part (the timing after the symbol is enlarged and displayed), it is switched to the brightness data table that emits light in the rainbow, and then the symbol is stopped (the timing when the symbol confirmation command is sent). By continuing to use the brightness data table that emits light in the rainbow without switching the brightness data table, the light emission mode is switched in a short period when the symbol is stopped, resulting in poor appearance or switching of light emission. By preventing the player from being dissatisfied with the flickering due to the flicker, the epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be made to look suitable, and as a result, the flow of the series of productions to be executed can be made to look better. ..

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (29)] (2020-403)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is executed when it is determined that the introduction part is notified of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and that the control is controlled to the advantageous state after the notification of the result. Consists of including an epilogue part that is
In the introductory part, there is a first scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character and the operation sound corresponding to the movement of the character are output.
In the first scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the operation sound corresponding to the movement of the character.
In the introductory part, there is a second scene in which the first serif subtitle is displayed for the first serif sound emitted by the character, and the second serif subtitle is displayed for the second serif sound emitted by the character.
In the second scene, the display of the second dialogue subtitle is started while the first dialogue subtitle is displayed, then the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed. It will be in the state of being
The fade effect is applied to at least one of the time when the display of the first serif subtitle ends and the time when the display of the second serif subtitle starts.
[Drawings] FIGS. 165 to 167 and 178 to 181.
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, in the introduction part , While outputting the physical sound as a part of the production to bring out the reality of the production, the content of the production can be easily conveyed to the player by outputting a large dialogue sound when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap. Furthermore, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the change of the subtitle becomes easy to understand due to the fade effect, so that the switching of the subtitle can be easily understood, and as a result, a series of executions are performed. It is possible to show the flow of production better.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (30)] (2020-404)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that it will be done,
The introductory part is
A scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are displayed.
A scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are not displayed.
It is composed of a specific scene in which the first serif subtitle is displayed for the first serif sound emitted by the character and the second serif subtitle is displayed for the second serif sound emitted by the character.
The luminance data table used in the scene where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed is configured so that the luminance data using the emission color corresponding to the character is switched according to the action of the character. ,
In the specific scene, the display of the second dialogue subtitle is started while the first dialogue subtitle is displayed, then the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed. In the state of
The fade effect is applied to at least one of the time when the display of the first serif subtitle ends and the time when the display of the second serif subtitle starts.
[Drawings] FIGS. 168-170, 178-181, 213, 214.
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, in the introduction part Even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue sound, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the subtitle changes due to the fade effect. By making it easier to understand, it is possible to make it easier to understand the switching of subtitles, and as a result, it is possible to better show the flow of a series of effects to be executed.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (31)] (2020-405)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Movable body and
Sound output means and
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that it will be done,
Up to the hit / fail notification part, when the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, the scene change is notified.
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retracting from the second position to the first position, the movable body is movable. End the effect display for body movement, display the corresponding scene after switching,
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, the brightness data table for moving the movable body is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the scene after switching. ,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and switches while the movable body is retracting from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the later scene,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the first serif subtitle is displayed for the first serif sound emitted by the character, and the second serif subtitle is displayed for the second serif sound emitted by the character.
In the specific scene, the display of the second dialogue subtitle is started while the first dialogue subtitle is displayed, then the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed. In the state of
The fade effect is applied to at least one of the time when the display of the first serif subtitle ends and the time when the display of the second serif subtitle starts.
[Drawings] FIGS. 171 and 172, FIGS. 178 to 181.
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, the character is By switching to the background display corresponding to the scene after switching by the time the return operation to the initial position is completed, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after switching during the ascending of the character, the character moves and the flow in which the introduction part is executed is smoothly executed. Furthermore, even if the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap each other, the change of the subtitles can be easily understood by the fade effect, so that the switching of the subtitles can be easily understood, and as a result, the subtitles are executed. It is possible to show the flow of a series of productions better.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (32)] (2020-406)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Movable body and
Sound output means and
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that it will be done,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the first serif subtitle is displayed for the first serif sound emitted by the character, and the second serif subtitle is displayed for the second serif sound emitted by the character.
In the specific scene, the display of the second dialogue subtitle is started while the first dialogue subtitle is displayed, then the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed. In the state of
A fade effect is applied to at least one of the time when the display of the first serif subtitle ends and the time when the display of the second serif subtitle starts.
In the hit / fail notification part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means.
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves while retracting from the second position to the first position. The effect display for body movement is finished, the display corresponding to the epilogue part is performed, and after the movable body is retracted to the first position, the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character are displayed.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, the brightness data table for moving the movable body is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part.
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the epilogue is in the process of retracting the movable body from the second position to the first position. Output the sound corresponding to the part [Drawing] FIGS. 173, 174, 178 to 181.
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, in the epilogue part By switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part by the time the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part while the character is rising, the character is movable and the flow in which the epilogue part is executed is shown smoothly. Furthermore, even when subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the change of subtitles can be easily understood by the fade effect, so that the switching of subtitles can be easily understood, and as a result, a series of executions are performed. It is possible to show the flow of production better.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (33)] (2020-407)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is controlled by the introduction part until the right or wrong of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the advantageous state. It is composed including the first epilogue part that is notified to the effect.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the advantageous state is not controlled includes the introduction part until the propriety of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified, and the fact that the advantageous state is not controlled. Consists of including a second epilogue part to be notified
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the first serif subtitle is displayed for the first serif sound emitted by the character, and the second serif subtitle is displayed for the second serif sound emitted by the character.
In the specific scene, the display of the second dialogue subtitle is started while the first dialogue subtitle is displayed, then the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed. In the state of
A fade effect is applied to at least one of the time when the display of the first serif subtitle ends and the time when the display of the second serif subtitle starts.
The light emission control means
In both the introduction part in the notification effect executed when it is determined to be controlled in the advantageous state and the introduction part in the notification effect executed when it is determined not to be controlled in the advantageous state. The light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the common introduction part.
In the first epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part.
In the second epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.
The average time to switch to the next brightness data after the brightness data of 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part is after the brightness data of 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time to switch to the next brightness data.
[Drawings] FIGS. 178 to 181, 261 and 262.
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and it is executed at the time of hit in the series of flow in the notification production. In the first epilogue part to be performed, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part executed at the time of loss, so that it is easy for the player to understand that the hit is made depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. I can tell. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more than when it is lost, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is calmed down more than when it hits, so that the epilogue part can be made to look more suitable. Furthermore, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap each other, the change of the subtitles can be easily understood by the fade effect, so that the switching of the subtitles can be easily understood, and as a result, a series of productions to be executed can be performed. It is possible to show the flow of.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (34)] (2020-408)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Movable body and
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that it will be done,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the first serif subtitle is displayed for the first serif sound emitted by the character, and the second serif subtitle is displayed for the second serif sound emitted by the character.
In the specific scene, the display of the second dialogue subtitle is started while the first dialogue subtitle is displayed, then the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed. In the state of
A fade effect is applied to at least one of the time when the display of the first serif subtitle ends and the time when the display of the second serif subtitle starts.
In the hit / fail notification part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means.
The light emission control means
In the hit / fail notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table for moving the movable body.
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part.
The luminance data table for moving a movable body is configured so that the luminance data representing a chromatic color and the luminance data representing an achromatic color are sequentially used.
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured such that the luminance data representing the first chromatic color and the luminance data representing the plurality of chromatic colors including the luminance data representing the second chromatic color are sequentially used.
[Drawings] FIGS. 178 to 181 and 263.
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, the hit is notified. The brightness data table for moving the movable body, which is used to move the accessory, is configured to alternate between chromatic and achromatic colors to create a rainbow that emits light in a flash mode, and then the story is developed. The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part is configured to sequentially use chromatic colors without sandwiching achromatic colors, and by making it a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner, it is a hit depending on the flash mode. By intuitively telling the player that, and then giving a sense of blessing without overemphasizing it in a smooth manner, the flow from the result notification to the epilogue can be shown favorably, and the subtitles overlap. Even when is displayed, the fade effect makes it easier to understand the change in subtitles, which makes it easier to understand the switching of subtitles, and as a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects to be executed. It will be possible.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (35)] (2020-409)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is executed when it is determined that the introduction part is notified of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and that the control is controlled to the advantageous state after the notification of the result. Consists of including an epilogue part that is
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the first serif subtitle is displayed for the first serif sound emitted by the character, and the second serif subtitle is displayed for the second serif sound emitted by the character.
In the specific scene, the display of the second dialogue subtitle is started while the first dialogue subtitle is displayed, then the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed. In the state of
A fade effect is applied to at least one of the time when the display of the first serif subtitle ends and the time when the display of the second serif subtitle starts.
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect.
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output.
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, there are cases where the dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound emitted by the character and cases where the dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
The number of lines emitted by the character differs between the first notification effect and the second notification effect.
The ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the introduction part of the first notification effect. high,
The ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the second notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the introduction part of the second notification effect. high.
[Drawings] FIGS. 175 and 178 to 181.
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, in the epilogue part By designing the display ratio of the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound higher than that of the introductory part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is speaking, and it is possible to enhance the sense of blessing in the epilogue part, and further. Even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the change of the subtitles can be easily understood by the fade effect, so that the switching of the subtitles can be easily understood, and as a result, the flow of the series of effects to be executed can be understood. It will be possible to make it look better.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (36)] (2020-410)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Directing execution means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is decided that the epilogue is to be performed, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the first serif subtitle is displayed for the first serif sound emitted by the character, and the second serif subtitle is displayed for the second serif sound emitted by the character.
In the specific scene, the display of the second dialogue subtitle is started while the first dialogue subtitle is displayed, then the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed. In the state of
A fade effect is applied to at least one of the time when the display of the first serif subtitle ends and the time when the display of the second serif subtitle starts.
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The effect executing means is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state is controlled, among a plurality of types of re-lottery effects, a replacement display in which the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol is displayed. It is possible to perform the first re-lottery effect of displaying the second symbol in the latter half part.
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, the replacement display is performed in the first half part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. Re-lottery production is possible,
The first re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all the other symbols between the start of the replacement display in the first half part and the display of the second symbol in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all the other symbols between the start of the replacement display in the first half part and the display of the first symbol in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is used. The brightness data table for controlling the light emitting means is controlled, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. ..
[Drawing] FIGS. 176 to 182
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by increasing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, the re-lottery part In, when the re-lottery effect is performed, the player can be appropriately fanned by displaying the symbols that may be replaced (promoted) by the re-lottery effect using all the symbols, and the re-lottery can be performed. At the specific timing of the part (timing after the symbol is enlarged and displayed), the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table that emits light with rainbow, and then the luminance data table is also displayed at the timing when the symbol is stopped (timing when the symbol confirmation command is sent). By continuing to use the brightness data table that emits light in the rainbow without switching, the light emission mode is switched during a short period when the design is stopped, resulting in poor appearance or flickering due to the switching of light emission. By preventing dissatisfaction with the person, the epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be made to look suitable, and even if the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the change in the subtitles is easy to understand due to the fade effect. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to understand the switching of subtitles, and as a result, it is possible to better show the flow of a series of effects to be executed.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (37)] (2020-411)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is executed when it is determined that the introduction part is notified of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and that the control is controlled to the advantageous state after the notification of the result. Consists of including an epilogue part that is
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character and the operation sound corresponding to the movement of the character are output.
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the operation sound corresponding to the movement of the character.
The display means
In the epilogue part, while displaying the decorative pattern on the edge side of the display area, the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed.
After that, the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is finished, and
At the timing related to the end of the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area.
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part.
When the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to the brightness data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is used by using the brightness data table for enlarged display. Control.
[Drawings] FIGS. 165 to 167, 183.
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by increasing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, in the introduction part , While outputting the physical sound as a part of the production to bring out the reality of the production, the content of the production can be easily conveyed to the player by outputting a large dialogue sound when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap. Furthermore, when the image of the hit epilogue part is flowing, the reduced symbol is positioned on the edge side of the screen so that the image of the hit epilogue part is not disturbed, and the development of the image of the hit epilogue part is completed and the symbol is put out. When doing so, the decorative symbol is enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge side of the screen and the center of the screen, and the brightness data table is also switched in conjunction with the symbol output to emphasize the jackpot symbol and show it to the player. It is possible to make the hit epilogue part look good. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects to be executed.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (38)] (2020-412)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is executed when it is determined that the introduction part is notified of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and that the control is controlled to the advantageous state after the notification of the result. Consists of including an epilogue part that is
The introductory part is
A scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are displayed.
It is composed of a scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are not displayed.
The luminance data table used in the scene where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed is configured so that the luminance data using the emission color corresponding to the character is switched according to the action of the character. The display means is
In the epilogue part, while displaying the decorative pattern on the edge side of the display area, the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed.
After that, the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is finished, and
At the timing related to the end of the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area.
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part.
When the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to the brightness data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is used by using the brightness data table for enlarged display. Control.
[Drawings] FIGS. 168-170, 183, 213, 214.
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, in the introduction part , Even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue sound, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and further, when the image of the hit epilogue part is flowing, the reduced pattern is placed on the edge side of the screen. By positioning it, the image of the hit epilogue part is not disturbed, and when the development of the image of the hit epilogue part is completed and the pattern is displayed, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed as if it is continuous using the screen edge side and the center of the screen. However, by switching the brightness data table in conjunction with the symbol output, the jackpot symbol can be emphasized and shown to the player, and the hit epilogue part can be shown favorably. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects to be executed.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (39)] (2020-413)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Movable body and
Sound output means and
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that it will be done,
Up to the hit / fail notification part, when the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, the scene change is notified.
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retracting from the second position to the first position, the movable body is movable. End the effect display for body movement, display the corresponding scene after switching,
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, the brightness data table for moving the movable body is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the scene after switching. ,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and switches while the movable body is retracting from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the later scene,
The display means
In the epilogue part, while displaying the decorative pattern on the edge side of the display area, the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed.
After that, the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is finished, and
At the timing related to the end of the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area.
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part.
When the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to the brightness data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is used by using the brightness data table for enlarged display. Control.
[Drawings] FIGS. 171 and 172, 183.
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, the character is By switching to the background display corresponding to the scene after switching by the time the return operation to the initial position is completed, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after switching while the accessory is rising, the accessory is movable and the flow in which the introduction part is executed is smoothly executed. Furthermore, when the image of the hit epilogue part is flowing, the reduced symbol is positioned on the edge side of the screen so that the image of the hit epilogue part is not disturbed, and the development of the image of the hit epilogue part is completed. When displaying the design, the decorative design is enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge of the screen and the center of the screen, and the brightness data table is switched in conjunction with the design to emphasize the jackpot design and the player. It can be shown in, and the hit epilogue part can be shown favorably. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects to be executed.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (40)] (2020-414)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Movable body and
Sound output means and
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that it will be done,
In the hit / fail notification part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means.
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves while retracting from the second position to the first position. The effect display for body movement is finished, the display corresponding to the epilogue part is performed, and after the movable body is retracted to the first position, the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character are displayed.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, the brightness data table for moving the movable body is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part.
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the epilogue is in the process of retracting the movable body from the second position to the first position. Output the sound corresponding to the part,
The display means
In the epilogue part, while displaying the decorative pattern on the edge side of the display area, the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed.
After that, the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is finished, and
At the timing related to the end of the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area.
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part.
When the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to the brightness data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is used by using the brightness data table for enlarged display. Control.
[Drawing] Fig. 173, Fig. 174, Fig. 183.
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, in the epilogue part By switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part by the time the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, it is possible to prevent the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part while the accessory is rising, the accessory is movable and the flow in which the epilogue part is executed is shown smoothly. In addition, when the image of the hit epilogue part is flowing, the reduced symbol is positioned on the edge side of the screen so that the image of the hit epilogue part is not disturbed, and the development of the image of the hit epilogue part is completed and the symbol is put out. When doing so, the decorative symbol is enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge side of the screen and the center of the screen, and the brightness data table is also switched in conjunction with the symbol output to emphasize the jackpot symbol and show it to the player. It is possible to make the hit epilogue part look good. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects to be executed.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (41)] (2020-415)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is controlled by the introduction part until the right or wrong of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the advantageous state. It is composed including the first epilogue part that is notified to the effect.
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the advantageous state is not controlled includes the introduction part until the propriety of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified, and the fact that the advantageous state is not controlled. Consists of including a second epilogue part to be notified
The display means
In the first epilogue part, while displaying the decorative pattern on the edge side of the display area, the story development corresponding to the first epilogue part is displayed.
After that, the display in the story development corresponding to the first epilogue part is finished, and
At the timing related to the end of the display in the story development corresponding to the first epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area.
The light emission control means
In both the introduction part in the notification effect executed when it is determined to be controlled in the advantageous state and the introduction part in the notification effect executed when it is determined not to be controlled in the advantageous state. The light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the common introduction part.
In the first epilogue part, when the story development corresponding to the first epilogue part is displayed, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part, and then the decorative pattern is displayed. When the enlarged display is performed using the center of the region, the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part is switched to the luminance data table for the enlarged display, and the luminous means is used by using the luminance data table for the enlarged display. Control and
In the second epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.
The average time to switch to the next brightness data after the brightness data of 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part is after the brightness data of 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time to switch to the next brightness data.
[Drawings] FIGS. 183, 261 and 262.
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and it is executed at the time of hit in the series of flow in the notification production. In the first epilogue part to be performed, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part executed at the time of loss, so that it is easy for the player to understand that the hit is made depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. I can tell. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more than when it is lost, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is calmed down more than when it hits, so that the epilogue part can be made to look more suitable. In addition, when the image of the hit epilogue part is flowing, the reduced symbol is positioned on the edge side of the screen so that the image of the hit epilogue part is not disturbed, the development of the image of the hit epilogue part is completed, and the design is displayed. When doing so, the decorative symbol is enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge side of the screen and the center of the screen, and the brightness data table is also switched in conjunction with the symbol output to emphasize the jackpot symbol and show it to the player. It is possible to make the hit epilogue part look suitable. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects to be executed.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (42)] (2020-416)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Movable body and
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that it will be done,
In the hit / fail notification part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means.
The display means
In the epilogue part, while displaying the decorative pattern on the edge side of the display area, the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed.
After that, the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is finished, and
At the timing related to the end of the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area.
The light emission control means
In the hit / fail notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table for moving the movable body.
In the epilogue part, when the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed, the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and then the decorative pattern is displayed by using the center of the display area. When the enlarged display is performed, the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to the luminance data table for the enlarged display, and the luminance data table for the enlarged display is used to control the light emitting means.
The luminance data table for moving a movable body is configured so that the luminance data representing a chromatic color and the luminance data representing an achromatic color are sequentially used.
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured such that the luminance data representing the first chromatic color and the luminance data representing the plurality of chromatic colors including the luminance data representing the second chromatic color are sequentially used.
[Drawing] Fig. 183, Fig. 263
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. After that, by setting up an epilogue part and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp effect with the feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and the feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, the hit is notified. The brightness data table for moving the movable body, which is used to move the accessory, is configured to alternate between chromatic and achromatic colors to create a rainbow that emits light in a flash mode, and then the story is developed. The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part is configured to sequentially use chromatic colors without sandwiching achromatic colors, so that the rainbow emits light in a smooth manner, and it is a hit depending on the flash mode. By intuitively telling the player that, and then giving a sense of blessing without overemphasizing it in a smooth manner, the flow from the result notification to the epilogue can be shown favorably, and in addition, the hit epilogue part When the image is flowing, the reduced symbol is positioned on the edge side of the screen so that the image of the hit epilogue part is not disturbed. By enlarging the decorative design in a continuous manner using the center of the screen and switching the brightness data table in conjunction with the design, the jackpot symbol can be emphasized and shown to the player, making the hit epilogue part suitable. Can be shown to. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects to be executed.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (43)] (2020-417)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is executed when it is determined that the introduction part is notified of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and that the control is controlled to the advantageous state after the notification of the result. Consists of including an epilogue part that is
The display means
In the epilogue part, while displaying the decorative pattern on the edge side of the display area, the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed.
After that, the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is finished, and
At the timing related to the end of the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area.
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part.
When the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to the brightness data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is used by using the brightness data table for enlarged display. Control,
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect.
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output.
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, there are cases where the dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound emitted by the character and cases where the dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
The number of lines emitted by the character differs between the first notification effect and the second notification effect.
The ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the introduction part of the first notification effect. high,
The ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the second notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound emitted by the character in the introduction part of the second notification effect. high.
[Drawings] FIGS. 175 and 183.
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, in the epilogue part By designing the display ratio of the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound higher than that of the introductory part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is speaking, and it is possible to enhance the sense of blessing in the epilogue part, and further. , When the image of the hit epilogue part is flowing, the reduced symbol is positioned on the edge side of the screen so that the image of the hit epilogue part is not disturbed. By using the edge of the screen and the center of the screen to enlarge the decorative design and switching the brightness data table in conjunction with the design, the jackpot symbol can be emphasized and shown to the player. The hit epilogue part can be shown favorably. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects to be executed.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (44)] (2020-418)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means and
Directing execution means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state.
The notification effect is executed when it is determined that the introduction part is notified of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and that the control is controlled to the advantageous state after the notification of the result. It is composed of an epilogue part to be performed and a re-lottery part executed after the epilogue part.
The display means
In the epilogue part, while displaying the decorative pattern on the edge side of the display area, the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed.
After that, the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is finished, and
At the timing related to the end of the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area.
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part.
When the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to the brightness data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is used by using the brightness data table for enlarged display. Control and
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The effect executing means is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state is controlled, among a plurality of types of re-lottery effects, a replacement display in which the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol is displayed. It is possible to perform the first re-lottery effect of displaying the second symbol in the latter half part.
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, the replacement display is performed in the first half part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. Re-lottery production is possible,
The first re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all the other symbols between the start of the replacement display in the first half part and the display of the second symbol in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all the other symbols between the start of the replacement display in the first half part and the display of the first symbol in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is used. The brightness data table for controlling the light emitting means is controlled, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. ..
[Drawings] FIGS. 176, 177, 182, 183.
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and in the series of flow in the notification production, the re-lottery part In, when the re-lottery effect is performed, the player can be appropriately fanned by displaying the symbols that may be replaced (promoted) by the re-lottery effect using all the symbols, and the re-lottery can be performed. At the specific timing of the part (timing after the symbol is enlarged and displayed), the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table that emits light with rainbow, and then the luminance data table is also displayed at the timing when the symbol is stopped (timing when the symbol confirmation command is sent). By continuing to use the brightness data table that emits light in the rainbow without switching, the light emission mode is switched during a short period when the design is stopped, resulting in poor appearance or flickering due to the switching of light emission. By preventing dissatisfaction with the person, the epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown favorably, and the reduced symbol is positioned on the edge side of the screen when the image of the hit epilogue part is flowing. When the development of the image of the hit epilogue part is completed and the design is displayed without disturbing the image of the hit epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed as if it is continuous using the edge side of the screen and the center of the screen. By switching the brightness data table in conjunction with the output, the jackpot symbol can be emphasized and shown to the player, and the hit epilogue part can be shown favorably. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects to be executed.

[From SP reach start to symbol confirmation (45)] (2020-419)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
The notification effect is executed when it is determined that the introduction part is notified of whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and that the control is controlled to the advantageous state after the notification of the result. Consists of including an epilogue part that is
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the first serif subtitle is displayed for the first serif sound emitted by the character, and the second serif subtitle is displayed for the second serif sound emitted by the character.
In the specific scene, the display of the second dialogue subtitle is started while the first dialogue subtitle is displayed, then the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed. In the state of
A fade effect is applied to at least one of the time when the display of the first serif subtitle ends and the time when the display of the second serif subtitle starts.
The display means
In the epilogue part, while displaying the decorative pattern on the edge side of the display area, the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed.
After that, the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is finished, and
At the timing related to the end of the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area.
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part.
When the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to the brightness data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is used by using the brightness data table for enlarged display. Control.
[Drawings] FIGS. 178 to 181 and 183.
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and the player is notified of the hit by enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a feeling of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, so that it overlaps in the series of flow in the notification production. Even when the subtitles are displayed, the fade effect makes it easier to understand the change in the subtitles, which makes it easier to understand the switching of the subtitles. By locating it on the edge side of the screen, the image of the hit epilogue part is not disturbed, and when the development of the image of the hit epilogue part is completed and the design is drawn, the screen edge side and the center of the screen are used so as to be continuous. By enlarging the decorative symbol and switching the brightness data table in conjunction with the symbol output, the jackpot symbol can be emphasized and shown to the player, and the hit epilogue part can be shown favorably. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects to be executed.

<Example of time saving control without hitting>
Next, an example of executing the time saving control that does not go through the hit (big hit, small hit, etc.) as the time saving state will be described.
(Example of time saving control using time saving symbol)

(A1) In each of the above-mentioned feature parts and modified examples, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) always shifts via the big hit state or the small hit state in which the special variable winning ball device 7A operates. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time-saving state (high base) without operating the special variable winning ball device 7A. It may be made to shift to the state). That is, as the time saving state, the time saving control that does not go through a hit (big hit, small hit, etc.) may be executed.

(A2) As the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be a part of the lost symbol or a part of the small hit symbol.

(A3) Further, when performing a lottery process related to the derivation display of the time-saving symbol, the lottery may be executed by using a dedicated random number for the time-saving symbol lottery in these lottery processes, or the lottery random number of the lost symbol. Or, a lottery random number of a big hit symbol, a lottery random number of a small hit symbol, a random number for determining a big hit lottery, a lottery random number of a fall lottery, or other random numbers for performing a lottery may be used for the lottery.

(A4) Further, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as a small hit symbol or a combination of symbols displayed as a lost symbol. In this case, it may be determined whether or not the time saving state is changed depending on the small hit symbol used together. However, if a time-saving symbol is won, the presence or absence of a transition to the time-saving state will not be drawn by lottery, and the number of time-savings will not be drawn.

(A5) Further, in the case of drawing a time-saving symbol and the set value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the set value, that is, the time-saving symbol is used for all the set values. Although the lottery probabilities of the above are the same, the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special figure and the second special figure.

(A6) Regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing a lottery for time-saving symbols, the start port (first start) regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used. It may be at the time of winning a prize (the winning opening, the second starting winning opening).

(A7) Regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol is drawn, when using a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result by the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the time-saving symbol is drawn. When a small hit symbol random number is used, a specific small hit symbol random number can be used as the winning value, and when a random number for the fall lottery judgment value is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. , A lottery using a structure, for example, a time saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the time saving symbol may be won when the game ball passes through the time saving area.

(A8) In the case where the lottery of the time saving symbol is performed using the structure, when the small hit symbol also uses the time saving symbol, the variable display number (time saving number) of the time saving state is determined by the presence or absence of passing through the time saving area. Make sure it doesn't change.

(A9) Regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol lottery is performed, when the lost symbol random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery, the specific lost symbol random number value is used as the winning value, and the jackpot symbol random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery. In that case, a specific jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, when these random values are used as winning values, performances other than the jackpot probability differ depending on the settings, so that the set values can be changed only if they cannot be changed.

(A10) Further, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the jackpot determination. In addition, the lottery of the time saving symbol is not executed in the time saving state (high base) or the high probability time regardless of the random number value used for the lottery, and is executed only in the low probability low base state. .. However, if the time saving symbol is derived and displayed in the state where the time saving state has already been set, even if the number of time saving times is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each gaming machine.

(A11) Further, regarding the number of time reductions when the time reduction symbol is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of time reductions according to the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, it is possible to make the conditions for granting the time reduction different for each time saving symbol.

(A12) Further, when the number of time reductions differs depending on the time reduction symbol, the time reduction symbol distribution lottery can be changed between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

(A13) Further, even when the same time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time saving times given may be different depending on the game state at that time. However, it is necessary that the game state is predetermined.

(A14) Further, the lottery result of "0 times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving symbol in the low probability low base state.

(A15) In addition, the time-saving end symbol derivation lottery (time-saving end lottery) is executed, and the number of time reductions is set to the number of times until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed after the time reduction starts, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. good. That is, in principle, the number of time reductions may not be set and may be unlimited.

(A16) Further, the number of time reductions and the granting condition may be different between the time reduction state controlled by the time reduction symbol and the time reduction state controlled by the occurrence of a big hit.

(A17) Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing of being controlled to the time-saving state is the time when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where the small hit symbol random number is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, when the small hit is won and the time saving state is entered, the end time of the small hit operation is controlled to the time saving state.

(A18) Further, in the case of a lottery using the structure, the timing controlled to the time saving state is the timing at the end of the operation of the structure in the gaming state (for example, the small hit state) in which the structure is operated.

(A19) Further, in the case of a gaming machine (so-called specified number of probability change machines (ST machines)) that is controlled to a high probability low base state over a predetermined variable display number after a big hit, a high probability at the time of opening the game hall. It is a low-base state, and the high-probability low-base state may be controlled to a time-saving state after the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed and ended.

(A20) Further, when the time saving limiter function is installed and the time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time saving limiter is updated.

(A21) Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol may be set to a time different from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

(Other examples of time saving control using time saving symbols)
As another time saving control using the time saving symbol, the control described below may be executed.

(B1) Game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time saving state (special state) based on the variable display result (special display result) of the time saving symbol being displayed in the special symbol in the normal state, and the special symbol is performed in the time saving state. Based on the variable display result of the time saving symbol being displayed in, the game control for further shifting from the time saving state to the same time saving state is not performed (even if the time saving symbol is displayed, the time saving state is overwritten (time saving state). (I do not control the switching of the game state). Then, different effects may be produced when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the special symbol in the normal state and when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the special symbol in the time-saving state (decorative symbol). In the normal state, a special symbol is displayed as a time-saving symbol, and in the time-saving state, a general lost symbol is displayed, etc.). As a result, it is possible to perform suitable control according to the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the effect is improved by executing the effect according to the presence or absence of the transition of the state).

(B2) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), when the display result of the special symbol is the time-saving symbol, the special symbol displays the common time-saving symbol in the normal state and the time-saving state, and the decorative symbol is in the normal state. It is also possible to display different symbols in the time-saving state as the display result (for example, the decorative symbol displays a special symbol corresponding to the time-saving symbol in the normal state, but simply displays a lost symbol in the time-saving state, for example, the time-saving design is displayed. Do not display the symbol corresponding to the symbol). As a result, the display result of the decorative pattern in the time-saving state does not give the player a feeling of loss, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(B3) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), in the normal state, an effect suggesting whether or not the display result of the decorative symbol becomes a special symbol (time saving symbol) is executed, but in the time saving state, the decorative symbol is executed. It is also possible not to execute the effect suggesting whether or not the display result of is a special symbol (time saving symbol). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game without causing the player to feel that the decorative pattern is displayed as a result of the effect in the time-saving state.

(B4) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), the fixed display time of the decorative symbol (the time for displaying the fixed surface result and then maintaining the display state) differs between the normal state and the time saving state. You may control it. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game without causing the player to feel that the decorative pattern is produced in a time-saving state.

(B5) After performing the first variable display by the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display by the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state which is advantageous for the player, and it is a normal state. In, game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time saving state (special state) based on the variable display result (special display result) of the time saving symbol being displayed in the special symbol, and the time saving symbol is changed by the special symbol in the time saving state. Based on the display result, the game is not controlled to shift from the time saving state to the same time saving state (even if the time saving symbol is displayed, the time saving state is overwritten (so that the time saving state occurs again). N) The switching control of the gaming state may not be performed). Then, the second variable display has a higher ratio of displaying the variable display result of the time saving symbol than the first variable display, and the information related to the variable display is stored as the hold storage information, and the hold storage is performed when the time saving state ends. It is possible to execute different effects depending on whether or not the information is stored (when shifting to time saving control, it is possible to specify that the time saving continuous display is performed, and when shifting to time saving control, the time saving control is not executed. (Display effect, etc.), right-handed game is played in response to right-handed notification (notification to instruct right-handed) during the time-saving state, and variable display based on the hold storage information stored when the time-saving state ends is displayed. Until all is done. Left-handed notification (notification instructing left-handed) may not be given. As a result, it is possible to perform suitable control according to the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the effect is improved by executing the effect according to the presence or absence of the transition of the state).

(B6) After performing the first variable display by the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display by the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state which is advantageous for the player, and it is a normal state. In, game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time saving state (special state) based on the variable display result (special display result) of the time saving symbol being displayed in the special symbol, and the time saving symbol is changed by the special symbol in the time saving state. Based on the display result, the game is not controlled to shift from the time saving state to the same time saving state (even if the time saving symbol is displayed, the time saving state is overwritten (so that the time saving state occurs again). N) The switching control of the gaming state may not be performed). Then, the second variable display has a higher ratio of displaying the variable display result of the time saving symbol than the first variable display, and the information related to the variable display is stored as the hold storage information, and the hold storage is performed when the time saving state ends. It is possible to execute different effects depending on whether or not the information is stored (when shifting to time saving control, it is possible to specify that the time saving continuous display is performed, and when shifting to time saving control, the time saving control is not executed. During the time saving state, the right-handed game is played in response to the right-handed notification, and until all the variable display based on the remaining hold storage information stored when the time-saving state ends is completed. Left-handed notification (notification instructing left-handed) may not be given. As a result, it is possible to perform suitable control according to the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the effect is improved by executing the effect according to the presence or absence of the transition of the state).

(B7) Left-handed notification is executed in the variable display (first variable display) that is executed after the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends is completed. You may. As a result, since the instruction of how to hit is given appropriately, the game can proceed smoothly, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(B8) When the display result of the time saving symbol is displayed in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends, and the variable display based on the remaining hold storage information The notification mode of the right-handed notification to be executed according to the hit (small hit, big hit) in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed It may be different. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game without causing the player to feel a loss due to the display result of the decorative pattern due to the effect of the notification mode of the right-handed notification.

(B9) In the remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends, a common effect is obtained when there is holding storage information in which the display result of the time saving symbol is displayed and when there is no holding storage information. It is possible to execute different effects after executing (For example, when there is hold memory information in which the display result of the time saving symbol is displayed in the fourth hold memory information out of the four remaining hold memories, the third hold memory A common effect that suggests whether or not to return to the time saving state is executed until the variable display based on the information, and a time saving state return effect different from the common effect is executed in the variable display based on the fourth reserved memory information. It may be possible). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game without causing the player to feel a loss due to the display result of the decorative pattern due to the effect of the notification mode of the right-handed notification.

(B10) The effect at the time of transition to the time saving state based on the display result of the variable display (second variable display) stored based on the remaining holding storage information stored when the time saving state ends, and the variable display based on the remaining holding storage information The notification mode of the right-handed notification to be executed differs depending on the effect at the time of transition to the time saving state based on the display result of the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed. You may do so. As a result, the production changes according to the game state, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

(B11) Confirmation display time of display result in variable display (second variable display) based on remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends (the display state is maintained after the confirmed surface result is displayed. The fixed display time of the display result in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining hold storage information is executed may be common. Thereby, the increase of the control data can be suppressed.

(B12) During the period when the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends is executed, the right-handed notification is not executed and the variable display is based on the remaining hold storage information. When the display result of the time saving symbol is displayed in the display, the right-handed notification may be executed during the initial period when the next variable display is started. As a result, since the instruction of how to hit is given appropriately, the game can proceed smoothly, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(B13) Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time saving symbol is displayed in the special symbol in the normal state, the game control for shifting from the normal state to the time saving state (special state) is performed, and the variable display result is small. It is possible to execute a common specific effect (reach effect, notice effect) depending on whether it is a hit symbol (specific display result) such as a hit symbol or a big hit symbol or a time-saving symbol (special display result). The ratio of the time saving symbol (special display result) may be different depending on which common specific effect is executed among the common specific effects provided. Then, when the display result of the time saving symbol is displayed in the variable display, the right-handed notification may be executed during the initial period of the start of the next variable display. As a result, it is possible to suitably control the effect according to the game state when the time saving symbol (special display result) is displayed.

(B14) After executing the common specific effect, the display result may be a hit symbol (specific display result) or a time-saving symbol (special display result). As a result, the variation of the effect result of the variable display is enriched, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(B15) The CPU 103 for game control has a common variation pattern depending on whether it is a hit symbol (specific display result), a time-saving symbol (special display result), or a lost symbol (predetermined display result). Is selectable, and even when the effect control CPU 120 receives a command for specifying the same fluctuation pattern from the game control CPU 103, different effects are produced in the variable display according to the type of the symbol specification command for specifying the display result. May be made feasible. As a result, the variation of the variable display effect is enriched, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(B16) After executing the common specific effect, it is possible to execute a special effect that can be executed when a time saving symbol (special display result) is obtained. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved by the special effect after the execution of the common specific effect.

(B17) Depending on the type of the common specific effect, a special effect that can be executed when the time saving symbol (special display result) is obtained may or may not be executed (for example, a plurality of types). Of the super reach productions in the above, when performing the production with the highest expectation, the special production is not executed, etc.). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expectation that the game is hit is maintained without the effect of inciting only the time saving state being executed excessively.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific effect, the degree of expectation (ratio) of the time saving symbol (special display result) when the special effect is executed may be different. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expectation that the game is hit is maintained without the effect of inciting only the time saving state being executed excessively.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific effect, the degree of expectation (ratio) of the time saving symbol (special display result) when the special effect is executed may be different. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expectation that the game is hit is maintained without the effect of inciting only the time saving state being executed excessively.

(B19) A predetermined effect different from the common specific effect (for example, an active display in which the display mode can be changed depending on the degree of expectation for a hit (a display moved from the display position of the hold display to another display position, and is currently being executed). The expectation (ratio) that becomes the time saving symbol (special display result) is made different according to the production mode of the production) that displays the effect that can suggest the expectation of the hit corresponding to the variable display of. May be good. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expectation that the game is hit is maintained without the effect of inciting only the time saving state being executed excessively.

(B20) In a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained, a winning symbol (specification) is executed after an effect (such as a time-saving suggestion effect) that suggests a time-saving symbol (special display result) is executed. It may be possible to execute an effect of notifying the display result) (such as a special jackpot whose game value is higher than that of the time saving state). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expectation that the game is hit is maintained without the effect of inciting only the time saving state being executed excessively.

(B21) The CPU 103 for game control can be controlled to a time saving state (special state) in which the number of time saving times (time saving duration) is different according to the types of time saving symbols (special display results) provided in a plurality of types (for example, the first The 1st time reduction symbol: 50 times of time reduction, the 2nd time reduction symbol: 100 times of time reduction, etc.), the effect control CPU 120 is given when the time reduction symbol is stopped depending on the type of effect executed (for example, the type of reach effect). You may execute effects with different number of time reductions (duration). As a result, depending on the type of production, the player's attention can be focused on the subsequent time reduction, and the game interest can be improved.

(B22) Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time saving symbol is displayed in the special state in the normal state, the game is controlled to shift from the normal state to the time saving state (special state), and the progress of the game is controlled. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means), and the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means) that receives the command can execute the effect based on the command. Then, the transmitted command includes a special command that can specify the transition (control) from the normal state to the time saving state (special state), and the effect control CPU 120 executes a plurality of types of commands including the special command. When it is received, based on the look-ahead of the hold storage information, it is specified that the variable display that can shift to the time saving state (special state) is executed. Execution may be restricted (do not execute at all, make it executable in rare cases, etc.). As a result, the effect control can be suitably executed according to the game state when the time saving symbol (special display result) is displayed.

(B23) Based on the look-ahead of the hold storage information, the look-ahead for the hold storage information generated after the hold storage information specified to execute the variable display capable of shifting (controlling) to the jackpot game state (specific game state) is executed. The execution of the advance notice effect may be restricted. Then, as the look-ahead notice effect during the execution restriction of such a look-ahead notice effect, the effect of a common mode may be executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game by limiting the execution of the effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state shifts.

(B24) The variable display based on the hold storage information for the look-ahead target is a variable display in which the time saving symbol (special display result) is displayed, and a variable display in which the time saving symbol (special display result) is displayed and is not displayed. In both the display and the case, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect for the hold storage information generated after the hold storage information may be restricted. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game by limiting the execution of the effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state shifts.

(B25) The look-ahead notice effect during the execution restriction of the look-ahead notice effect does not execute an effect having a higher expectation than a specific expectation (for example, hold when the expectation of the color of the hold display is blue <green <red). Do not change the display color to red, etc.). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game by limiting the execution of the effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state shifts.

(B26) The look-ahead notice effect during the execution restriction of the look-ahead notice effect does not execute a specific type of effect (for example, when the expectation of the color of the hold display is blue <green <red, the color of the hold display is changed to red. Do not change, etc.). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game by limiting the execution of the effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state shifts.

(Example of time reduction control using the variable display number that resulted in a predetermined display result such as the loss variable display number)
Next, an example of time saving control using a variable display number (the number of times of continuation of the variable display that has become a loss) that has become a predetermined display result (a loss display result, a small hit display result that does not become a big hit, etc.) in a normal state will be described. As shown below, in the time saving state (special state), the number of times the variable display that has become the predetermined display result (loss display result, small hit display result that does not become a big hit, etc.) has reached the special number (for example, 1000 times). May be feasible on condition of. As the predetermined result, the time saving state (special state) may be executed on condition that the number of continuations of the variable display resulting in the lost display result reaches the special number of times.

(C1) A game based on the fact that the variable display result becomes a specific display result after the first variable display by the first special symbol and the second variable display by the second special symbol. It is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the person, and the numerical information of the number of executions of the variable display that has become a predetermined display result (loss display result, small hit display result that does not become a big hit, etc.) in the normal state is updated, and the numerical information is concerned. When a special condition is satisfied in which the number of executions (continuation) of the variable display resulting in the predetermined display result reaches the special number (for example, 1000 times), the normal state is changed to the time saving state (special state). You may control the game to be transferred. Then, the numerical information may be updated both when the predetermined display result is obtained in the first variable display and when the predetermined display result is obtained in the second variable display. As a result, the numerical information of the number of times that the predetermined display result is obtained is continuously updated regardless of whether the first variable display or the second variable display can be executed, so that the player can be easily rescued due to the time saving state. , It is possible to increase the player's motivation to play. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize the relief of the player due to the time saving state.

(C2) The special condition is satisfied when it is determined that a predetermined display result different from the specific display result is continuously displayed a special number of times (for example, 1000 times) based on the numerical information. You may do it. As a result, when the display results that are disadvantageous to the player are continuous, the player can be rescued by shifting to the time saving state (special state), so that the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

(C3) The numerical information may be updated when the variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (probability change state, time saving state). As a result, the player can be suitably relieved when the display results that are disadvantageous to the player are continuous.

(C4) The numerical information may be initialized when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied. Such an initialization condition may be satisfied by being controlled to the advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to suppress relief when it is no longer necessary to rescue the player, such as when the player is in an advantageous state, and it is possible to prevent the gambling from being increased more than necessary.

(C5) When a special display result (time saving symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, control to shift to the time saving state (special state) can be executed, and the predetermined condition May be established when the special display result is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being rescued when it is no longer necessary to rescue the player, such as when the player is in a time-saving state (special state) that is advantageous to the player, and to prevent the gambling from being increased more than necessary. Can be done.

(C6) The predetermined condition may be satisfied when the variable display is executed a special number of times. As a result, it is possible to control the time saving state (special state) until the next advantageous state occurs, so that the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

(C7) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like, and the backup is stored when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is satisfied. The data can be initialized, and the numerical information may be initialized when the specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the numerical information backed up at the time of power failure is initialized at the time of data initialization and does not remain, so that it is suppressed from being disadvantageous to the amusement park side.

(C8) Based on the fact that the numerical information has reached the special number of times (for example, 1000 times or more), it is possible to control the time saving state (special state) for a period of the special number of times or more (for example, 1000 times or more). In the time saving state (special state), it is possible to control the time saving state (special state) again based on the numerical information becoming the special number of times, and the first time saving state (special state) and A different effect may be executed in the second time saving state (special state). As a result, in a game that is in an extremely disadvantageous state such as being controlled by the second time saving state (special state), the second time saving state shortens the variable display time as compared with the first time saving state. For example, it is possible to change the appearance of the production, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment. It should be noted that the same effect may be executed in the first time saving state (special state) and the second time saving state (special state) without executing such an effect. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being aware that the player is in an extremely disadvantageous state, such as being controlled by the second time saving state (special state), and suppresses a decline in the interest in the game. be able to.

(C9) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first process related to the variable display is executed, and the value of the special figure process flag is a second numerical value (4 or later) different from the first numerical value. ), The second process related to the advantageous state (big hit game state) is executed, and when the value of the special figure process flag is a third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the special condition is satisfied. The third process for controlling the time saving state (special state) based on the above is executed. Also. It is possible to hit the game ball into the first path (left side game area) and the second path (right side game area). In the normal state, the game ball is hit into the first path, and in the time saving state (special state), the second path. A game is played by hitting a game ball into the path. Then, during the execution of the third process, although it is not controlled to the time saving state (special state), it is notified that the second path should be fired (for example, right-handed notification by a right-handed lamp or the like). It may be. Further, during the execution of the third process, a notification effect of shifting to the time saving state (special state) may be produced. As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications are complicated, it is possible to perform appropriate control. For example, by turning on the right-handed lamp by the CPU 103 for game control, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the firing direction earlier (before the actual start of the time saving fluctuation) when actually shifting to the time saving state (special state). It becomes.

(C10) When the specific display result is displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, the second process may be executed after the execution of the first process, and the third process may not be executed. .. As a result, the control to the advantageous state is prioritized over the control to the time saving state (special state) based on the establishment of the special condition. The decrease can be suppressed.

(C11) The numerical information is updated when the variable display is started, and the numerical information becomes a specific value based on the updated numerical information becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. After the variable display ends (start of next fluctuation, waiting for customers), the time is controlled to a shorter time state (special state), and when the updated numerical information reaches a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, special information (special number of times reached). When changing the flag) from the first numerical value to the second numerical value (flag set) and controlling to the time saving state (special state), the special information is changed from the second numerical value to the first numerical value (flag reset). You may. As a result, it is possible to preferably execute the control of shifting to the time saving state (special state) by managing the special information.

(C12) The CPU 103 for game control selects and determines a variation pattern of the variable display, and selects and determines a variation pattern of a symbol determination time that differs depending on whether the special information is the first information or the second information. You may do so. As a result, the effect can be suitably executed when the variable display of the special number of times is executed.

(C13) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first process related to the variable display is executed, and the value of the special figure process flag is a second numerical value (4 or later) different from the first numerical value. ), The second process related to the advantageous state (big hit game state) is executed, and when the value of the special figure process flag is the third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the special condition is satisfied. The third process for controlling the time saving state (special state) is executed. Also. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means) that receives the command can execute the effect based on the command. Then, it may be possible to transmit specific information (background designation, fluctuation pattern) according to the case where the value of the special figure process flag is the second numerical value and the third numerical value in the special state. .. As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications are complicated, it is possible to perform appropriate control. For example, since different gaming states can be suitably identified, game control becomes easy. Then, if the command is different according to the game state identified at that time, the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means) can execute suitable effect control according to the game state.

(C14) In the time saving state (special state), when the special condition is satisfied, the value of the special figure process flag is changed to the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the fourth numerical value different from the third numerical value. By doing so, the time saving state (special state) may be controlled again. As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications are complicated, it is possible to perform appropriate control.

(C15) In the time saving state (special state), the case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the display of the specific display result (hit symbol) and the case where the special condition (variable display number of times) is displayed. It is possible to execute different effects depending on whether the condition) is satisfied and the time is controlled to the time saving state (special state) (for example, the time saving state is set when the variable display number is equal to or more than the special number of times). In some cases, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is shortened after the jackpot game state ends). As a result, it is possible to perform the production of a time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(C16) In the time saving state (special state), the case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the display of the specific display result (hit symbol) and the case where the special condition (variable display number of times) is displayed. The same effect may be executed when the condition) is satisfied and the time is controlled to the time saving state (special state) (for example, the time saving state is set when the variable display number is equal to or more than the special number of times). The fluctuation time is the same when the time is shortened and when the time is shortened after the big hit is completed). As a result, since new production data and the like are not required, the development cost is not increased, and the game entertainment can be improved by not confusing the player.

(C17) In the time saving state (special state), the case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the display of the special display result (time saving symbol) and the case where the special condition (variable display number of times) is displayed. It is possible to execute different effects depending on whether the condition) is satisfied and the time is controlled to the time saving state (special state) (for example, the time saving state is set when the variable display number is equal to or more than the special number of times). In some cases, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is shortened after the big hit is completed). As a result, it is possible to perform the production of a time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(C18) In the time saving state (special state), the case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the display of the special display result (time saving symbol) and the case where the special condition (variable display number of times) is displayed. The same effect may be executed when the condition) is satisfied and the time is controlled to the time saving state (special state) (for example, the time saving state is set when the variable display number is equal to or more than the special number of times). In such a case, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is shortened after the big hit is completed). As a result, since new production data and the like are not required, the development cost is not increased, and the game entertainment can be improved by not confusing the player.

(C19) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like, and the game control CPU 103 receives predetermined information (based on the backed up and stored data when the power is turned on. It is possible to transmit a ram clear command at the time of cold start and a command for notifying the number of fluctuations displayed until the end of the time saving state at the time of hot start) to the effect control CPU 120, and the effect control CPU 120 receives the predetermined information. A suggestion effect regarding the number of times the variable display was executed in a predetermined period after the power was turned on (so-called morning output is different, the background image is different, and an effect that suggests whether the variable display is far or near within 100 rotation fluctuations is executed. (Easy, etc.) may be made feasible. It is possible to give the player a motivation to play the game in the morning, so that the operating rate of the game machine increases and the processing load does not increase.

(C20) The game control CPU 103 can transmit specific information (a command capable of specifying information related to the time saving state) to the effect control CPU 120 in connection with the execution of the variable display, and the effect control CPU 120 is capable of transmitting the effect control CPU 120. It may be possible to execute a special effect (such as an effect of suggesting the end of the number of time-saving states) related to being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on the specific information. Then, as the specific information, the first specific information (first background designation, dedicated countdown effect) capable of specifying that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number of times is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, 127) is specified. Information) and second specific information (such as a command that counts down every 100 rotations) that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number of times is larger than a predetermined value (for example, 127). May be good. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly causing a loss by periodically suggesting the function to the player, and it is possible to preferably realize the command processing.

(C21) The effect control CPU 120 is put into a time saving state (special state) when the special condition is satisfied based on the execution of the variable display of the first predetermined number of times (for example, 300 times) less than the special number of times. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for time saving state suggestion effect control) suggesting that it is controlled, and a second predetermined number of times (for example, a second predetermined number of times) less than the first predetermined number of times is executed before the variable display of the special number of times is executed. The suggestion effect can be executed every time the variable display (such as 100 times) is executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly causing a loss by regularly suggesting the function to the player.

(C22) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like, and the game control CPU 103 is used when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is satisfied. The backup-stored data can be initialized, and the effect control CPU 120 has the special condition (variable) after the backup-stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed. The special display result (hit symbol) is displayed after the specific display result (winning symbol) is displayed when the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the display count condition) and after the backup-stored data is initialized. Different effects (such as different effects when shifting to the time saving state) are executed when the time is controlled to the special state based on the satisfaction of the condition and when the time saving state (special state) is controlled. As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications are complicated, it is possible to perform appropriate control. In addition, the player can grasp whether or not the backup-stored data has been initialized depending on the difference in the production. Therefore, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the jackpot probability setting can be changed, the setting is changed. Since it is possible to grasp the possibility that the setting has been made, the number of elements for guessing the setting can be increased and the game interest can be improved.

(C23) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like, and the game control CPU 103 is used when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is satisfied. The backup-stored data can be initialized, and the effect control CPU 120 has the special condition (variable) after the backup-stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed. The special display result (hit symbol) is displayed after the specific display result (winning symbol) is displayed when the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the display count condition) and after the backup-stored data is initialized. When it is controlled to a special state based on the satisfaction of a condition, and after being controlled to a time saving state (special state), different effects are executed (for example, the effect after shifting to the time saving state is different). As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications are complicated, it is possible to perform appropriate control. In addition, the player can grasp whether or not the backup-stored data has been initialized depending on the difference in the production. Therefore, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the jackpot probability setting can be changed, the setting is changed. Since it is possible to grasp the possibility that the setting has been made, the number of elements for guessing the setting can be increased and the game interest can be improved.

(D1) The execution ratio of the group notice effect may be different depending on whether the result of the variable display is the result of deriving the time saving symbol, the case where the big hit occurs, or the case where the result is lost.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention. Each configuration related to the features of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other feature portions. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

The above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1 is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but is an enclosed type that encloses the gaming medium and gives a score based on the occurrence of the winning. It may be a gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player determines the pachinko gaming machine 1. When a symbol is stopped in response to an operation of the stop button, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus, The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 game board, 3 game machine frame, 5 image display device, 5C, 5L, 5R decorative pattern display area, 6A winning ball device, 6B variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R speaker, 9 game effect lamp 10, General winning opening, 11 Main board, 12 Production control board, 13 Voice control board, 15 Relay board, 20 Special figure LED board, 21 Gate switch, 22A 1st start port switch, 22B 2nd start port switch, 23 counts Switch, 24V winning switch, 30 hitting operation handle, 31A stick controller, 31B push button, 32 movable body, 35A controller sensor unit, 35B push sensor, 41 passing gate, 50 4th symbol unit, 81, 82, 83 solenoid, 100 Gaming control microcomputer, 101,121 ROM, 102,122 RAM, 104,124 random number circuit, 106 RTC, 110 switch circuit, 111 output circuit, 123 display control unit.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Movable body and
Sound output means and
Directing execution means and
Display means and
With multiple light emitting means
A light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data.
The effect executing means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state.
The notification effect is controlled to the introduction part until the right / wrong of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified, the right / wrong notification part of notifying the right / wrong, and the advantageous state after the right / wrong notification. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is decided that the epilogue is to be performed, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part.
In the hit / fail notification part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means.
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves while retracting from the second position to the first position. The effect display for body movement is finished, the display corresponding to the epilogue part is performed, and after the movable body is retracted to the first position, the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character are displayed.
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means by using the brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, the brightness data table for moving the movable body is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part.
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the epilogue is in the process of retracting the movable body from the second position to the first position. Output the sound corresponding to the part,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The effect executing means is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state is controlled, among a plurality of types of re-lottery effects, a replacement display in which the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol is displayed. It is possible to perform the first re-lottery effect of displaying the second symbol in the latter half part.
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, the replacement display is performed in the first half part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. Re-lottery production is possible,
The first re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all the other symbols between the start of the replacement display in the first half part and the display of the second symbol in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all the other symbols between the start of the replacement display in the first half part and the display of the first symbol in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode.
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect, and the first re-lottery effect is supported. The light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect.
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is used. The brightness data table for controlling the light emitting means is controlled, and the light emitting means is controlled by continuously using the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emitting mode even during the subsequent symbol determination period.
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled by using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. , Game machine.

Images